•&ERA
            United States
            Environmental Protection
            Agency
            Office of
            Research and Development
            Washington, DC 20460
EPA/600/4-88/039
December 1988
(Revised July 1991)
Methods for the
Determination of
Organic Compounds in
Drinking Water
                        II

-------


-------
                                     EPA-600/4-88/039
                                     December 1988
                                     (Revised July 1991)
       METHODS FOR THE DETERMINATION

            OF ORGANIC COMPOUNDS

              IN DRINKING MATER
Environmental Monitoring Systems  Laboratory
    Office of Research and Development
   U.S.  Environmental  Protection Agency
          Cincinnati, Ohio  45268
                                    Printed on Recycled Paper

-------
                                  DISCLAIMER


     This manual has been reviewed by the Environmental Monitoring Systems
Laboratory - Cincinnati, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, and approved
for publication.  Mention of trade names or commercial products does not
constitute endorsement or recommendation for use.

-------
                                   FOREWORD
     Environmental measurements are required to determine the quality of
ambient waters and the character of waste effluents.  The Environmental
Monitoring Systems Laboratory - Cincinnati (EMSL-Cincinnati) conducts
research to:

      o   Develop and evaluate analytical methods to identify and measure the
          concentration of chemical pollutants in drinking water, surface
          waters, groundwater, wastewater, sediments, sludge, and solid waste.


     o    Investigate methods for the identification and measurement of
          viruses, bacteria and other microbiological organisms in aqueous
          samples and to determine the responses of aquatic organisms to
          water quality.

     o    Develop and operate a quality assurance program to support the
          achievement of data quality objectives in measurements of pollutants
          in drinking water, surface water, groundwater, wastewater, sediment
          and solid waste.

      This publication of the Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory -
Cincinnati titled, "Determination of Organic Compounds in Drinking Water" was
prepared to gather together under a single cover a set of 13 laboratory
analytical methods for organic compounds in drinking water.   We are pleased to
provide this manual and believe that it will  be of considerable value to many
public and private laboratories that wish to determine organic compounds in
drinking water for regulatory or other reasons.
                                        Thomas Clark,  Director
                                        Environmental  Monitoring Systems
                                        Laboratory - Cincinnati

-------
                                   ABSTRACT
      Thirteen analytical methods for the identification and measurement of
organic compounds in drinking water are described in detail.  Six of the
methods are for volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and certain disinfection
by-products, and these methods were cited in the Federal Register of July 8,
1987, under the National Primary Drinking Water Regulations.  The other seven
methods are designed for the determination of a variety of synthetic organic
compounds and pesticides, and these methods were cited in proposed drinking
water regulations in the Federal Register of May 22, 1989.  Five of the
methods utilize the inert gas purge-and-trap extraction procedure for VOCs,
six methods employ a classical liquid-liquid extraction, one method uses a new
liquid-solid extraction technique, and one method is for direct aqueous
analysis.  Of the 13 methods, 12 use either packed or capillary gas
chromatography column separations followed by detection with mass spectrometry
or a selective gas chromatography detector.  One method is basedion a high
performance liquid chromatography separation.
                                                                                       1
                                      iv

-------
                               TABLE  OF  CONTENTS


Method
Number   Title	  •                Revision    Page

        Foreword                                                  i i i

        Abstract                                                  iv

        Analyte - Method Cross Reference                          vii

        Acknowledgement                                           xii

        Introduction                                     -          1
502.1   Volatile Halogenated Organic                    2.0         5
        Compounds in Water by Purge and Trap
        Gas Chromatography

502.2   Volatile Organic Compounds in Water             2.0        31
        By Purge and Trap Capillary Column
        Gas Chromatography with Photoionization
        and Electrolytic Conductivity Detectors
        in Series

503.1   Volatile Aromatic and Unsaturated               2.0        63
        Organic Compounds in Water by Purge
        and Trap Gas Chromatography

504     1,2-Dibromoethane (EDB) and                     2.0        89
        1,2-Di bromo-3-Chloropropane (DBCP)
        in Water by Microextraction and Gas
        Chromatography

505     Analysis of Organohalide  Pesticides             2.0        109
        and Commerical  Polychlorinated Biphenyl
        Products in Water by Micro-Extraction
        and Gas Chromatography

507     Determination of Nitrogen - and                 2.0        143
        Phosphorus-Containing Pesticides
        in Water by Gas Chromatography with
        a Nitrogen-Phosphorus Detector

508     Determination of Chlorinated  Pesticides         3.0        171
        in Water by Gas Chromatography with
        An Electron Capture Detector

508A   Screening for Polychlorinated Biphenyls         1.0        199
        by Perch!orination and  Gas Chromatography

-------
                         TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
Method
Number   Title
515.1   Determination of Chlorinated Acids in
        Water by Gas Chromatography with an
        Electron Capture Detector

524.1   Measurement of Purgeable Organic
        Compounds in Water by Packed Column Gas
        Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry

524.2   Measurement of Purgeable Organic
        Compounds in Water by Capillary Column
        Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry

525.1   Determination of Organic Compounds
        in Drinking Water by Liquid-Solid
        Extraction and Capillary Column Gas
        Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry

531.1   Measurement of N-Methylcarbamoyloximes
        and N-Methylcarbamates in Water by
        Direct Aqueous Injection HPLC with
        Post Column Derivatization
Revision

  4.0



  3.0



  3.0



  2.2




  3.0
221
253
283
323
361
                                     VI

-------
                       ANALYTE - METHOD CROSS REFERENCE
   Analvte

Acenaphthylene
Acifluorfen
Alachlor
Aldicarb
Aldicarb sulfone
Aldicarb sulfoxide
Aldrin
Ametryn
Anthracene
Aroclor 1016
Aroclor 1221
Aroclor 1232
Aroclor 1242
Aroclor 1248
Aroclor 1254
Aroclor 1260
Aroclor (General screen)
Atraton
Atrazine
Baygon
Bentazon
Benz[a]anthracene
Benzene
Benzo[b]f1uoranthene
Benzo[k]fluorathene
Benzo[g,h,i]perylene
Benzo[a]pyrene
Bromacil
Bromobenzene
Bromochloromethane
Bromodichloromethane
Bromoform
Bromomethane
Butachlor
Butyl ate
n-Butylbenzene
sec-Butyl benzene
tert-Butylbenzene
Butyl benzylphthalate
Carbaryl
Carbofuran
Carbon  tetrachloride
Carboxin
Chloramben
Chiordane  (Technical)
Chlordane-alpha
Chlordane-gamma
                       Method  No.

                            525.1
                            515.1
                  505,  507,  525.1
                            531.1
                            531.1
                            531.1
                  505,  508,  525!1
                              507
                            525.1
                  505,  508,  525!1
                  505,  508,  525.1
                  505,  508,  525.1
                  505,  508,  525.1
                  505,  508,  525.1
                  505,  508,  525.1
                  505,  508,  525.1
                      508A,  525.1
                              507
                  505,  507,  525.1
                            531.1
                            515.1
                            525.1
       502.2,  503.1,  524.1,  524.2
                            525.1
                            525.1
                            525.1
                            525.1
                              507
502.1,  502.2,  503.1,  524.1,  524.2
       502.1,  502.2,  524.1,  524.2
       502.1,  502.2,  524.1,  524.2
       502.1,  502.2,  524.1,  524.2
       502.1,  502.2,  524.1,  524.2
                              507
                              507
              502.2,  503.1,  524.2
              502.2,  503.1,  524.2
              502.2,  503.1,  524.2
                            525.1
                            531.1
                            531.1
       502.1,  502.2,  524.1,  524.2
                              507
                            515.1
                         505, 508
                  505, 508,  525.1
                  505, 508,  525.1
                                      vn

-------
    Analyte
Method No.
 Chlorneb
 Chlorobenzene
 Chlorobenzilate
 2-Chlorobiphenyl
 Chloroethane
 Chloroform
 Chloromethane
 Chlorothalonil
 2-Chlorotoluene
 4-Chlorotoluene
 Chlorpropham
 Chrysene
 Cycloate
 Dalapon
 Dimethyl-2,3,5,6-tetrachloroterephthal
 DCPA mono  and diacid  metabolites
 2,4-Dichlorophenoxyacetic  acid  (2,4-D)
 4-(2,4-Dichlorophenoxy)butyric  acid  (2,4-DB)
 4,4'-DDD[l,l-dichloro-2,2-bis(p-chlorophenyl)ethane]
 4,4'-DDE[l,l-dichloro-2,2-bis(p-chlor       --   -  -
 4,4'-DDT[l,l,l-trichloro-2,2-bis(p-di
 Diazinon
 Dibenz[a,h]anthracene
 Di bromochloromethane
 1,2-Di bromo-3-chloropropane
 Dibromomethane
 1,2-Dibromoethane
 Di-n-butylphthalate
 Dicamba
 1,2-Di chlorobenzene
 1,3-Dichlorobenzene
 1,4-Di chlorobenzene
 3,5-Dichlorobenzoic acid
 2,3-Dichlorobiphenyl
 1,1-Dichloroethane
 1,2-Dichloroethane
 1,1-Dichloroethene
 cis-1,2-Dichloroethene
 trans-1,2-Di chloroethene
 1,2-Dichloropropane
 1,3-Di chloropropane
 2,2-Di chloropropane
 1,1-Di chloropropene
 cis-1,3-Dichloropropene
 trans-1,3-Dichloropropene
Di chlorodi f1uoromethane
Dichlorprop
Dichlorvos
Dieldrin
502.1, 502.2, 503.1, 524.1,
502.1, 502.2, 524.1,
502.1, 502.2, 524.1,
502.1, 502.2, 524.1,
502.1, 502.2, 503.1, 524.1,
502.1, 502.2, 503.1, 524.1,
;e (DCPA) (Dacthal) |
[-DB)
lenyl) ethane]
ienyl) ethyl ene]
'ophenyljethane]




502.


502.1,
502.1,
502.1,


















502.1,
502.
502.1,
1, 502.


502.2,
502.2,
502.2,


502.1,
502.1,
502.1,
502.1,
502.1,
502.1,
502.1,
502.1,
502.1,
502.1,
502.1,
502.1,




502.2,
2, 504,
502.2,
2, 504,


503.1,
503.1,
503.1,


502.2,
502.2,
502.2,
502.2,
502.2,
502.2,
502.2,
502.2,
502.2,
502.2,
502.2,
502.2,




524.1,
524.1,
524.1,
524.1,


524.1,
524.1,
524.1,


524.1,
524.1,
524.1,
524.1,
524.1,
524.1,
524.1,
524.1,
524.1,
524.1,
524.1,
524.1,


505
508
524.2
508
525.1
524.2
524.2
524.2
508
524.2
524.2
507
525.1
507
515.1
508
515.1
515.1
515.1
508
508
508
507
525.1
524.2
524.2
524.2
524.2
525.1
515.1
524.2
524.2
524.2
515.1
525.1
524.2
524.2
524.2
524.2
524.2
524.2
524.2
524.2
524.2
524.2
524.2
524.2
515.1
507
, 508
                                     viii

-------
   Analvte
                                                               Method No.
Diethylphthalate
Dimethylphthalate
Dinoseb
Diphenamid
Disulfoton
Disulfoton
Disulfoton
Endosulfan
Endosulfan
Endosulfan
sulfoxide
sulfone

sulf ate
I
II
Endrin aldehyde
Endrin
S-Ethyl dipropylthiocarbamate  (EPIC)
n-(2-Ethylhexyl)bicyclo[2.2.1]-5-heptene-2,3
Ethoprop
Ethyl benzene
bis(2-Ethylhexyl)adipate
bi s(2-Ethylhexyl)phthalate
Etridiazole
Fenamiphos
Fenarimol
Fluorene
Fluridone
a Hexachlorocyclohexane (a  BHC)(HCH-alpha)
B Hexachlorocyclohexane (6  BHC)(HCH-beta)
8 Hexachlorocyclohexane (6  BHC)(HCH-delta)
r Hexachlorocyclohexane (Lindane)(rBHC)(HCH-
Heptachlor
Heptachlor  Epoxide
2,2',3,3',4,4',6-Heptachlorobiphenyl
Hexachlorobenzene
2,2',4,4',5,6'-Hexachlorobi phenyl
Hexachlorobutadi ene
Hexachlorocyclopentadi ene
Hexazinone
3-Hydroxycarbofuran
 5-Hydroxydicamba
 Indeno[l,2,3,c,d]pyrene
 Isopropylbenzene
 4-Isopropylto!uene
 Merphos
 Methiocarb
 Methomyl
 Methoxychlor
 Methyl paraoxon
 Methylene chloride
 Metolachlor
 Metribuzin
 Mevinphos
 Molinate











505, 508,

-dicarboximide (MGK-264)

502.2, 503.1, 524.1,










-gamma) 505, 508,,
505, 508,
505, 508,

505, 508,

502.2, 503.1,
505,




502.2, 503.1,
502.2, 503.1,



505, 508,

502.1, 502.2, 524.1,




525.1
525.1
515.1
507
507
507
507
508
508
508
508
525.1
507
507
507
524.2
525.1
525.1
508
507
507
525.1
507
508
508
508
525.1
525.1
525.1
525.1
525.1
525.1
524.2
525.1
507
531.1
515.1
525.1
524.2
524.2
507
531.1
531.1
525.1
507
524.2
507
507
507
507

-------
    Anal.vte
                                                                Method No.
 Naphthalene
 Napropanride
 4-Nitrophenol
 cis-Nonachlor
 trans-nonachlor
 Norf1urazon
 2,2',3,3',4,5',6,6'-Octachlorobiphenyl
 Oxamyl
 Pentachlorophenol (PCP)
 Pebulate
 2,2',3',4,6-Pentachlorobiphenyl
 cis-Permethrin
 trans-Permethrin
 Phenanthrene
 Picloram
 Polychlorobiphenyls (General  screen)
 Prometon
 Prometryn
 Pronamide
 Propachlor
 Propazine
 Propylbenzene
 n-Propylbenzene
 Pyrene
 Simazine
 Simetryn
 Stirofos
 Styrene
 2,2',4,4'-Tetrachlorobiphenyl
 2,4,5-Trichlorophenoxyacetic  acid  (2,4,5-T)
 2-(2,4,5-Trichlorophenoxy)propionic  acid  (2
 Tebuthiuron
 Terbacil
 Terbufos
 Terbutryn
 Tetrachloroethene                      502
 1,1,1,2-Tetrachloroethane
 1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane
 Toluene
 Toxaphene  (Technical)
 Tri ademefon
 1,2,3-Trichlorobenzene
 1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene
 2,4,5-Trichlorobiphenyl
 Trichloroethene                         502.
 1,1,1-Tri chloroethane
 1,1,2-Tri chloroethane
Tri chlorof1uoromethane
 1,2,3-Trichloropropane
Tricyclazole
502.2, 503.1,



505,



515.1,






'






503.1,

505, 507,


502.2, 503.1, 524.1,


4,5-TP)(Silvex)


i

1, 502.2, 503.1, 524.1,
502.1, 502.2, 524.1,
502.1, 502.2, 524.1,
502.2, 503.1, 524.1,
505, 508,
524.2
507
515.1
505
525.1
507
525.1
531.1
525.1
507
525.1
508
508
525.1
515.1
508A
507
507
507
508
507
502.2
524.2
525.1
525.1
507
507
524.2
525.1
515.1
515.1
507
507
507
507
524.2
524.2
524.2
524.2
525.1
          502.2, 503.1,
          502.2, 503.1,

1,  502.2,  503.1, 524.1,
   502.1,  502.2, 524.1,
   502.1,  502.2, 524.1,
   502.1,  502.2, 524.1,
   502.1,  502.2, 524.1,
                          507
524.2
524.2
525.1
524.2
524
524
524
524
.2
.2
.2
.2
                          507

-------
   Analvte

Trifluralin
1,2,4-Trimethylbenzene
1,3,5-Trimethylbenzene
Vernolate
Vinyl chloride
m-Xylene
o-Xylene
p-Xylene
502.1.
         Method No.

                508
502.2, 503.1, 524.2
502.2, 503.1, 524.2
                507
502.2, 524.1, 524.2
502.2, 503.1, 524.1, 524.2
502.2, 503.1, 524.1, 524.2
502.2, 503.1, 524.1, 524.2
                                       XI

-------
                                ACKNOWLEDGEMENT


      This  manual  was  prepared  by  the  Chemistry  Research  Division,
 Environmental  Monitoring  Systems  Laboratory  - Cincinnati.  .Special  thanks  and
 appreciation  are  due  to Patricia  L. Hurr,  Diane M. Schirmann, Arleen M.
 Ciampone,  and  Glenora F.  Scruggs  who  provided outstanding  secretarial  and  word
 processing support  for the  entire effort.

      In  addition, James J.  Lichtenberg  and James E. Longbottom, who managed
 the drinking water  organic  methods development  program for a number of years,
 are recognized for  their  many  important contributions.   William Middleton, Jr.
 provided superb technical support during the development of all the mass
 spectrometric  methods.  Jean R. Wilson  and Carol Brockhoff typed many  of the
 earlier drafts of the methods.  John  P. Donnelly provided electronics
 engineering support during  several of the methods development projects.    - '^
 Gerald D.  McKee served as a manager during the  development of several  of the
 methods.

     The staff of the Technical Support Division of the Office of Drinking
 Water, and particularly Richard Reding, provided extensive comments on the
 first draft of this manual, and on previous revisions of many of the
 analytical methods.   Caroline A.  Madding, working under the direction  of Dr.
 Herbert Brass, tested  and provided data for the cryogenic interface option in
Method 524.2.

     Finally,  all the  authors and contributors wish to thank the
administrators and managers of the Environmental Protection Agency for their
support during the development and preparation of this manual.   Special
appreciation is due to Robert L.  Booth, former Director of the Environmental
Monitoring and Support Laboratory - Cincinnati,  Dr. Joseph Cotruvo,  Director
of the Criteria and Standards Division, Office of Drinking Water,  and Thomas
Clark, current Director of  EMSL-Cincinnati.
                                     xn

-------
                                 INTRODUCTION


                               William L.  Budde


     Many of the nearly 200 organic analytes included in this manual  may be
identified and measured in drinking water  using two or more of the documented
analytical methods.  For example, nearly 50 compounds are listed as analytes
in four different methods.  This approach  of multiple methods for many
analytes was selected to provide the maximum flexibility to method users from
small and large laboratories.  Some methods require relatively modest
equipment, and others require sophisticated instrumentation.  This flexible
approach should meet the needs and requirements of nearly all laboratories.

GENERAL METHOD FEATURES

     Each of the methods in the manual was written to stand-alone, that is,
each method may be removed from the manual, photocopied, inserted into another
binder, and used without loss of information.  Revisions of these methods will
be made available in a similar stand-alone format to facilitate the
replacement of existing methods as new technical developments occur.   This
flexibility comes at the cost of some duplication of material, for example,
the definitions of terms section of each method is nearly identical.   The
authors believe that the added bulk of the manual is a small price to pay for
the flexibility of the format.

     An important feature of the methods in this manual is the consistent use
of terminology, and this feature is especially helpful in the quality control
sections where standardized terminology is not yet available.  The terms were
carefully selected to be meaningful without extensive definition, and
therefore should be easy to understand and use.  The names of authors of the
methods are provided to assist users  in obtaining direct telephone support
when required.

SAMPLE MATRICES

     All methods were developed  for relatively clean water matrices, that  is,
drinking water and some ground and surface waters.  Some methods have been
tested only in reagent water and/or drinking water.  While some of these
methods may provide reliable results  with more complex water matrices, for
example,  industrial wastewaters  and beverages, techniques for dealing with
more complex matrices have not been included in the methods  in order to keep
them as simple and brief  as possible.  Therefore caution is needed when
applying  these methods to matrices other than  relatively clean water.

     Methods developed for drinking water  include provisions for removal of
free chlorine  (dechlorination) which  is assumed to be present in all samples.
Dechlorination  is  necessary  to stop the formation of trichloromethanes and
other  disinfection by-products,  or to prevent  the formation  of method
interferences  and  analytes generated  from  chlorination  of  impurities in
reagents  and  solvents.

                                       1

-------
      Similarly, pH adjustments are included in some of the methods for several
 reasons:  (a) to retard growth in dechlorinated water of bacteria that can
 decompose some analytes; (b) to prevent acid or base catalyzed decomposition
 of analytes; and (c) to improve the extraction efficiency of certain analytes.

 DETECTION LIMITS

      Host methods include either a method detection limit (MDL) or an
 estimated detection limit (EDL) for each analyte.   These limits are intended
 to provide an indication of the capability of the  method, but they may not be
 of regulatory significance.

      The MDL is calculated from the standard deviation of replicate
 measurements, and is defined as the minimum concentration of a substance that
 can be identified,  measured, and reported with 99% confidence that the analyte
 concentration is greater than zero.  The EDL is either the MDL, or a
 concentration of compound in a clean water matrix  that gives a peak in the
 final  extract with  a signal-to-noise ratio of about 5.

      If the  replicate measurements needed to calculate an MDL are obtained
 under ideal  conditions,  for  example,  during a short period of time within a
 work shift,  the resulting standard deviation may be small  and give an
 unrealistically low MDL.   The data acquired for measurement of an MDL should
 be obtained  over a  period of time  (several  days or more).   Obtained in this
 way,  the standard deviation  includes  normal  day-to-day variations,  and the MDL
 will  be more realistic.

 CALIBRATION  STANDARDS AND QUALITY  CONTROL SAMPLES

     The methods  contain  separate  calibration  and  quality control  sections,
 and  accurate calibration  standards and  quality control  samples  are  needed to
 implement the methods.  Calibration standards  and  quality  control  samples
 should  be obtained  from different  sources  so that  the  quality control  sample
 can  provide  an  independent check on the calibration  and  the  other method
 variables.

     Calibration  standards and  quality  control  samples may  be  available
 commercially,  or  may  be available  on  a  limited  basis from the Quality
 Assurance Research  Division,  Environmental Monitoring  Systems  Laboratory  -
 Cincinnati,  26 W. Martin  Luther King  Drive,  Cincinnati, OH,  45268.

 METHODS  FOR  VOLATILE  ORGANIC  COMPOUNDS  (VOCS)

     Six  of  the methods in the  manual are for the determination of VOCs and
 certain disinfection  by-products.   These methods were cited  in the Federal
 Register  of July 8,  1987 under  the  National  Primary Drinking Water
 Regulations.   These are Methods 502.1,  502.2, 503.1, 504, 524.1 and 524.2.

     The  six VOC methods have been distributed  in the form of photocopied
documents by EMSL-Cincinnati  to several  hundred laboratories in the last two

-------
years.  Five of these methods utilize the same basic purge-and-trap extraction
technique, but, depending on the specific method selected, the user has a
choice of a packed or capillary column gas chromatography (GC) separation and
a mass spectrometer (MS) or conventional GC detector.  The other method
(Method 504) is a microextraction procedure for two compounds of special
interest, ethylene dibromide (EDB) and l,2-dibromo-3-chloropropane (DBCP).

     Solicited and unsolicited written and telephoned comments have been
received from some of the laboratories using the VOC methods, and some of
these users suggested certain technical and editorial changes.  In addition,
the staff of the Chemistry Research Division recognized that some changes were
needed to make the methods easier to understand and use, and bring them
up-to-date.  The revisions of the six VOC methods contained in the manual
incorporate a few technical and many editorial changes which are summarized
below.

      Few technical changes were made to the six VOC methods.  The use of
ascorbic acid as a dechlorinating agent is described.  Ascorbic acid has  been
extensively tested as a dechlorinating  agent,  and has been found to be  as
effective as  sodium thiosulfate, but without the undesirable generation of
sulfur dioxide at low pH.

      The open  split interface  between the  GC and the MS was  incorporated  into
Method 524.2,  but the interfaces previously mentioned were retained.  Data  is
presented in  the method to  show that the open  split  interface can provide
acceptable  precision, accuracy, and detection  limits.  The previous revision
of Method 524.2  allowed any interface that could meet the precision and
accuracy  requirements of the method.  Many laboratories will  find the open
split interface  to  be the most economical  for  this method.

      Changes  were made  in the  recommended  chromatographic conditions  and
 internal  standards  in Method  502.2.  These changes  allow  the measurement  of
 all 60 VOCs in a single calibration  solution.

      Extensive editorial changes  were  made in. all  six  VOC methods.  These
 editorial  changes  were  necessary  to  provide  an organized,  consistent,  and much
 more complete presentation of the myriad  details  needed  by  laboratories to
 successfully implement  the methods.   The  addition  of these  details,  the
 consistent  use of terminology, and the uniform organization  of all  the  methods
 should substantially reduce the number of questions received and provide the
 user community with the information  needed to obtain high quality results.

 METHODS FOR SYNTHETIC ORGANIC COMPOUNDS (SOCS)

      Four of the SOC methods were developed for a national  pesticides survey
 conducted by EPA during 1987-1989, and these are designated Methods 507,  508,
 515.1, and 531.1.   One  screening method (Method 508A)  for polychlorinated
 biphenyls (PCBs) was developed as a result of a specific request from the
 Office of Drinking Water (ODW).  Method 505, a relatively simple
 microextraction procedure patterned after Method 504,  was developed to provide
 a  rapid method for the  determination of chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides  and

-------
 commercial PCB mixtures (Aroclors) in drinking water.  Method 525.1 is a broad
 spectrum GC/MS method for a variety of compounds under consideration for
 regulation, and it was developed specifically to utilize the new liquid-solid
 extraction technology and minimize use of the solvent methylene chloride.

      Three of the methods used in the national pesticides survey utilize a
 liquid-liquid extraction of the SOCs from water followed by a high resolution
 capillary column GC separation and detection with an electron capture or other
 selective detector (Methods 507,  508, and 515.1).  One of the methods (531.1)
 employs the direct analysis of a water sample with a high performance liquid
 chromatography (HPLC) separation and post-column derivatization to a compound
 detected with a fluorescence detector.

      Method 508A was designed as a screening procedure for polychlorinated
 biphenyls (PCBs).   The method uses the powerful  chlorinating agent antimony
 pentachloride to convert all  the PCB congeners in a sample extract to
 decachlorobiphenyl  which is separated with either packed or capillary column
 gas  chromatography,  and detected with an  electron capture detector.

      Method 505 provides a rapid  procedure for chlorinated hydrocarbon
 pesticides and commercial  PCB mixtures (Aroclors).   This method uses a high
 resolution capillary column GC separation and detection  with an electron
 capture detector.

      The broad spectrum GC/MS method  (Method 525.1)  uses a liquid-solid
 extraction (LSE)  procedure based  on  commercial  LSE  cartridges  or disks.  The
 cartridges are small  (about 0.5 in.  x 3 in.)  plastic or  glass  tubes  packed
 with  reverse  phase  liquid  chromatography  packing  materials.  The disks are
 made  of Teflon containing  silica  which is coated  with  a  chemically bonded C-18
 organic phase.   Water samples are passed  through  the cartridges  or disks and
 some  organic  compounds  are sorbed on  the  solid phase.  After air drying, the
 organic compounds are eluted  using a  very small volume of an organic  solvent.
 Cartridges  from six  suppliers were used in  the methods research, and  a quality
 control  procedure was developed to permit selection  of cartridges  with
 acceptable  performance  characteristics.   The  disks  are manufactured  by a
 single  company,  so only one type  was  evaluated.

     The  LSE  procedure  is  attractive  because  it greatly  reduces  the use and
worker  exposure to methylene  chloride  and similar solvents.  The compounds  in
the cartridge  extract are  separated,  identified, and measured with a  high
resolution  capillary  column GC/MS  procedure.  This allows the simultaneous
determination  of 42 SOCs including chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides,
polycyclic  aromatic hydrocarbons,  phthalate and adipate  esters,  individual  PCB
congeners,  several triazine pesticides, and pentachlorophenol.   Laboratories
will  find this method attractive  because  of its potential economy of operation
when a wide variety of  analytes are to be determined.

-------
METHOD 502.1.  VOLATILE HAL06ENATED ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN WATER
               BY PURGE AND  TRAP  GAS  CHROMATOGRAPHY
                         Revision 2.0
     T. A. Bellar - Method 502.1, Revision 1.0  (1986)

     T. A. Bellar - Method 502.1, Revision 2.0  (1989)
          ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
               OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
              U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
                     CINCINNATI,  OHIO  45268

-------
                                  METHOD 502.1
                VOLATILE HAL06ENATED ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN WATER
                     BY PURGE AND TRAP GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY

1.   SCOPE AND APPLICATION

     1.1  This method is applicable for the determination of various
          halogenated volatile compounds in finished drinking water, raw
          source water, or drinking water in any treatment stage.i(l)  The
          following compounds can be determined by this method:
               Analvte

     Bromobenzene
     Bromochloromethane
     Bromodichloromethane
     Bromoform
     Bromomethane
     Carbon  tetrachloride
     Chlorobenzene
     Chloroethane
     Chioroform
     Chloromethane
     2-Chlorotoluene
     4-Chlorotoluene
     Di bromochloromethane
     1,2-Dibromoethane
     Dibromomethane
     1,2-Di chlorobenzene
     1,3-Dichlorobenzene
     1,4-Di chlorobenzene
     Di chlorodi f1uoromethane
     1,1-Di chloroethane
     1,2-Dichloroethane
     1,1-Dichloroethene
     ci s-1,2-Di chloroethene
     trans-1,2-Di chloroethene
     1,2-Di chloropropane
     1,3-Dichloropropane
     2,2-Di chloropropane
     1,1-Di chloropropene
    ci s-1,3-Di chloropropene
    trans-1,3-Dichloropropene
    Methylene chloride
    1,1,1,2-Tetrachloroethane
    1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane
    Tetrachloroethene
    1,1,1-Tri chloroethane
Chemical Abstract Service
      Registry Number
          108
           74
           75
           75
           74
           56-
          108-
           75-
           67-
           74-
           95-
          106-
          124-
          106-
           74-
           95-
          541-
          106-
           75-
           75-
          107-
           75-
          156-
          156-
           78-
          142-
          590-
          563-
       10061-
       10061-
           75
          630
           79
          127
           71
 •86-1
-97-5
-27-4
-25-2
-83-9
-23-5
-90-7
-00-3
-66-3
-87-3
-49-8
-43-4
-48-1
-93-4
-95-3
-50-1
-73-1
-46-7
-71-8
-34-3
-06-2
-35-4
-59-4
-60-5
•87-5
•28-9
 20-7
•58-6
 01-5
 02-6
 09-2
 20-6
 34-5
 18-4
 55-6

-------
    1,1,2-Trichloroethane                                    79-00-5
    Trichloroethene                                          Z2~5i~5
    Trichlorofluoromethane                                   75-69-4
    1,2,3-Trichloropropane                                   96-18-4
    Vinyl chloride                                           75-01-4

    1.2  This method  is applicable to the determination of Total
         Trihalomethanes and other volatile synthetic organic compounds as
         required by  drinking water regulations of 40 Code of Federal
         Regulations  Part  141.

    1.3  Single  laboratory accuracy and  precision data show that this
         procedure  is useful for  the detection and measurement  of
         multi-component mixtures added  to carbon filtered finished water and
         raw  source water  at concentrations between  0.20  and 0.40 /jg/L with
         method  detection  limits  (MDL)(2) generally  less  than 0.01 /jg/L.  The
         upper concentration limit of the method  is  about 1000  /z/L for most
         compounds.   Determination of complex mixtures containing partially
         resolved compounds may be hampered by concentration differences
         larger  than  a factor of  10.  This problem commonly occurs when
         finished drinking waters are analyzed because of the relatively high
         trihalomethane content.  When  such samples  are  analyzed, chloroform
         will  affect  the method detection limit for  1,2-dichloroethane.

     1.4  Accuracy  and precision data  are not yet  available for  Bromomethane,
         2,2-dichloropropane, cis- and  trans-l,3,-dichloropropene.

     1.5  This method  is recommended  for use only  by  analysts experienced  in
         the  measurement  of purgeable organics  at the  low fig/L  level  or by
         experienced  technicians  under  the close  supervision of a qualified
          analyst.   It is  also  recommended  for  use only with  a purge  and trap
          system  devoted to the  analysis of low level samples.

2.   SUMMARY OF METHOD

     2.1   Organohalides and other  highly volatile  organic compounds with  low
          water solubility are  extracted (purged)  from the sample matrix  by
          bubbling an  inert gas  through  the  aqueous sample.   Purged  sample
          components are trapped in  a tube  containing suitable  sorbent
          materials.  When purging is complete,  the sorbent  tube is  heated and
          backflushed with an inert  gas  to  desorb  trapped sample components
          onto a gas chromatography (GC) column.   The gas chromatograph is
          temperature programmed to  separate  the method analytes which are
          then detected with a halogen specific detector.

     2.2  A second chromatographic column is  described that can  be used to
          help confirm GC  identifications or resolve coeluting  compounds.
          Confirmatory analyses may be performed by gas chromatography/mass
          spectrometry  (GC/MS)  according to Method 524.1 or Method 524.2.

-------
3.   DEFINITIONS
     3.2
     3.3
    3.4
 3.1  Internal standard — A pure analyte(s) added to a solution in known
      amount(s) and used to measure the relative responses of other method
      analytes that are components of the same solution.  The internal
      standard must be an analyte that is not a sample component.

      Laboratory duplicates (LD1 and LD2) — Two sample aliquots taken in
      the analytical laboratory and analyzed separately with identical
      procedures. Analyses of LD1 and LD2 give a measure of the precision
      associated with laboratory procedures, but not with sample
      collection, preservation, or storage procedures.

      Field duplicates (FD1 and FD2) — Two separate samples collected at
      the same time and place under identical  circumstances and treated
      exactly the same throughout field and laboratory procedures
      Analyses of FD1 and FD2 give a measure of the precision associated
      with sample collection,  preservation and storage,  as well  as  with
      laboratory procedures.

      Laboratory reagent  blank (LRB)  — An aliquot  of reagent water that
      is  treated exactly  as a sample including exposure  to all  glassware
      equipment,  solvents,  reagents  and internal  standards that  are used
      with other samples.   The LRB is  used to  determine  if method analytes
      or  other interferences  are present  in  the  laboratory environment
      the reagents,  or the  apparatus.

      Field  reagent  blank  (FRB)  — Reagent water  placed  in a  sample
      container in the laboratory  and  treated  as  a  sample  in  all  respects
      including exposure to sampling site  conditions,  storage,
      preservation and all  analytical  procedures. The  purpose of the FRB
      is  to  determine  if method  analytes or  other interferences  are
      present  in the  field environment.

      Laboratory performance check solution  (LPC) — A solution  of  one  or
      more compounds  used to evaluate the  performance of the  instrument
      system with respect to a defined  set of method criteria.

      Laboratory fortified blank (LFB) — An aliquot of reagent water to
      which  known quantities of the method analytes are added in the
      laboratory.  The LFB is analyzed exactly like a sample, and its
      purpose  is to determine whether the methodology is in control, and
     whether  the laboratory is capable of making accurate and precise
     measurements at the required method detection limit.

3.8  Laboratory fortified sample matrix (LFM) — An aliquot of an
     environmental sample to which known quantities of the method
     analytes are added in the laboratory.  The LFM is analyzed exactly
      like a sample,  and its purpose is to determine whether the sample
     matrix contributes bias to the analytical results.  The background
     concentrations of the analytes in the sample matrix must be
    3.5
    3.6
    3.7
                                     8

-------
         determined  in a separate aliquot and the measured values in the LFM
         corrected for background concentrations.

    3.9  Stock  standard solution — A concentrated solution containing a
         single certified  standard that  is a method analyte, or a
         concentrated solution of a single analyte prepared in the laboratory
         with an  assayed reference compound.  Stock standard solutions are
         used to  prepare primary dilution standards.

    3.10 Primary  dilution  standard solution — A  solution of several analytes
         prepared in the laboratory from stock standard  solutions and diluted
         as  needed to prepare calibration solutions and  other needed analyte
         solutions.

    3.11 Calibration standard  (CAL) — A solution prepared  from the primary
         dilution standard solution and  stock standard  solutions of the
          internal standards and  surrogate analytes.   The CAL solutions are
         used to  calibrate the  instrument response with  respect to analyte
         concentration.

    3.12 Quality  control  sample  (QCS)  — A  sample matrix containing method
          analytes or a  solution  of method analytes  in a  water miscible
          solvent  which  is  used  to  fortify reagent water or  environmental
          samples.  The  QCS is  generated  from  a  source of reagents different
          than  those  used to prepare  the  primary  dilution standards and the
          calibration standard  and  is  used to  check  laboratory performance.

4. INTERFERENCES

     4.1  During analysis,  major contaminant sources  are volatile  materials  in
          the laboratory and impurities in  the inert  purging gas  and  in  the
          sorbent trap.   The use of non-polytetrafluoroethylene  (PTFE)  plastic
          tubing,  non-PTFE thread sealants,  or flow  controllers  with  rubber
          components in the purging device  should be avoided since such
          materials out-gas organic compounds  which  will  be  concentrated  in
          the trap during the purge operation.   Analyses of laboratory reagent
          blanks  (Sect.  10.4) or field reagent blanks (Sect. 10.6)  provide
          information about the presence of contaminants.  When  potential
          interfering peaks are noted in laboratory reagent blanks,  the
          analyst must eliminate the problem before analyzing samples.
          Subtracting blank values from sample results is not permitted.

     4.2  Interfering contamination may occur when a sample containing low
          concentrations of volatile organic compounds is analyzed immediately
          after a sample containing relatively high concentrations of volatile
          organic compounds.  A preventive technique is  between-sample rinsing
          of the  purging apparatus and sample syringes with two portions of
          reagent water.  After analysis of a sample containing high
          concentrations of volatile organic compounds,  laboratory reagent
          blanks  must be analyzed until  system memory is reduced to an
          acceptable level.

-------
      4.3
      4.4
 Special precautions must be taken to analyze for methylene chloride.
 The analytical and sample storage area should be isolated from all
 atmospheric sources of methylene chloride, otherwise random
 background levels will result.  Since methylene chloride will
 permeate through PTFE tubing, all gas chromatography carrier gas
 lines and purge gas plumbing should be constructed from stainless
 steel or copper tubing.  Laboratory clothing worn by the analyst
 should be clean since clothing previously exposed to methylene
 chloride fumes during common liquid/liquid extraction procedures can
 contribute to sample contamination.

 When traps containing combinations of silica gel  and coponut
 charcoal are used,  residual  water from previous analyses collects in
 the trap and can be randomly released into the analytical  column.
 To minimize the possibility of this occurring,  the trap is
 reconditioned after each use as described in Sect.  11.4.
     SAFETY
     5.1
     5.2
 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of chemicals  used in this method has
 not been precisely defined;  each chemical  should be treated as a
 potential  health hazard,  and exposure  to these  chemicals  should be
 minimized.   Each laboratory  is  responsible for  maintaining awareness
 of OSHA regulations regarding s-afe handling of  chemicals  used  in
 this method.   Additional  references to laboratory safety  are
 available  (3-5)  for the  information of the analyst.

 The following  method analytes have been tentatively classified as
 known or suspected human  or  mammal.ian  carcinogens:   carbon
 tetrachloride,  1,2-dichloroethane,  1,1,2,2-tetrachloroethane,
 1,1,2-trichloroethane, chloroform,  1,2-dibrpmoethane,   :
 tetrachloro-ethene,  trichloroethene, and vinyl  chloride.   Pure
 standard materials and stock standard  solutions  of  these  compounds
 should  be handled  in a hood.  A  NIOSH/MESA approved  toxic gas
 respirator should  be worn when the  analyst handles  high
 concentrations of  these toxic compounds.
6.   APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT
     6.1
     6.2
SAMPLE CONTAINERS - 40-mL to 120-mL screw cap vials (Pierce #13075
or equivalent) each equipped with a PTFE-faced silicone 'septum
(Pierce #12722 or equivalent).  Prior to use, wash vials and septa
with detergent and rinse with tap and distilled water.  Allow the
vials and septa to air dry at room temperature, place in a 105°C
oven for one hour, then remove and allow to cool in an area known to
be free of organic solvent vapors.

PURGE AND TRAP SYSTEM - The purge and trap system consists of three
separate pieces of equipment: purging device, trap, and desorber.
Systems are commercially available from several sources that meet
all of the following specifications.
                                      10

-------
    6.2.1     The all glass purging device (Figure 1) must be designed
              to accept 5-mL samples with a water column at least 5 cm
              deep.  Gaseous volumes above the sample must be kept to a
              minimum (<15 ml) to eliminate dead-volume effects.  A
              glass frit should be installed at the base of the sample
              chamber so the purge gas passes through the water column
              as finely divided bubbles with a diameter of 3 mm at the
              origin.  Needle spargers may be used, however, the purge
              gas must be introduced at a point 5 mm from the base of
              the water column.

    622     The trap (Figure 2) must be at least 25 cm long and have
              an inside diameter of at least 0.105 in.  Starting from
              the inlet, the trap must contain the following amounts of
              adsorbents:  1/3 of 2,6-diphenylene oxide polymer, 1/3 of
              silica gel, and 1/3 of coconut charcoal.  It is
              recommended that 1.0 cm of methyl silicone coated packing
              be inserted at the inlet to extend the life of the trap.
              If it  is not necessary to analyze for
              dichlorodifluoromethane, the charcoal can be eliminated
              and the polymer increased to fill 2/3 of the trap.  If
              only compounds boiling above 35°C are to be analyzed, both
              the silica gel and charcoal can be eliminated and the
              polymer increased to fill the entire trap.  Before initial
              use, the trap  should be conditioned overnight at  180°C by
              backflushing with an inert gas flow of at least 20 mL/min.
              Vent the trap  effluent to the room, not to the analytical
              column.  Prior to daily use, the trap  should be
              conditioned  for 10 min at  180°G with backflushing.  The
              trap may be  vented to the  analytical column during daily
              conditioning;  however, the column must be run through the
              temperature  program  prior  to analysis  of  samples.

     6.2.3    The  desorber (Figure 2) must be capable of rapidly heating
              the  trap to  180°C.   The polymer section of the trap  should
              not  be heated  higher than  200°C or  the life  expectancy  of
              the  trap will  decrease.  Trap  failure  is  characterized  by
               a pressure  drop  in excess  of 3  pounds  per square  inch
               across the  trap  during purging  or  by  poor bromoform
               sensitivities.

6.3  GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY  SYSTEM

     6.3.1     The GC must be capable  of  temperature programming and
               should be  equipped with  variable-constant differential
               flow controllers  so  that  the  column flow rate will  remain
               constant  throughout  desorption and temperature program
               operation.   The column  oven  may need to  be cooled to <30°C
               (Sect. 11.3);  therefore,  a subambient oven controller may
               be required.
                                 11

-------
 6.3.2     Two gas  chromatography columns  are  recommended.   Column  1
           (Sect. 6.3.3)  is  a highly efficient column  that  provides
           outstanding  separations for  a wide  variety  of organic
           compounds.   Column 1  should  be  used as  the  primary
           analytical column unless routinely  occurring  analytes  are
           not adequately resolved.   Column  2  (Sect. 6.3.4)  is
           recommended  for use as an alternate column.   Retention
           times for the  listed  analytes on  the two columns  are
           presented in Table 1.

 6.3.3     Column 1 - 1.5 to 2.5  m x 0.1 in  ID stainless steel or
           glass, packed  with 1%  SP-1000 on  Carbopack-B :(60/80 mesh)
           or  equivalent.  The flow rate of  the helium carrier gas is
           established  at 40 mL/min.  The  column temperature is
           programmed to  hold at  45°C for  three min, increased to
           220°C at 8°C/min,  and  held at 220°C for 15 min or until
           all  expected compounds have  eluted.   During handling,
           packing, and programming,  active  sites  can be  exposed  on
           the Carbopack-B packing which can result in tailing peak
           geometry and poor resolution of many constituents.  To
           protect the  analytical  column,  pack the first  5 cm of  the
           column with  3% SP-1000 on  Chromosorb-W  (60/80 mesh)
           followed by  the Carbopack-B  packing.  Condition the
           precolumn and  the Carbopack  columns  with carrier gas flow
           at  220°C overnight.  Pneumatic  shocks and rough treatment
           of  packed columns  will  cause excessive  fracturing of the
           Carbopack.   If pressure  in excess of 60 psi is required to
           obtain 40 mL/min  carrier  flow,  the  column should be
           repacked.  A sample chromatogram obtained with Column  1 is
           presented in Figure 3.

6.3.4      Column 2 - 1.5  to  2.5  m long x  0.1  in ID staiinless steel
           or  glass, packed with  n-octane  chemically bonded on
           Porasil-C (100/120 mesh) or equivalent.  The flow rate of
           the helium carrier gas  is established at 40 mL/min.   The
           column temperature  is  programmed to  hold at 5|0°C for three
          min, increased  to  170°C at 6°C/min,  and held at 170°C  for
           four min or  until  all   expected compounds have eluted.
          NOTE:  This material was not commercially available at
          time of publication.   Check with suppliers for a suitable
          substitute if this material cannot be located.

6.3.5     An electrolytic conductivity or microcoulometric detector
           is required.   These halogen-specific systems eliminate
          misidentifications due to non-organohalides which are
          coextracted during the purge step.  A Tracor Hall Model
          700-A detector was used to develop the single laboratory
          method performance data described in Sect.  13.  The
          operating conditions used to collect these data are  as
          follow:
          Reactor tube:
Nickel 1/16 in OD
                            12

-------
                    Reactor temperature:             810°C
                    Reactor base temperature:        250°C
                    Electrolyte:                     100% n-propyl alcohol
                    Electrolyte flow rate:           0.8 mL/min
                    Reaction gas:                    Hydrogen at 40 mL/min
                    Carrier gas:                     Helium at 40 mL/min
          6.3.6     It is acceptable to insert a photoionization detector
                    between the analytical column and the halide detector to
                    simultaneously analyze for the regulated volatile organic
                    compounds (VOC) that are aromatic or unsaturated (6).
                    Some of the analytes listed in the Scope of Method 503.1
                    can be determined in this manner.  See Method 502.2.
     6.4  SYRINGE AND SYRINGE VALVES
          6.4.1     Two 5-mL glass hypodermic syringes with Luer-Lok tip.
          6.4.2     Three 2-way syringe valves with Luer ends.
          6.4.3     One 25-/iL micro syringe with a 2 in x 0.006 in ID, 22°
                    bevel needle (Hamilton #702N or equivalent).
          6.4.4     Micro syringes - 10, 100 nl.
          6.4.5     Syringes - 0.5, 1.0, and 5-mL, gas tight with shut-off
                    valve.
     6.5  MISCELLANEOUS
          6.5.1     Standard solution storage containers - 15-mL bottles with
                    PTFE-lined screw caps.
7.   REAGENT AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
     7.1  TRAP PACKING MATERIALS
          7.1.1     2,6-Diphenylene oxide polymer, 60/80 mesh, chromatographic
                    grade (Tenax GC or equivalent).
          7.1.2     Methyl silicone packing - OV-1 (3%) on Chromosorb-W, 60/80
                    mesh or equivalent.
          7.1.3     Silica gel - 35/60 mesh, Davison, grade 15 or equivalent.
          7.1.4     Coconut charcoal - Prepare from Barnebey Cheney, CA-580-26
                    lot #M-2649 by crushing through 26 mesh screen.
     7.2  COLUMN PACKING MATERIALS
          7.2.1     1% SP-1000 on 60/80 mesh Carbopack-B or equivalent.
                                      13

-------
      7.2.2      n-Octane  chemically  bonded  on  Porasil-C,  100/120  mesh
                (Durapak  or  equivalent).

      7.2.3      3%  SP-1000 on  60/80  mesh Chromosorb-W  or  equivalent.

7.3   REAGENTS

      7.3.1      Methanol  - demonstrated to  be  free of  analytes.

      7.3.2      Reagent water  demonstrated  to  be free  of  analytes -
                Prepare reagent water by passing tap water through a
                filter bed containing about 0.5 kg of  activated carbon, by
                using a water  purification  system, or  by  boiling distilled
                water for 15 min followed by a 1-h purge  with inert gas
                while the water temperature is held at 90°C.  Store in
                clean, narrow-mouth  bottles with PTFE-lined septa and
                screw caps.

      7.3.3      Ascorbic  acid  or sodium thiosulfate - ACS Reagent grade,
                granular.

      7.3.4      Hydrochloric acid (1+1) - Carefully add measured volume of
                cone.  HC1 to  equal  volume  of reagent water.

      7.3.5      Vinyl chloride - 99.9% pure vinyl chloride is available
                from Ideal Gas Products, Inc., Edison, New Jersey and from
               Matheson, East Rutherford,  New Jersey.  Certified mixtures
               of vinyl   chloride in nitrogen at 1.0 and  10.0 ppm are
                available from several sources.

7.4  STOCK STANDARD SOLUTIONS - These solutions may be purchased as
     certified solutions or prepared from  pure standard materials using
     the following procedures:

     7.4.1     Place about 9.8 ml of methanol into a 10-mL ground-glass
               stoppered volumetric flask.   Allow the flask to stand,
               unstoppered,  for about 10 min or until all alcohol-wetted
               surfaces  have dried.   Weigh  to the nearest 0.1 mg.

     7.4.2     If the analyte is a liquid at room temperature,  use a
               100-/zL syringe and immediately add two or more drops of
               reference standard to the flask.   Be sure that; the
               reference standard falls directly into the alcohol without
               contacting the neck of the flask.   If the analyte is a  gas
               at room temperature,  fill  a  5-mL valved gas-tight syringe
               with the  standard to  the 5.0 mL mark,  lower the needle  to
               5 mm above the methanol  meniscus,  and  slowly inject the
               standard  into the neck area  of the flask.   The gas will
               rapidly dissolve in  the methanol.

     7.4.3     Reweigh,  dilute to volume, stopper,  then  mix by  inverting
               the flask several  times.   Calculate  the concentration  in

                                 14

-------
                    micrograms per microliter from the net gain in weight.
                    When compound purity is certified at 96% or greater,  the
                    weight can be used without correction to calculate the
                    concentration of the stock standard.

          7.4.4     Store stock standard solutions in 15-mL bottles equipped
                    with PTFE-lined screw caps.   Methanol solutions prepared
                    from liquid analytes are stable for at least four weeks
                    when stored at 4°C.  Methanol  solutions prepared from
                    gaseous analytes are not stable for more than one week
                    when stored at <0°C; at room temperature, they must be
                    discarded after one day.  Storage times may be extended
                    only if the analyst proves their validity by analyzing
                    quality control samples.

     7.5 .PRIMARY DILUTION STANDARDS - Use standard stock solutions to prepare
          primary dilution standard solutions that contain the analytes in
          methanol.   The primary dilution standards should be prepared at
          concentrations that can be easily diluted to prepare aqueous
          calibration solutions (Sect. 9.1) that will bracket the working
          concentration range.  Store the primary dilution standard solutions
          with minimal headspace and check frequently for signs of
          deterioration or evaporation, especially just before preparing
          calibration solutions for them.  Storage times described for stock
          standard solutions in Sect. 7.4.4 also apply to primary dilution
          standard solutions.

     7.6  QUALITY CONTROL SAMPLE - Prepare or obtain from a certified source a
          methyl alcohol solution at a concentration of 1.00 #g/mL for the
          regulated volatile organic contaminants and the unregulated
          contaminants of interest.  It will be necessary to prepare more than
          one solution and to increase the concentration of some of the
          contaminants proportional to the instrument detection limits if all
          of the analytes in Sect. 1.1 are being measured by this method.  The
          concentrate should be prepared from a source of stock standards
          different than those used for Sect. 7.5

8.   SAMPLE COLLECTION. PRESERVATION. AND STORAGE

     8.1  SAMPLE COLLECTION, DECHLORINATION, AND PRESERVATION

          8.1.1     Collect all samples in duplicate.  If samples contain
                    residual chlorine, and measurements of the concentrations
                    of disinfection by-products (trihalomethanes, etc.) at  the
                    time of sample collection are desired, add about 25 mg  of
                    ascorbic acid (or 3 mg sodium thiosulfate) to the sample
                    bottle before filling.  Rill sample bottles to overflow-
                    ing, but take care not to flush out the rapidly dissolving
                    ascorbic acid (or sodium thiosulfate).  No air bubbles
                    should pass through the sample as the bottle is filled, or
                    be trapped in the sample when the bottle is sealed.
                    Adjust the pH of the duplicate samples to <2 by carefully

                                      15

-------
          8.1.2
          8.1.3
          8.1.4
adding one drop of 1:1 HC1 for each 20 mL of sample
volume.  Seal the sample bottles, PFTE-face down, and
shake vigorously for 1 min.

When sampling from a water tap, open the tap and allow the
system to flush until the water temperature has stabilized
(usually about 10 min).  Adjust the flow to about 500
mL/min and collect duplicate samples from the flowing
stream.

When sampling from an open body of water, fill a 1-quart
wide-mouth bottle or 1-liter beaker with sample from a
representative area, and carefully fill duplicate sample
bottles from the 1-quart container.

The samples must be chilled to 4°C on the day of
collection and maintained at that temperature until
analysis.  Field samples that will not be received at the
laboratory on the day of collection must be packaged for
shipment with sufficient ice to ensure that they will be
at 4°C on arrival  at the laboratory.
     8.2  SAMPLE STORAGE
          8.2.1
          8.2.2
Store samples at 4°C until  analysis.   The sample storage
area must be free of organic solvent vapors.

Analyze all samples within 14 days of collection.  Samples
not analyzed within this period must be discarded and
replaced.
     8.3  FIELD REAGENT BLANKS

          8.3.1     Duplicate field reagent blanks must be handled along with
                    each sample set, which is composed of the samples
                    collected from the same general sample site at
                    approximately the same time.  At the laboratory, fill
                    field blank sample bottles with reagent water, seal, and
                    ship to the sampling site along with empty sample bottles
                    and back to the laboratory with filled sample bottles.
                    Wherever a set of samples is shipped and stored, it is
                    accompanied by appropriate blanks.

          8.3.2     Use the same procedures used for samples to add ascorbic
                    acid (or sodium thiosulfate) and HC1 to blanks (Sect.
                    8.1.1).

9.   CALIBRATION AND STANDARDIZATION

     9.1  PREPARATION OF CALIBRATION STANDARDS
                                      16

-------
     9.1.1     Calibration standards  containing  mixtures  of analytes  that
               are at least 80 percent resolved  are prepared as  needed.
               The number of calibration  solutions  (CALs)  needed depends
               on the resolution requirement and calibration range
               desired.   A minimum of three CAL  solutions is required to
               calibrate a range of a factor of  20  in concentration.   For
               a factor  of 50 use at  least four  standards,  and for a
               factor of 100 at least five standards.  The lowest level
               calibration standard should contain  analytes at a
               concentration two to ten times the MDL (Table 2)  for that
               compound.  The other CAL standards should  contain each
               analyte of concern at  concentrations that  define  the range
               of the sample analyte  concentrations.

     9.1.2     To prepare a calibration standard, add an  appropriate
               volume of a primary dilution standard solution to an
               aliquot of reagent water in a volumetric container or
               sample syringe.  Use a  microsyringe and rapidly inject
               the alcoholic standard into the water.  Remove the needle
               as quickly as possible after injection.  Accurate
               calibration standards  are prepared by adding 20 /zL of  the
               primary dilution standard to 25 ml or more of reagent
               water using the syringe described in Sect. 6.4.3.  Aqueous
               standards are not stable and should  be discarded after one
               hour unless sealed and stored as  described in Sect. 8.2
               and 8.4.

9.2  CALIBRATION WITH AQUEOUS STANDARDS

     9.2.1     Starting with the standard of lowest concentration,
               analyze each calibration standard according to Sect. 11
               and tabulate peak height or area  response versus the
               concentration in the standard.  The  results can be used to
               prepare a calibration curve for each compound.
               Alternatively, if the ratio of response to concentration
               (calibration factor) is a constant over the working range
               (< 10% relative standard deviation), linearity through the
               origin can be assumed and the average ratio or calibration
               factor can be used in place of a calibration curve.

     9.2.2     The working calibration curve or calibration factor must
               be verified on each working day by the measurement of one
               or more calibration standards.  If the response for any
               analyte varies from the predicted response by more than
               ±20%, the test must be repeated using a fresh calibration
               standard.  If the results still do not agree, generate a
               new calibration curve for that analyte or use a single
               point calibration standard as described in Sect. 9.2.3.

     9.2.3     Single point calibration is a viable alternative to a
               calibration curve.  Prepare single point standards from
               the primary dilution standards in methanol.  The single

                                 17

-------
9.3
           point standards should be  prepared  at  a  concentration  that
           produces  a response  close  (±20%)  to that of the  unknowns.

 9.2.4     As  a second alternative to a  calibration curve,  internal
           standard  calibration techniques may be used.   The
           following organohalides are recommended  for this purpose:
           2-bromo-l-chloropropane or 1,4-dichlorobutane.   The
           internal  standard  is added to the sample just  :before
           purging.   Check the  validity  of the internal standard
           calibration factors  daily  by  analyzing a calibration
           standard.   Since the calculated concentrations can be
           strongly  biased by inaccurate detector response
           measurements  for the internal  standard or by cbelution of
           an  unknown,  it  is  required that the area measurement of
           the internal  standard  for  each sample  be within  ±3
           standard  deviations  of those  obtained  from calibration
           standards.   If  they  do not then internal  standards can not
           be  used.

 CALIBRATION FOR VINYL CHLORIDE USING A  CERTIFIED GASEOUS MIXTURE
 (OPTIONAL)
     9.3.1


     9.3.2
     9.3.3
          Fill the purging device with 5.0 mL of reagent water or
          aqueous calibration standard.

          Start to purge the aqueous mixture.  Inject a known volume
          (between 100 and 2000 #L at room temperature) of the
          calibration gas (at room temperature) directly into the
          purging device with a gas tight syringe.  Slowly inject
          the gaseous sample through an inlet needle.  After
          completion, inject 2 mL of clean room air to sweep the
          gases from the inlet needle into the purging device.
          Inject the gaseous standard before five min of the 11-min
          purge time have elapsed.                      :

          Determine the aqueous equivalent concentration of vinyl
          chloride standard injected with the equation:
               S = 0.51 (C) (V)

               where,
                                           Equation 1
9.4
          S = Aqueous equivalent concentration of vinyl chloride
                standard in /ig/L;
          C = Concentration of gaseous standard in ppm (v/v); and
          V = Volume of standard injected in milliliters,

INSTRUMENT PERFORMANCE - Check the performance of the entire
analytical system daily using data gathered from analyses of field
blanks, standards, duplicate samples, and the quality control
sample.
                                 18

-------
          9.4.1     All  of  the  peaks  contained  in the standard chromatograms
                   must be sharp  and symmetrical.   Peak tailing significantly
                   in  excess of that shown  in  the method chromatogram  (Figure
                   3)  must be  corrected.  Tailing problems  are generally
                   traceable to active  sites on the GC column or the detector
                   operation.  If only  the  compounds eluting before
                   chloroform  give random responses or unusually wide  peak
                   widths, are poorly resolved, or  are missing, the problem
                   is  usually  traceable to  the trap/desorber.  If  only
                   brominated  compounds show poor peak geometry or do  not
                   properly respond  at  low  concentrations,  repack  the  trap.
                   Excessive detector reactor  temperatures  can also cause low
                   bromoform response.  If  negative peaks appear in the
                   chromatogram,  replace the ion exchange column and replace
                   the electrolyte in the detector.

          9.4.2     Check the precision  between replicate analyses.  A
                   properly operating system should perform with an average
                   relative standard deviation of less than 10%.   Poor
                   precision is generally traceable to pneumatic leaks,
                   especially  around the sample purger and  detector reactor
                   inlet and exit, electronic  problems, or  sampling and
                   storage problems. Monitor  the retention times  for  each
                   organohalide using data  generated from calibration
                   standards.   If individual retention times vary  by more
                   than 10% over  an  8-h period or do not fall within 10% of
                   an  established norm, the source  of retention data variance
                   must be corrected before acceptable data can be generated.

10.   QUALITY CONTROL

     10.1 Quality control (QC)  requirements  are the  initial  demonstration of
          laboratory  capability followed by  regular  analyses of laboratory
          reagent blanks, field reagent  blanks, and  laboratory fortified
          blanks.  The  laboratory  must maintain records to document the
          quality of  the data generated. Additional  quality  control practices
          are recommended.

     10.2 Initial demonstration of low system background.  Before any samples
          are analyzed, it  must be demonstrated that a laboratory reagent
          blank (LRB) is reasonably free of  contamination that would prevent
          the determination of  any analyte  of concern.  Sources of  background
          contamination are glassware, purge gas,  sorbants,  and equipment.
          Background  contamination must  be  reduced to  an  acceptable level
          before proceeding with  the  next  section.   In general background  from
          method analytes should  be below  the method detection limit.

     10.3 Initial demonstration of laboratory accuracy  and precision.   Analyze
          four to seven replicates of a  laboratory fortified blank  containing
          each analyte  of concern  at  a concentration in the  range of 0.1-5
          ug/L (see regulations and maximum contaminant levels for  guidance  on
          appropriate concentrations).

                                      19

-------
     10.3.1  Prepare each replicate by adding an appropriate aliquot of a
             quality control sample to reagent water.  If a quality
             control sample containing the method analytes is not
             available, a primary dilution standard made from a source of
             reagents different than those used to prepare the calibration
             standards may be used.  Also add the appropriate amounts of
             internal standard and surrogates if they are being used.
             Analyze each replicate according to the procedures described
             in Section 11, and on a schedule that results in the analyses
             of all replicates over a period of several days.

     10.3.2  Calculate the measured concentration of each analyte in each
             replicate, the mean concentration of each analyte in all
             replicates, and mean accuracy (as mean percentage of true
             value) for each analyte, and the precision (as relative
             standard deviation, RSD) of the measurements for each
             analyte. Calculate the MDL of each analyte using the
             procedures described in (2).

     10.3.3  For each analyte and surrogate, the mean accuracy, expressed
             as a percentage of the true value, should be 80-120% and the
             RSD should be <20%.  Some analytes, particularly the early
             eluting gases and late eluting higher molecular weight
             compounds, are measured with less accuracy and precision than
             other analytes.  The method detection limits must be
             sufficient to detect analytes at the regulatory levels.  If
             these criteria are not met for an analyte, take remedial
             action and repeat the measurements for that analyte to
             demonstrate acceptable performance before samples are
             analyzed.

     10.3.4  Develop and maintain a system of control charts to plot the
             precision and accuracy of analyte and surrogate measurements
             as a function of time.  Charting of surrogate recoveries is
             an especially valuable activity since these are present in
             every sample and the analytical  results will  form a
             significant record of data quality.

10.4 Laboratory reagent blanks.   With each batch of samples processed as
     a group within a work shift,  analyze a laboratory reagent blank to
     determine the background system contamination.

10.5 With each batch of samples processed as a group within ^a work shift,
     analyze a single laboratory fortified blank (LFB) containing each
     analyte of concern at a concentration as determined  in 10.3.  If
     more than 20 samples are included in a batch,  analyze one LFB for
     every 20 samples.   Use the procedures described in  10.3.3 to
     evaluate the accuracy of the  measurements,  and to estimate whether
     the method detection limits can be obtained.   If acceptable accuracy
     and method detection limits cannot be achieved, the  problem must be
     located and corrected before  further samples  are analyzed.   Add
                                 20

-------
         these results to the on-going control charts to document data
         quality.

     10.6 With each set of field samples a field reagent blank  (FRB) should be
         analyzed.  The results of these analyses will help define
         contamination resulting from field sampling and transportation
         activities.  An acceptable  FRB may replace the LRB.

     10.7 At  least quarterly, replicates of laboratory fortified blanks should
         be  analyzed  to determine the precision of the laboratory
         measurements.  Add these results to  the on-going control charts to
         document data quality.

     10.8 At  least quarterly, analyze a quality control sample  (QCS) from an
         external source.   If measured analyte concentrations  are not of
         acceptable  accuracy, check  the entire analytical procedure to locate
         and correct  the problem source.

     10.9 Sample  matrix effects  have  not been  observed when this method is
         used with distilled water,  reagent water, drinking water, and ground
         water.  Therefore,  analysis of a laboratory fortified sample matrix
          (LFM)  is not required.   It  is recommended that sample matrix effects
         be  evaluated at least  quarterly using the QCS described  in 10.8.

    10.10 Numerous other quality control measures  are  incorporated  into other
         parts  of this procedure,  and  serve to alert the  analyst  to potential
         problems.

11.  PROCEDURE

    11.1  INITIAL CONDITIONS

          11.1.1  Recommended chromatographic conditions  are  summarized  in
                 Sect. 6.3.3.   Other  packed  or capillary  (open  tubular)
                 columns may be used  if the  requirements of  Sect.  10.3  are
                 met.

          11.1.2 Calibrate  the  system daily  as described  in  Sect.  9.2.

          11.1.3 Adjust  the purge  gas (nitrogen or helium)  flow rate to
                 40  mL/min.   Attach the trap inlet to  the  purging  device  and
                 open the  syringe  valve on  the purging device.

    11.2  SAMPLE INTRODUCTION AND PURGING

          11.2.1 To generate accurate data,  samples and calibration standards
                 must be analyzed under identical  conditions.   Remove  the
                 plungers  from two 5-mL syringes  and  attach  a closed  syringe
                 valve to each.  Warm the sample to room temperature,  open  the
                 sample (or standard) bottle,  and carefully pour the  sample
                 into one of the syringe barrels  to just short of overflowing.
                 Replace the syringe plunger,  invert  the syringe,  and  compress

                                      21

-------
11.3
                  the sample.   Open  the  syringe  valve  and  vent  any  residual  air
                  while  adjusting  the  sample  volume  to 5.0 ml.   If applicable,
                  add the  internal calibration standard to the  sample  through
                  the syringe  valve.   Close the  valve.   Fill  the  second  syringe
                  in  an  identical  manner from the  same sample bottle.  Reserve
                  this second  syringe  for 
-------
          Concentration of         Peak height sample        Concentration of
          unknown (ng/L)     =    Peak height standard  x    standard
    12.3  Results should be reported with an appropriate number of significant
          figures.   Experience indicates that three significant figures may be
          used for concentrations above 99 #g/L,  two. significant figures for
          concentrations between 1-99 /*g/L, and 1 significant figure for lower
          concentrations.

    12.4  Calculate the total  trihalomethane concentration by summing the four
          individual trihalomethane concentrations in /ig/L.

13.  ACCURACY AND PRECISION

    13.1  Single laboratory (EMSL-Cincinnati) accuracy and precision for the
          organohalides added to Ohio River water and carbon-filtered tap
          water are presented in Table 2.(1)  Method detection limits for
          several of the listed analytes are also presented in Table 2.(1)
          Some laboratories may not be able to achieve these detection limits
          since results are dependent upon instrument sensitivity and matrix
          effects.

    13.2  This method was tested by 20 laboratories using drinking water
          fortified with various organohalides at six concentrations between 8
          and 505 /zg/L.  Single operator precision, overall precision, and
          method accuracy were found to be directly related to the
          concentration of the analyte.  Linear equations to describe these
          relationships are presented in Table 3 (9).

14. REFERENCES

    1.  Bellar, T.A. and J.J. Lichtenberg, "The Determination of Halogenated
        Chemicals in Water by the Purge and Trap Method," Method 502.1, EPA
        600/4-81-059, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental
        Monitoring  and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, April,
        1981.

    2.  Glaser, J.A., D.L. Foerst, G.D. McKee, S.A. Quave, and W.L. Budde,
        "Trace Analyses  for Wastewaters,"  Environ. Sci . Techno!.. 15,  1426,
        1981.

    3.  "Carcinogens - Working with Carcinogens," Department of Health,
        Education,  and Welfare,  Public Health Service, Center for Disease
        Control, National  Institute for Occupational Safety and Health,
        Publication No.  77-206,  August, 1977.

    4.  "OSHA Safety and Health  Standards,"  (29-CFR-1910), Occupational Safety
        and Health  Administration, OSHA 2206.

    5.  "Safety  in  Academic Chemistry  Laboratories." American Chemical  Society
        Publication, Committee on Chemical  Safety, 4th  Edition, 1985.


                                       23

-------
6.
7.
8.
9.
 Kingsley,  B.A.,  C.  Gin,  D.M.  Coulson,  and  R.F.  Thomas,  "Gas
 Chromatographic  Analysis of Purgeable  Halocarbon  and Aromatic
 Compounds  in  Drinking  Water Using Two  Detectors in  Series, Water
 Chiorination,  Environmental  Impact  and Health  Effects,"  Volume  4, Ann
 Arbor Science.

 Slater, R.W.,  Graves,  R.L.  and G.D. McKee,  "A  Comparison of           ;
 Preservation  Techniques  for Volatile Organic Compounds  in Chlorinated
 Tap Waters,"  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,  Environmental
 Monitoring and Support Laboratory,  Cincinnati,  Ohio  45268.

 Bellar, T.A.  and J.J.  Lichtenberg,  "The Determination of Synthetic
 Organic Compounds in Water  by Purge and Sequential Trapping Capillary
 Column Gas Chromatography,"  U.S. Environmental  Protection Agency,
 Environmental Monitoring  and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio
 45268.                                                    '  •       .

 EPA Method Validation Study 23, Method 601 (Purgeable Halocarbons),
U.S.  Environmental Protection Agency,  Environmental Monitoring and
Support Laboratory,  Cincinnati, Ohio 45268.
                                 24

-------
TABLE 1.  RETENTION TIMES FOR ORGANOHALIDES

Analvte
Chl oromethane
Bromomethane
Dichlorodifluoromethane
Vinyl chloride
Chloroethane
Methyl ene chloride
Tr i ch 1 or of 1 uqromet h ane
1,1-Di chl oroethene
Bromochl oromethane
1,1-Di chloroethane
trans-1 , 2-Di chl oroethene
cis-1, 2-Di chl oroethene
Chloroform
1, 2-Di chloroethane
Dibromomethane
1,1, 1-Tri chl oroethane
Carbon tetrachloride
Bromodi chl oromethane
Di chl oroacetoni tri 1 e(c)
1 , 2-Di chl oropropane
1,1-Dichloropropene
Tri chl oroethene
1 ,3-Di chl oropropane
Di bromochl oromethane
1,1, 2-Tri chl oroethane
1,2-Dibromoethane
2-Chloroethyl ethyl ether CJ
2-Chloroethyl vinyl ether(c)
Bromoform
1,1,1, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
1,2, 3-Tri chl oropropane
Chi orocycl ohexane' '
1,1,2, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
Tetrachl oroethene
Pentachl oroethane
1-Chl orocycl ohexene(c)
Chlorobenzene
1 , 2-Di bromo-3-chl oropropane
Bromobenzene
2-Chlorotoluene
bis-2-Chloroisopropyl ether
1 , 3-Di chl orobenzene
1 , 2-Di chl orobenzene
1 , 4-Di chl orobenzene
Retention
Column 1
- r 1.50
2.17
2.62
2.67
3.33
5.25
7.18
7.93
8.48
9.30
10.1
10.1
10.7
11.4
11.6
12.6
13.0
13.7
14.7
14.9
15.1
15.8
16.2
16.5
16.5
17.4
17.6
18.0
19.2
19.4
21.3
21.4
21.6
21.7
21.7
22.4
24.2
26.0
27.1
32.1
32.2
34.0
34.9
35.45
(a) = Columns and conditions are described in Sect.
(b) = Not determined.
(c) = Compound not a method analyte
(d) = Pentachl oroethane apparently
analytical system.

•
Time (min)a
Column 2
5.28
7.05
(b)
5.28
8.68
10.1
(b)
7.72
12.7
12.6
9.38
12.1
12.1
15.4
14.9
13.1
11.1
14.6
(b)
16.6
(b)
13.1
(b)
16.6
18.1
18.9
(b)
(b)
19.2
21.8
(b)
(b)
(b)
15.0
(b)
19.9
18.8
(b)
(b)
22.0
(b)
22.4
23.9
22.3
6.3.3 and 6.3.4.


decomposes to tetrachl oroethene in the


                      25


-------
  TABLE 2.
 n,™ tABORATORY ACCURACY, PRECISION,  AND METHOD DETECTION LIMITS
FOR VOLATILE HAL06ENATED ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN MATER
Analyte
Bromobenzene
Bromochl oromethane
Bromodi chl oromethane
Bromoform
Carbon tetrachloride
Chl orobenzene
Chlorocyclohexane
1-Chl orocycl ohexene
Chloroethane
2-Chloroethyl ethyl ether
Chl oromethane
2-Chlorotoluene
Di bromochl oromethane
1,2-Dibromoethane
Dibromomethane
1 , 2-Di chl orobenzene
1 , 3-Di chl orobenzene
1,4-Di chl orobenzene
Dichlorodifluoromethane
1,1-Di chloroethane
1, 2-Di chloroethane
1,1-Di chl oroethene
l,2-Dichloroethene(b)
1 , 2-Di chl oropropane
1 , 3-Di chl oropropane
1 , 1-Di chl oropropene
Methyl ene chloride
1,1,1, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
1,1,2, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
Tetrachl oroethene
1,1, 1-Tri chl oroethane
1,1, 2-Tri chl oroethane
Tri chl oroethene
Trichlorofluoromethane
1, 2, 3-Trichl oropropane
Vinyl Chloride
Concen-
tration
(A9/L)
0.40
0.40
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.20
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.20
0.20
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.20
0.40
0.40
0.20
0.40
0.40
0.20
0.40
0.40
0.20
Average
Recovery
(%)
'93
,90
roo
95
90
88
93
93
93
95
93
85
95
93
100
95
95
90
103
95
110
88
88
95
98
88
85
93
95
90
93
95
94
90
100
110
Number
of
Samples
20
19
17
17
17
18
21
21
20
18
16
20
17
18
5
21
21
20
12
17
17
18
20
20
21
18
17
20
18
17
20
15
17
21
20
12
Relative
Standard
Deviation
(%)
12
Ji b
9 '5
*X • v
6.5
15.0 1
7 n
/ • v/
9 "?
^ •  • w
18
A \J
7.5
8 5
w • «j
9 3
•? » wf
7 0
t • w
12 5
JL fm • W
8 0
\J • V
13
A -iJ
8 3
w » w
13
JLO
20
t_\/
6 0
w • V
7 0
/ • V
9 3
& • w
7.0
3.5
6.5
9.3
12.0
8 0
w • v
9 0
y * v
9 5
«x • \f
8.0
6 0
w • V
6 0
V • V
9.3
9.5
15
Method
Detection
Limit
(09/L)
i*\
\*i
(a\
\a/
0 003
v » Ww
0 05
V . VtJ
Onrio
. uuo
0(\(\K
. uuo
(a\
\&)
(a\
\4)
Onnft
. uuo
0 02
V » Uc»
Om
. Ul
/a\
v«;
Onno
. uuo
004.
. UH
^a^
va;
/a^
^d^
(a\
\*)
/a\
la;
/a^
\*)
n nn^
u . uuo
Onno
. UU£
Onn-s
. uuo
0.002
(a)
/a\
\d^
(a)
/a\
\4)
(n\
\d7
001
. Ul
0001
. VUJ.
0 00^
v . UUO
0007
. uu/
0001
«UU1
/a\
\*)
(a\
\<*/
0.01
(a)  » Not determined.
(b)  = Includes cis- and trans- isomers.
                                      26

-------
 TABLE 3.   SINGLE ANALYST PRECISION,  MULTI-LABORATORY PRECISION,  AND  ACCURACY
           FOR VOLATILE HALOGENATED ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN DRINKING WATER


Analvte
Bromodi chl oromethane
Bromoform
Carbon Tetrachloride
Chlqrobe.nzene
Chldroethane
Chloroform
Chl oromethane
Di bromochl oromethane
1 , 2-Di chl orobenzene
1 , 3-Di chl orobenzene
1 , 4-Di bhl orobenzene
1,1-Di chl oroethane
1, 2-Di chl oroethane
1,1-Dichloroethene
trans-1 , 2-Di chl oroethene
1, 2-Di chl oropropane
Methyl ene Chloride
1,1,2, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
Tetrachl oroethene
1,1, 1-Tri chl oroethane
1,1, 2-Tri chl oroethane
TrichToroethene
Tri chl orof 1 uoromethane
Vinyl Chloride


Single Analyst
0.13X + 1.41
0.10X + 0.20
0.1 OX + 1.57
0.07X + 1.71
0.07X + 0.65
0.05X + 5.58
0.28X + 0.27
0.10X + 1.55
0.12X + 2.02
0.15X + 0.64
0.09X + 0.39
0.09X + 0.47
0.06X + 1.69
0.12X + 0.13
0.16X + 0.29
0.19X - 0.6.1
0.08X + 1.04
0.09X - 1.42
0.17X + 0.96
0.14X - 0.33
0.06X + 0.99
0.13X + 0.23
0.22X + 0.03
0.14X - 0.17

Multi -Laboratory
Precision
0.18X + 3.06
0.24X + 1.25
0.20X + 1.09
0.16X + 1.43
0.19X + 0.39
0.09X + 6.21
0.49X +1.51
0.23X + 0.91
0.17X + 2.26
0.24X + 1.48
0.15X + 0.39
0.18X + 1.13
0.18X + 1.21
0.31X - 0.71
0.24X + 0.95
0.27X - 0.10
0.17X + 2.43
0.20X + 1.65
0.25X + 0.58
0.27X - 0.76
0.19X + 0.69
0.32X - 0.57
0.30X + 0.64
0.32X + 0.07
Accuracy
As Mean _
Recovery (X)
l.OOC + 0.96
1.02C - 1.81
l.OOC - 2.20
l.OOC - 1.39
1.08C - 1.97
0.90C + 3.44
0.91C - 0.99
0.98C + 2.89
0.91C + 1.12
0.91C - 0.13
0.91C + 0.26
0.93C - 2.04
1.03C - 0.41
1.03C - 1.16
0.98C - 1.02
0.98C + 1.19
0.97C - 1.50
0.92C - 0.82
0.96C + 0.35
0.92C + 0.02
0.84C + 0.83
0.92C - 0.10
0.92C + 1.21
1.06C - 1.86
X =  Mean recovery, in
C =  True value for the concentration, in
                                      27

-------
   OPTIONAL
   FOAM
   TRAP
 EXIT K IN.
    0.0.
KIN.
0. D. EXIT
                         0, 0.
                   INLET H IN.
                        0.0.
  10MM GLASS FRIT
  MEDIUM POROSITY
    SAMPLE INLET

|-»-2-WAY SYWNGE VALVE
   -17CM. 20 GAUGE SYRINGE NIEDLE

V^fiMM. 0. D. RUBBER SEPTUM

     	  1/16 IN. O.D.
     W-INLET   ^/STAINLESS STEEL
                                       13X MOUSCULAR
                                       SIEVE PURGE
                                       GASRLTER
                                         PURGE GAS
                                         aow
                                         CONTROL
            FIGURE 1.  PURGING DEVICE
                       28

-------
     PACKING PROCEDURE
                   CONSTRUCTION
    (SUSS
    WOOL
ACTIVATED, ,,
CHARCOAL7.N
 6RADE15 , ,,
 SIUCA GEL7'7'
   TENAX


3XOV-1
GLASS WOOL'
1CM
          5MM
            7««./FOOT
          RESISTANCE
         WIRE WRAPPED
            SOLID   _
       (DOUBLE LAYER)
          RESISTANCE
         WIRE WRAPPED
               SOLID
        (SINGLE LAYER)
                SOB-
             TRAP INLET
                     LD
 COMPRESSION
'FITTING NUT
 AND FERRULES

  THERMOCOUPLE/
  CONTROLLER
  SENSOR
     rBrtPERAlTJRE
     CONTROL
     AND
     PYROMETER
                                   ^   / TUBING 2SCU
  0.105 IN. I.D.
  0.125 IN. 0.0.
  STAINLESS STEEL
      FIGURE 2.  TRAP PACKINGS AND CONSTRUCTION TO  INCLUDE
                DESORB CAPABILITY
                            29

-------
                 3N3ZN380H01HOia-fr
  3WH130a01HOVH131-2 1 'I *
                        7 '
3NVH130H01HDVH131-J'l'l'l
                     3NVH130HOWIO-Z 'L
  3N3dOUdOU01K)ia-C 'I -
                   T
  3NVm30801HDIUl -
3N3H13U01H3IQ -Z'l -si 3
                                                   t/5
                                                   O
                                                   CQ
                                                        LU
                                                        CO
                                                        UU
                                                        a:
                                                        GL
                                                        u.
                                                        o
                                                        z:
                                                  o
                                                  a:
                                                  o
                                                  oo
                                                  ui
                                                  o:
                 30

-------
METHOD 502.2   VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN WATER BY PURGE AND TRAP
               CAPILLARY COLUMN GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY WITH PHOTOIONIZATION
               AND ELECTROLYTIC CONDUCTIVITY DETECTORS IN SERIES
                            Revision 2.0
     R. W. Slater, Jr. and J. S. Ho - Method 502.2, Revision 1.0 (1986)

     J. S. Ho - Method 502.2, Revision 2.0 (1989)
             ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
                  OFFICE OF  RESEARCH AND  DEVELOPMENT
                 U.S.  ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
                        CINCINNATI, OHIO  45268
                                  31

-------
                                 METHOD 502.2

            VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN WATER BY PURGE AND TRAP
           CAPILLARY COLUMN GAS  CHROMATOGRAPHY WITH  PHOTOIONIZATION
              AND ELECTROLYTIC CONDUCTIVITY DETECTORS IN SERIES
1.   SCOPE AND APPLICATION
     1.1
This is a general purpose method for the identification and
simultaneous measurement of purgeable volatile organic compounds in
finished drinking water, raw source water, or drinking water in any
treatment stage (1-3).  The method is applicable to a'wide range of
organic compounds, including the four trihalomethane disinfection
by-products, that have sufficiently high volatility and low water
solubility to be efficiently removed from water samples with purge
and trap procedures.  The following compounds can be determined by
this method.
                Analvte

          Benzene
          Bromobenzene
          Bromochloromethane
          Bromodi chloromethane
          Bromoform
          Bromomethane
          n-Butylbenzene
          sec-Butyl benzene
          tert-Butylbenzene
          Carbon  tetrachloride
          Chlorobenzene
          Chloroethane
          Chloroform
          Chloromethane
          2-Chlorotoluene
          4-Chlorotoluene
          Di bromochloromethane
          1,2-Di bromo-3-chloropropane
          1,2-Dibromoethane
          Dibromomethane
          1,2-Dichlorobenzene
          1,3-Di chlorobenzene
          1,4-Di chlorobenzene
         Di chlorodi f1uoromethane
          1,1-Di chloroethane
         1,2-Dichloroethane
         1,1-Dichloroethene
         ci s-1,2-Di chloroethene
         trans-1,2-Di chloroethene
         1,2-Di chloropropane
                                      Chemical Abstract Services
                                             Registry Number

                                                71-43-2
                                          •     108-86-1
                                                74-97-5
                                                75-27-4
                                                75-25-2
                                                74-83-9
                                               104-51-8
                                               135-98-8
                                                98-06-6
                                                56-23-5
                                               108-90-7
                                                75-00-3
                                                67-66-3:
                                                74^-87-3
                                                95^49-8*
                                               106-43-4
                                               124-48-1
                                                96-12-8
                                               106-93-4
                                                74-95-3
                                                95-50-1
                                               541-73-1
                                               106-46-7
                                                75-71-8
                                                75-34-3
                                               107-06-2
                                                75-35-4
                                               156-59-4
                                               156-60-5
                                                78-87-5
                                     32

-------
         1,3-Dichloropropane                            142-28-9
         2,2-Dichloropropane                            590-20-7
         1,1-Dichloropropene                            563-58-6
         cis-l,3-Dichloropropene                      10061-01-5
         trans-l,3-Dichloropropene                    10061-02-6
         Ethyl benzene                                   100-41-4
         Hexachlorobutadi ene                             87-68-3
         Isopropy1 benzene                                98-82-8
         4-Isopropyltoluene                              99-87-6
         Methylene chloride                              75-09-2
         Naphthalene            • .  , j.                    91-20-3
         Propylbenzene                                  103-65-1
     .    Styrene                                        100-42-5
         1,1,1,2-Tetrachloroethane                      630-20-6
         1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane                       79-34-5,
         Tetrachloroethene                              127-18-4
         Toluene                                        108-88-3
         1,2,3-Trichlorobenzene                          87-61-6
         1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene                         120-82-1
         1,1,1-Trichloroethane                           71-55-6
         1,1,2-Trichloroethane                           79-00-5
         Trichloroethene                                 79-01-6
         Trichlorofluoromethane                          75-69-4
         1,2,3-Trichloropropane                          96-18-4
         1,2,4-Trimethyl benzene                          95-63-6
         1,3,5-Trimethyl benzene                         108-67-8
         Vinyl  chloride                                  75-01-4
         o-Xylene                                       95-47-6
         m-Xylene                                      108-38-3
         p-Xylene                                      106-42-3

     1.2  This method is  applicable to  the  determination of  total
         trihalomethanes and  otfter volatile  synthetic  compounds as  required
         by  drinking water regulations of  40 Code  of Federal  Regulations  Part
          141.  Method detection  limits (MDLs)  (4)  are  compound  and  instrument
         dependent  and vary from approximately 0.01-3.0 jttg/L.   The  applicable
          concentration range  of this method  is also compound  and instrument
          dependent  and is approximately 0.02 to 200 /zg/L.   Analytes that  are
          inefficiently purged from water will  not  be detected when  present at
          low concentrations,  but they  can  be measured  with  acceptable
          accuracy and precision when present in sufficient  amounts.

     1.3   Two of the three isomeric  xylenes may not be  resolved  on the
          capillary column, and if not, must  be reported  as  isomeric pairs.

2.   SUMMARY OF METHOD

     2.1   Highly volatile organic compounds with low water solubility are
          extracted  (purged) from the sample  matrix by  bubbling  an inert gas
          through a 5 ml aqueous sample.  Purged sample components are trapped
          in a tube containing suitable sorbent materials.  When  purging is
          complete, the sorbent tube is heated and backflushed with helium to

                                      33

-------
           desorb  trapped  sample  components  onto  a  capillary  gas  chromatography
           (GC)  column.  The  column  is  temperature  programmed to  separate  the
           method  analytes which  are then detected  with  a photoionization
           detector  (PID)  and a halogen  specific  detector placed  in  series.

     2.2   Tentative  identifications are confirmed  by analyzing standards  under
           the same conditions used  for  samples and comparing resultant GC
           retention  times.   Additional  confirmatory information  can be gained
           by comparing the relative response from  the two detectors.  Each
           identified component is measured  by relating  the response produced
           tor that compound  to the  response produced by a compound that is
           used  as an internal standard.  For absolute confirmation, a gas
           chromatography/mass spectrometry(GC/MS)  determination  according to
          method 524.1 or method 524.2 is recommended.

3.   DEFINITIONS

     3.1   Internal standard -- A pure analyte(s)  added to a solution in known
          amount(s)  and used to measure the relative responses of other method
          analytes and surrogates that are components  of the same solution
          The internal  standard must be an analyte that is  not a sample
          component.

     3.2  Surrogate  analyte  — A pure analyte(s), which is  extremely unlikely
          to be  found in  any sample, and which  is added to  a sample aliquot in
          known  amount(s)  before  extraction  and  is  measured with  the same
          procedures  used  to measure other sample components.  The purpose of
          a surrogate analyte is  to  monitor  method  performance with each
          sample.
    3.3
    3.4
    3.5
    3.6
 Laboratory-duplicates (LD1  and LD2)  - Two sample aliquots  taken  in
 the analytical  laboratory and analyzed separately with  identical
 procedures.   Analyses of LD1  and LD2 give a measure  of  the  precision
 associated with laboratory  procedures,  but not  with  sample
 collection,  preservation, or  storage procedures.

 Field  duplicates (FD1 and FD2)  —  Two separate  samples  collected  at
 the same  time and  place  under identical  circumstances and treated
 exactly the  same throughout field  and laboratory  procedures
 Analyses  of  FD1  and  FD2  give  a  measure  of the precision associated
 with sample  collection,  preservation  and  storage,  as well as with
 laboratory procedures.

 Laboratory reagent blank (LRB)  - An  aliquot of reagent water that
 is  treated exactly as  a  sample  including  exposure  to all glassware
 equipment, solvents,  reagents,  internal standards, and surrogates '
 that are  used with other samples.  The LRB  is used to determine if
method analytes  or other interferences are  present in the laboratory
 environment,  the reagents, or the apparatus.

 Field reagent blank  (FRB) — Reagent water placed  in a sample
container  in  the laboratory and treated as a sample in all  respects,

                            34

-------
     including exposure to sampling site conditions,  storage,
     preservation and all  analytical  procedures.   The purpose  of the FRB
     is to determine if method analytes or other  interferences are
     present in the field environment.

3.7  Laboratory performance check solution (LPC)  — A solution of method
     analytes, surrogate compounds, and internal  standards used to
     evaluate the performance of the instrument system with respect to a
     defined set of method criteria.

3.8  Laboratory fortified blank (LFB) -- An aliquot of reagent water to
     which known quantities of the method analytes are added in the
     laboratory.  The LFB is analyzed exactly like a sample, and its
     purpose is to determine whether the methodology is in control, and
     whether the laboratory is capable of making accurate and precise
     measurements at the required method detection limit.

3.9  Laboratory fortified sample matrix (LFM) —'An aliquot of an
     environmental sample to which known quantities of the method
     analytes are added in the laboratory.  The LFM is analyzed exactly
     like a sample, and its purpose is to determine whether the sample
     matrix contributes bias to the analytical results.  The background
     concentrations of the analytes in the sample matrix must be
     determined in a separate aliquot and the measured values in the LFM
     corrected for background concentrations.

3.10 Stock standard solution — A concentrated solution containing a
     single certified standard that is a method analyte, or a
     concentrated solution of a single analyte prepared in the laboratory
     with an  assayed reference compound.  Stock standard solutions are
     used to  prepare primary dilution standards.

3.11 Primary  dilution standard solution — A  solution of several analytes
     prepared in the laboratory from stock standard solutions and diluted
     as  needed to prepare calibration solutions and other needed analyte
     solutions.

3.12 Calibration standard  (CAL) — A solution prepared from the primary
     dilution standard  solution and  stock standard solutions  of the
     internal  standards and  surrogate analytes.  The CAL solutions are
     used to  calibrate  the  instrument response with respect to analyte
     concentration.

3.13 Quality  control sample  (QCS)  — A  sample matrix containing method
     analytes or  a  solution  of method  analytes in  a water miscible
     solvent  which  is  used  to fortify reagent water or environmental
     samples.  The  QCS  is  obtained from a source external to  the
     laboratory,  and is  used to check  laboratory performance  with
     externally  prepared  test materials.
                                  35

-------
 4.   INTERFERENCES
      4.1
      4.2
     4.3
     4.4
 During analysis, major contaminant sources are volatile materials in
 the laboratory and impurities in the inert purging gas and in the
 sorbent trap.  The use of non-polytetrafluoroethylene (iPTFE) plastic
 tubing, non-PTFE thread sealants, or flow controllers with rubber
 components in the purging device should be avoided since such
 materials out-gas organic compounds which will  be concentrated in
 the trap during the purge operation.  Analyses of "laboratory reagent
 blanks (Sect. 10.3) provide information about the presence of
 contaminants.  When potential interfering peaks are noted in
 laboratory reagent blanks,  the analyst should change the purge gas
 source and regenerate the molecular sieve purge gas filter.
 Subtracting blank values from sample results is not permitted.

 Interfering contamination may occur when a sample containing low
 concentrations of volatile organic compounds is analyzed immediately
 after a sample containing relatively high concentrations of volatile
 organic compounds.   A preventive technique is between-sample rinsing
 of the purging apparatus and  sample syringes with two portions  of
 reagent water.  After analysis of a sample containing high
 concentrations of volatile  organic compounds,  one or more laboratory
 reagent blanks should be analyzed to check for  cross contamination.

 Special  precautions must be taken to analyze for methylene chloride.
 The analytical and  sample storage area should be isolated from  all
 atmospheric sources of methylene chloride,  otherwise random
 background  levels will  result.   Since  methylene chloride will
 permeate  through PTFE tubing,  all  gas  chromatography carrier  gas
 lines  and purge  gas plumbing  should  be constructed  from  stainless
 steel  or  copper  tubing.   Laboratory  clothing worn  by the analyst
 should be clean  since clothing  previously  exposed  to methylene
 chloride  fumes during common  liquid/liquid  extraction procedures can
 contribute  to  sample  contamination.

 When traps  containing combinations of  silica gel and  coconut
 charcoal  are  used,  residual water  from previous  analyses  collects in
 the trap  and  can  be randomly  released  into  the  analytical  column.
 To minimize the  possibility of this  occurring,  the  trap  is
 reconditioned  after each  use  as described  in Sect.  11.4.
5.   SAFETY
     5.1
The toxicity or carcinogenicity of chemicals used 'in this method has
not been precisely defined; each chemical should be treated as a
potential health hazard, and exposure to these chemicals should be
minimized.  Each laboratory is responsible for maintaining awareness
of OSHA regulations regarding safe handling of chemicals used in
this method.  Additional references to laboratory safety are
available (5-7) for the information of the analyst.
                                      36

-------
    5 2  The following method analytes have been tentatively classified as
         known or  suspected human or mammalian carcinogens: benzene, carbon
         tetrachlori de,  1,4-di chlorobenzene   1,2-dichlorethane,
         hexachlorobutadi ene, 1,1,2,2-tetrachloroethane,
         1,1,2-trichloroethane,  chloroform, 1,2-dibromoethane
         tetrachloroethene, trichloroethene,  and vinyl chloride.   Pure
         standard  materials  and  stock  standard solutions  of these  compounds
         should  be handled  in a  hood.  A NIOSH/MESA  approved toxic gas
         respirator  should  be worn  when  the analyst  handles high
         concentrations of  these toxic compounds.

6.   APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT

     6 1  SAMPLE CONTAINERS  - 40-mL to 120-mL  screw cap vials  each equipped
          with a PTFE-faced silicone septum .   Prior to use  wash vials and
          septa with detergent and rinse with  tap and distilled water   A low
          the vials and septa to air dry at room temperature,  place in a 105 C
          oven for one hour, then remove and allow to cool in an area known to
          be free of organics.

     fi 9  PURGE AND TRAP SYSTEM  - The purge and trap system consists of three
          separate peces of equipment:  purging device   trap, and desorber.
          Interns  are commercially  available  from several sources  that meet
          all of the following specifications.

          621  The all  glass purging device (Figure  1)  must be designed  to
                  accept 5-mL samples with  a water column  at least  5 cm deep.
                  Gaseous volumes above the sample must be kept to  a minimum
                  «15  ml) to eliminate dead volume effects.  A glass  tnt
                  should be  installed  at  the base of  the  sample chamber  so  that
                  the purge  gas  passes  through the water  column as  finely
                  divided bubbles with  a  diameter of  <3 mm at the  origin.
                  Needle spargers may  be  used, however, the purge  gas  must  be
                  introduced at  a point <5 mm  from  the base of  the water
                  column.

           622  The trap (Figure 2)  must be  at least 25 cm long and have  an
                  inside diameter of at least  0.105 in.  Starting from the
                  inlet, the trap must contain the following amounts of
                  adsorbents:  1/3 of 2,6-diphenylene oxide polymer, 1/3 of
                  silica gel, and 1/3 of coconut charcoal.  It is recommended
                  that  1.0 cm of methyl silicone coated packing be inserted at
                  the inlet to extend the  life of the trap.  If it is not
                  necessary to analyze for dichlorodifluoromethane, the
                   charcoal can be eliminated  and the polymer increased to  fill
                   2/3 of the trap.  If only compounds boiling above 35 C are to
                   be analyzed, both the  silica gel and charcoal can be
                   eliminated and the polymer  increased to fill the entire  trap.
                   lefore initial use/the  trap should  be  conditioned  overnight
                   at 180°C  by backflushing with an inert  gas flow  of  at least
                   20 mL/min. Vent the  trap effluent  to the  room,  not  to.the
                   analytical  column.   Prior to daily use, the trap should  be
                                        37

-------
             conditioned for 10 min at 180°C with  backflushing.   The  trao
             may be vented to the analytical  column  during  dai y         P
             conditioning; however,  the column  must  be  run  through  the
             temperature program prior to  analysis of samples.

      6.2.3  The use of the methyl  silicone  coated packing  is recommended

             D?otectir?hat0r^   lhe +P3C k1ng  Serves  a d""l  PurposeTded'
             ?K5 thl 9rf the. adjorbent  from aerosols, and also of  insuring
             that the adsorbent  is fully enclosed within the heated zone
             of  the  trap thus  eliminating potential  cold spots.

             ai  thelrapfnllt   ^^  fl1aSS W°01 may be Used as a
til     r-Ure) "     be Capable °f
                          0-
                          ?. :  The Polymer section of the trap should
               n  n      hlgher $han 2PO°C or the life expectancy of the
            SSL? ]1 decrease'  Tl"ap ^ilure is characterized by a
            pressure drop in excess of 3 pounds per square inch across
            the trap during purging or by poor bromofoVm sensitiJi^es.

6.3  GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY SYSTEM

     6.3.1  The GC must be capable of temperature  programming  and  should
            be equipped with variable-constant differentia  flow
            controllers so that the column  flow rate will  reialS constant
            throughout  desorption  and  temperature  program  operation    The
            column oven may need to be cooled  to <10'C  (Sect   6  3 3)
            therefore,  a subambient oven  controller may  be required.'
     6*3'2
                                 9™Phy Columns.  Any gas chromatography
           mnt        .           performance specifications of this
           method may be used.  Separations of the calibration mixture
           must be equivalent or better than those described; in this

                    ?J?6 Uf fU  C°1UmnS have been identified: column 1
                    3'3) and column 2 (^ct. 6.3.4) both provide
                  6 3S5eParwhl°hnShf°rhSlXtJ! °^a»^ compounds!  Column 3
                 m^hAH^o*1 has been demonstrated satisfactory for
                 method 524.2,  may also be used.
    6.3.3  Column 1- 60m long x 0.75mm ID VOCOL (Supelco  Inc
           wide-bore capillary column with 1.5 Am film thickness  or

           tTr1^  ,?? fl°W rate of helium easier gls?s  adjusted
           to about 6 ml/mm.   The column temperature Is held for  8  min
           at 10 C,  then programmed to 180°C  at 4°C/min,  and  held  until

           ODLfnePdeCw?dhCt°i;POUndiS haV? eluted"   A samP^ ch?oSogr  m
           obtained  with this  column is presented in  Figure 3

           lifted1?!! TaMp  IhatT?ay be ani1ciPated with  this  column  are
           listed in Table  1.   It was  used  to  develop the method
           performance  statements in Sect.  13.

   6.3.4   Column 2  - 105m  long x 0.53mm  ID, RTX-502  2  (0 I
           Corporation/RESTEK  Corporation) mega-bore  capiilary column,
                               38

-------
       with  3.0  urn film thickness,  or  equivalent.   The  flow rate  of
       helium carrier gas  is  adjusted  to  about  8 mL/rmn.   The  column
       temperature is held for 10 min  at  35°C,  then programmed to
       200°C at  4°C/min, and  held until all  expected compounds have
       eluted.  A sample chromatogram  obtained  with this  column is
       presented in Figure 4.  Retention  times  that may be
       anticipated with this  column are listed  in  Table 3.  It was
       used to develop the method performance statements  in Sect.
       13.

635  Column 3 - 30 m long x 0.53  mm ID  DB-62  mega-bore (J&W
       Scientific, Inc.) column with 3 pm film thickness.
6.3.6
6.3.7
A series configuration of a high temperature photoionization
detector(PID) equipped with 10.0 eV (nominal) lamp and
electroconductivity detector(ELCD) is required.  This allows
to simultaneously analyze volatile organic compounds (VOC)
that are aromatic or unsaturated by photoionization detector
and organohalide by an electrolytic conductivity detector.

A Tracer 703 photoionization detector and a Tracer Hall model
700-A detector connected in series with a short piece of
uncoated capillary tube, 0.32 mm ID was used to develop the
single laboratory method performance data described in
Sect.13.  The system and operating conditions  used to collect
these data  are as follows:
        Column:
        The purge-and-trap  Unit:
        PID detector base temperature:
        Reactor  tube:
        Reactor  temperature:
        Reactor  base temperature:
        Electrolyte: 100% n-propyl  alcohol
        Electrolyte flow rate:
        Reaction gas:
        Carrier  gas plus make-up gas:
                                     Column  1  (Sect.6.3.3)
                                     Tekmar  LSC-2
                                     250°c
                                     Nickel  1/16  in.  OD
                                     810 °C
                                     250°C

                                     0.8  mL/min
                                     Hydrogen  at  40 mL/min
                                     Helium  at 30 mL/min
 6 3 8  An O.I. Model 4430 photoionization detector mounting together
        with the model 4420 electrolytic conductivity detector (ELCD)
        as a dual detector set was used to develop the single
        laboratory method performance data for column 2 described in
        Sect.13.  The system and the operating conditions used to
        collect these data are as follows:
        Column:
        The purge-and-trap unit:
        Reactor tube:

        Reactor temperature:
        Reactor base temperature:
        Electrolyte: 100 % n-propyl alcohol
                                      Column 2 (Sect.6.3.4)
                                      O.I. 4460A
                                      Nickel 1/16 in. OD
                                         &  .02in.ID
                                      950°C
                                      250°C
                             39

-------
                  Electrolyte flow rate:
                  Reaction gas:
                  Carrier gas plus make-up gas:
0.050 mL/min
Hydrogen at 100 mL/min
Helium at 30 mL/min
      6.4  SYRINGE AND SYRINGE VALVES

           6.4.1   Two 5-mL glass hypodermic syringes  with  Luer-Lok tip.

           6.4.2   Three 2-way syringe valves with  Luer  ends.

           6.4.3   One 25-AtL micro syringe with  a 2  in x 0.006  in  ID,  22°  bevel
                  needle (Hamilton #702N or equivalent).

           6.4.4   Micro  syringes  - 10,  100  #L.

           6.4.5   Syringes  -  0.5,  1.0,  and  5-mL, gas tight with shut-off  valve.

     6.5   MISCELLANEOUS

           6.5.1   Standard  solution storage containers - 15-mL bottles with
                  PTFE-lined  screw caps.

7-   REAGENT AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

     7.1  TRAP PACKING MATERIALS

          7.1.1  2,6-Diphenylene oxide polymer, 60/80 mesh,  chromatographic
                 grade (Tenax GC or  equivalent).

          7.1.2  Methyl silicone packing  (optional) - OV-1 (3%)  on
                 Chromosorb-W, 60/80 mesh or equivalent.

          7.1.3  Silica gel - 35/60  mesh, Davison,  grade 15  or equivalent.

          7.1.4  c°conut charcoal  -  Prepare from Barnebey  Cheney,  CA-580-26
                 lot  #M-2649  by crushing through 26 mesh screen.

    7.2   REAGENTS

          7.2.1   Ascorbic  acid -  ACS  Reagent  grade, granular.

          7.2.2   Sodium  thiosulfate - ACS Reagent grade, granular.

          ?'2'3   S°CuJ?rlC  acid/1+J) -  Carefully add a measured volume of
                 cone. HC1  to  equal volume  of reagent water.

         7.2.4   Reagent water -  It should  be demonstrated to be free of
                 analytes   Prepare reagent  water by passing tap water through
                 a filter bed containing about 0.5 kg  of activated carbon  by
                using a water purification  system, or by boilinq distilled
                water for 15 min followed by a 1-h purge with  Inert gas while


                                     40

-------
            the water temperature is held at  90°C.   Store in clean,
            narrow-mouth bottles with PTFE-lined septa and screw caps.

     7.2.5  Methanol  - demonstrated to be free of analytes.

     7.2.6  Vinyl  chloride - 99.9% pure vinyl chloride is available from
            Ideal  Gas Products,  Inc., Edison, New Jersey and from
            Matheson, East Rutherford, New Jersey.   Certified mixtures  of
            vinyl  chloride in nitrogen at 1.0 and 10.0 ppm (v/v) are
            available from several sources.

7.3  STOCK STANDARD SOLUTIONS - These solutions may be purchased as
     certified solutions or prepared from pure standard materials using
     the following procedures:

     7.3.1  Place about 9.8 ml of methanol into a 10-mL ground-glass
            stoppered volumetric flask.  Allow the flask to stand,
            unstoppered, for about 10 min or until all alcohol-wetted
            surfaces have dried.  Weigh to the nearest 0.1 mg.

     7.3.2  If the analyte is a liquid at room temperature, use a 100-/iL
            syringe  and immediately  add two  or more drops of reference
            standard to the flask.   Be sure  that the reference  standard
            falls directly into the  alcohol  without contacting  the neck
            of the flask.  If the analyte  is a gas at room temperature,
            fill a 5-mL valved gas-tight syringe with the standard to the
            5.0-mL mark, lower the needle  to 5 mm above  the methanol
            meniscus,  and slowly  inject the  standard  into the neck area
            of the flask.  The gas will rapidly dissolve in the methanol.

     7.3.3  Reweigh,  dilute to volume, stopper, then mix by  inverting the
            flask several times.  Calculate  the concentration in
            micrograms per micro!iter from the  net gain  in weight.  When
            compound purity  is  certified  at  96% or greater,  the weight
            can be used without  correction to  calculate  the  concentration
            of the stock  standard.

     7.3.4  Store  stock standard solutions in  15-mL  bottles  equipped with
            PTFE-lined screw caps.   Methanol solutions  prepared from
            liquid analytes  are stable for at  least  four weeks  when
            stored at 4°C.   Methanol solutions prepared  from gaseous
            analytes are  not stable for  more than  one week  when stored  at
            <0°C;  at room temperature, they  must  be  discarded after one
            day.   Storage time  may be extended only  if the  analyte proves
            their validity by analyzing  quality control  samples.

 7.4  PRIMARY  DILUTION STANDARD SOLUTION - Use stock standard solutions  to
      prepare  primary dilution standard solutions  that contain the
      analytes in  methanol.   The primary dilution  standards  should be
      prepared at  concentrations that can be  easily diluted  to prepare
      aqueous  calibration standard solutions  (Sect.  9.1)  that will bracket
      the working  concentration range.  Store the primary dilution

                                  41

-------
7.5
           standard  solutions with minimal  headspace  and check frequently  for
           signs of  deterioration or evaporation, especially just  before
           preparing calibration standard solutions from them.  Stbrage times
           described for stock standard solutions in  Sect. 7.3.4 also  apply to
           primary dilution standard solutions.

           INTERNAL  STANDARD SOLUTION - Prepare a fortified solution containing
           l-chloro-2-fluorobenze or fluorobenzene and 2-bromo-l-chloropropane
           in methanol using the procedures described in Sect. 7.3 and 7.4.  It
           is recommended that the primary dilution standard be prepared at a
           concentration of 5 /jg/mL of each internal standard compound.  The
           addition  of 10 #L of such a standard to 5.0 mL of sample or
           calibration standard would be equivalent to 10 /*g/L.

8.   SAMPLE COLLECTION. PRESERVATION. AND STORAGE

     8.1  SAMPLE COLLECTION, DECHLORINATION,  AND PRESERVATION

          8.1.1  Collect all samples in duplicate.   If samples contain
                 residual  chlorine,  and measurements of the concentrations of
                 disinfection by-products (trihalomethanes,  etc.)  at the time
                 of sample collection are desired,  add about 25 mg of ascorbic
                 acid (or 3 mg of sodium thiosulfate) to the sample bottle
                 before filling.   Fill  sample bottles to overflowing,  but take
                 care not  to flush out the rapidly  dissolving ascorbic acid
                 (or sodium thiosulfate).   No air bubbles  should pass  through
                 the sample as the bottle is  filled,  or be trapped in  the
                 sample when the  bottle is sealed.   Adjust the pH  of the
                 duplicate samples to <2  by carefully adding one drop  of 1:1
                 HC1 for each 20  mL  of sample volume.  Seal  the  sample
                 bottles,  PFTE-face  down,  and shake vigorously for 1 min.

          8.1.2  When  sampling from  a water tap,  open the  tap  and  allow  the
                 system to flush  until  the  water  temperature  has stabilized
                 (usually  about 10 min).  Adjust  the  flow  to  about 500 mL/min
                 and collect  duplicate  samples from the  flowing  stream.

          8.1.3 When  sampling from  an  open body  of water, fill  a  1-quart
                wide-mouth  bottle or  1-liter beaker  with  sample from  a
                representative area, and carefully fill duplicate sample
                bottles from the  1-quart container.
    8.1.4
                 The  samples must  be  chilled  to  4°C on the day of collection
                 and  maintained  at that temperature until analysis.   Field
                 samples that will  not be received at the laboratory  on the
                 day  of collection must be packaged for  shipment with
                 sufficient ice  to ensure that they will be at 4°C on arrival
                 at the laboratory.
                                42

-------
     8.2  SAMPLE STORAGE

          8.2.1  Store samples at 4°C  until  analysis.  The  sample  storage  area
                 must be free of organic solvent vapors.

          8.2.2  Analyze all  samples within 14 days of collection.  Samples
                 not analyzed within this period must be  discarded and
                 replaced.

     8.3  FIELD REAGENT BLANKS

          8.3.1  Duplicate  field reagent blanks must be handled along with
                 each sample set, which is composed of the samples collected
                 from the same general sample site at approximately the same
                 time.  At  the laboratory, fill field blank sample bottles
                 with reagent water, seal, and ship to the sampling site along
                 with empty sample bottles and back to the laboratory with
                 filled sample bottles.  Wherever a set of samples is shipped
                 and stored,  it is accompanied by appropriate blanks.

          8.3.2  Use the same procedures used for samples to add ascorbic acid
                 (or sodium thiosulfate) and HC1 to blanks (Sect.  8.1.1).

9.   CALIBRATION AND STANDARDIZATION

     9.1  PREPARATION OF CALIBRATION STANDARDS

          9.1.1  The number of calibration solutions (CALs) needed depends on
                 the calibration range desired.  A minimum of three CAL
                 solutions is required to calibrate a range of a factor of 20
                 in concentration.  For a factor of 50 use at least four
                 standards, and for a factor of 100 at least five standards.
                 One calibration standard should contain each analyte of
                 concern at a concentration 2 to 10 times greater than the
                 method detection limit (Table 2 and 4) for that compound.
                 The other CAL standards should contain each analyte of
                 concern at concentrations that define the range of the sample
                 analyte concentrations.  Every CAL solution contains the
                 internal standard at same concentration (10 /ig/L).

          9.1.2  To prepare a calibration standard, add an appropriate volume
                 of a primary dilution standard solution to an aliquot of
                 reagent water in a volumetric container or sample syringe.
                 Use a microsyringe and rapidly inject the alcoholic standard
                 into the water.  Remove the needle as quickly as possible
                 after injection.  Accurate calibration standards can be
                 prepared by  injecting 20 fil of the primary dilution standards
                 to 25 mL or more of  reagent water using the syringe described
                 in section 6.4.3.  Aqueous standards are not stable in
                 volumetric container and should be discarded after one hour


                                      43

-------
             unless  transferred  to  sample  bottle  and  sealed  immediately as
             described  in  Sect.  8.1.2.

9.2  CALIBRATION

     9.2.1   Starting with the standard of lowest concentration,  analyze
             each  calibration standard according  to Sect.  11  and  tabulate
             peak  height or  area response  versus  the  concentration  in the
             standard.  The  results can be used to prepare a  calibration
             curve for  each  compound.  Alternatively,  if the  ratio  of
             response to concentration (calibration factor)  is a  constant
             over  the working range (<10%  relative standard deviation),
             linearity  through the origin  can be  assumed and  the  average
             ratio or calibration factor can be used  in place of  a
             calibration curve.

     9.2.2   The working calibration curve or calibration factor  must be
             verified on each working day  by the measurement  of one or
             more  calibration standards.   If the  response for any analyte
             varies  from the predicted response by more than  ± 20%, the
             test  must  be  repeated using a fresh  calibration  standard.  If
             the results still do not agree, generate  a new calibration
             curve or use  a  single point calibration  standard as  described
             in Sect. 9.2.3.'

     9.2.3   Single  point  calibration is a viable alternative to  a
             calibration curve.  Prepare single point  standards from the
             primary dilution standards in methanol.   The single  point
             standards  should be prepared  at a concentration  that produces
             a response close (± 20%) to that of the  unknowns.

     9.2.4   As a  second alternative to a  calibration  curve,  internal
             standard calibration techniques may be used.  The
             organohalides recommended for this purpose are:  l-chloro-2-
             fluorobenze or 2-bromo-l-chloropropane and fluorobenzene.
             The internal  standard is added to the sample just before
             purging.  Check the validity  of the internal standard
             calibration factors daily by  analyzing a  calibration
             standard.  Since the calculated concentrations can be
             strongly biased by  inaccurate detector response measurements
             for the internal standard or  by coelution of an  unknown, it
             is required that the area measurement of  the internal
             standard of each sample be within ± 3 standard deviations of
             those obtained from calibration standards.  If they do not,
             then  internal  standards can not be used.

9.3  CALIBRATION  FOR VINYL CHLORIDE USING A CERTIFIED GASEOUS MIXTURE
     (OPTIONAL)

     9.3.1   Fill the purging device with 5.0 mL of reagent water or
             aqueous calibration standard,  and add internal standards.
                                 44

-------
          9.3.2   Start  to  purge  the  aqueous mixture  (Sect.  7.2.6).  Inject  a
                 known  volume  (between  100 and  2000  /zL)  of  the  calibration gas
                 (at  room  temperature)  directly into the purging  device with  a
                 gas  tight syringe.   Slowly inject the gaseous  sample  through
                 the  aqueous sample  inlet needle.  After completion, inject 2
                 ml of  clean room air to sweep  the gases from the inlet needle
                 into the  purging device. Inject the gaseous  standard  before
                 five min  of the 11-min purge time have  elapsed.

          9.3.3   Determine the aqueous  equivalent concentration of vinyl
                 chloride  standard injected in  /tg/L, according  to the
                 equation:

                         S = 0.51 (C) (V)              Equation  1

                 where:  S = Aqueous equivalent concentration of vinyl
                            chloride standard  in Mg/L;
                         C = Concentration  of gaseous standard  in ppm  (v/v);
                         V = Volume of standard injected in millilHer

10.  QUALITY CONTROL

     10.1 Quality control  (QC) requirements  are the  initial demonstration of
          laboratory capability followed  by regular  analyses of laboratory
          reagent blanks,  field reagent blanks, and  laboratory fortified
          blanks.  The laboratory must maintain records  to document the
          quality of the data  generated.  Additional  quality control practices
          are recommended.

     10.2 Initial demonstration of low system background.  Before any samples
          are analyzed, it must be demonstrated that a laboratory reagent
          blank  (LRB)  is reasonably free of contamination that would prevent
          the determination of any analyte of concern.  Sources of background
          contamination are glassware, purge gas, sorbents, and equipment.
          Background contamination must be reduced to an acceptable level
          before proceeding with the next section.   In general  background from
          method analytes should be below the method detection limit.

     10.3 Initial demonstration of laboratory accuracy and precision.   Analyze
          four to seven replicates of  a laboratory  fortified blank containing
          each analyte of concern at a concentration in the range of 0.1-5
          /jg/L (see  regulations and maximum contaminant levels for guidance  on
          appropriate  concentrations).

          10.3.1 Prepare  each replicate by adding an appropriate  aliquot  of  a
                 quality  control  sample to reagent  water.  If  a quality
                 control  sample containing the method analytes is not
                 available, a primary  dilution  standard made from a source of
                 reagents different  than those  used to prepare the calibration
                 standards may  be used.  Also  add the appropriate amounts of
                 internal standard  and surrogates if they  are  being used.
                 Analyze  each replicate according to the procedures described

                                       45

-------
             in Section 11, and on a schedule that results in the analyses
             of all replicates over a period of several days.

      10.3.2 Calculate the measured concentration of each analyte in each
             replicate, the mean concentration of each analyte in all
             replicates, and mean accuracy (as mean percentage of true
             value) for each analyte, and the precision (as relative
             standard deviation, RSD) of the measurements for each
             analyte. Calculate the MDL of each analyte using the
             procedures described in (4).

      10.3.3 For each analyte and surrogate,  the mean accuracy,  expressed
             as a percentage of the true value,  should be 80-120% and the
             RSD should be <20%.  Some analytes, particularly the early
             eluting gases and late eluting higher molecular weight
             compounds, are measured with less accuracy and precision than
             other analytes.   The method detection limits must be
             sufficient to detect analytes at the regulatory levels.   If
             these criteria are not met  for an analyte;  take remedial
             action and repeat the measurements  for that analyte  to
             demonstrate acceptable performance  before samples are
             analyzed.

      10.3.4 Develop and maintain  a system of control  charts  to plot  the
             precision  and  accuracy of analyte and surrogate  measurements
             as a  function  of  time.   Charting of surrogate recoveries  is
             an especially  valuable activity  since these  are  present  in
             every sample  and  the  analytical  results will  form a
             significant record  of data  quality.

10.4  Laboratory reagent blanks.   With each batch  of samples  processed as
      a group within a  work shift,  analyze  a  laboratory reagent blank to
      determine the  background system contamination.

10.5  With each batch of samples processed  as  a group within  a work shift
      analyze a single  laboratory  fortified blank  (LFB) containing each   '
      analyte of concern at a concentration as determined  in  10 3   If
     more than 20 samples  are included  in a  batch, analyze one LFB for
      every 20  samples.  Use the procedures described in 10.3.3 to
     evaluate the accuracy of the measurements, and to estimate whether
     the method detection limits can be obtained.  If acceptable accuracy
     and method detection limits cannot be achieved, the problem must be
     located and corrected before further samples are analyzed.  Add
     these results to the on-going control charts to document data
     quality.

10.6 With each set of field samples a field reagent blank (FRB)  should be
     analyzed.   The results of these analyses will help define
     contamination resulting from field  sampling and transportation
     activities.   An acceptable FRB may  replace the LRB.
                                 46

-------
     10.7  At  least  quarterly,  replicates  of  laboratory  fortified  blanks  should
          be  analyzed  to  determine  the  precision of  the laboratory
          measurements.   Add  these  results to  the  on-going  control  charts  to
          document  data quality.

     10.8  At  least  quarterly,  analyze a quality control  sample  (QCS)  from  an
          external  source.   If measured analyte concentrations  are  not of
          acceptable accuracy, check the  entire analytical  procedure  to  locate
          and correct  the problem source.

     10.9  Sample matrix effects have not  been  observed  when this  method  is
          used with distilled water, reagent water,  drinking water, and  ground
          water. Therefore,  analysis of  a laboratory fortified sample matrix
          (LFM) is  not required.   It is recommended  that sample matrix effects
          be  evaluated at least quarterly using the  QCS described in  10.8.

    10.10  Numerous  other  quality control  measures  are incorporated  into   other
          parts of  this procedure,  and  serve to alert the analyst to
          potential problems.

11.  PROCEDURE

    11.1  INITIAL CONDITIONS

          11.1.1 Recommended chromatographic conditions are summarized  in
                 Sect. 6.3.  Other columns or  element specific  detectors may
                 be used  if the requirements of Sect. 10.3 are  met.

          11.1.2 Calibrate the system  daily  as described in Sect. 9.2.

          11.1.3 Adjust  the purge gas  (nitrogen or helium) flow rate  to
                 40 mL/min.  Attach the trap inlet to the purging device and
                 open  the syringe valve on  the purging  device.

    11.2  SAMPLE INTRODUCTION AND PURGING

          11.2.1 To generate accurate  data,  samples and calibration standards
                 must  be analyzed under identical  conditions.  Remove the
                 plungers from two 5-mL syringes  and attach a closed  syringe
                 valve to each.  Warm the sample  to room temperature, open the
                 sample  (or standard)  bottle,  and carefully pour the  sample
                 into one of the syringe barrels  to just short of overflowing.
                 Replace the syringe plunger,  invert the syringe, and compress
                 the sample.  Open the syringe valve and vent any residual air
                 while adjusting the sample volume to 5.0 mL.  Add 10 /iL of
                 the internal calibration standard to the sample through the
                 syringe valve. Close the valve.   Fill  the second syringe in
                 an identical manner from the same sample bottle.  Reserve
                 this second  syringe for a reanalysis if necessary.

          11.2.2 Attach  the sample  syringe valve to the syringe valve on the
                 purging device.  Be sure that the trap is cooler than 25°C,

                                      47

-------
                 then open the sample syringe valve and inject the sample into
                 the purging chamber.  Close both valves and initiate purging.
                 Purge the sample for 11.0 ± 0.1 min at ambient temperature.

    11.3  SAMPLE DESORPTION - After the 11-min purge, couple the trap to the
          chromatograph by switching the purge and trap system to the desorb
          mode, initiate the temperature program sequence of the gas
          chromatograph and start data acquisition.  Introduce the trapped
          materials to the GC column by rapidly heating the trap to 180°C
          while backflushing the trap with an appropriate inert gas flow for
          4.0 ± 0.1 min.  While the extracted sample is being introduced into
          the gas chromatograph, empty the purging device using the sample
          syringe and wash the chamber with two 5-mL flushes of reagent water.

    11.4  TRAP RECONDITIONING - After desorbing the sample for four min,
          recondition the trap by returning the purge and trap system to the
          purge mode.  Maintain the trap temperature at 180°C.   After
          approximately seven min, turn off the trap heater and open the
          syringe valve to stop the gas flow through the trap.   When the trap
          is cool,  the next sample can be analyzed.

12. CALCULATIONS

    12.1  Identify each analyte in the sample chromatogram by comparing the
          retention time of the suspect peak to retention times generated by
          the calibration standards,  the LFB and other fortified quality
          control  samples.   If the retention time of the suspect peak agrees
          within ± 3 standard deviations of the retention times of those
          generated by known standards (Table 1 and 3)  then the identification
          may be considered as positive.   If the suspect peak falls outside
          this range or coelutes with other compounds (Table 1  and 3),  then
          the sample should be reanalyzed.   When applicable,  determine  the
          relative  response of the alternate detector to the analyte.   The
          relative  response should agree to within  20% of the relative
          response  determined from standards.

    12.2  Xylenes  and other structural  isomers  can  be explicitly identified
          only if they have sufficiently different  GC retention times.
          Acceptable resolution is achieved if  the  height  of the valley
          between two isomer peaks is less  than 25% of the  sum  of the two peak
          heights.   Otherwise,  structural  isomers are identified as isomeric
          pairs.

    12.3  When both  detectors  respond to  an analyte,  quantitation  is  usually
          performed  on  the  detector which exhibits  the  greater  response.
          However,  in  cases where  greater specificity or precision  would
          result, the  analyst may  choose the  alternate  detector.

    12.4  Determine  the  concentration  of the  unknowns  by using  the  calibration
          curve  or by  comparing the peak height  or  area  of  the  unknowns to the
          peak height  or  area of the  standards  as follows:


                                      48

-------
          Concentration of unknown (fig/I)  = (Peak height sample/Peak height
          standard)  x Concentration of standard
    12.5  Calculations should utilize all  available digits of precision, but
          final  reported concentrations should be rounded to an appropriate
          number of significant figures(one digit of uncertainty).  Experience
          indicates that three significant figures may be used for
          concentrations above 99 /jg/L, two significant figures for
          concentrations between 1 to 99 jtg/L, and 1 significant figure for
          lower concentrations.

    12.6  Calculate the total trihalomethane concentrations by summing the
          four individual trihalomethane concentrations in M9/L.

13. ACCURACY AND PRECISION

    13.1  This method was tested in a single laboratory using reagent water
          fortified at 10 /jg/L (1).  Single laboratory precision and accuracy
          data for each detector are presented for the methpd analytes in
          Tables 2 and 4.

    13.2  Method detection limits for these analytes have been calculated from
          data collected by fortifying reagent water at 0.1 /wj/L.(l).  These
          data are presented in Tables 2 and 4.

14. REFERENCES

    1.  Ho, J.S., A Sequential Analysis for Volatile Organics in Water by
        Purge and Trap Capillary Column Gas Chromatograph with Photoionization
        and Electrolytic Conductivity Detectors in Series, Journal of
        Chromatographic Science 27(2) 91-98, February 1989.

    2.  Kingsley, B.A., Gin, C., Coulson, D.M., and Thomas, R.F., Gas
        Chromatographic Analysis of Purgeable Halocarbon and Aromatic
        Compounds in Drinking Water Using Two Detectors in Series, Water
        Chlorination, Environmental Impact and Health Effects, Volume 4, Ann
        Arbor Science.

    3.  Bellar, T.A., and J.J. Lichtenberg. The Determination of Halogenated
        Chemicals in Water by the Purge and Trap Method, Method 502.1, U.S.
        Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support
        Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, April, 1981.

    4.  Glaser, J.A., D.L. Foerst, G.D. McKee, S.A. Quave, and W.L. Budde,
        Trace Analyses for Wastewaters, Environ. Sci . Techno!., 15, 1426,
        1981.

    5.  Carcinogens - Working with Carcinogens, Department of Health,
        Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease
        Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health,
        Publication No.  77-206, August, 1977.


                                       49

-------
6.
7.
8.
9:
OSHA  Safety  and  Health  Standards,  (29  CFR 1910),  Occupational  Safety
and Health Administration,  OSHA  2206.

Safety  in Academic Chemistry  Laboratories, American  Chemical Society
Publication, Committee  on Chemical  Safety, 4th  Edition,  1985.

Bellar, T.A. and J.J. Lichtenberg,  The Determination  of  Synthetic
Organic Compounds in Water  by Purge and Sequential Trapping Capillary
Column Gas Chromatography,  U.S.  Environmental Protection Agency
Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory,  Cincinnati, Ohio,
45268.

Slater, R.W., Graves, R.L.  and McKee, G.D., "A Comparison of
Preservation Techniques for Volatile Organic Compounds in Chlorinated
Tap Waters," U.S. Environmental  Protection Agency, Environmental
Monitoring and Support Laboratory,  Cincinnati, Ohio  45268.
                                 50

-------
   TABLE 1.  RETENTION TIMES FOR VOLATILE ORGANIC  COMPOUNDS
             ON PHOTOIONIZATION DETECTOR (PID) AND ELECTROLYTIC
             CONDUCTIVITY DETECTOR  (ELCD) FOR COLUMN  1
Ana1vte(b)
   Retention Time (min)a
PID	  ELCD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

24

25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Di chl orodi f 1 uoromethane
Chloromethane
Vinyl Chloride
Bromomethan
Chloroethane
Tri chl orofl uoromethane
1,1-Di chl oroethene
Methyl ene Chloride
trans-l,2-Dichldroethene
1,1-Di chloroethane
2 , 2-Di chl oropropane
ci s- 1 , 2-Di chl oroethene
Chloroform
Bromochl oromethane
1,1, 1-Tri chl oroethane
1,1-Di chl oropropene
Carbon Tetrachloride
Benzene
1,2-Dichloroethane
Tri chl oroethene
1 , 2-Di chl oropropane
Bromodi chl oromethane
Dibromomethane
Ci s-1 , 3-Di chl oropropene
Toluene
Trans-1 , 3-Di chl oropropene
1,1, 2-Tr i chl oroethane
Tetrachl oroethene
1 , 3-Di chl oropropane
Di bromochl oromethane
1,2-Dibromoethane
Chlorobenzene
Ethyl benzene
1,1,1, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
m-Xyl ene
p-Xylene
o-Xylene
Styrene
I sopropyl benzene
Bromoform
1,1,2, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
1,2, 3-Tri chl oropropane
n-Propyl benzene
-(c)

9.88
-
-
_
6.14
-
19.30
-
-
23.11
-
-
-
25.21
-
26.10
-
27.99
-
-
-
31.38
31.95
33.01
-
33.88
-
-
-
36.56
36.72
-
36.98
36.98
38.39
38.57
39.58
-
-
-
40.87
8.47
9.47
9.93
11.95
12.37
13.49
16.18
18.39
19.33
20.99
22.88
23.14
23.64
24.16
24.77
25.24
25.47
-
26.27
28.02
28.66
29.43
29.59
31.41
• -
33.04
33.21
33.90
34.00
34.73
35.34
36.59
-
36.80
-
-
-
-
-
39.75
40.35
40.81
-
                               51

-------
                              TABLE 1 (CONTINUED)
         Ana1vte(b)
Internal Standards
     Fluorobenzene
     2-Bromo-l-chloropropaned
    Retention Time (min)a
 PIP	    ELCD
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
Bromobenzene
1,3, 5-Tri methyl benzene
2-Chlorotoluene
4-Chlorotoluene
tert-Butyl benzene
1,2, 4-Tr i methyl benzene
sec-Butyl benzene
p-Isopropyl to! uene
1 , 3-Di chl orobenzene
1 , 4-Di chl orobenzene
n-Butyl benzene
1 , 2-Di chl orobenzene
1 , 2-Di bromo-3-Chl oropropane
1,2, 4-Tri chl orobenzene
Hexachl orobutadi ene
Naphthalene
1,2, 3-Tri chl orobenzene
40.99
41.41
41.41
41.60
42.71
42.92
43.31
43.81
44.08
44.43
45.20
45.71
-
51.43
51.92
52.38
53.34
41.03
-
41.45
41.63

-
-
-
44.11
44.47
-
45.74
48.57
51.46
51.96
-
53.37
26.84
                    33.08
a. Column and analytical conditions are described in Sect. 6.3.
b. Number refers to peaks in Figure 502.2-1.
c. - Dash indicates detector does not respond.
d. Interferes with trans-l,3-dichloropropene and
     1,1,2-trichloroethane on the column. Use with care.
                                      52

-------
      •o s-
      •r- (U
             •o o
             0) 0)
             0:0
                        SSSvo-H       So^SSSSo coco CMS oSSSSSoooSo

                      1 ddd^-J '  '  ' dddddddwddoldddddddddddd
  ^OWCMOO

  csicooivocn
                                         ,

                                    '      co co co cO w CM co 3 co CM «> -H * CM «> in ro CM  a
             i- o a
      i Cn O Cn III
CM CM VO   •-«
OO O   O
                                                       • CM
                                                      o o
                                             ir> cvi i—i
                                             poo
«« ,   ,  ,  ,^r- -r-  •  •  -22  •  •  •   '5dd  •  •  '^-- •
CO .

       (O O
                      o o
                      CM
                                    o o o   o
              ^- r- po   o
            i  •  •  • i   •
              ««r CM CM   1-1
                                                      zo
                                               • CM in
                                              o o o
                                                                                  :oo
                                                i  i  i
                                                      a o
                                                           i  i  i  i
                                 *-« IO i—I
                                  •  •  •

                                 CM r-t CM
                                                                           I  I   I
              O) S- •
              en o>.
cr> en
en en  i  i
. 01
I O <
     CO   O
    i ty\ t  o
                                                      O i—i
                                                           I  II
 CM"* CO
i o o o i
                                                                                 CM
 oo co
i o  • en i
 i—i z:
                                                                                           I  I
                            a>
                            C .
                            
                       OO
      0)0      C N C U
    O) E S-    Q)CUCCU«S
    COO    C N 0) JO &-
    O) S- r-    W C -Q i— 4J
    IM o-c s jc a> r— >» a>


    SJE-" otui—••-> s
   ^O-O4-E>>3CQ C
    O O O O O 4-> CQ  I  O

    EEEEE3l-i->-Q
    OOOOOOQOt-S-
    J_ S- S- S- S-  I 0>  +^ O
                                             i—I i—I  O 4-» i—I •—I CM
                                           53

-------


13
•r—
O
=1
•O
O
°
^£
4->

r—
0
S-
*4^
O
Ci)
Cu


»••»
s
i
M C
fc" 0
•Z* *r"

Si «
•r~
* O
CM T-
LU 4J
eg j=
M3C Pun


























S-
4J
O
g>
4->
O>
O

















C5
•*->
CO
4>>
Q






















_l
o

• C
13 0
OO +*

r-I*>
CU CU
ceo

>,
cu s-
o> cu

s- o
cu o
> cu
*t OS


_l
3E


* e
•o o
•f<>3 •p*

"*
r— >
O CD
C£O

>l
O) O>
2 0
o u
> CD
*3C O£


















*^*
^,
••
•M
**_«


4^*1
^^




^+

•"••n.
c
^
SM>


1^"*
"*x
•M
§
^M





t**
•>~



_J
o
a
V*















cu
>
^~
c
«£
CM CM CM i— l 1-4 ^- CO CO CO • i— 1 CO
o o o ooo 000000*1-
o o o ooo ooozooo



co co en cooom t-4 t-i co *o vo in co
CO 00 CM CM (O CM CO CM CO in CO CO CM





co oo »^ en en i~- oo CM «*• en 10 vo en
oicni i en i i icncncnicnooocncncn
•—• i— 1 f— 4 t— 1




CM t—i 10 in i— i 10 •— 1 1— i in i— < « CM CM
o o Q o o ooo oooo o
O O O O O OOO OO3EO O





00
in •* in en «*• CMOCO oo oo oo CM r*~
co t— i en o CM «o CM r~4 i-i o r-H CM o




co T-I en co oo CM co «ef i-icntoi* o
oocncncnioooi loenooi 101 i
"—< i"-4 f— 1 t— < r— 1 f— « r- 1 «—t <— 1







CU CU
C C
(O 03
jc jc eo eo cu eu
+J 4-> C C CO CO CC
eoeu co co c c 03 03
CO CO OO N rsl 03 03 J= CX
C C CU CU S- S- C CJ=J= 4-> O
CO CU C"O O O CO CO CO •*->-»-> O) S-
O- •r-eUeUT- r— r— C J3 JD CO CO E CL
0 -OCCtS- CO JCJCCO O O O O CO O O
Q. 4->NOr— CO OS 03 4-> OOOOCUOO
0 CU =3 C 4-> J= N S-S-CU r—i—r— r-JC Sr—
OCUOJQ>> CCU CO CO &- O O O O CO <4- O
r—ISIS-r— Q. CO CO JD 1— 1— O .r-.r-.r-.i-OO"!-
JCCO>)Oer— i— | I r— S_ J_ i_ S- S- S- S-
O COr— O.S- CO 03 >>COCMCMJC CUh- I— 1— h- O OH-
r~ -O JC O Q-r— JC O. C *• " O C 1 1 I 1 r— r— 1
O r— O J- O >>•!-» O CUf-4CM 03 CUCO^i-HCMJCJCCO
I «^^ (9 CL VJ «CT ^C ^B ^M •* •* ^_ ^3 »*»»•»•* ^J ^J **
i-4 JC X 0 »-« 4-> C3.Q. >>i-l r-i4Jr-CMCMr-4r-4.r-.r- CM
-4-> CO V) 1 CO 03 I 4J ». ^ CO O » « ^ ^ S- i- »
r-4 LU Or •-< O.SI "Z. C*• en
m o •— j o




en en o en
o en o en
1—4 t— 4














•r-
S-
0
JC CO CO CO
u e c c
cu co eo
^_ ^^ ^^ ^^ ,
•r- 1 1 1
> 0 E Q.



cu
'S.'oS
5 *
V) CO
c c
CU-r-
eu >>
C/) ***>

E TD •
O CO O

^" "r— d*
gg
•o C s-
CO CO O
.r- eu
ET3 CU
eu cu cu
4-> S- N
Q) Ol C
•g
CU •* 0
% SH 3
eu r—
CO > Ll_
c o
O O "
•r_ cu CU
4-> ce s-
03 Q>
*> eu
eu 4-> v>
*X3 n5 03
S- C "O
03 03 C
"O 03
C JC 4->
03 U M
4"^ O3
CO COi—
03
0>«4_ C
> O S-
•r- CO
4-> — 1 +J
03^ — . e
r— C7>>— l
2* .
OT3
•O r-4 O
C JC
03 4-> 4->
03 CU
2-n E
d) A?
Z.^-2
CO M- 03
>-r- T3
O 4-> C
0 S- 03
CO 0 4J
o: u- co


03

































O
O
__1
LU

S-
o
(4-

CO
C
03
O.
O
s.
Q.
O
O
o

r— 4
O
1
CO
1
CM








































•
•o

o
0.
CO
CO
s-

4->
o
CO
cu
o

o
4J
u
CO
cu
o


JD
V






























Jfj
1
^







•
"O
cu
c
•r—
i_
cu
4->
cu
•o
4->
o
c
It
*
a
•


u
54

-------
TABLE 3.  RETENTION TIMES FOR VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS ON
           PHOTOIONIZATION DETECTOR (PID)  AND  ELECTROLYTIC
           CONDUCTIVITY DETECTOR(ELCD)  FOR COLUMN 2

                                Retention  Time (min)a
                                  and Rel.  Std.  Dev.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
. 31
32
33
• 34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Anal vteb
Di chl orodi f 1 uoromethane
Chloromethane
Vinyl Chloride
BromomethanE
Chloroethane
Tri chl orofl uoromethane
1,1-Dichloroethene
Methyl ene Chloride
trans-1 , 2-Di chl oroethene
1,1-01 chloroethane
2 , 2-Di chl oropropane
ci s-1 , 2-Di chl oroethene
Chloroform
Bromochl oromethane
1,1, 1-Tri chl oroethane
1 , 1-Di chl oropropene
Carbon Tetrachloride
1,2-Dichloroethane
Benzene
Tri chl oroethene
1 , 2-Di chl oropropane
Bromodi chl oromethane
Dibromomethane
Ci s-1 , 3-Di chl oropropene
Toluene
Trans-1 , 3-Di chl oropropene
1 , 1 , 2-Tri chl oroethane
1, 3-Di chl oropropane
Tetrachl oroethene
Di bromochl oromethane
1 , 2-Di bromoethane
Chlorobenzene
1,1,1, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
Ethyl benzene
m-Xylene
p-Xylene
o-Xylene
Styrene
I sopropyl benzene
Bromoform
1,1,2, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
1,2, 3-Tri chl oropropane
n-Propyl benzene
Bromobenzene
PID
-(c)

8.57
-
-
-
14.46
-
17.61
-
-
21.52
-
_
-
24.07
_
-
25.06
27.99
-
-
-
30.40
31.58
32.11
-
-
33.85
-
-
36.76

36.92
37.19
37.19
38.77
38.90
40.04
-
-
-
41.51
41.73
RSD


0.06



0.08

0.02


0.02



0.01


0.01
0.01



0.01
0.01
0.01


0.01


0.01

0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01


0.01
0.01
0.01
ELCD
7.36
8.09
8.58
10.39
10.74
11.85
14.47
16.46
17.62
19.25
21.36
21.52
22.08
22.69
23.53
24.08
24.47
24.95
_
27.15
27.73
28.57
28.79
30.41
-
32.13
32.69
33.57
33.86
34.58
35.29
36.87
36.87
-
-
-
-
.
-
40.19
40.64
41.18
-
41.75
RSD
0.06
0.06
0.08
0.06
0.05
0.07
0.07
0.04
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.01

0.01
0.01
0.02
0.01
0.02

0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01






0.01
0.01
0.01

0.01
                             55

-------
                              TABLE 3 (CONTINUED)
         Analvte1
PIP
Retention Time (min)£
  and Rel. Std. Dev.
   BSD	ELCD
45 1, 3, 5-Tri methyl benzene
46 2-Chlorotoluene
47 4-Chlorotoluene
48 tert-Butyl benzene
49 1, 2, 4-Trimethyl benzene
50 sec-Butyl benzene
51 p- I sopropyl toluene
52 1,3-Dichlorobenzene
53 1,4-Dichlorobenzene
54 n-Butyl benzene
55 1,2-Dichlorobenzene
56 l,2-Dibromo-3-Chloropropane
57 1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene
58 Hexachlorobutadiene
59 Naphthalene
60 1,2,3-Trichlorobenzene
Internal Standards
42.08
42.20
42.36
43.40
43.55
44.19
44.69
45.08
45.48
46.22
46.88

53.26
53.86
54.45
55.54

l-Chloro-2-Fluorobenzene 37.55
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
-
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01

0.01

42.21
42.36
_
_
_
_
45.09
45.48

46.89
49.84
53.26
53.87

55.54

37.56
•*+"*
0.01
0.01




0.01
0.01

0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01

0.01

0.01
a. Column and analytical conditions are described in Sect. 6.3.4.
b. Number refers to peaks in Figure 502.2-2.
c. - Dash indicates detector does not respond.
                                      56

-------
   CM
O —I
Ul O
0°.
 U

•o
 c  o
 o +->
O  . o •<*• r«» «* en co co * m m co CM   •
                                  .-H O--I O I-H          O O «-i O t-< O O CMO t-i .-I O O O CMO O O O O O O O
                                  oooo o
                                                   I   I   I
                                                           ozoooooooooooooooooooo;
•o  o
+J T-
CO •** :
    eo;

•-^  >
 (DO)
o: Q
                      CO S- —
                      O> CO
                                  CM in IO O «*•          •* CM CM CM CO CO CO CM O CO tn O CM CM CM CO CO CO CO lf> 00 CO CM
                                I	Ill   .......................
 S-  O D
 CD  O ~~
 >  0)^-
                       _>UVtOCOI^
                   •—en en en en en  i   i
                                                                 en Cn O) Cn O) Cn Cn en
                                                                                                          O) Cn Cn en CIS Cn CO
                                    (•             CO CO IO    CM          CO CM              CO CM PO          O CO CO
                             _,0 O             0000          00              000          i-«00
                         o  ol  *   •  i   i   i   i    •   •   •  i   >iii    >.iiii   >..iii   ...iii
                             S3 o o             ooo    o          oo              ooo          ooo
CO
>-i Z
O i-4
UI
01 V>
OL O
II
3 O
U
O O
•o o
4J-I-
c
o
•fM
•!->
to s-
N O
"c "o
O  CD
O
JC
a.
(X) -)->
« *~
* 'P** ^C
I— > —
a> a>
a: o

>>
o> a> — i

s- o c
a> o a



IO l-H
• « i
f— 1 r-H






r^ oo i
en en



««!• •— < i— '
III . . .
CM CM CM






1 1 1 IT) (O CO
en en en

                                                               f—I VO              ^f '
                                                       III    ••III!   •
                                                               CO i—I              r—t '
                                                                                           CM r*. oo
                                                                                   iii   •••ill
                                                                                           CM i-l i-H
                                                        co  i  co  i   i   i  «*> i»o i   i   i   i  i-» i-» IN.  r i   icncncni  i  i
                                                               ^>          en en             en en en
O _J
00 t-H

55
LU O
>-i O
CO U.
                                      a>
                                         a>
                       a>
                       c
                       a>
                       N
                       C
                                         +->
                                         a>
                                         £
                                         o
                                         s-
                                         o
                                   0)
                             > i
                             fa
                                c JD o
r—     to
JC  S JC
 O  C -4-5 .
i-  O CO i
  i <«- £
  i  O O
                                                   O)
                             Q)
                            •o
                            •r-
                         CO  S.
                      CO C  O
                      C CO i—
                      CO N J=
                      N C  (J
                      C CO  tO
                      O) JD  S-
                      JD r— 4->
                      r— >> 0>
                      >>4-> +•>
                     • •!-> 3
                     t 3 CO  C
                     'CO  I   O
CO
CO
                                   o o
                                   s- s-
                                   CO CO
                       i- i.
                      CO CO
                                          o>  Q> *o
                                           4J O
 CO
 C  CO
 CO  C
 N  10
 C JC
 CO -M
JD  CO '

 22
 o  o
r— r™- i
J= JC ,
<_) O
                                
                                                      C C
                                                      0> CO
                                                      3 3
                                                      i— r—
                                                      O O
                                                      +-> 4->
                                                      O O
                                                      S- i-
                                                      o o
                                   O O
                                    I   I
                                   CM ^-
                                                            O)

                                                            (O
                                                            Q.
                                                            O

                                                            Q.
                                                            O CO
                                                            S. C
                                                            o to  co
                                                            r—JC  C
                                                            JC 4J  rt>
                                                            U CO JC
                                                                                            0)
                                                                     CO
                                                                      I
    O  CD
    S-  O
    §0  E
   r—  O
 O JC  S.
 i.  O JD
JD  O-i-

O  O  I
 I  S- CM
CM JD   -
   0)

   O)
   N

CO CO
C JD
 O
CO r—

O U
E "r™
OO
S.  I
JD CM
                                                                                     0>  0) 4->
                                                                                     C  C  CO
                                                                                     CO  CO  E
                                                                                     N  N  O

                                                                                     Q)  CO
 O O

 O O

JC JC
 U U
'•r— "f™
O O
 I   I
CO ?*•
                0)

             CO CO
             C JC
             CO 4->
            JC CO
    o>  co  eo -t-> o
          C CO i-
          Ci> O O
         JC S-!—
         +J O JC
          Or— O
          O JC-r-
          i. O O
          O T-  I
         i— O CM
 o  to to
 S- JC JC
 O 4-> 4J
 3  0) CO
i—  O O
t4-  S- S-
-r-  O O
                                                                                           Q »—t T—« I—I
 O J= JC
 S-  O  O

|oo

 U r-H CM

O »—i i—«
                                                                                                     O CM i—I
                                                                                                            I
                                                                                                           to
                                                                                                      I   I  C
                                                                                                        CO nj
                                                                                                        •r- S_
 CO  CO  CO
 c  c  c
 O9  fO  A3
 O. O. O.
 ooo
 s-  s-  s-
 o. o. o.
 ooo
 S-  i-  S-
 o  o  o

JC JC JC
 U  U  U
             i—i co O O O

                   CM CO CM

                   •—I I-H CM
                                                              57

-------
                                             (O


















__
<^^H
F9
g
»-«
O
o
*M*


«*•
^JT
l&J
	 	 •
<••!
CO
g










































£>
•/•"
•r"
^^
o
s
•a
§
o
u
•r*
id

"o
S.
•*•*
U
V
r—
UJ






t=
0
*r~
4->
m
N
•r-
r*
O
•I—
o

o
JC
CX,







































J-
0
•«->
s
4->
ft\
0


















S-
o
4-i
U
•!->
O>
O









































_J
£


• c
•o o
frt
•V
r^*>
0) O)
cca

>,
0) S-
cna>
2 0
Q) CJ


a> a>
aid


>*
a> s-
cn Q)
2 0
0) O
< €
2!,






_j





2
"^
2







8





x~»
_j
o
S3
























0)
•|j>
^
^~
tO
c



CM CO
O O
O O




tO O
CM CM






i-» co





in to
o o
o o






F-l tO
CM •— 1






to co
en en











Q)
C
0)
CX
a> o
c s_
(U CX
CX O
o s-
s- o
CXr—
O JC
S- U
O-i-
r— Q
JC 1
O CO
•r— •*
Q r-t
I I
i—> V>
•»«r—
f—1 (_>


O in i-H >CMCM tOOOi— l^tO^-CM
•-i O O OOO O O O O O CO O
o o o zoo o o o o o o o




<• co f-< CM oo en co m to to CM o o
i-H CM CO CM CM •— 1 CM CM CM i-H •— 1 tO CM






§co o r>« co to to en co r^. o
i i i en c3 en i en CM en en en CM CD
Cn CM i-H > r~i . i— 4




tO^-CMCMCM CM COO •* CM in tO CO
OOOOO O O fH OOOO O
OOQOO 000 0,000 0






r-. CM «o ^- o r-i co en to co co o r—
I— 1 I— 1 CM i— 1 CM CM i— 1 i— 1 •— ll-HCSJCO i-H






otoOLor**io lor-^io r^oomx^ r^
O% O) O) O) O) 1 O) O> O> 1 1 O) O^ O> O) 1 I 0) 1 1









O) 0) Q>
c c c
O fltf <0
ex jc jc a> a> a>o>
o -»j>-4-> C c: a> O
s- a> c -o ooa> a)  +j a) s_
O -i— O) O) -i— r— r— C jQj3a> E CX
r— •OC3S- O) JCJCO) O O O O OJ O O
jc a oil— o c o o j= &_ &. s- s- c i- s-
O *4J* M O ^~ 0) ttS nS 4J> O O O O C) O O
•|-0>=JC4->JC N S-S-O) i— i— r— r— JC 3 i—
OCJQCUr— OOJC 4->4->O JC JC JC JC +J i— JC
i a> o jo >i ca> a>a>s- o o o o »OCr— r- I 1 r— S-S.S.&.S.L.S.
•— I 0>r— CXI. (1) CO >>0)CMCMJC O) 1— H- J— h— O O 1—
1 JO JC O CXr— JCCXC «-»UC:i 1 1 1 i— i— 1
VI i— U t- O >>••-> O OJf-HCM rt OCO'S-rHCMJCjCCO
c>>(acxbojcjcs.s- - »&.=> - - « »uo »
« JC X O •— i •»-» CXCi. >>i-H i— i+Jr— CMCMt-H»— l-r-'r-CM
v- 4-> a> «/> i a> « i .+-> >«a)o «««.>t-s- »
1— UJ Z >-H CX3E Z CC^i-H^Hh- t— ^Hf-Hi-Hf-iJ— r-r-i
















1





CM
o
o






o
CM






s












0)
c
Oi
N
c
0)
JO
^~
^.
^
*i
O)
E

1—
1
•a-

CM

I-H


w— »
1*111
_* III




1. 1 1 1
• 1 1 1
CM






i en i i i





CO i-l CM CM CM
OOOOO
OOOOO






ID I-H I-H r-HJ CM
i-H I-H rH I-H O






co m co co oo
en en en en en












0)
c
0)
N
C
a>

r"~
>^ Q)
jC *O
4J -i-
Q) t-
E O

>— 0 C C C
i a» a> a>
U> p— r— i— r—
•« 2>- ^k ^^ ^^
co e x >< x
*••- i i i
fH» 0 E CX
•o
a>
•r—
-U
,0

0)

§"
(/*
V?
c

a>
V)

^
2
<4-

•o
a>
c:
0)

•o
o
s_
0)


CO
C
•r-
t$
•fW
^


•^*
>^>
(O

"a!
s-

•o
c


CO
O)
•rw
s-
Q^
>
o
U

QM



•
(0











•
•§
.f

O
E
•o
s-

.j^J
0)
•o

G)
(U
X

CX)
a>
•r-
S.

O
U
O)
Q£

*
Oi

>,

tit
C
(O

JC
U

0)
















































•
•o
c
o
CX ••
co -a
01 0)
s- c

,^j c:
o s.:
C O)

M at
a> -a
0
•O •!->
o
s- c
o
+-> II
U
O) •
-M O
0) •
a z



» V
.0 U
58

-------
   OPTIONAL
   FOAM
   HAP
KM.
0. 0. EXIT
 BIT X IN.
    0.0.

  14MM 0. 0.

Mint IN.
    0.0.
         ; INLET

 -•-LlAY SYRINGE VALVE
^-17CM. M GAUGE SYRINGE NEEDLE
      I. 0. 0. RUBBER S9TU1

                    1/11 IN. 0.0.
                    STAINLESS STEEL
  10UM GLASS FUT
  MEDIUM POROSITY
                                     131 MOLECULAR
                                     SIEVE PURGE
                                     GAS FILTER
                                        PURGE GAS
                                        FLOW
                                        CONTROL
            FIGURE 1.  PURGING DEVICE
                    59

-------
PAOQNG PHOCSXItt
           CONSTRUCTION
    7A/POOT
   RESISTANCE
 WIRE WRAPPED

0.
                     STAINLESS STEEL
FIGURE 2.  TRAP PACKINGS AND CONSTRUCTION TO INCLUDE
          OESORB CAPABILITY
                 60

-------
Pi
g
o
I
H


1

-------
8-
   8-
8-
                                        -   »>*
                                                   I
                                                   o
                                                   I

                                                   1
                                                   6

                                                   I
                                                   O

-------
METHOD 503.1.  VOLATILE AROMATIC AND UNSATURATED ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN WATER
               BY PURGE AND TRAP GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY
                                Revision 2.0
              T. A. Bellar - Method 503.1, Revision 1.0  (1986)

              T. A. Bellar - Method 503.1, Revision 2.0  (1989)
                 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
                      OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
                     U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
                            CINCINNATI,  OHIO  45268
                                      63

-------
                                 METHOD 503.1

         VOLATILE AROMATIC AND  UNSATURATED  ORGANIC  COMPOUNDS  IN  WATER
                      BY PURGE AND  TRAP  GAS  CHROMATOGRAPHY
1.   SCOPE AND APPLICATION
     1.1
    1.2
 This method is applicable for the determination of various volatile
 aromatic and unsaturated compounds in finished drinking water,  raw
 source water,  or drinking water in any treatment stage (1,2).   The
 following compounds can be determined by this method:
          Analvte

          Benzene
          Bromobenzene
          n-Butylbenzene
          sec-Butyl benzene
          tert-Butylbenzene
          Chlorobenzene
          2-Chlorotoluene
          4-Chlorotoluene
          1,2-Di chlorobenzene
          1,3-Di chlorobenzene
          1,4-Di chlorobenzene
          Ethyl benzene
          Hexachlorobutadi ene
          Isopropylbenzene
          4-Isopropyltoluene
          Naphthalene
          n-Propylbenzene
          Styrene
          Tetrachloroethene
          Toluene
          1,2,3-Tr i chlorobenzene
          1,2,4-Tri chlorobenzene
          Trichloroethene
          1,2,4-Tri methyl benzene
          1,3,5-Trimethylbenzene
          o-Xylene
         m-Xylene
          p-Xylene
                                      Chemical  Abstract Service
                                          Registry Number
                                                        i-
                                                1-43-2
                                              108-86-1
                                              104-51-8
                                              135-98-8
                                               98-06-6
                                              108-90-7
                                               95-49-8
                                              106-43-4
                                               95-50-1
                                              541-73-1
                                              106-46-7
                                              100-41-4
                                               87-68-3
                                               98-82-8
                                               99-87-6
                                               91-20-3
                                              103-65-1
                                              100-42-5
                                              127-18-4
                                              108-88-3
                                               87-61-6
                                             120-82-1
                                               79-01-6
                                               95-63-6
                                             108-67-8
                                               95-47-6
                                             108-38-3
                                             106-42-3
Single laboratory accuracy and precision data show that this
procedure is useful for the detection and measurement of
multi-component mixtures in finished water and raw source water at
concentrations between 0.05 and 0.5 #g/L.  Individual aromatic
compounds can be measured at concentrations up to 1500 #g/L.
Determination of complex mixtures containing partially resolved
                                     64

-------
          compounds may be hampered by concentration differences larger than a
          factor of 10.

     1.3  This method is recommended for use only by analysts experienced in
          the measurement of purgeable organics at the low /xg/L level  or by
          experienced technicians under the close supervision of a qualified
          analyst.

2.   SUMMARY OF METHOD

     2.1  Highly volatile organic compounds with low water solubility are
          extracted (purged) from a 5-mL sample by bubbling an inert gas
          through the aqueous sample.  Purged sample components are trapped in
          a tube containing a suitable sorbent material.  When purging is
          complete, the sorbent tube is heated and backflushed with an inert
          gas to desorb trapped sample components onto a gas chromatography
          (GC) column.  The gas chromatograph is temperature programmed to
          separate the method analytes which are then detected with a
          photoionization detector.

     2.2  A second chromatographic column is described that can be used to
          help confirm GC identifications or resolve coeluting compounds.
          Analyses may be performed by gas chromatography/mass spectrometry
          (GC/MS) according to Method 524.1 or Method 524.2.

3.   DEFINITIONS

     3.1  Internal standard — A pure analyte(s) added to a solution in known
          amount(s) and used to measure the relative responses of other method
          analytes that are components of the same solution.  The internal
          standard must be an analyte that is not a sample component.

     3.2  Laboratory duplicates  (LD1 and LD2) -- Two sample aliquots taken  in
          the analytical  laboratory and analyzed separately with identical
          procedures.  Analyses of LD1 and LD2 give a measure of the precision
          associated with laboratory procedures, but not with sample
          collection,  preservation, or storage procedures.

     3.3  Field duplicates  (FD1  and FD2) -- Two  separate samples collected  at
          the same time and place under identical circumstances and treated
          exactly the  same throughout field and  laboratory procedures.
          Analyses of  FD1 and FD2 give a measure of the precision associated
          with  sample  collection, preservation and storage, as well as with
          laboratory procedures.

     3.4  Laboratory reagent blank  (LRB) — An aliquot  of reagent water that
          is  treated exactly as  a  sample including exposure to  all glassware,
          equipment,  solvents, reagents and internal  standards  that are used
          with  other  samples.  The  LRB  is  used to determine  if method  analytes
          or  other  interferences are  present  in  the laboratory  environment,
          the reagents, or  the apparatus.


                                       65

-------
 3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
      Field reagent blank (FRB) -- Reagent water placed in a sample
      container in the laboratory and treated as a sample in all  respects,
      including exposure to sampling site conditions,  storage,
      preservationand all analytical procedures.  The  purpose of the FRB
      is to determine if method analytes or other interferences are
      present in the field environment.

      Laboratory performance check solution (LPC) — A solution of one  or
      more compounds used to evaluate the performance  of the instrument
      system with respect to a defined set of method criteria.

      Laboratory fortified blank (LFB) — An aliquot of reagent water to
      which known quantities of the method analytes  are added in  the
      laboratory.   The LFB is analyzed exactly like  a  sample,  and its
      purpose is to determine whether the methodology  is in  control,  and
      whether the laboratory is capable  of making accurate and  precise
      measurements at the required method detection  limit.

      Laboratory fortified sample matrix (LFM)  -- An aliquot of an -
      environmental  sample to which known quantities of the  method
      analytes are added  in  the laboratory.   The LFM is analyzed  exactly
      like a sample,  and  its purpose is  to determine whether the  sample
      matrix contributes  bias to the analytical  results.   The background
      concentrations  of the  .analytes in  the sample matrix  must  be
      determined in  a separate aliquot and the  measured values  in the LFM
      corrected  for  background concentrations.

      Stock standard  solution --. A concentrated  solution containing  a
      single certified  standard  that is  a method  analyte,  or a
      concentrated solution  of a single  analyte  prepared in  the laboratory
      with  an  assayed reference  compound.   Stock  standard  solutions  are
      used  to  prepare primary dilution standards.

3.10  Primary  dilution  standard  solution  — A solution  of  several analytes
      prepared in  the laboratory from  stock standard solutions and diluted
      as needed  to prepare calibration solutions  and other needed analyte
      solutions.

3.11  Calibration  standard (CAL)  — A  solution prepared from the  primary
      dilution standard solution  and stock standard solutions of  the
      internal standards and  surrogate analytes.  The CAL solutions are
      used to calibrate the  instrument response with respect to analyte
      concentration.

3.12  Quality control sample  (QCS) — A sample matrix containing method
      analytes or a solution of method analytes in a water miscible
     solvent which is used to fortify reagent water or environmental
     samples.  The QCS is generated from a source of reagents different
     than those used to prepare the primary dilution standards and the
     calibration standard and is used to check laboratory performance.
3.9
                                 66

-------
4.   INTERFERENCES

     4.1  During analysis, major contaminant sources are volatile materials in
          the laboratory and impurities in the inert purging gas and in the
          sorbent trap.  The use of non-polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) plastic
          tubing, non-PTFE thread sealants, or flow controllers with rubber
          components in the purging device should be avoided since such
          materials out-gas organic compounds which will be concentrated in
          the trap during the purge operation.  Analyses of laboratory reagent
          blanks (Sect. 10.4) provide information about the presence of
          contaminants.  When potential interfering peaks are noted in
          laboratory reagent blanks, the analyst should change the purge gas
          source and regenerate the molecular sieve purge gas filter.
          Subtracting  blank values from sample results is not permitted.

     4.2  Interfering  contamination may occur when a sample containing low
          concentrations of volatile organic compounds is analyzed immediately
          after  a sample containing relatively high concentrations of volatile
          organic compounds.  A preventive technique is between-sample rinsing
          of the purging apparatus and sample syringes with two portions of
          reagent water.  After analysis of a sample containing high
          concentrations of volatile organic compounds, one or more laboratory
          reagent blanks  should be analyzed to check for cross contamination.

     4.3  Water  will cause a broad negative baseline deflection  in the
          retention  area  of Benzene.  The  method provides for  a dry purge
          period to  prevent this  problem.

 5.   SAFETY

     5.1  The  toxicity or carcinogenicity  of  chemicals  used  in this method has
          not  been  precisely defined;  each chemical  should  be  treated as  a
          potential  health hazard,  and  exposure  to these chemicals  should  be
          minimized.  Each laboratory  is  responsible for maintaining  awareness
          of OSHA regulations  regarding  safe  handling  of chemicals  used  in
           this method.  Additional  references to laboratory safety  are
           available (3-5)  for  the information of the analyst.

      5.2  The following method analytes  have  been  tentatively  classified  as
           known or suspected human or  mammalian  carcinogens:   benzene,
           1,4-dichlorobenzene, hexachlorobutadiene,  tetrachloroethene, and
           trichloroethene.  Pure standard materials and stock  standard
           solutions of these compounds should be handled  in a  hood.   A
           NIOSH/MESA approved respirator should  be worn when the analyst
           handles high concentrations  of these toxic compounds.

 6.   APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT

      6.1  SAMPLE CONTAINERS - 40-mL to 120-mL screw cap vials  (Pierce #13075
           or equivalent) each equipped with a PTFE-faced silicone septum
            (Pierce #12722 or equivalent).  Prior to use, wash vials and septa

                                       67

-------
     with detergent  and  rinse with tap and distilled water.  Allow the
     vials  and  septa to  air dry  at room temperature, place  in a  105°C
     oven for one hour,  then remove and allow to cool in an area known to
     be free of organic  solvent  vapors.

6.2  PURGE  AND  TRAP  SYSTEM - The purge and trap system consists of three
     separate pieces of  equipment: purging device, trap, and desorber.
     Systems are commercially available from several sources that meet
     all of the following specifications.

     6.2.1  The all  glass purging device  (Figure 1) must be designed to
            accept 5-mL  samples  with a water column at least 5 cm deep.
            Gaseous  volumes above the sample must be kept to a minimum
            (<15 ml) to  eliminate dead volume effects.  A glass frit
            should be installed  at the base of the sample chamber so the
            purge gas passes through the water column as finely divided
            bubbles  with a diameter of <3 mm at the origin.  Needle
            spargers may be used, however, the purge gas must be
            introduced at a point $5 mm from the base of the water
            column.                                          ,

     6.2.2  The trap (Figure 2)  must be at least 25'cm long and have an
            inside diameter of at least 0.105 in.  It is recommended that
            1.0 cm of methyl silicone coated packing be added at the
            inlet end to prolong the life of the trap.  Add a sufficient
            amount of 2,6-diphenylene oxide polymer to fill the trap.
            Before initial use,  the trap should be conditioned overnight
            at  180°C by backflushing with an inert gas flow of at least
            20 mL/min.  Vent the trap effluent to the room, not to the
            analytical column.   Prior to daily use, the trap should be
            conditioned for 10 minutes at 180°C with backflushing.   The
            trap may be vented to the analytical column during daily
            conditioning; however, the column must be run through the
            temperature program  prior to analysis of samples.

     6.2.3  The desorber (Figure 2) must be capable;6f'ra>i'dTy heating
            the trap to 180°C.  the trap should not be heated higher than
            200°C or the life expectancy of the trap will decrease.   Trap
            failure  is characterized by a pressure drop in excess of 3
            pounds per square inch across the trap during purging.

6.3  GAS CHROMATQGRAPHY SYSTEM

     6.3.1  The GC must be capable of temperature programming and should
            be equipped with variable-constant differential flow
            controllers so that the column flow rate will remain constant
            throughout desorption and the temperature*program.

     6.3.2  Two gas chromatography columns are recommended.  Column  1
            (Sect.  6.3.3) is a highly efficient column that provides
            outstanding separations for a wide variety of organic
            compounds.   Column 1  should be used as the primary analytical

                                 68

-------
           column unless routinely occurring analytes are not adequately
          /resolved.   Column 2 (Sect.  6.3.4) is recommended for use as
           an alternate column.   Retention times for the listed analytes
           on the two columns are presented in Table 1.

    633  Column 1 - 1.5 to 2.5 m x 0.085 in ID #304 stainless steel or
    ' '  •* •  glass, packed with 5% SP-1200 and 1.75% Bentone 34 on
           Supelcoport (80/100 mesh) or equivalent.  The flow rate of
           the helium carrier gas must be established at 30 mL/min.
           With this column, modification to the column ID and carrier
           qas flow rate will adversely, affect resolution.  The column
           temperature is held at 50°C for 2 min,then programmed at
. -     -    3°C/min to 110°C and held at 110°C until all compounds have
           eluted.  When not  in use, maintain the column at  110 C.
           Condition new SP-1200/Bentone columns with carrier gas flow
           at 120°C for several days before connecting to  the detector.
           A sample chromatogram  obtained with Column 1  is presented  in
  .  . •      Figure 3.

    ,6.3.4  Column 2 -  1.5 to  2.5  m  long x 0.085  in  ID #304 stainless
           steel or glass,  packed with  5% l,2,3-tris(2-cyanoethoxy)
           propane on  Chromosorb  W  (60/80 mesh)  or  equivalent,.  The  flow
           rate  of the  helium carrier gas must  be  established  at  30
           mL/min.  The column  temperature  is programmed to  hold  at  40  C
           for 2 min,  increase  to 100°C at  2°C/min,  and  hold at 100  C
           until  all  expected compounds have  eluted.  A sample
           chromatogram obtained with Column  2 is  presented  in Figure 4.
           '                              i

     6  3 5 A high  temperature photoionization detector  equipped with a
            10.2  eV (nominal)  lamp is  required (HNU Systems,  Inc., Model
            PI-51-02  or equivalent).  Departures from the required flow
            rate  of 30 mL/min will adversely effect method detection
            limits or precision.

6.4  SYRINGE AND SYRINGE VALVES                     ,

     6.4.1  Two 5-mL glass hypodermic syringes with Luer-Lok tip.

     6,4.2, Three 2-way syringe valves .with Luer ends.

     6 43  One 25-/JL micro syringe with a 2  in x 0.006 in ID, 22° bevel
            needle (Hamilton  #702N  or equivalent).

     6.4.4  Micro syringes -  10,  100 /iL.

6.5  MISCELLANEOUS.

     6.5.1   Standardsolution storage containers -  15-mL  bottles  with
             PTFE-lined  screw  caps.
                                  69

-------
7.   REAGENT AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

     7.1  TRAP PACKING MATERIALS

          7.1.1  2,6-Diphenylene oxide polymer, 60/80 mesh, chromatographic
                 grade (Tenax GC or equivalent).

          7.1.2  Methyl silicone packing - OV-1 (3%) on Chromosorb-W, 60/80
                 mesh or equivalent.

     7.2  COLUMN PACKING MATERIALS

          7.2.1  5% SP-1200/1.75% Bentone 34 on 100/120 mesh Supelcoport or
                 equivalent.

          7.2.2  5% l,2,3-tris(2-cyanoethoxy)  propane on 60/80 mesh Chromosorb
                 W or equivalent.

     7.3  REAGENTS

          7.3.1  Methanol  - demonstrated to be free  of analytes.

          7.3.2  Reagent  water demonstrated to be  free of analytes  - Prepare
                 reagent  water by  passing tap  water  through a filter bed
                 containing about  0.5  kg of activated carbon,  by  using  a water
                 purification  system,  or by boiling  distilled water for 15  min
                 followed  by a 1-h purge with  inert  gas while the water
                 temperature is held at  90°C.   Store in clean,  narrow-mouth
                 bottles with  PTFE-lined septa and screw caps.

          7.3.3  Ascorbic  acid or  sodium thiosulfate - ACS  Reagent  grade,
                 granular.

          7.3.4  Hydrochloric  acid (1+1)  -  Carefully add  measured volume of
                 cone.  HC1 to equal volume of reagent water.

    7.4   STOCK STANDARD SOLUTIONS - These  solutions  may  be purchased as
          certified solutions  or prepared from pure  standard materials  using
          the following procedures:

          7.4.1   Place about 9.8 mL  of methanol  into  a  10-mL ground-glass
                 stoppered volumetric flask.  Allow the flask to  stand,
                 unstoppered,   for  about  10  min  or  until all alcohol-wetted
                 surfaces have dried.  Weigh to the nearest 0.1 mg.

          7.4.2   Using a 100-pL syringe, immediately  add two or more drops of
                 reference standard  to the  flask.  Be sure that the reference
                 standard falls directly into the alcohol without contacting
                the neck of the flask.

         7.4.3   Reweigh, dilute to volume, stopper,  then mix by  inverting the
                flask several  times.  Calculate the concentration in

                                     70

-------
                micrograms per micro!iter from the net gain in weight.  When
                compound purity is certified at 96% or greater, the weight
                can be used without correction to calculate the concentration
                of the stock standard.

         7.4.4  Store stock standard solutions at 4°C in 15-mL bottles
                equipped with PTFE-lined screw caps.  Methanol solutions are
                stable for at least four weeks when stored at 4°C.  Storage
                times may be extended only  if the analyst proves their
                validity by analyzing quality control samples.

     7..5  PRIMARY  DILUTION STANDARDS - Use standard stock solutions to prepare
         primary  dilution standard solutions that contain the analytes  in
         methanol.  The primary dilution standards should be prepared at
         concentrations that can  be easily  diluted to prepare aqueous
         calibration  solutions  (Sect. 9.1)  that will bracket the working
         concentration range.  Store the primary dilution standard solutions
         with  minimal headspace and check frequently for signs of
         deterioration or evaporation,  especially just  before preparing
         calibration  solutions  from them.   Storage times described for  stock
         standards  also  apply to  primary dilution standard  solutions.

     7.6  QUALITY  CONTROL  SAMPLE - Prepare or obtain  from a  certified  source  a
         methyl  alcohol  solution  at  a concentration  of  1.00 /xg/mL  for the
         regulated  volatile  organic  contaminants  and the unregulated
         contaminants of interest.   It  will be  necessary to prepare more  than
         one solution and to increase the concentration of  some  of the
         contaminants proportional  to the  instrument detection  limits if  all
         of the analytes in  Sect. 1.1  are  being measured by this method.   The
         concentrate should  be  prepared from a  source  of stock standards
         different  than  those  used for  Sect.  7.5.

8.   SAMPLE COLLECTION.  PRESERVATION.  AND STORAGE

     8.1   SAMPLE COLLECTION,  DECHLORINATION, AND PRESERVATION

          8.1.1  Collect all  samples in  duplicate.   If samples contain
                 residual  chlorine, and  measurements of the concentrations of
                 disinfection by-products (trihalomethanes,  etc.) at  the time
                 of sample collection are desired,  add about 25 mg of ascorbic
                 acid (or 3 mg sodium thiosulfate)  to the sample bottle before
                 filling.  Fill  sample bottles to overflowing, but take care
                 not to flush out the rapidly dissolving ascorbic acid  (or
                 sodium thiosulfate).  No air bubbles should pass through the
                 sample as the bottle is filled, or be trapped in the sample
                 when the bottle  is sealed.   Adjust the pH of the duplicate
                 samples to <2 by carefully adding one drop of 1:1 HC1  for
                 each 20 mL of sample volume.  Seal  the sample bottles,
                  PFTE-face down,  and shake  vigorously for 1 min.

          8.1.2  When sampling from a water tap, open the tap and allow the
                  system to flush  until the  water temperature has stabilized

                                      71

-------
8.1.3
8.1.4
                  (usually about 10 min).  Adjust the flow to about 500 mL/min
                  and collect duplicate samples from the flowing stream.

                  When sampling from an open body of water, fill a 1-quart
                  wide-mouth bottle or 1-liter beaker with sample from a
                  representative area, and carefully fill duplicate sample
                  bottles from the 1-quart container.

                  The samples must be chilled to 4°C on  the day  of collection
                  and maintained at that temperature until  analysis.   Field
                  samples that will not be received at the laboratory on the
                  day of collection must be packaged for shipment with
                  sufficient ice to ensure that they will be at  4°C on arrival
                  at the laboratory.

      8.2   SAMPLE STORAGE

        .   8.2.1   Store  samples at  4°C  until  analysis.   The  sample storage  area
                  must be free of organic solvent  vapors.

           8.2.2   Analyze all  samples  within  14 days of  collection.   Samples
                  not analyzed within  this period  must be discarded and
                  replaced.

      8.3   FIELD  REAGENT BLANKS

           8.3.1   Duplicate  field reagent  blanks must be handled  along with
                  each sample  set,  which  is composed of  the  samples collected
                  from the same  general sample  site  at approximately the same
                  time.   At  the  laboratory, fill field blank sample bottles
                  with reagent water, seal, and ship to  the  sampling site along
                  with empty sample bottles and back to  the  laboratory with
                  filled  sample  bottles.   Wherever a set  of samples is  shipped
                  and stored,  it is accompanied by appropriate blanks.

          8.3.2   Use the same procedures  used for samples to add ascorbic acid
                  (or sodium thiosulfate)  and HC1 to blanks  (Sect. 8.1.1).

9.   CALIBRATION AND STANDARDIZATION

     9.1  PREPARATION OF CALIBRATION STANDARDS

          9.1.1  Calibration standards containing mixtures of analytes that
                 are at  least 80 percent resolved are prepared as needed.   The
                 number  of calibration solutions (CALs)  needed depends on the
                 resolution requirement and calibration  range desired.  A
                 minimum of three CAL solutions is required to calibrate a
                 range of a factor of 20 in concentration.   For  a factor of 50
                 use at  least four standards, and for a  factor of 100 at least
                 five standards.  The lowest level calibration standard should
                 contain analytes at a concentration two to ten  times the  MDL
                 (Table  2)  for that compound.  The other CAL standards should

                                      72

-------
            contain each analyte of concern  at concentrations  that define
            the range of the sample analyte  concentrations.

     9.1.2  To prepare a calibration standard, add an appropriate volume
            of a primary dilution standard solution to an aliquot of
            reagent water in a volumetric container.  Use a microsyringe
            and rapidly inject the alcoholic standard into the water.
            Remove the needle as quickly as  possible after injection.
            Accurate calibration standards are prepared by adding 20 #L
            of the primary dilution standard to 25 ml or more  of reagent
            water using the syringe described in Sect. 6.4.3.   Aqueous
            standards are not stable and should be discarded after one
            hour unless preserved, sealed and stored as described in
            Sect. 8.2.

9.2  CALIBRATION

     9.2.1  Starting with the standard of lowest concentration, analyze
            each calibration standard according to Sect. 11 and tabulate
            peak height or area response versus the concentration in the
            standard.  The results can be used to prepare a calibration
            curve for each compound.  Alternatively, if the ratio of
            response to concentration (calibration factor) is a constant
            over the working range  (<10 % relative standard deviation),
            linearity through the origin can be assumed and the average
            ratio or calibration factor can be used in place of a
            calibration curve.

     9.2.2  The working calibration curve or calibration factor must be
            verified on each working day by the measurement of one or
            more calibration standards.  If the response for any  analyte
            varies  from the predicted response by more than ±20%, the
            test must be repeated  using a fresh calibration standard.   If
            the  results still do not agree, generate  a new calibration
            curve  for that  analyte  or use a single  point calibration
            standard  as described  in Sect. 9.2.3.

     9.2.3  Single  point calibration is a viable  alternative to a
            calibration curve.   Prepare single point  standards from the
            primary dilution standards  in methanol.   The single point
            standards should be prepared at a concentration that  produces
            a response  close  (<±20%) to that  of the unknowns.  Do not  use
            less than 20 /zL of  the primary dilution standard to produce a
            single point calibration standard in  reagent water.

     9.2.4  As a second alternative to  a calibration  curve, internal
            standard calibration techniques may be  used.
            a,a,a-Trifluorotoluene is recommended as  an  internal  standard
            for this method.  The  internal  standard is  added to  the
            sample just before  purging.  Check the  validity of the
            internal  standard calibration factors daily  by  analyzing  a
            calibration standard.   Since  the  calculated  concentrations

                                  73

-------
9.3
                  can be strongly biased by inaccurate detector response
                  measurements for the internal  standard or by coelution of an
                  unknown,  it is required that the area measurement of the
                  internal  standard for each sample be within  ±3 standard
                  deviations of those obtained from calibration standards.   If
                  they do not then internal  standards  can not  be used.

           INSTRUMENT PERFORMANCE - Check the performance of the entire
           analytical  system daily using data gathered from analyses  of field
           blanks,  standards,  duplicate samples,  and the quality control
           sample.

           9.3.1   All  of the peaks contained in  the standard chromatograms  must
                  be  sharp  and symmetrical.   Peak tailing significantly in
                  excess of that shown  in  the method chromatograms  (Figures  6
                  and  7)  must  be corrected.   If  only the compounds  eluting
                  before ethyl benzene give random responses  or  unusually  wide
                  peak widths,  are poorly  resolved,  or are missing, the problem
                  is usually traceable  to  the trap/desorber.   If negative peaks
                  appear early in  the chromatogram,  increase the  dry  purge  time
                  to 5  min.

           9.3.2   Check the  precision between  laboratory  replicates.  A
                  properly operating  system  should  perform with  a relative
                  standard deviation  of  less  than  10%.   Poor precision  is
                 generally  traceable to pneumatic  leaks, especially  around the
                 sample  purger  or to an improperly  adjusted lamp intensity
                 power.  Monitor the retention times  for each method analyte
                 using data generated from calibration standards.  If
                 individual retention times vary by more than 10% over an 8-h
                 period  or do not fall within 10% of  an established norm, the
                 source  of retention data variance must be corrected before
                 acceptable data can be generated.

10.  QUALITY CONTROL

     10.1 Quality control (QC) requirements are the initial demonstration of
          laboratory capability followed by regular analyses of laboratory
          reagent blanks, field reagent blanks,  and laboratory fortified
          blanks.  The laboratory must maintain records to document the
          quality of the data generated. Additional quality control practices
          are recommended.

     10.2 Initial demonstration of low system background.  Before any samples
          are analyzed, it must be demonstrated  that a laboratory reagent
          blank (LRB)  is reasonably free of contamination that would  prevent
          the determination of any analyte of concern.  Sources of background
          contamination are glassware,  purge gas, sorbants,  and equipment.
          Background  contamination must be reduced to  an acceptable level
          before  proceeding with the next  section.   In general  background from
          method  analytes should be below the method detection  limit.
                                74

-------
10.3 Initial  demonstration of laboratory accuracy and precision.  Analyze
     four to seven replicates of a laboratory fortified blank containing
     each analyte of concern at a concentration in the range of 0.1-5
     ug/L (see regulations and maximum contaminant levels for guidance on
     appropriate concentrations).

     10.3.1 Prepare each replicate by adding an appropriate aliquot of a
            quality control sample to reagent water.  If a quality
            control sample containing the method analytes is not
            available, a primary dilution standard made from a source of
            reagents different than those used to prepare the calibration
            standards may be used.  Also add the appropriate amounts of
            internal standard and surrogates if they are being used.
            Analyze each replicate according to the procedures described
            in Section 11, and on a schedule that results in the analyses
            of all replicates over a period of several days.

     10.3.2 Calculate the measured concentration of each analyte in each
            replicate, the mean concentration of each analyte in all
            replicates, and mean accuracy (as mean percentage of true
            value) for each analyte, and the precision (as relative
            standard deviation, RSD) of the measurements for each
            analyte. Calculate the MDL of each analyte using the
            procedures described in (8).

     10.3.3 For each analyte and surrogate, the mean accuracy, expressed
            as a percentage of the true value, should be 80-120% and the
            RSD should be <20%. Some analytes, particularly the early
            eluting gases and late elutjng higher molecular weight
            compounds, are measured with less accuracy and precision than
            other  analytes.  The method detection limits must be
            sufficient to detect analytes at the regulatory levels.  If
            these  criteria are not met for an analyte, take remedial
            action and repeat the measurements for that analyte to
            demonstrate acceptable performance before samples are
            analyzed.

     10.3.4 Develop and maintain a system of control charts to plot the
            precision  and  accuracy of analyte and surrogate measurements
            as a  function  of time.  Charting of  surrogate recoveries is
            an especially  valuable activity since these are present in
            every  sample  and the analytical results will form a
            significant record of data quality.

 10.4 Laboratory reagent blanks.  With each batch of  samples processed as
     a  group  within a  work shift, analyze a laboratory reagent  blank to
     determine the background  system contamination.

 10.5 With each batch  of samples  processed as a group within a work  shift,
     analyze  a single  laboratory fortified blank (LFB) containing each
     analyte  of concern at a concentration as determined in 10.3. If more
     than 20  samples  are  included in a batch,  analyze one LFB for every

                                  75

-------
          20 samples.  Use the procedures described in 10.3.3 to evaluate the
          accuracy of the measurements, and to estimate whether the method
          detection limits can be obtained.  If acceptable accuracy and method
          detection limits cannot be achieved, the problem must be located and
          corrected before further samples are analyzed.  Add these results to
          the on-going control charts to document data quality.

     10.6 With each set of field samples a field reagent blank (FRB) should be
          analyzed.  The results of these analyses will help define
          contamination resulting from field sampling and transportation
          activities.  An acceptable FRB may replace the LRB.

     10.7 At least quarterly, replicates of laboratory fortified blanks should
          be analyzed to determine the precision of the laboratory
          measurements.  Add these results to the on-going control charts to
          document data quality.

     10.8 At least quarterly, analyze a quality control sample (QCS) from an
          external source. If measured analyte concentrations are not of
          acceptable accuracy, check the entire analytical procedure to locate
          and correct the problem source.

     10.9 Sample matrix effects have not been observed when this method is
          used with distilled water, reagent water, drinking water, and ground
          water.  Therefore, analysis of a laboratory fortified sample matrix
          (LFM) is not required.  It is recommended that sample matrix effects
          be evaluated at least quarterly using the QCS described in 10.8.

    10,10 Numerous other quality control measures are incorporated into  other
          parts of this procedure, and serve to alert the analyst to
          potential  problems.

11. PROCEDURE

    11.1 INITIAL CONDITIONS

         11.1.1  Recommended chromatographic conditions are summarized in
                 Sect. 6.3.  Other packed or capillary (open tubular) columns
                 may be used if the requirements of Sect. 10.3 are met.

         11.1.2  Calibrate the system daily as described in Sect. 9.2.

         11.1.3  Adjust the purge gas (nitrogen or helium) flow rate to 40
                 mL/min.  Attach the trap inlet to the purging device and open
                 the syringe valve on the purging device.

    11.2 SAMPLE INTRODUCTION AND PURGING

         11.2.1  To generate accurate data, samples and aqueous standards must
                 be analyzed under identical  conditions.  Remove the plungers
                 from two 5-mL syringes and attach a closed syringe valve to
                 each.  Warm the sample to room temperature, open the sample

                                      76

-------
                (or standard) bottle, and carefully pour the sample into one
                of the syringe barrels to just short of overflowing.  Replace
                the syringe plunger, invert the syringe, and compress the
                sample.  Open the syringe valve and vent any residual air
                while adjusting the sample volume to 5.0 ml.  If applicable,
                add the internal calibration standard to the sample through
                the syringe valve.  Close the valve.  Fill the second syringe
                in an identical manner from the same sample bottle.  Reserve
                this second syringe for a reanalysis if necessary.

        11.2.2  Attach the sample syringe valve to the syringe valve on the
                purging device.  Open the sample syringe valve and  inject the
                sample into the purging chamber.  Close both valves and
                initiate purging.   Purge the sample for 11.0 ±0.1 min at
                ambient temperature.

    11.3 TRAP DRY AND SAMPLE DESORPTION - After the 11-min purge, completely
        dry the trap for at least 4 min by adjusting the purge and  trap
        system to  the dry purge position or by temporarily  replacing the
        purge device with a clean,  dry unit while maintaining purge gas flow.
        Empty the  purging device using the sample syringe and wash  the
        chamber with two 5-mL  flushes of reagent water.  After the  4-min dry
        purge, attach  the trap to the chromatograph, adjust the purge and
        trap system to the desorb mode and initiate the temperature program
        sequence of the gas  chromatograph.  Introduce the trapped materials
        to the GC  column by  rapidly heating the trap to 180°C while back-
        flushing the trap with an inert gas at 30 mL/min  for 4.0 ±  0.1 min.
        The transfer  is complete  after approximately four min.

    11,4 TRAP RECONDITIONING  -  After desorbing the sample  for four min,
        recondition the trap  by returning  the purge and trap system to the
        purge mode.  Wait  15  s,  then close the  syringe  valve on the purging
        device to  begin gas  flow through  the  trap.  Maintain the trap
        temperature at 180°C.   After approximately  seven  min, turn  off the
        trap heater and open the syringe  valve  to  stop  the  gas  flow through
        the trap.  When the  trap is cool  (< 30°C),  the  next sample  can be
        analyzed.

12.  CALCULATIONS

 .   12.1  Identify each  analyte in the sample  chromatogram  by comparing  the
        retention  time of the suspect peak to retention times generated  by
        the  calibration standards,  the LFB and  other  fortified  quality
         control  samples.   If the retention time of the  suspect  peak agrees
        within  ±3  standard deviations of those  generated  by knowns then  the
         identification may be considered as  positive.   If the  suspect  peak
         falls  outside this range or coelutes  with  other compounds (Table 1),
         then  the sample should be reanalyzed  according  to Sect.  2.2.

    12.2 Determine the concentration of the unknowns by using the calibration
         curve or by comparing the peak height or area of the unknowns  to the
         peak height or area of the standards  as follows:

         Cone,  of unknown (/jg/L) =  (Peak height sample/Peak height std.)  x
         Cone,  of standard. (
-------
     12.3 Results  should  be  reported with  an  appropriate number  of  significant
         figures.   Experience  indicates that three  significant  figures may  be
         used for concentrations  above 99 /jg/L, two significant figures  for
         concentrations  between 1-99 /*g/L, and 1 significant  figure  for  lower
         concentrations.

13. ACCURACY AND  PRECISION

    13.1 Single laboratory  (EMSL-Cincinnati) accuracy and precision  for  most
         of the analytes added to Ohio River water  and chlorinated drinking
         water are  presented in Table 2 (2).

    13.2 This method was tested by 20 laboratories  using drinking water
         fortified with various method analytes at  six concentrations between
         2.2 and 600 jttg/L.  Single operator  precision, overall  precision, and
         method accuracy were found to be directly  related to the
         concentration of the analyte.  Linear equations to describe these
         relationships are presented in Table 3 (9).

    13.3 Multilaboratory studies have been conducted by the Quality Assurance
         Research Division of EMSL-Cincinnati to evaluate the performance of
         various laboratories.   Accuracy and precision data applicable to this
         method for several  purgeable aromatics in  reagent water are presented
         in Table 4 (10).

14. REFERENCES

    1.   Bellar,  T.A. and J.J.Lichtenberg,  The Analysis of Aromatic Chemicals
        in  Water by the Purge and  Trap Method,  Method 503.1,  EPA 600/4-81-057,
        U.S.  Environmental  Protection Agency, Environmental  Monitoring and
        Support  Laboratory,  Cincinnati,  Ohio 45268,  April,  1981.

    2.   Bellar,  T.A. and J.J.  Lichtenberg, The  Determination  of Volatile
        Aromatic Compounds  in Drinking Water and  Raw Source  Water,  unpublished
        report,  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring
        and Support  Laboratory,  Cincinnati,  Ohio  1982.
    3.
    4.
    5.
   6.
Carcinogens - Working with Carcinogens, Department of Health,
Education, and Welfare,  Public Health Service, Center for Disease
Control, National  Institute for Occupational Safety and Health,
Publication No. 77-206,  August, 1977.

OSHA Safety and Health Standards.  (29 CFR 1910), Occupational Safety
and Health Administration, OSHA 2206.

Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories, American Chemical Society
Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 4rd Edition, 1985.

Slater, R.W., Graves, R.L. and McKee, G.D., "A Comparison of
Preservation Techniques  for Volatile Organic Compounds in Chlorinated
Tap Waters," U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental
Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio  45268.
                                     78

-------
 7.   T.  A.  Bellar and J. J. Lichtenberg,  The Determination of Synthetic
     Organic Compounds in Water by Purge and Sequential Trapping Capillary
     Column Gas Chromatography, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
     Environmental  Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio
     45268.

 8.   Glaser, J.A.,  D.L. Foerst, G.D. McKee, S.A. Quave, and W.L. Budde,
     Trace Analyses for Wastewaters, Environ. Sci. Technol., 15, 1426,
     1981.

 9.   EPA Method Validation Study 24, Method 602 (Purgeable Aromatics), U.S.
     Environmental  Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support
     Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268.

10.   Analytical Methods and Monitoring Issues Associated with Volatile
     Organics in Drinking Water, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
     Office of Drinking Water, Washington, D.C., June 1984.
                                   79

-------
                 TABLE 1.   RETENTION TIMES FOR METHOD ANALYTES
                                             Retention Time (min)
Analvte
Benzene
Trichloroethene
a,a,a-Trifluorotoluene(a)
Toluene
Tetrachl oroethene
Ethyl benzene
1-Chlorocyclohexene (b)
p-Xyl ene
Chlorobenzene
m-Xyl ene
o-Xyl ene
I sopropyl benzene
Styrene
1 , 4-Bromof 1 uorobenzene (b)
n-Propyl benzene
tert-Butyl benzene
2-Chlorotoluene
4-Chlorotoluene
Bromobenzene
sec-Butyl benzene
1,3, 5-Tr i methyl benzene
4-Isopropyl to! uene
1 , 2 , 4-Tri methyl benzene
1 , 4-Di chl orobenzene
1 ,3-Di chl orobenzene
n-Butyl benzene
Cyclopropyl benzene (b)
2,3-Benzofuran (b)
1,2-Di chl orobenzene
Hexachlorobutadiene
1,2, 4-Tri chl orobenzene
Naphthalene
1 , 2 , 3-Tri chl orobenzene
Col 1
3.32
3.85
4.93
5.40
6.71
10.10
10.6
10.8
11.5
11.5
12.3
12.8
13.9
14.2
14.7
16.3
16.4
16.5
16.7
17.1
17.4
18.2
18.2
19.2
20.2
20.2
20.2
22.0
23.8
27.5
32.1
42.4
43.9
Col 2
2.75
2.37
2.80
4.25
2.80
6.25
5.75
6.72
8.02
6.27
8.58
7.58
11.5
12.3
8.63
9.92
11.4

13.5
9.92
10.2
11.4
12.5
16.3
15.0
12.8

24.3
19.4
16.9
25.6
38.3
30.3
(a)  - Recommended internal standard (Sect. 8.1.6).
(b)  » Not a method analyte.
                                      80

-------





o
I— I
!•_•
lie
O Ul Z
1-4 _J 1— 1
«/» 1-1
*-n— v>
0 O
0.
•OCSC
>- o o
o u. o
2 oo o
=»l— 1-«

t^ 3C ^C
^C ^"* C3
^J Qg
>- o
oe z

^™ !•_! l^
«ff ^__. !__.
^2 ^_) ^c
o ui S

^C Ul I*"*
•— i C2 ^C
CO
Ul O Z
-JO =3
Z H- Q
I-IUJZ
(/) SC <

.
CM

Ul
mJ
CO
4^
H-

























c
o
•O -i- 4-> •—
O •»->•>- —I
J= 0 £-.
"cu+j'Ij §
_E CU v.

c
CO -O O
> J-T-
•r- «O +J^-
nt C" ••— • N»-.
•O ^_, ™t~~ ^**
"oj •*-> o>
o: oo Q





^k
Q> S.
D)0>

t. o a^
CO O —
> CO
^^ _^





(/
S- CU
CU r—
J3 4- O
E^k ^
o c
3 (O
Z CO

1 C
CO •—

U +* CU "--
Cf^ *^ ^
*%* *^ ^1
o s- cu 3
<_> 4J _l —




















^
>
n—
f^
c



CM (£>•«*• oo oo  i •— i CM ^-i in co •<*• oo ICMCO ir-*«3-mvoi--coincMOoin
 C7^ C71 C7I CT) P^ CO O) 00 Ot O^ OO CO CD OO t^« O% O) O> CO
t— I










coo»r>.f«~r».CT>CT> if~.oocj>cni^.C3i^. ivor>~ io»coobooo>coi~~oii~-ii~-«i>«




OOOOOOO OOOOOOO OO OOOOOOOOOOO
-j-in-t-^f*a-inin inminin^in^- m *&• m«3-mmmin«*-in«d-*d-«*-
OOOOOOO 1 O C3 O O C3 C3 O 1 OO 1 OOOOOOOOOC9O




"o"
<^"% *•*••* '
JD O) CU CU CO CO
— c c c c c
CO CO CU CU CU
CU CO CO CU CO NN-tNN
C CCCCO) C C i— C C
CU CO CUCUCU 0) C CU CO O) O CU CU
CUC X NINN -r- CO CU C JDJ3 +-> JD ^2
CCU COCUCUCCC -CCS CU CU OOCUOi — r—
CO CO N J=CCCUCUCU tO CU i— C J= S- S- C i- >> >>
CMCCOOa)COJ3-Q^ -UNO CU -»-> OOCUOJ=J=
CUCUCCUCi — 33OOOCUZ3C-1-J N CU i — i— JC 3 •*->•!->
CNCUJSCUUr— i— S-i-S-C-QCUF— CUC O JZX!-4->i — CO CO
CUC-Qi— NI>>OOOOOCUO-C>>>CCU S_ O O CU "4- E E
NCUr— >>CO4->-»->r — i— i — N S- r— QL CU JQ O *r- •.— O -i— -i— -i—
CXI >»•»-> CUOOO^=^=J=CO>>Oi— r— r— S-S-S-S-i-S-COCUCU
COCUi— -t->3^ii-i-S-U>CUJ=CU|— h-OI— t— 1— CCC
CJ3 >, =1 03 O O O O-i-"---J3J= O 0.^= CXCUCIIr— 1 1 ICUCOCU
CO 0 +-> CO 1 S_r— i— r— OQQi— OS-0-»->OCOe«CUCO-J-^=<3-J-mi— •— i—
IM E 3 i-»->oj=.c^: i i i >i>>•>>>
coca o s-i — tjt_><_>cMco'a-J= x o •— > Q.Q- >>4->i — CMCM-I- CSCMCOXXX
CU S- 1 CO CO ^= 1 1 1 ^^--t->CUooirO|4J.«S- •>•>•.) 1 1
coco c «/>.«->o— icM*d-i-n-n-iuj:E»-H*3-z coot— i— i-ii-Hi— e^-ii-n E o a.














•
5-
CU
+J
M

CU
0
s-
3
o


^
(O
s-

•o ?"
c
(O CM

^ o>
CU
ITS +->
& u
CU
D> 00
C»^ -M
^ ^
•^ "O
g* 5-
"Z -5
•o c
(O
CU +->
•o v>
_3 •
r— CU i—
c >, c
••-i— S-
(0 CU
•O C •!->
CU  J= CU
+J TD
M CU C
CU E CO
U E

'£ rt o
-4-> •»-> O
fO O CO
a=:z c£.
H H U

^•^^^^^^•^k
(O J3 U
v^ >•—••»»•
81

-------

u_
i.
§S
< 5
is
-z
2g

1-4 _
o J5
Q;
§~



>1
o5
a"
G£ y
t
II

^P |jj
^ —1
*J P
cs 5
5 o
c/> ^


CO
Ul
CO

=jz: o
u u
O CO O)






c
r— O
nS co
^ *p»
0) U
> 0)
Oe
>•
Q.


CO

(O O
C •!-
 O
i— CO

C Q>
«/>

















O)

^,
^«
(fl
c

in CM *a- I-H to I-H r-.
00 i-l ««»• CM CM Tt- r-l
0000000
o o o o o o o

o o o o o o o



r-« to oo co en oo to
r-l CO CM CO CO tO r-l
i— < O O O O O O

"*"
X X XX X X X
CM to co tn in o I-H
CM r-l r-< r-l r-4 CM CM
O O O O 0 0 0


tO CM CM CO O» 00 00
O i— 1 •* CO CO r- 1 r- 1
o o o o o o o
1 ++++++
X X X X X X X
r— 1 O O CO CT O O
r-H i— 1 I— 1 O O i— 1 t— 1
O O O 0 0 0 0








0) 0) 0)
c c c
0)0)0)
N N Nl
C C C
O) O) O)
o> .a .0 .a
C 0 O 0 0)
O» S- S- J- C
N O O O (U
C r— i— r— N
0) -C -C JC C
o) -o u o o o> a>
C O T- «r- «i— JD C
cu s- a o o r— a>
N O 1 1 1 >> =3
C I — CM CO ^- .C r—
a> jc « « »4-> o
CQ O r-i i— I i— 1 UJ h-





















I


{=
o
4-*
's- '
£=
0)
u
0
^^ o
— . a>
O-C
=».•<-»

S-
>> 0
$-<*-
Q)
> O)
O =3
Q) n3
s- >

C O)
(O 3
0) S-


H II

X 0
82

-------




11
n
ui p
|i
i|
|i
si
go
5
g^i
1-4
;!
is

^
UI
1




















0) i-*
cn a)
s. o &e
0) o x_
> O)

0) "O O
£&'£**
*J "O  .—
CO O) C C —I
o»s- a> o --
tO Z3 U M— C
S-  C 4J 53
Q) lO O f0 ^*
> 0)0 S-
(O
fl
o £
c

J3 S-
15
Z rt

1 C
CO *~
CO-r-i— —I
C (0 > C
O S- O) 53
O H->— 1 «—














(
H

r-
<
1
«

00 C^ ^^ 00 ^O 00 '^ CM
cn o o co cn cn o o
1— 1 I— 1 !-« 1— 1


O CO
tO 00 "* 00 CM i— I !•*» CO
oo <— i to o to CM to in
»~l t-( i— 1 ^ i-< CM

CM m
cn O r-» CM oo •-< co to
O> «* •— 1 CO CM •-«




cn ca oo t-i in r^. to oo



O CM
•— < o co •— i ^ to oo m
^^'^» oo co *""* ^^ co m
cn * ft •* CM i— i












in in
r-~ co



toco
r-400
CO r-l

en in
CM to
h-. i-i




in <
c
O)
Nl
C
0)
JO
0
S-
0
.c
0
-r-
0
1
CM
i— i

cn o
f-H


00 •-«
CM cn
CM CM

into
to «-i




in in



to r-.
00 CO
to •-•




0)
c
o>
Nl
c

'si
1—
1
^"
•»
CM
f-H
83

-------
OPTIONAL
FOAM
TRAP
                   -EXIT K IN.
                        0. D.

                  H-14MM 0. D.

                   INLET K IN.
                        0.0.
KIN.   _
0. D. EXIT
                    SAMPLE INLET
                    2-WAY SYRINGE VALVE
                    17CM. 20 GAUGE SYRINGE NEEDLE
                       . 0. D. RUBBER SEPTUM
                      ~10MM. 0. D.
                         INLET
                         % IN. 0. D.
                                        1/16 IN. 0.0.
                                       /STAINLESS ST
1QMM GLASS FRIT
MEDIUM POROSITY
                                     131 MOLECULAR
                                     SIEVE PURGE
                                     GAS FILTER
                                       PURGE GAS
                                       FLO*
                                       CONTROL
          FIGURE 1.  PURGING DEVICE
                    84

-------
      PACKING PROCEDURE

     GLASS
     WOOL
    TENAX 23CM
    3XOV-1
GLASS WOOL
1CM
                >•
CONSTRUCTION

       COMPRESSION FITTING
      "NUT AND FERRULES
        14FT.7A/FOOT RESISTANCE
       "WIRE WRAPPED SOLID

        THERMOCOUPLE/
        CONTROLLER.
        SENSOR
              TRAP INLET
           aECTRONIC
           TEMPERATURE
           CONTROL
           AND
           PYROMETER
        TUBING 25CM.
>0.105 IN. I.D.
        0.125 IN. O.D.
        STAINLESS STEEL
 FIGURE 2.  TRAP PACKINGS AND CONSTRUCTION TO INCLUDE
           DESORB CAPABILITY
                                  85

-------
INSZNllOU01M9IIUfri,


      •NffTVMJUMVN*
                                                 K
                                                 M


                                                'H
                                                 to
                                                 Id
                                                I
                                                3


                                                M
                                                fe
     asNOdsau snvos *nry
   86

-------
         COLUMN: 5% 1.2.3-TRIS (2-CYANOETHOXY)
         PROPANE ON CHROMOSOR8—W
         PROGRAM: 40*C«2minutM 2*C/min. to 100«C
         DETECTOR: PHOTOIONI2ATJON
         SAMPLE: 2.0*«/1 STANDARD MIXTURE
      8        12      16
      RENTENT10N TIME.minutM
2O
24
FIGURE 4. CHROMATOGRAM OF TEST MIXTURE

                  87

-------

-------
METHOD 504.   1,2-DIBROMOETHANE (EDB) AND 1.2-DIBROMO-3-CHLOROPROPANE
              (DBCP) IN WATER BY MICROEXTRACTION AND GAS CHRONATOGRAPHY
                            Revision 2.0
       T. W. Winfield - Method 504, Revision 1.0 (1986)

       T. W. Winfield - Method 504, Revision 2.0 (1989)
             ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS  LABORATORY
                 OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
                U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
                       CINCINNATI, OHIO 45268
                                 89

-------
                                  METHOD 504

        1,2-DIBROMOETHANE (EDB)  AND  1.2-DIBROMO-3-CHLOROPROPANE  (DBCP)
              IN WATER BY MICROEXTRACTION AND GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY
1.   SCOPE AND APPLICATION
     1.1
           This method (1-4) is applicable to the determination of the
           following compounds in finished drinking water and groundwater:
          Analvte

          1,2-Dibromoethane
          1,2-Di bromo-3-Chloropropane
                                        Chemical  Abstract Services
                                              Registry Number

                                                 106-93-4
                                                  96-12-8
     1.2
     1.3
           For compounds other than  the above  mentioned  analytes,  or for other
           sample sources,  the analyst  must  demonstrate  the  usefulness  of the
           method by collecting precision  and  accuracy data  on  actual samples
           (5)  and provide  qualitative  confirmation  of results  by  gas
           chromatography/mass spectrometry  (GC/MS)  (6).

           The  experimentally  determined method  detection  limits (MDL)  (7)  for
           EDB  and DBCP  were calculated to be  0.01 /jg/L.   The method has been
           shown  to be useful  for  these analytes over a  concentration range
           from approximately  0.03 to 200  /zg/L.   Actual  detection  limits are
           highly dependent upon the characteristics of  the  gas chromatographic
           system used.

2.   SUMMARY OF  METHOD

     2.1   Thirty-five ml of sample are extracted with 2 ml  of hexane.   Two #L
           of the extract are  then injected  into a gas chromatograph equipped
           with a linearized electron capture  detector for separation and
           analysis.  Aqueous  calibration  standards are extracted  and analyzed
           in an  identical  manner  as the samples  in order to compensate  for
           possible  extraction  losses.

     2.2   The extraction and  analysis  time  is 30 to 50 min per sample
           depending upon the  analytical conditions chosen.

     2.3   Confirmatory evidence can be obtained using a dissimilar column.
           When component concentrations are sufficiently high,  Method 524.1 or
           524.2 may be employed for improved specificity.

3.   DEFINITIONS

     3.1   Laboratory duplicates (LD1 and LD2)  — Two sample aliquots taken in
          the analytical laboratory and analyzed separately with identical

                                      90

-------
     procedures.  Analyses of LD1 and LD2 give a measure of the precision
     associated with laboratory procedures, but not with sample
     collection, preservation, or storage procedures.

3.2  Field duplicates (FD1 and FD2) -- Two separate samples collected at
     the same time and place under identical circumstances and treated
     exactly the same throughout field and laboratory procedures.
     Analyses of FD1 and FD2 give a measure of the precision associated
     with sample collection, preservation and storage, as well as with
     laboratory procedures.

3.3  Laboratory reagent blank (LRB) — An aliquot of reagent water that
     is treated exactly as a sample including exposure to all glassware,
     equipment, solvents, reagents, internal standards, and surrogates
     that are used with other samples.  The LRB is used to determine if
     method analytes or other interferences are present in the laboratory
     environment, the reagents, or the apparatus.

3.4  Field reagent blank (FRB) — Reagent water placed in a sample
     container in the laboratory and treated as a sample in all respects,
     including exposure to sampling site conditions, storage,
     preservation and all analytical procedures.  The purpose of the FRB
     is to determine if method analytes or other interferences are
     present in the field environment.

3.5  Laboratory performance check solution (LPC) — A solution of method
     analytes, surrogate compounds, and internal standards used to
     evaluate the performance of the instrument system with respect to a
     defined set of method criteria.

3.6  Laboratory fortified blank (LFB) — An aliquot of reagent water to
     which known quantities of the method analytes are added in the
     laboratory.  The LFB is analyzed exactly like a sample, and its
     purpose is to determine whether the methodology is in control, and
     whether the laboratory is capable of making accurate and precise
     measurements at the required method detection limit.

3.7  Laboratory fortified sample matrix (LFM) — An aliquot of an
     environmental sample to which known quantities of the method
     analytes are added in the laboratory.  The LFM is analyzed exactly
     like a sample, and its purpose is to determine whether the sample
     matrix contributes bias to the analytical results.  The background
     concentrations of the analytes in the sample matrix must be
     determined in a separate aliquot and the measured values in the LFM
     corrected for background concentrations.

3.8  Stock standard solution — A concentrated solution containing a
     single certified standard that is a method analyte, or a
     concentrated solution of a single analyte prepared in the laboratory
     with an assayed reference compound.  Stock standard solutions are
     used to prepare primary dilution standards.


                                 91

-------
      3.9   Primary dilution  standard  solution — A  solution  of  several  analytes
           prepared in  the laboratory from  stock standard  solutions  and diluted
           as  needed to prepare  calibration solutions  and  other needed  analyte
           solutions.

      3.10  Calibration  standard  (CAL)  — A  solution prepared from the primary
           dilution standard solution and stock standard solutions of the
           internal  standards and  surrogate analytes.  The CAL  solutions are
           used  to calibrate the instrument response with  respect to analyte
           concentration.

      3.11  Quality control sample  (QCS) —  A sample matrix containing method
           analytes or  a solution  of  method analytes in a water miscible
           solvent which is  used to fortify reagent water or environmental
           samples.   The QCS is  obtained from a source external  to the
           laboratory,  and is used to  check laboratory performance with
           externally prepared test materials.

4.    INTERFERENCES

      4.1   Impurities contained  in the extracting solvent usually account for
           the majority of the analytical problems.  Solvent blanks should be
           analyzed  on  each  new  bottle of solvent before use.   Indirect daily
           checks  on  the extracting solvent  are obtained by  monitoring  the
           reagent water blanks  (Sect. 7.3.4).  Whenever an  interference is
           noted in  the reagent  water  blank, the analyst should  reanalyze the
           extracting solvent.   Low level interferences generally can be
           removed by distillation or  column chromatography  (4).  WARNING:
           When a  solvent is  purified, stabilizers put into  the  solvent by the
           manufacturer are  removed thus potentially making the  solvent
           hazardous.   Also,  when  a solvent  is purified, preservatives put into
           the solvent  by the manufacturer  are removed thus potentially making
        '  the shelf-life short.   However,  it is generally more  economical to
           obtain  a new source of  solvent.   Interference-free solvent is
           defined  as a solvent  containing  less than 0.1 ng/L individual
           analyte  interference.   Protect interference-free solvents by storing
           in an area known  to be  free of  organochlorine solvents.

     4.2  This liquid/liquid extraction technique efficiently extracts a wide
           boiling range of  non-polar organic compounds and,  in  addition,
          extracts polar organic  components of the sample with varying
          efficiencies.

     4.3  Current column technology suffers from the fact that EDB at low
          concentrations may be masked by very high levels of
          dibromochloromethane  (DBCM), a common disinfection by-product of
          chlorinated drinking waters.

5.   SAFETY

     5.1  The toxicity  and carcinogenicity of chemicals used in this method
          has not been precisely defined;  each chemical  should be treated as a

                                      92

-------
          potential  health hazard,  and exposure  to  these  chemicals  should  be
          minimized.   Each laboratory is  responsible  for  maintaining awareness
          of OSHA regulations regarding safe handling of  chemicals  used in
          this method.   Additional  references to laboratory safety  are
          available  (7-9)  for the information of the  analyst.

     5.2  EDB and DBCP have been tentatively classified as known or suspected
          human or mammalian carcinogens.  Pure  standard  materials  and stock
          standard solutions of these compounds  should be handled in a hood or
          glovebox.   A NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas  respirator should be  worn
          when the analyst handles high concentrations of these toxic
          compounds.

     5.3  WARNING:  When a solvent is purified,  stabilizers put into the
          solvent by the manufacturer are removed thus potentially making  the
          solvent hazardous.

6.   APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT

     6.1  SAMPLE CONTAINERS - 40-mL screw cap vials (Pierce #13075 or
          equivalent) each equipped with a size 24 cap with a flat, disc-like
          PTFE-faced polyethelene film/foam extrusion (Fisher #02-883-3F or
          equivalent).  Individual vials shown to contain at least 40.0 ml can
          be calibrated at the 35.0 ml mark so that volumetric, rather than
          gravimetric, measurements of sample volumes can be performed. Prior
          to use, wash vials and septa with detergent and rinse with tap and
          distilled water.  Allow the vials and septa to air dry at room
          temperature, place in a 105°C oven for one hr,  then remove and allow
          to cool in an area known to be free of organic solvent vapors.

     6.2  VIALS, auto sampler, screw cap with PTFE-faced septa, 1.8 mL, Varian
          #96-000099-00 or equivalent.

     6.3  MICRO SYRINGES - 10 and 100 /iL.

     6.4  MICRO SYRINGE - 25 juL with a 2-inch by 0.006-inch needle - Hamilton
          #702N or equivalent.                          -

     6.5  PIPETTES - 2.0 and 5.0 mL transfer.

     6.6  STANDARD SOLUTION  STORAGE CONTAINERS - 15-mL bottles with PTFE-lined
          screw caps.

     6.7  GAS  CHROMATOGRAPHY SYSTEM

          6.7.1  The GC must be capable  of  temperature programming  and  should
                  be equipped with a linearized electron  capture detector  and a
                  capillary  column split!ess  injector  at  200°C.

          6..7.2   Two gas  chromatography  columns  are recommended. Column A
                  (Sect. 6.7.3)  is a highly  efficient  column that provides
                  separations for  EDB  and DBCP without interferences from

                                       93

-------
                  trihalomethanes (Sect.  4.4).   Column A should be used as the
                  primary analytical  column unless routinely occurring analytes
                  are not adequately resolved.   Column B (Sect. 6.7.4) is
                  recommended for use as  a confirmatory column when GC/MS
                  confirmation is not viable.   Retention times for EDB and DBCP
                  on these columns are presented in Table 1.

           6.7.3   Column A - 0.32 mm ID x 30M  long fused silica capillary with
                  dimethyl  silicone mixed phase (Durawax-DX3,  0.25 jum film,  or
                  equivalent).   The linear  velocity of the helium carrier gas
                  should be about 25  cm/sec at  100°C and 7 psi  column head
                  pressure.   The column temperature is programmed  to hold at
                  40°C for 4 min,  to  increase to 190°C at 8°C/min,  and hold  at
                  190°C for 25 min or until  all  expected compounds  have eluted.
                  (See Figure 1 for a sample chromatogram.)

           6.7.4   Column B  (alternative column)  -  0.32mm ID x  30M  long fused
                  silica capillary with methyl  polysiloxane phase  (DB-1,  1.0 /on
                  film,  or  equivalent).   The linear  velocity  of the helium
                  carrier gas should  be about 25 cm/sec at 100°C.   The column
                  temperature is programmed  to  hold at 40°C for 4 min,  to
                  increase  to 270°C at 10°C/min, and hold at 270°C  for 10 min
                  or until  all  expected compounds  have eluted.

           6.7.5   Column C  (alternative column,  wide bore)  —  0.53  mm ID  x 30  M
                  long,  2.0  pi  film thickness,  Rtx-Volatiles (part #10902),
                  dimethyl diphenyl polysiloxane,  bonded  phase.  The hydrogen
                  carrier gas flow is  about  80  cm/sec  linear velocity,  measured
                  at  50°C with  about  11.5  psi column  head pressure.   The  oven
                  temperature is programmed  to  hold  at  200°C until  all  expected
                  compounds  have eluted.   Injector  temperature:  250°C.
                  Detector temperature:   250°C.  NOTE:  The  above parameters
                  were obtained  by  Restek  Corporation  during preliminary
                  attempts to improve  the  separation of EDB  and  DBCM.

7.   REAGENTS AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

     7.1  REAGENTS

          7.1.1   Hexane  extraction solvent - UV Grade, Burdick  and  Jackson
                 #216 or equivalent.

          7.1.2  Methyl  alcohol - ACS Reagent Grade, demonstrated to be  free
                 of analytes.

          7.1.3  Sodium chloride, NaCl -  ACS Reagent Grade - For pretreatment
                 before use, pulverize a  batch of NaCl and place in a muffle
                 furnace at room temperature.   Increase the temperature to
                 400°C for 30 min.  Place in a bottle and cap.

          7.1.4  Sodium thiosulfate,  Na^O,, ACS Reagent Grade  — For
                 preparation of solution  (0.04 g/mL), mix 1 g of Na2S203 with

                                      94

-------
            reagent water and bring to 25-mL volume in a volumetric
            flask.

7.2  STANDARD MATERIALS

     7.2.1  1,2-Dibromoethane - 99%, available from Aldrich Chemical
            Company.

     7.2.2  l,2-Dibromo-3-chloropropane - 99%, available from USEPA,
            EMSL-QARD, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268.

7.3  REAGENT WATER - Reagent water is defined as water free of
     interference when employed in the procedure described herein.

     7.3.1  Reagent water can be generated by passing tap water through a
            filter bed containing activated carbon.  Change the activated
            carbon when there is evidence that volatile organic compounds
            are breaking through the carbon.
                               r
     7.3.2  A Millipore Super-Q Water System or its equivalent may be
            used to generate deionized reagent water.

     7.3.3  Reagent water may also be prepared by boiling water for
            15 min.  Subsequently, while maintaining the temperature at
            90°C, bubble a contaminant-free inert gas through the water
            at 100 mL/min for 1 hr.  While still hot, transfer the water
            to a narrow mouth screw cap bottle with a Teflon seal.

     7.3.4  Test reagent water each day it is used by analyzing it
            according to Sect. 11.

7.4  STOCK STANDARD SOLUTIONS - These solutions may be purchased as
     certified solutions or prepared from pure standard materials using
     the following procedures:

     7.4.1  Place about 9.8 mL of methanol into a 10-mL ground-glass
            stoppered volumetric flask.  Allow the flask to stand,
            unstoppered, for about 10 min and weigh to the nearest 0.1
            mg.

     7.4.2  Use a 100-#L syringe and immediately add two or more drops of
            standard material to the flask.  Be sure that the standard
            material falls directly into the alcohol without contacting
            the neck of the flask.

     7.4.3  Reweigh, dilute to volume, stopper, then mix by inverting the
            flask several times.  Calculate the concentration in
            micrograms per microliter from the net gain in weight.

     7.4.4  Store stock standard solutions in 15-mL bottles equipped with
            PTFE-lined screw caps.  Methanol solutions prepared from


                                 95

-------
                 liquid  analytes  are  stable for at least four weeks when
                 stored  at 4°C.

     7.5  PRIMARY DILUTION STANDARD SOLUTIONS — Use stock standard solutions
          to prepare primary dilution standard solutions that contain both
          analytes in methanol.   The  primary dilution standards should be
          prepared at concentrations  that can be easily diluted to prepare
          aqueous calibration standards  (Sect. 9.1.1) that will bracket the
          working concentration range.   Store the primary dilution standard
          solutions with minimal  headspace and check frequently for signs of
          deterioration  or evaporation,  especially just before preparing
          calibration standards.  The storage time described for stock
          standard solutions in Sect. 7.4.4 also applies to primary dilution
          standard solutions.

     7.6  LABORATORY FORTIFIED BLANK  (LFB) SAMPLE CONCENTRATE (0.25 /Jg/mL) —
          Prepare a LFB  sample concentrate of 0.25 fig/ml of each analyte from
          the stock standard solutions prepared in Sect. 7.4.

     7.7  MDL CHECK SAMPLE CONCENTRATE (0.02 fig/ml) — Dilute 2 mL of LFB
          sample concentrate (Sect. 7.6) to 25 mL with methanol.

8«   SAMPLE COLLECTION. PRESERVATION. AND STORAGE

     8.1  SAMPLE COLLECTION

          8.1.1  Replicate field reagent blanks (FRB) must be handled along
                 with each sample set, which is composed of the samples
                 collected from the same general  sampling site at
                 approximately the same time.   At the laboratory,  fill a
                 minimum of two sample bottles with reagent water,  seal,  and
                 ship to the sampling site along with sample bottles.
                 Wherever a set of samples is  shipped and stored,  it must be
                 accompanied by the FRB.                          '.','.

          8.1.2  Collect all  samples in 40-mL  bottles into which 3  nig of
                 sodium thiosulfate crystals have been added to the empty
                 bottles just prior to shipping to the sampling site.
                 Alternately,  75 /zL of freshly prepared sodium thiosulfate
                 solution (0.04 g/mL may be added to  empty 40-mL bottles  just
                 prior to sample collection.

          8.1.3  When sampling from a water tap,  open the tap and  allow the
                 system to flush until the water temperature has stabilized
                 (usually about 10 min).   Adjust  the  flow to about  500 mL/min
                 and  collect  samples from the  flowing stream.

          8.1.4  When sampling from a well,  fill  a wide-mouth bottle or beaker
                 with sample,  and carefully fill  40-mL sample bottles.
                                      96

-------
    8.2  SAMPLE PRESERVATION

         8.2.1  The samples must be chilled to 4°C on the day of collection
                and maintained at that temperature until analysis.  Field
                samples that will not be received at the laboratory on the
                day of collection must be packaged for shipment with
                sufficient ice to insure that they will be <4°C on arrival at
                the laboratory.

         8.2.2  The addition of sodium thiosulfate as a dechlorinating agent
                and/or acidification to pH 2 with 1:1 HC1, common
                preservative procedures for purgeable compounds, have been
                shown to  have no effect on EDB or DBCP  (See Table 3).
                Nonetheless, sodium thiosulfate must be added to avoid the
                possibility of reactions which may occur between residual
                chlorine  and indeterminant contaminants present in some
                solvents, yielding compounds which may  subsequently  interfere
                with the  analysis.. The presence of sodium thiosulfate will
                arrest the formation of DBCM  (See Sect. 4.3).  Also,  samples
                should be acidified to avoid the possibility of microbial
                degradation which may periodically affect these analytes
                contained in other groundwater matrices.

     8.3  SAMPLE STORAGE

          8.3.1  Store  samples  and  field reagent blanks  together at 4°C  until
                analysis. The  sample  storage  area must be free of organic
                solvent  vapors.

          8.3.2  Analyze  all  samples within  28  days of  collection.  Samples
                not analyzed within  this  period must be discarded  and
                replaced.

9.   CALIBRATION AND STANDARDIZATION

     9.1  CALIBRATION

          9.1.1   At least three calibration  standards  are  needed;  five are
                 recommended.   One should  contain  EDB  and  DBCP at  a
                 concentration  near to but greater than the method detection
                 limit (Table 1)  for each  compound;  the other two  should be at
                 concentrations that bracket the range  expected in samples.
                 For example,  if the MDL is  0.01 p.g/1,  and a sample expected
                 to contain approximately 0.10 #g/L is  to be analyzed, aqueous
                 standards should be prepared at concentrations of 0.02 Mg/L,
                 0.10 #g/L,  and 0.20
          9.1.2  To prepare a calibration standard (CAL), add an appropriate
                 volume of a primary dilution standard solution to an aliquot
                 of reagent water in a volumetric flask.  If less than 20 ill
                 of an alcoholic standard is added to the reagent water, poor
                 precision may result.  Use a 25-M- micro syringe and rapidly
                                      97

-------
           9.1.3
           9.1.4
     9.2
           inject the alcoholic  standard  into  the  expanded  area  of  the
           filled volumetric  flask.   Remove  the  needle  as quickly as
           possible  after  injection.   Mix by inverting  the  flask several
           times.  Discard the contents contained  in the neck of the
           flask.  Aqueous standards  should  be prepared fresh and
           extracted immediately after preparation unless sealed and
           stored  without  headspace as described in Sect. 8.

           Each day,  analyze  each calibration standard  according to
           Sect.  11  and tabulate peak height or area response versus the
           concentration in the  standard.  The results  can  be used to
           prepare a calibration curve for each compound.
           Alternatively,  if  the ratio of concentration to  response
           (calibration factor)  is a  constant over the  working range
           (<20% relative  standard deviation),  linearity through the
           origin  can be assumed  and  the average ratio  or calibration
           factor  can be used in place of a calibration curve.

           Single  point calibration is a viable alternative to a
           calibration curve.  Prepare single point standards from the
           secondary dilution standard solutions.  The  single point
           calibration standard  should be prepared at a concentration
           that produces a response close to that of the unknowns,  i.e.,
           no more than 20% deviation  between response of standard and
           response of sample.

   INSTRUMENT PERFORMANCE - Check the performance of the entire
   analytical system daily using data gathered from analyses of reagent
   water blanks,  standards, and the QC check standard (Sect. 10.3).

   9.2.1  Significant peak tailing in excess of that shown  for  the
          target  compounds in the method  chromatogram (Figure 1) must
          be corrected.   Tailing problems are  generally traceable  to
          active  sites on  the GC column,  improper  column  installation,
          or the  operation of the detector.

   9.2.2  Check the  precision between replicate  analyses.   A properly
          operating  system should perform with  an  average relative
          standard deviation  of  less  than 10%:   Poor  precision  is
          generally  traceable to pneumatic leaks,  especially at  the
          injection  port.
10.  QUALITY CONTROL
     10
.1  Each  laboratory that  uses  this  method  is  required  to  operate  a
   formal  quality control  program.   The minimum  requirements  of  this
   program consist of an initial demonstration of  laboratory  detection
   limits  capability  and an ongoing  analysis of  laboratory performance
   check solutions (LPC),  laboratory reagent blanks (LRB), laboratory
   fortified  blanks (LFB), laboratory fortified  sample matrix (LFM),
   and quality control samples  (QCS) to evaluate and  document data
   quality.   Ongoing  data  quality  checks  are compared with established

                               98

-------
    performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses meet
    the performance characteristics of the method.

    10.1.1 The analyst must make an initial determination of the method
           detection limits and demonstrate the ability to generate
           acceptable precision with this method.  This is established
           as described in Sect. 10.2.

    10.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in chromato-
           graphy, the analyst is permitted certain options to improve
           the separations or lower the cost of measurements.  Each time
           such a modification is made to the method, the analyst  is
           required to repeat the procedure in Sect. 10.2.

    10.1.3 Each day, the analyst must analyze a laboratory reagent blank
           (LRB) and a field reagent blank, if applicable (Sect. 8.1.1),
           to demonstrate that interferences from the analytical system
           are under control before any samples are analyzed.

    10.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through
           the analyses of laboratory fortified blanks  (LFB)-that  the
           operation of the measurement system is in control.  This
           procedure  is described  in Sect.  10.3.   The frequency of the
           LFB analyses  is equivalent to  10% of all samples  analyzed.

     10.1.5 On  a weekly basis,  the  laboratory should demonstrate the
           ability  to  analyze  low  level samples.   The procedure for  low
           level  LFB  samples  is described in Sect. 10.4.

10.2 To establish  the  ability  to achieve low detection limits and
    generate acceptable  accuracy  and precision, the analyst  should
     perform  the  following  operations:

     10.2.1  Prepare  four  to  seven  samples  at 0.02  /ig/L by  fortifying
            35 ill  of the  MDL  check sample  concentrate  (Sect.  7.7)  into
            35-mL  aliquots  of reagent water in  40-mL bottles.  Cap  and
            mix well.

     10.2.2 Analyze the well-mixed MDL  check samples according to  the
            method beginning  in Sect.  11.

     10.2.3 Calculate the average  concentration found  (X)  in  /*g/L,  and
            the standard deviation of the  concentrations(s)  in #g/L,  for
            each analyte.   Then,  calculate the  MDL for each  analyte.

     10.2.4 For each analyte,  X should be  between 80%  and 120% of the
            true value.  Additionally,  the calculated  MDL should meet
            data quality objectives.   If both  analytes meet  these
            criteria,  the system performance is acceptable and analysis
            of actual  samples can begin.   If either analyte  fails to meet
            the data quality objectives on the basis of high variability,
            correct the source of the problem and  repeat the test.   It is

                                 99

-------
             recommended that the laboratory repeat the MDL determination
             on a regular basis.  CAUTION:  No attempts to establish low
             detection limits should be made before instrument
             optimization and adequate conditioning of both the column and
             the GC system.  Conditioning includes the processing of LFB
             and LFM samples containing moderate concentration levels of
             EDB and DBCP.

 10.3 The laboratory must demonstrate on a frequency equivalent to 10% of
      the sample load that  the measurement system is in control by
      analyzing an LFB of both analytes at 0.25 /zg/L concentration level.

      10.3.1  Prepare an, LFB sample (0.25 /ig/L)  by adding 35 /tL of LFB
             concentrate (Sect.  7.6)  to 35 mL of reagent'water in a 40-mL
             bottle.

      10.3.2  Immediately analyze the  LFB sample according  to Sect.  11 and
             calculate the  recovery for each analyte.   The recovery should
             be between 60% and  140%  of the expected value.

      10.3.3  If the recovery for either analyte falls  outside the
             designated range, the analyte fails the acceptance criteria.
             A  second LFB containing  each  analyte that failed must  be
             analyzed.  Repeated  failure,  however,  will  confirm a general
             problem with the measurement  system.   If  this occurs,  locate
             and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test.

10.4  On  a weekly basis,  the laboratory should  demonstrate the ability to
      analyze low level  samples.

      10.4.1  Prepare an  MDL  check  sample  (0.02  /jg/L) as  outlined  in  Sect.
             10.2.1  and  immediately analyze  according  to the  method  in
             Sect.  11.

      10.4.2  The  instrument  response must  indicate that  the laboratory's
             MDL  is  distinguishable from instrument  background  signal.   If
             not,  correct the problem  and  repeat the MDL test  in  Sect.
             10.2.

      10.4.3  For  each analyte, the  recovery must be  between 60% and  140%
             of the  expected value.

      10.4.4 When either analyte fails the test, the analyst  should  repeat
            the test for that analyte.  Repeated failure, however, will
            confirm a general problem with the measurement system or
            faulty  samples and/or standards.   If this occurs, locate and
            correct the source of the problem and repeat the test.

10.5 At least quarterly, a quality control sample from an external source
     should be analyzed.  If measured analyte concentrations are not of
     acceptable accuracy, check the entire analytical  procedure to locate
     and correct the problem source.

                                 100

-------
    10 6 At least once in every 20 samples, fortify an aliquot of a randomly
         selected routine sample with a.known amount (see Sect. 4.3).   me
         added concentration should not be less than the background
         concentration of the sample selected for fortification.  To simplify
         these checks, it would be convenient to use LFM concentrations ~10X
         MDL.  Over time, recovery should be evaluated on fortified samples
         from all routine sources.

    10 7 It is recommended  that the laboratory adopt additional quality
         assurance practices for  use with this method.  The  specific
         oractices that  are most  productive depend  upon the  needs of the
         laboratory  and  the nature of the  samples.  Field duplicates may  be
         analyzed to  assess the precision  of the environmental  measurements.
         Whenever possible, the laboratory  should  analyze standard  reference
         materials  and participate  in relevant performance  evaluation
         studies.

11.   PROCEDURE

     11.1 SAMPLE PREPARATION

          11.1.1 Remove samples and standards  from storage and allow them to
                 reach room temperature.

          11 1 2 For samples and field reagent blanks,  contained in 40-mL
                 bottles, remove the container cap.  Discard a 5-mL volume
                 using a 5-mL transfer pipette or 10-mL graduated cylinder.
                 Replace the container cap and weigh the container with
                 contents to the nearest O.lg and record this weight for
                 subsequent sample volume determination (Sect. 11.3).

          11 1 3 For calibration  standards, laboratory fortified blanks and
                 laboratory reagent blanks, measure a 35-mL  volume using  a
                 50-mL graduated  cylinder and transfer it to a 40-mL sample
                 container.

      11.2 MICROEXTRACTION AND ANALYSIS

           11.2.1 Remove  the container cap  and add  6 g NaCl  (Sect. 7.1.3)  to
                 the  sample.

           11.2.2 Recap the  sample container and dissolve the NaCl by  shaking
                 by  hand for  about  20  sec.

           11.2.3  Remove the cap  and,  using a  transfer  pipette,  add  2.0 mL of
                  hexane.  Recap  and shake  vigorously  by  hand for  1  min.  Allow
                  the water and hexane  phases  to  separate.   (If stored at this
                  stage,  keep the container upside down.)

           11 2.4 Remove the cap and carefully transfer 0.5  mL of the hexane
                  layer into an autoinjector using a disposable glass pipette.


                                       101

-------
            11.2.5  Transfer the  remaining  hexane  phase,  being  careful  not  to
                   include  any of the  water  phase,  into  a  second  autoinjector
                   vial.  Reserve this second  vial  at  4°C  for  a reanalysis if
                   necessary.                                          J

            11.2.6  Transfer the  first  sample vial to an  autoinjector set up to
                   inject 2.0 jil portions  into the  gas chromatograph for
                   analysis.  Alternatively, 2 /iL portions of  samples, blanks
                   and standards may be manually  injected, although an
                   autoinjector  is recommended.

      11.3 DETERMINATION OF SAMPLE VOLUME

           11.3.1  For samples and field blanks, remove the cap from the sample
                   container.                                               K

           11.3.2  Discard the remaining sample/hexane mixture.  Shake off the
               .    remaining few drops using short,  brisk wrist movements.

           11.3.3 Reweigh the empty container with  original  cap and calculate
                  the net weight of sample by difference to  the nearest 0.1 g
                  This net  weight (in g)  is equivalent to the volume of water
                   (in mL)  extracted.  (Sect.  12.3)

 12.   CALCULATIONS

      12.1  Identify EDB  and DBCP in  the sample chromatogram  by comparing the
           retention time of the suspect  peak  to  retention times  generated by
           the calibration  standards  and  the laboratory  control standard.

      12.2  Use single point calibrations  (Sect. 9.1.4) or  use  the calibration
           curve  or calibration  factor (Sect.  9.1.3) to  directly  calculate the
           unconnected concentration  (Cf) of each analyte  in the  sample  (e.g.,
           calibration factor x  response).

      12.3  Calculate the sample  volume (V ) as equal to the net sample weight-
           Vs = gross weight (Sect. 11.l.i) - bottle tare  (Sect.  11.3.3).

      12.4  Calculate the corrected sample concentration  as-
           Concentration, /jg/L = C-  x  35
                                       vs

      12.5  Results  should be reported with an appropriate number  of significant
           figures.   Experience  indicates that three significant  figures may be
           used for concentrations above 99 /jg/L,  two significant figures  for
          concentrations     een !~" m/l' and l  significant figure for  lower

13.  ACCURACY AND  PRECISION

     13.1 Single  laboratory and  interlaboratory accuracy and precision at
          several concentrations in  three waters  are presented in Tables 2 and
          4 (l).   The method detection limits  are presented  in Table 1.

     13.2 In a preservation study extending over  a  4-week period, the  average
          percent recoveries and relative standard  deviations  presented  in

                                      102

-------
          Table 3 were observed for reagent water (acidified),  tap water and
          groundwater (1).   The results for acidified and non-acidified
          samples were not significantly different.

14.  REFERENCES

     1    Winfield, T.W., J.E. Longbottom, R.L. Graves and A.L. Cohen,
          "Analysis of Organohalide Pesticides and Commerical PCB Products in
          Drinking Water by Microextraction and Gas Chromatography,"  U.S.
          Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring Systems
          Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio.

     2    Glaze, W.W., Lin, C.C., "Optimization of Liquid-Liquid Extraction
          Methods for Analysis of Organics in Water,"  EPA-600/S4-83-052,
          January 1984.

     3.   Henderson, J.E., Peyton, G.R. and Glaze, W.H.(1976).  In
          Identification and Analysis  of Organic Pollutants  in Water  (L.H.
          Keith  ed.), pp.  105-111.  Ann Arbor Sci. Publ., Ann Arbor,  Michigan.

     4.   Richard, J.J., G.A.  Junk, "Liquid Extraction for Rapid Determination
          of Halomethanes  in Water," Journal AWWA, 69, 62, January  1977.

     5.   Handbook for Analytical Quality  Control in Water and Wastewater
          Laboratories,  EPA-600/4-79-019,  U. S.  Environmental  Protection
          Agency,  Environmental  Monitoring Systems Laboratory  - Cincinnati,
          Ohio 45268, March  1979.

      6.   Budde, W.L., J.W.  Eichelberger,  "Organic Analyses  Using  Gas
          Chromatography-Mass  Spectrometry," Ann Arbor  Science, Ann Arbor,
          Michigan  1979.

      7.   Glaser,  J.A.   D.L.  Forest,  G.D.  McKee, S.A. Quave, and  W.L. Budde,
           "Trace Analyses  for Wastewaters,"  Environmental  Science and
          Technology,  15,  1426 (1981).

      8.    "Carcinogens-Working with Carcinogens",  Department of  Health,
           Education, and Welfare,  Public Health Service, Center  for Disease
           Control,  National   Institute of Occupational  Safety and Health,
           Publication No.  77-206,  August, 1977.

      9.    OSHA Safety and Health Standards,(29CFR1910),  Occupational  Safety
           and Health Administration,  OSHA 2206.

      10.  Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,American Chemical Society
           Publication, Committee on Chemical  Safety, 4th Edition, 1985.
                                       103

-------
TABLE  1.   CHROMATOGRAPHIC  CONDITIONS  AND  METHOD  DETECTION LIMITS
FOR 1,2-DIBROMOETHANE (EDB) AND 1,2-DIBROMO-S-CHLOROPROPANE (DBCP)
 Analvte
      Retention Time. Min              MDL. ua/L
Column A     Column B     Column C*
    EDB
    DBCP
  9.5
  17.3
8.9
15.-0
4.1
12.8
0.01
0.01
*  The MDL  experimentally  observed  by  Resteck  Corporation  during
   preliminary optimization was  0.3
                              104

-------
      TABLE 2.  SINGLE LABORATORY ACCURACY AND PRECISION
                 FOR EDB  AND DBCP  IN  TAP  WATER
Analvte
Number
of
Samples
Concen-
tration
(ua/l}
Average
Accuracy
m
Relative
Standard
Deviation
m
EDB            7            0.03          114               9.5
               7            0.24           98              11.8
               7           50.0            95               4.7

DBCP           7            0.03           90              11.4
               7            0.24          102               8.3
               7           50.0            94               4.8
                                105

-------
    TABLE 3.  ACCURACY AND PRECISION AT 2.0 /ig/L OVER A 4-WEEK STUDY PERIOD
Analvte
EDB




DBCP




Matrix1
RW-A
GW
GW-A
TW
TW-A
RW-A
GW
GW-A
TW
TW-A
Average
Number
of Samel es
16
15
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
Relative
Accuracy
(% Recovery^
104
101
96
93
93
105
105
101
95
94
Std. Dev.
(%)
4.7
2.5
4.7
6.3
6.1
8.2
6.2
8.4
10.1
6.9
 Matrix Identities
RW-A = Reagent water at pH 2
GW   - Groundwater, ambient pH
GW-A « Groundwater at pH 2
TW   = Tap water, ambient pH
TW-A - Tap water at pH 2.
                                     106

-------
                                          Column:  FuMd silica capillary
                                          Liquid Fhaaa:  Ourawax«DX3
                                          Film Thicknasr 0.2Sj*n
                                          Column Oimansions: 30 M • 0.317 mm ID
      2     4     6    8    10   12    14   16    18    20   22    24   2i    2S
                                    Tlmo(Min)

Figuro 1.    Extract of rogentwatar tpiked at 0.114 j/g/L with EDB «nd DBCP.
                                                107

-------

-------
METHOD 505.  ANALYSIS OF OR6ANOHALIDE PESTICIDES AND
 COMMERCIAL POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL (PCB) PRODUCTS
  IN  WATER BY  MICROEXTRACTION  AND  GAS CHROMAT06RAPHY
                     Revision 2.0
   T.  W.  Winfield - Method 505,  Revision 1.0 (1986)

   T.  W.  Winfield - Method 505,  Revision 2.0 (1989)
      ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
          OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
         U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
                CINCINNATI, OHIO  45268
                          109

-------
                                   METHOD 505

  ANALYSIS  OF OR6ANOHALIDE PESTICIDES AND COMMERCIAL POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL
        (PCB) PRODUCTS IN WATER BY MICROEXTRACTION AND GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY

1.   SCOPE AND APPLICATION
     1.1
    1.2
      This method (1,2,3)  is applicable to the determination of the
      following analytes in finished drinking water,  drinking water during
      intermediate stages  of treatment, and the raw source water:
               Analvte

               Alachlor
               Aldrin
               Atrazine
               Chlordane
               alpha-Chlorodane
               gamma-Chlorodane
               Dieldrin
               Endrin
               Heptachlor
               Heptachlor Epoxide
               Hexachlorobenzene
               Hexachlorocyclopentadi ene
               Lindane
               Methoxychlor
               cis-Nonachlor
               trans-Nonachlor
               Simazine
               Toxaphene
               Aroclor 1016
               Aroclor 1221
               Aroclor 1232
               Aroclor 1242
               Aroclor 1248
               Aroclor 1254
               Aroclor 1260
                                     Chemical  Abstract Service
                                          Registry Number
                                            5972-
                                             309-
                                            1912-
                                              57-
                                            5103-
                                            5103-
                                              60-
                                              72-
                                              76-
                                            1024-
                                             118-
                                              77-
                                              58-
                                              72-
-60-8
-00-2
-24-9
-74-9
-71-9
•74-2
•57-1
•20-8
•44-8
57-3
•74-1
74-4
89-9
43-5
                                          39765-80-5
                                             122-34-9
                                           8001-35-2
                                          12674-11-2
                                          11104-28-2
                                          11141-16-5
                                          53469-21-9
                                          12672-29-6
                                          11097-69-1
                                          11096-82-5
     For compounds other than the above mentioned analytes or for other
     sample sources, the analyst must demonstrate the applicability of the
     method by collecting precision and accuracy data on fortified samples
     (i.e., groundwater, tap water) (4) and provide qualitative"confirma-
     tion of results by Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry (GC/MS) (5),
     or by GC analysis using dissimilar columns.

1.3  Method detection limits (MDL) (6) for the above organohalides and
     Aroclors have been experimentally determined (Sect. 13.1).  Actual
     detection limits are highly dependent upon the characteristics of the
     gas chromatographic system used (e.g. column type,  age, and proper
     conditioning; detector condition; and injector mode and condition).
                                      110

-------
     1.4  This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of
          analysts experienced in the use of GC and in the interpretation of gas
          chromatograms.  Each analyst must demonstrate the ability to generate
          acceptable results with this method using the procedure described in
          Sect. 11.

     1.5  Analytes that are not separated chromatographically, i.e., analytes
          which have very similar retention times, cannot be individually
          identified and measured in the same calibration mixture or water
          sample unless an alternative technique for identification and
          quantitation is used (Sect. 11.4).

     1.6  When this method is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for any or all
          of the analytes above,  analyte identifications should be confirmed by
          at least one additional qualitative technique.

     1.7  Degradation of Endrin,  caused by active sites in the injection port
          and GC columns, may occur.  This is not as much a problem with new
          capillary columns as with packed columns.  However, high'boil ing
          sample residue in capillary columns will create the same problem after
          injection of sample extracts.

2.   SUMMARY OF METHOD

     2.1  Thirty-five ml of sample are extracted with 2 ml of hexane.  Two n\. of
          the extract are then injected into a gas chromatograph equipped with a
          linearized electron capture detector for separation and analysis.
          Aqueous calibration standards are extracted and analyzed in an
          identical manner in order to compensate for possible extraction
          losses.

     2.2  The extraction and analysis time is 30 to 50 min per sample depending
          upon the analytes and the analytical conditions chosen.  (See Sect.
          6.9.)

3.   DEFINITIONS

     3.1  Laboratory duplicates (LD1 and LD2) -- Two sample aliquots taken in
          the analytical laboratory and analyzed separately with identical
          procedures.  Analyses of LD1 and LD2 give a measure of the precision
          associated with laboratory procedures, but not with sample collection,
          preservation, or storage procedures.

     3.2  Field duplicates (FD1 and FD2) — Two separate samples collected at
          the same time and place under identical circumstances and treated
          exactly the same throughout field and laboratory procedures.  Analyses
          of FD1 and FD2 give a measure of the precision associated with sample
          collection, preservation and storage, as well as with laboratory
          procedures.

     3.3  Laboratory reagent blank (LRB) — An aliquot of reagent water that is
          treated exactly as a sample including exposure to all glassware,

                                       111

-------
      equipment,  solvents,  reagents,  internal  standards, and surrogates that
      are  used  with  other  samples.  The  LRB  is used to determine  if method
      analytes  or other  interferences  are present  in the laboratory
      environment, the reagents,  or the  apparatus.

3.4   Field  reagent  blank  (FRB) — Reagent water placed in a sample
      container in the laboratory and  treated  as a sample in all  respects,
      including exposure to sampling  site conditions, storage, preservation
      and  all analytical procedures.   The purpose of the FRB is to determine
      if method analytes or other interferences are present in the field
      environment.

3.5   Laboratory performance check solution  (LPC) — A solution of method
      analytes,  surrogate  compounds,  and internal standards used  to evaluate
      the  performance of the instrument  system with respect to a  defined set
      of method criteria.

3.6   Laboratory  fortified  blank  (LFB) — An aliquot of reagent water to
      which  known quantities of the method analytes are added in  the
      laboratory.  The LFB  is analyzed exactly like a sample, and its
      purpose is  to  determine whether  the methodology is in control, and
      whether the laboratory is capable  of making accurate and precise
      measurements at the  required method detection limit.

3.7   Laboratory  fortified  sample matrix (LFM) — An aliquot of an environ-
      mental sample  to which known quantities  of the method analytes are
      added  in  the laboratory.  The LFM  is analyzed exactly like  a sample,
      and  its purpose is to  determine whether  the sample matrix contributes
      bias to the analytical results.  The background concentrations of the
      analytes  in the sample matrix must be determined in a separate aliquot
      and the measured values in the LFM corrected for background concentra-
      tions.

3.8   Stock  standard solution — A concentrated solution containing a single
      certified standard that is a method analyte,  or a concentrated
      solution  of a  single  analyte prepared in the laboratory with an
      assayed reference  compound.  Stock standard solutions are used to
      prepare primary dilution standards.

3.9   Primary dilution standard solution — A  solution of several  analytes
      prepared  in the laboratory from stock standard solutions and diluted
      as needed to prepare calibration solutions and other needed analyte
      solutions.

3.10  Calibration standard  (CAL) — A solution prepared from the primary
      dilution standard solution and stock standard solutions of the
      internal standards and surrogate analytes.   The CAL solutions are used
      to calibrate the instrument response with respect to analyte
      concentration.

3.11 Quality control sample (QCS) — A sample matrix containing method
      analytes or a solution of method analytes in  a water miscible solvent

                                 112

-------
          which is used to fortify reagent water or environmental samples.  The
          QCS is obtained from a source external to the laboratory, and is used
          to check laboratory performance with externally prepared test
          materi al s.

4.   INTERFERENCES

     4.1  Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents,
          reagents, glassware and other sample processing apparatus that lead to
          discrete artifacts or elevated baselines in gas chromatograms.   All
          reagents and apparatus must be routinely demonstrated to be free from
          interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running
          laboratory reagent blanks as described in Sect. 10.2.

          4.1.1  Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned (2).  Clean all glass-
                 ware as soon as possible after use by thoroughly rinsing with
                 the last solvent used in it.  Follow by washing with hot water
                 and detergent and thorough rinsing wih tap and reagent water.
                 Drain dry, and heat in an oven or muffle furnace at 400°C for 1
                 hr.  Do not heat volumetric ware.  Thermally stable materials
                 might not be eliminated by this treatment.  Thorough rinsing
                 with acetone may be substituted for the heating.  After drying
                 and cooling, seal and store glassware in a clean environment to
                 prevent any accumulation of dust or other contaminants.  Store
                 inverted or capped with aluminum foil.

          4.1.2  The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to minimize
                 interference problems.  Purification of solvents by distilla-
                 tion in all-glass systems may  be required.  WARNING:  When a
                 solvent is purified, stabilizers put into the solvent by the
                 manufacturer are removed thus  potentially making the solvent
                 hazardous.  Also, when a solvent is purified, preservatives put
                  into the solvent by the manufacturer are removed thus
                 potentially reducing the shelf-life.

     4.2  Interfering contamination may occur when a sample containing low
          concentrations of analytes is analyzed immediately following a  sample
          containing relatively high concentrations of analytes.  Between-sample
          rinsing  of the sample syringe and  associated equipment with hexane can
          minimize sample cross contamination.  After analysis of  a sample
          containing high concentrations of  analytes, one or more  injections of
          hexane  should  be made to ensure that  accurate values are obtained for
          the  next sample.

     4.3  Matrix  interferences may be caused  by contaminants that  are coextract-
          ed from the  sample.  Also, note that  all the analytes  listed  in the
          scope and application section are  not resolved from  each other  on any
          one  column,  i.e., one anlayte of  interest may  be  an  interferent for
          another analyte of  interest.  The  extent of matrix interferences will
          vary considerably from  source to  source, depending upon  the water
          sampled. Cleanup of  sample extracts  may be necessary.   Positive
          identifications  should  be  confirmed (Sect. 11.4).

                                       113

-------
      4.4
      4.5
      4.6
      4.7
      4.8
 It  is  important -that  samples and working standards be contained in the
 same solvent.  The solvent for working standards must be the same as
 the final  solvent used  in sample preparation.   If this is not the
 case,  chromatographic comparability of standards to sample may be
 affected.

 Caution must be taken in the determination of endrin since it has been
 reported that the splitless injector may cause endrin degradation (7).
 The analyst should be alerted to this possible interference resulting
 in an  erratic response  for endrin.

 Variable amounts of pesticides and commercial PCB products from
 aqueous solutions adhere to glass surfaces.  It is recommended that
 sample transfers and  glass surface contacts be minimized.

Aldrin, hexachlorocyclopentadiene and methoxychlor are rapidly
oxidized by chlorine.  Dechlorination with sodium thiosulfate at time
of collection will retard further oxidation of these compounds.

WARNING:  An interfering, erratic peak has been observed within the
retention window of heptachlor during many analyses of reagent, tap,
and groundwater.  It  appears to be related to di butyl  phthalate;
however, the specific source has not yet been definitively determined.
The observed magnitude and character of this peak randomly varies in
numerical  value from  successive injections made from the same vial.
5.   SAFETY

     5.1  The toxicity and carcinogenicity of chemicals used in this method have
          not been precisely defined; each chemical should be treated as a
          potential health hazard, and exposure to these chemicals should be
          minimized.  Each laboratory is responsible for maintaining awareness
          of OSHA regulations regarding safe handling of chemicals used in this
          method.  Additional references to laboratory safety are available
          (8-10) for the information of the analyst.

     5.2  The following organohalides have been tentatively classified as known
          or suspected human or mammalian carcinogens:  aldrin, commercial PCB
          products, chlordane, dieldrin, heptachlor, hexachlorobenzene, and
          toxaphene.  Pure standard materials and stock standard solutions of
          these compounds should be handled in a hood or glovebox.

     5.3  WARNING:  When a solvent is purified,  stabilizers put into the solvent
          by the manufacturer are removed thus potentially making the solvent
          hazardous.

6.   APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT

     6.1  SAMPLE CONTAINERS - 40-mL screw cap vials (Pierce #13075 or
          equivalent)  each equipped with a size  24 cap with a flat,  disc-like
          TFE facing backed with a polyethylene  film/foam extrusion  (Fisher
          #02-883-3F or equivalent).   Prior to use, wash vials  and septa with

                                      114

-------
     detergent and rinse with tap and distilled water.  Allow the vials and
     septa to air dry at room temperature, place the vials in a 400°C oven
     for one hour, then remove and allow to cool in an area known to be
     free of organics.

6.2  VIALS - auto sampler, screw cap with septa, 1.8 ml, Varian
     #96-000099-00 or equivalent or any other autosampler vials not
     requiring more than 1.8 ml sample volumes.

6.3  AUTO SAMPLER - Hewlett-Packard 7671A, or equivalent.

6.4  MICRO SYRINGES - 10 and 100 /zL.

6.5  MICRO SYRINGE - 25 til with a 2-inch by 0.006-inch needle - Hamilton
     702N or equivalent.

6.6  PIPETTES - 2.0 and 5.0 mL transfer.

6.7  VOLUMETRIC FLASKS - 10 and 100 mL, glass stoppered.

6.8  STANDARD SOLUTION STORAGE CONTAINERS - 15-mL bottles with PTFE-lined
     screw caps.

6.9  GAS CHROMATOGRAPH — Analytical system complete with temperature
     programmable GC suitable and split/split!ess injector for use with
     capillary columns and all required accessories including syringes,
     analytical columns, gases, a linearized electron capture detector and
     stripchart recorder.  A data system is recommended for measuring peak
     areas.  Table 1 lists retention times observed for method analytes
     using the columns and analytical conditions described below.

     6.9.1  Three gas chromatographic columns are recommended.  Column 1
            (Sect. 6.9.2) should be used as the primary analytical column
            unless routinely occurring analytes are not adequately
            resolved.  Validation data presented in this method were
            obtained using this column.  Columns 2 and 3 are recommended
            for use as confirmatory columns when GC/MS confirmation is not
            available.  Alternative columns may be used in accordance with
            the provisions described in Sect. 10.3.

     6.9.2  Column 1  (Primary Column) - 0.32 mm ID x 30 M long fused silica
            capillary with chemically bonded methyl polysiloxane phase
            (DB-1, 1.0 urn film, or equivalent).  Helium carrier gas flow is
            about 25 cm/sec linear velocity, .measured at 180° with 9 psi
            column head pressure.  The oven temperature is programmed from
            180°C to 260°C at 4°C/min and held at 260°C until all expected
            compounds have eluted.  Injector temperature:  200°C.
            Splitless Mode:  0.5 min.  Detector temperature:  290°C.
            Sample chromatograms for selected pesticides are presented in
            Figures 1 and 2.  Chromatograms of the Aroclors, toxaphene, and
            technical chlordane are presented in Figures 3 through 11.


                                  115

-------
          6.9.3  Column 2  (alternative column 1) - 0.32mm ID x 30 M long fused
                 silica capillary with a 1:1 mixed phase of dimethyl silicone
                 and polyethylene glycol (Durawax-DX3, 0.25/jm film, or
                 equivalent).  Helium carrier gas flow is about 25 cm/sec linear
                 velocity  and oven temperature is programmed from 100°C to 210°C
                 at 8°C/irrin, and held at 210°C until all expected compounds have
                 eluted.   Then the post temperature is programmed to 240°C at
                 8°C/min for 5 min.

          6.9.4  Column 3  (alternative column 2) - 0.32mm ID x 25 M long fused
                 silica capillary with chemically bonded 50:50 Methyl-Phenyl
                 silicone  (OV-17, 1.5/zm film thickness, or equivalent).  Helium
                 carrier gas flow is about 40 cm/sec linear velocity and oven
                 temperature is programmed from 100°C to 260°C at 4°C/min and
                 held at 260°C until all expected compounds have eluted.

7.   REAGENTS AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS - - WARNING:  When a solvent is purified
     stabilizers put into  the solvent by the manufacturer are removed thus
     potentially making the solvent hazardous.  Also, when a solvent is
     purified, preservatives put into the solvent by the manufacturer are
     removed thus potentially making the shelf-life short.

     7.1  REAGENTS

          7.1.1  Hexane extraction solvent - UV Grade, Burdick and Jackson #216
                 or equivalent.

          7.1.2  Methyl alcohol - ACS Reagent Grade, demonstrated to be free of
                 analytes.

          7.1.3  Sodium chloride, NaCl  - ACS Reagent Grade - For pretreatment
                 before use, pulverize a batch of NaCl and place in a muffle
                 furnace at room temperature.  Increase the temperature to 400°C
                 and hold for 30 min.  Place in a bottle and cap.

       ,   7.1.4  Sodium thiosulfate, Na?S203, ACS Reagent Grade—For preparation
                 of solution (0.04 g/mL),  mix 1 g of Na2S203 with reagent water
                 and bring  to 25-mL volume in a volumetric flask.

     7.2  REAGENT WATER - Reagent water is defined as water free of interference
          when employed in  the procedure described herein.

          7.2.1  A Millipore Super-Q Water System or its equivalent may be used
                 to generate deionized  reagent water.

          7.2.2  Test reagent water each day it is used by analyzing it
                 according  to Sect.  11.

     7.3  STOCK STANDARD SOLUTIONS - These solutions may be obtained as
          certified solutions or prepared  from pure standard materials  using the
          following procedures:
                                      116

-------
          7.3.1  Prepare stock standard solutions (5000 /jg/mL)  by accurately
                 weighing about 0.0500 g of pure material.   Dissolve the
                 material in methanol  and dilute to volume  in a 10-mL volumetric
                 flask.  Larger volumes can be used at the  convenience of the
                 analyst.  When compound purity is assayed  to be 96% or greater,
                 the weight can be used without correction  to calculate the
                 concentration of the  stock standard.   Commercially prepared
                 stock standards can be used at any concentration if they are
                 certified by the manufacturer or by an independent source.

          7.3.2  Transfer the stock standard solutions into Teflon-sealed
                 screw-cap bottles.  Store at 4°C and protect from light.  Stock
                 standard solutions should be checked frequently for signs of
                 degradation or evaporation, especially just prior to preparing
                 calibration standards from them.

          7.3.3  Stock standard solutions must be replaced  after six months, or
                 sooner if comparison  with check standards  indicates a problem.

     7.4  PRIMARY DILUTION STANDARD SOLUTIONS — Use stock  standard solutions to
          prepare primary dilution standard solutions that  contain the analytes
          in methanol.  The primary dilution standards should be prepared at
          concentrations that can be easily diluted to prepare aqueous calibra-
          tion standards (Sect. 9.1.1) that will bracket the working concentra-
          tion range.  Store the primary dilution standard  solutions with
          minimal headspace and check frequently for signs  of deterioration or
          evaporation, especially just before preparing calibration standards.
          The storage time described for stock standard solutions in Sect. 7.3.3
          also applies to primary dilution standard solutions.

8.   SAMPLE COLLECTION. PRESERVATION.  AND STORAGE

     8.1  SAMPLE COLLECTION

          8.1.1  Collect all samples in 40-mL bottles into  which 3 mg of sodium
                 thiosulfate crystals  have been added to the empty bottles just
                 prior to shipping to  the sampling site. Alternately, 75 #L of
                 freshly prepared sodium thiosulfate solution (0.04 g/mL) may be
                 added to empty 40-mL bottles just prior to sample collection.

          8.1.2  When sampling from a water tap, open the tap and allow the
                 system to flush until the water temperature has stabilized
                 (usually about 10 min).  Adjust the flow to about 500 mL/min
                 and collect samples from the flowing stream.

          8.1.3  When sampling from a well, fill a wide-mouth bottle or beaker
                 with sample, and carefully fill 40-mL sample bottles.

     8.2  SAMPLE PRESERVATION

          8.2.1  The samples must be chilled to 4°C at the  time of collection
                 and maintained at that temperature until the analyst is

                                       117

-------
                 prepared for the extraction process.  Field samples that will
                 not be received at the laboratory on the day of collection must
                 be packaged for shipment with sufficient ice to insure that
                 they will be maintained at 4°C until arrival at the laboratory.

     8.3  SAMPLE STORAGE

          8.3.1  Store samples and extracts at 4°C until extraction and
                 analysis.

          8.3.2  Extract all samples as soon as possible after collection.
                 Results of holding time studies suggest that all analytes with
                 the possible exception of heptachlor were adequately stable for
                 14 days when stored under these conditions.  In general,
                 heptachlor showed inconsistent results.  If heptachlor is to be
                 determined, samples should be extracted within 7 days of
                 collection.  Analyte stability may be affected by the matrix;
                 therefore, the analyst should verify that the preservation
                 technique is applicable to the samples under study.

9.   CALIBRATION AND STANDARDIZATION

     9.1  Establish GC operating parameters equivalent to those indicated in
          Sect. 6.9.  WARNING:  Endrin is easily degraded in the injection port
          if the injection port or front of the column is dirty.  This is the
          result of buildup of high boiling residue from sample injection.
          Check for degradation problems by injecting a mid-level standard
          containing only endrin.  Look for the degradation products of endrin
          (endrin ketone and endrin aldehyde).  If degradation of endrin exceeds
          20%, take corrective action before proceeding with calibration.
          Calculate percent breakdown as follows:

     Total endrin degradation peak area fendrin aldehyde + endrin ketone)   xlOO
     Total endrin peak area (endrin + endrin aldehyde + endrin ketone)
     9.2  At least three calibration standards are needed; five are
          recommended.  One should contain analytes at a concentration near
          but greater than the method detection limit for each compound; the
          other two should be at concentrations that bracket the range
          expected in samples.  For example> if the MDL is 0.01 ng/L, and a
          sample expected to contain approximately 0.10 /zg/L is to be
          analyzed, aqueous standards should be prepared at concentrations of
          0.02 /zg/L, 0.10 /zg/L, and 0.20 pg/L.

          9.2.1  To prepare a calibration standard (CAL), add an appropriate
                 volume of a secondary dilution standard to a 35-mL aliquot of
                 reagent water in a 40-mL bottle.  Do not add less than 20 /iL
                 of an alcoholic standard to the reagent water.  Use a 25-/iL
                 micro syringe and rapidly inject the alcoholic standard into
                 the middle point of the water volume.  Remove the needle as
                 quickly as possible after injection.  Mix by inverting and
                                      118

-------
            shaking the capped bottle several times.  Aqueous standards
            must be prepared fresh daily.

     9.2.2  Starting with the standard of lowest concentration, prepare,
            extract, and analyze each calibration standard beginning with
            Sect. 11.2 and tabulate peak height or area response versus
            the concentration in the standard.  The results are to be
            used to prepare a calibration curve for each compound by
            plotting the peak height or area response versus the concen-
            tration.  Alternatively, if the ratio of concentration to
            response (calibration factor) is a constant over the working
            range (20% RSD or less), linearity to the origin can be
            assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor can be
            used in place of a calibration curve.

     9.2.3  The working calibration curve or calibration factor must be
            verified on each working day by the measurement of one or
            more calibration standards.  If the response for an analyte
            varies from the predicted response by more than ±20%, the
            test must be repeated using a fresh calibration standard.  If
            the results still do not agree, generate a new calibration
            curve or use a single point calibration standard as described
            in Sect. 9.2.4.

     9.2.4  Single point calibration is an acceptable alternative to a
            calibration curve.  Prepare single point standards from the
            secondary dilution standard solutions.  The single point
            calibration standard should be prepared at a concentration
            that produces a response close (±20% or less) to that of the
            unknowns.  Do not use less than 20 jil of the secondary
            dilution standard solution to produce a single point
            calibration standard in reagent water.

9.3  INSTRUMENT PERFORMANCE - Check the performance of the entire
     analytical system daily using data gathered from analyses of
     laboratory reagent blanks (LRB), (CAL),  laboratory duplicate samples
     (LD1 and LD2),  and the laboratory performance check solution (LPC)
     (Sect. 10.6).

     9.3.1  Significant peak tailing in excess of that shown for the
            target compounds in the method chromatograms (Figures 1-11)
            must be corrected.  Tailing problems are generally traceable
            to active sites on the GC column, improper column installa-
            tion, or operation of the detector.

     9.3.2  Check the precision between replicate analyses.   Poor
            precision is generally traceable  to pneumatic leaks,
            especially at the injection port.  If the GC system is
            apparently performing acceptably  but with decreased
            sensitivity, it may be necessary  to generate a new curve or
            set of calibration factors to verify the decreased responses
            before searching for the source of the problem.

                                 119

-------
          9.3.3  Observed relative area responses of endrin (See 4.5) must
                 meet the following general criteria:

                 9.3.3.1 The breakdown of endrin into its aldo and keto forms
                         must be adequately consistent during a period in
                         which a series of analyses is made.  Equivalent
                         relative amounts of breakdown should be demonstrated
                         in the LRB, LPC, LFB, CAL and QCS.  Consistent break-
                         down resulting in these analyses would suggest that
                         the breakdown occurred in the instrument system and
                         that the methodology is in control.

                 9.3.3.2 Analyses of laboratory fortified matrix (LFM) samples
                         must also be adequately consistent after corrections
                         for potential background concentrations are made.

10.  QUALITY CONTROL

     10.1 Minimum quality control (QC) requirements are initial demonstration
          of laboratory capability, analysis of laboratory reagent blanks
          (LRB), laboratory fortified blanks (LFB), laboratory fortified
          sample matrix (LFM), and quality control samples (QCS).

     10.2 Laboratory Reagent Blanks.  Before processing any samples, the
          analyst must demonstrate that all glassware and reagent interfer-
          ences are under control.  Each time a set of samples is extracted or
          reagents are changed, an LRB must be analyzed.  If within the reten-
          tion time window of any analyte the LRB produces a peak that would
          prevent the determination of that analyte, determine the source of
          contamination and eliminate the interference before processing
          samples.

     10.3 Initial Demonstration of Capability

          10.3.1 Select a representative concentration (about 10 times MDL or
                 at the regulatory Maximum Contaminant Level, whichever is
                 lower) for each analyte.  Prepare a primary dilution standard
                 solution (in methanol) containing each analyte at 1000 times
                 selected concentration.  With a syringe, add 35 #L of the
                 concentrate to each of at least four 35-mL aliquots of
                 reagent water, and analyze each aliquot according to proce-
                 dures beginning in Sect. 11.

          10.3.2 For each analyte the recovery value should for at least three
                 out of four consecutively analyzed samples fall in the.range
                 of R±30% (or within R±3SR if broader)  using the values for R
                 and SR for reagent water in Table 2.  For those compounds
                 that meet the acceptance criteria, performance is considered
                 acceptable and sample analysis may begin.  For those com-
                 pounds that fail these criteria, initial demonstration
                 procedures should be repeated.
                                      120

-------
     10.3.3 The initial demonstration of capability is used primarily to
            preclude a laboratory from analyzing unknown samples via a
            new, unfamiliar method prior to obtaining some experience
            with it.  It is expected that as laboratory personnel gain
            experience with this method the quality of data will improve
            beyond those required here.

10.4 The analyst is permitted to modify GC columns, GC conditions, or
     detectors to improve separations or lower analytical  costs.  Each
     time such method modifications are made,  the analyst  must repeat the
     procedures in Sect. 10.3.

10.5 Assessing Laboratory Performance - Laboratory Fortified Blank (LFB)

     10.5.1 The laboratory must analyze at least one laboratory fortified
            blank (LFB) per sample set (all samples extracted within a
            24-h period).  If the sample set contains more than 20
            samples, analyze one LFB for every 20 samples.  The fortify-
           .ing concentration of each analyte  in the LFB sample should be
            1.0 times MDL or the MCL, whichever is less.  Calculate
            accuracy as percent recovery (X,-).   If the recovery of any
            analyte falls outside the control  limits (see  Sect. 10.5.2),
            that analyte is judged out of control, and the source of the
            problem should be identified and resolved before continuing
            analyses.                                        ,

     10.5.2 Until  sufficient data become available from  within their own
            laboratory, usually a minimum of results from  20 to 30
            analyses, the laboratory may assess laboratory performance
            against the control  limits in Sect. 10.3.2 that are derived
            from the data in Table 2.   When sufficient internal perfor-
            mance data becomes available, develop control  limits from the
            mean percent recovery (X)  and standard deviation (S) of the
            percent recovery.   These data are  used to establish upper and
            lower control limits as follows:

                    UPPER CONTROL LIMIT  =  X  + 3S

                    LOWER CONTROL LIMIT  =  X  - 3S


            After each five to ten new recovery measurements,  new control
            limits should be calculated using  only the most recent 20-30
            data points.

     10.5.3 It is  recommended  that the laboratory periodically determine
            and document its detection limit capabilities  for analytes of
            interest.  CAUTION:   No attempts to establish  low detection
            limits should be made before instrument optimization and
            adequate conditioning of both the  column and the GC system.
            Conditioning includes the  processing of LFB  and LFM samples
            containing moderate  concentration  levels of  these analytes.

                                 121

-------
          10.5.4 At least each quarter the laboratory should analyze quality
                 control  samples (QCS) (if available).   If criteria provided
                 with the QCS are not met, corrective action should be taken
                 and documented.

     10.6 Assessing Analyte Recovery - Laboratory Fortified Sample Matrix
          (LFM)

          10.6.1 The laboratory must add a known concentration to a minimum of
                 10% of the routine samples or one LFM per set, whichever is
                 greater.  The fortified concentration should not be less than
                 the background concentration of the sample selected for
                 fortification.  Ideally the LFM concentration should be the
                 same as that used for the LFB (Sect. 10.5).  Periodically,
                 samples from all routine sample sources should be fortified.

          10.6.2 Calculate the percent recovery (R,-)  for each analyte,
                 corrected for background concentrations measured in the
                 unfortified sample, and compare these values to the control
                 limits established in Sect. 10.5.2 from the analyses of LFBs.

          10.6.3 If the recovery of any such analyte falls outside the
                 designated range, and the laboratory performance for that
                 analyte is shown to be in control (Sect. 10.5), the recovery
                 problem encountered with the dosed sample is judged to be
                 matrix related, not system related.  The result for that
                 analyte in the unfortified sample is labeled suspect/matrix
                 to inform the data user that the results are suspect due to
                 matrix effects.

     10.7 The laboratory may adopt additional quality control practices for
          use with this method.  The specific practices that are most produc-
          tive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the nature of the
          samples.  For example, field or laboratory duplicates may be
          analyzed to assess the precision of the environmental measurements
          or field reagent blanks may be used to assess contamination of
          samples under site conditions, transportation and storage.

11.  PROCEDURE

     11.1 SAMPLE PREPARATION

          11.1.1 Remove samples from storage and allow them to equilibrate to
                 room temperature.

          11.1.2 Remove the container caps.  Withdraw and discard a 5-mL
                 volume using a 10-mL graduated cylinder.  Replace the
                 container caps and weigh the containers with contents to the
                 nearest 0.1 g and record these weights for subsequent sample
                 volume determinations (Sect. 11.3).
                                      122

-------
11.2 EXTRACTION AND ANALYSIS

     11.2.1 Remove the container cap of each sample, and add 6 g NaCl
            (Sect. 7.1.3) to the sample bottle.  Using a transfer or
            automatic dispensing pipet, add 2.0 ml of hexane.  Recap and
            shake vigorously by hand for 1 min.  Invert the bottle and
            allow the water and hexane phases to separate.

     11.2.2 Remove the cap and carefully transfer approximately 0.5 ml of
            hexane layer into an autosampler vial using a disposable
            glass pipet.

     11.2.3 Transfer the remaining hexane phase, being careful not to
            include any of the water phase, into a second autosampler
            vial.  Reserve this second vial at 4°C for an immediate
            reanalysis if necessary.

     11.2.4 Transfer the first sample vial to an autosampler set up to
            inject 1-2 fil portions into the gas chromatograph for
            analysis (See Sect. 6.9 for GC conditions).  Alternately, 1-2
            ml portions of samples, blanks, and standards may be manually
            injected, although an autosampler is strongly recommended.

11.3 DETERMINATION OF SAMPLE VOLUME IN BOTTLES NOT CALIBRATED

     11.3.1 Discard the remaining sample/hexane mixture from the sample
            bottle.  Shake off the remaining few drops using short, brisk
            wrist movements.

     11.3.2 Reweigh the empty container with original  cap and calculate
            the net weight of sample by difference to the nearest 0.1 g
            (Sect. 11.1.2 minus Sect. 11.3.2).  This net weight (in
            grams) is equivalent to the volume (in mL) of water extracted
            (Sect. 12.3).  By alternately using 40-mL bottles precali-
            brated at 35-mL levels, the gravimetric steps can be omitted,
            thus increasing the speed and ease of this extraction
            process.

11.4 IDENTIFICATION OF ANALYTES

     11.4.1 Identify a sample component by comparison of its retention
            time to the retention time of a reference chromatogram.  If
            the retention time of an unknown compound corresponds,  within
            limits, to the retention time of a standard compound, then
            identifiction is considered positive.

     11.4.2 The width of the retention time window used to make identifi-
            cations should be based upon measurements  of actual  retention
            time variations of standards over the course of a day.   Three
            times the standard deviation of a retention time can be used
            to calculate a suggested window size for a compound.


                                 123

-------
                 However, the experience of the analyst should weigh heavily
                 in the interpretation of chromatograms.

          11.4.3 Identification requires expert judgement when sample compo-
                 nents are not resolved chromatographically.  When peaks
                 obviously represent more than one sample componenet (i.e.,
                 broadened peak with shoulder(s) or valley between two or more
                 maxima), or any time doubt exists over the identification of
                 a peak on a chromatogram, appropriate alternative techniques
                 to help confirm peak identification need be employed.  For
                 example, more positive identification may be made by the use
                 of an alternative detector which operates on a
                 chemical/physical principle different from that originally
                 used, e.g., mass spectrometry, or the use of a second
                 chromatography column.  Suggested alternative columns are
                 described in Sect. 6.9.

12.  CALCULATIONS

     12.1 Identify the organohalides in the sample chromatogram by comparing
          the retention time of the suspect peak to retention times generated
          by the calibration standards and the laboratory fortified blanks.
          Identify the multicomponent compounds using all peaks that are
          characteristic of the specific compound from chromatograms generated
          with individual standards.  Select the most sensitive and
          reproducible peaks to obtain a sum for calculation purposes (See
          Table 1).

     12.2 Use the single point calibration (Sect. 9.2.4)  or use the calibra-
          tion curve or calibration factor (Sect. 9.2.3)  to directly calculate
          the unconnected concentration (Ci) of each analyte in the sample
          (e.g., calibration factor x response).

     12.3 Calculate the sample volume (Vs) as equal to the net sample weight:

          Vs - gross weight (Sect. 11.1.2) - bottle tare (Sect. 11.3.2).

     12.4 Calculate the corrected sample concentration as:
          Concentration,
pg/L = 35XC,-!
        (Vs)
     12.5 Results should be reported with an appropriate number of significant
          figures.  Experience indicates that three significant figures may be
          used for concentrations above 99 /jg/L, two significant figures for
          concentrations between 1-99 /tg/L, and 1 significant figure for lower
          concentrations.

13.  ACCURACY AND PRECISION

     13.1 Single laboratory (EMSL-Cincinnati) accuracy and precision at
          several concentrations in reagent, ground, and tap water matrices

                                      124

-------
          are presented in Table 2.(11).   These results  were obtained from
          data generated with a DB-1  column.

     13.2 This method has been tested by  10 laboratories using reagent water
          and groundwater fortified at three concentration levels.   Single
          operator precision, overall precision, and method accuracy were
          found to be directly related to the concentration of the  analyte and
          virtually independent of the sample matrix.  Linear equations to
          describe the relationships are  presented in Table 3.(12).

14.   REFERENCES

     1.  Glaze, W.W., Lin, C.C., Optimization of Liquid-Liquid Extraction
         Methods for Analysis of Organics in Water, EPA-600/S4-83-052, January
         1984.

     2.  Henderson, J.E., Peyton, 6.R. and Glaze, W.H. (1976).  In
         "Identification and Analysis of Organic Pollutants in Water" (L.H.
         Keith ed.), pp. 105-111.  Ann Arbor Sci. Publ., Ann Arbor, Michigan.

     3.  Richard, J.J., Junk, G.A., "Liquid Extraction for Rapid Determination
         of Halomethanes in Water," Journal AWWA, 69, 62, January 1977.

     4.  "Handbook for Analytical Quality Control in Water and Wastewater
         Laboratories," EPA-600/4-79-019, U. S. Environmental Protection
         Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati,
         Ohio, 45268, March  1979.

     5.  Budde, W.L., Eichelberger, J.W., "Organic Analyses Using Gas
         Chromatography-Mass Spectrometry," Ann Arbor Science, Ann Arbor,
         Michigan 1979.

     6.  Glaser, J.A. et a!.,  "Trace Analyses for Wastewaters," Environmental
         Science and Technology, 15, 1426  (1981).

     7.  Bellar, T.A.,  Stemmer,  P.,  Lichtenberg, J.J., "Evaluation of
         Capillary Systems for  the Analysis of  Environmental  Extracts,"
         EPA-600/S4-84-004,  March 1984.

     8.  "Carcinogens-Working with Carcinogens," Department of Health,
         Education,  and Welfare, Public  Health  Service,  Center for Disease
         Control, National Institute of  Occupational  Safety and Health,
         Publication No.  77-206, August,  1977.

     9.  "OSHA Safety  and  Health Standards, General  Industry," (29CFR1910),
         Occupational  Safety and Health  Administration,  OSHA  2206,  (Revised,
         January  1976).

     10.  "Safety  in  Academic Chemistry Laboratories," American Chemical
         Society  Publication,  Committee  on Chemical  Safety, 3rd  Edition,  1979.
                                      125

-------
11.  Winfield, T., et al. "Analysis of Organohalide Pesticides and
     Commercial PCB Products in Drinking Water by.Microextraction and Gas
     Chromatography."  In preparation.

12.  Multilaboratory Method Validation Study #40, conducted by the Quality
     Assurance Branch, EMSL-Ci. Report in progress.
                                 126

-------
                 TABLE 1. RETENTION TIMES FOR METHOD ANALYTES
Analvte
              Retention Time(a),  Min
Primary	Confirm.  1       Confirm.  2
Hexachlorocyclopentadiene 5.5
Simazine 10.9
Atrazine 11.2
Hexachlorobenzene 11.9
Lindane 12.3
Alachlor 15.1
Heptachlor 15.9
Aldrin 17.6
Heptachlor Epoxide 19.0
gamma-Chl ordane 19.9
alpha-Chlordane 20.9
trans-Nonachlor 21.3
Dieldrin 22.1
Endrin 23.2
ci s-NonachTor 24.3
Methoxychlor 30.0
6.8
25.7
22.6
13.4
18.4
19.7
17.5
18.4
24.6
25.9
26.6
24.8
45.1
33.3
39.0
58.5
5.2
19.9
19.6
15.6
18.7
21.1
20.0
21.4
24.6
26.0
26.6
26.3
27.8
29.2
30.4
36.4
Primary(b)
Aroclor 1016
Aroclor 1221
Aroclor 1232
Aroclor 1242
Aroclor 1248
Aroclor 1254
Aroclor 1260
Chlordane
Toxaphene
13
7.
11
11
14
19
23
15
21
.6,
7,
.2,
.2,
.8,
.1,
.4,
.1,
.7,
14
9.0
14
13
16
21
24
15
22
.8,
, 15
.7,
.6,
.2,
.9,
.9,
• 9,
.5,
15
.9
13
14
17
23
26
20
26
.2,
, 19
.6,
.7,
.1,
.4,
.7,
.1,
.7,
16
.1
15
15
17
24
28
20
27
.2
9
.2
.2
.7
.9
.2
.9
.2
, 17
24.7
, 17
, 17
, 19
, 26
, 29
, 21

.7

.7
.7,
.8,
.7
.9,
.3




19.8
22.0

32.6


     Columns and analytical  conditions are described in Sect.  6.9.2,  6.9.3,
     and 6.9.4.

     Column and  conditions described in Sect.  6.9.2.  More than one peak
     listed does not implicate the total  number of peaks characteristic of the
     multi-component analyte.   Listed peaks indicate only the  ones chosen for
     summation in the quantification.
                                     127

-------
TABLE 2.  SINGLE LABORATORY ACCURACY, PRECISION AND METHOD DETECTION LIMITS
           (MDLS)  FOR ANALYTES FROM REAGENT WATER,  GROUNDWATER,  AND TAP WATER3

                                        Accuracy  and  Standard  Deviation Data
Analvte
Aldrin
Al achl or
Aldrin
Atrazine

alpha-Chlordane

gamma-Chl ordane

Chlordane

Dieldrin

Endrin

Heptachlor

Heptachlor Epoxide

Hexachl orobenzene
0.09
Hexachl orocycl opentadi ene

Lindane

Hethoxychlor

cis-Nonachlor

trans-Nonachlor

Simazine

Toxaphene

Aroclor 1016
Aroclor 1221
Aroclor 1232
Aroclor 1242
Aroclor 1248

Aroclor 1254

Aroclor 1260

«q/L
0.075
0.225
0.007
2.4

0.006

0.012

0.14

0.012

0.063

0.003

0.004

0.002
103
0.13

0.003

0.96

0.027

0.011

6.8

1.0

0.08
15.0
0.48
0.31
0.102

0.102

0.189

Concen-
tration*
IM/L
0.15
0.50
0.05
5.0
20.0
0.06
0.35
0.06
0.35
0.17
3.4
0.10
3.6
0.10
3.6
0.032
1.2
0.04
1.4
0.003
6.6
0.15
0.35
0.03
1.2
2.10
7.03
0.06
0.45
0.06
0.35
25
60
10
80
1.0
180
3.9
4.7
3.6
3.4
1.8
1.7
2.0
1.8
Reagent Water
R* SRd
86
102
106
85
95
95
86
95
86
NA
NA
87
114
119
99
77
80
100
115
104
101
73
73
91
111
100
98
110
82
95
86
99
65
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
-
NA
-
NA
NA
9.5
13.4
20.0
16.2
5.2
3.5
17.0
0.4
18.5
8.0
3.6
17.1
9.1
29.8
6.5
10.2
7.4
15.6
6.6
13.5
4.4
5.1
11.7
6.5
5.0
21.0
10.9
15.2
21.3
9.6
•21.8
8.3
3.6
12.6
15.3
6.6
8.3
13.5
6.0
11.5
-
10.4
-
20.7
-
Groundwater
R S»
100
_
86
95
86
83
94
86
95
— ••
—
67
94
94
100
37
71
90
103
91
88
87
69
88
109
-
_
101
93
83
94
97
59
-
-
-
-
-
_
_
-
-
_
_
-
11.0
_
16.3
7.3
9.1
4.4
10.2
5.3
14.5
. —
_
10.1
8.6
20.2
11.3
6.8
9.8
14.2
6.9
10.9
13.4
5.1
4.8
7.7
3.4
-
_
7.2
18.3
7.1
17.2
9.2
18.0
-
-
_
_
_
_
_
_
—
—
_
-
Tap
R
69
_
_
108
91
85
91
83
91
105
95
92
81
106
85
200
106
112
81
100

191
109
103
93
-
_
93
87
73
86
102
67
110
114
97
92
86
96
_
84
_
85
_
88
Water
SR
9.0
_
_
10.9
3.1
7.1
2.4
14.7
6.0
12.4
9.6
15.7
14.0
14.0
12.4
22.6
16.8
7.5
5.9
15.6

18.5
14.3
8.1
18.4
-
_
14.3
5.4
4.1
5.1
13.4
6.2
9.5
13.5
7.5
9.6
7.3
7.4
_
9.9
_
11.8
_
19.8
                                    128

-------
                             Table 2  (Continued)
NA =  Not applicable.  A separate set of aqueous standards was not analyzed,
and the response factor for reagent water was used to calculate a recovery for
the tap water matrix.

aData corrected for amount detected in blank and represent the mean of  5-8
samples.
     = method detection limit in sample in /ig/L;  calculated by multiplying
standard deviation (S) times the students' t value appropriate for a 99%
confidence level and a standard deviation estimate with n-1 degrees of
freedom.

CR = average percent recovery.

dSR = Standard deviation  about  percent recovery.

*  Refers to  concentration levels used to generate R and SR data for the three
types of water Matrices, not for MDL determinations.

- No analyses conducted.
                                      129

-------
     Ul
     CD
co

IU
c
o
*o .— »
0) _J
r—
t.
O


•M
>> «.
"J5
c c
r-»r- O>
C 0> *-_rJ
f- t-
CO Q.



(A
«BX
S- > C7>
3 O 51
u oCi
u o>
«CQi

Q)
sl^
goe-j
•**• • o>
r— O 53.
o. o
.
O CM
CM CM
CD O




CM CD
in CD
CO CD
IX IX
at co
* 0
O i-i
0 O



to
•«*• CD
• •
CM CO
en CM
CO 0


fV t 	 - 	
V>J »***
CD CO
in •
1 CD
in i
in r-i
o
F-J O




a>
c
0)
Nl
C
CD
1-1
O
Simazine
Hexachlor


o to
O I-H
0 CD
IX ,X
CM in
^t CD
i-H i-H
O* CD




•-H CD
O l-H
0 0
I J , J
in (>.
0 0
O 0




O CO
CD 0
CD CD
1 1
O 0
en «*•
0 0
0 0


_
f^, O
en in
co
i-H CO
^J- o
CD in
o o











Lindane
Alachlor


CM O
0 0
r— I to
CM CM
0 CD




r-l CM
O O
0 0
,x ,x
f1^ l-H
O CO
•-H O
0 CD




CM O
0 0
CD* CD
CM tO
o to
O O
1—1 I-H


•—I CM
*s- <*•
O O
o o










s_
Heptachlol
Aldrin


CM CM
0 0
0 O
IX IX
'Js 'Z5
en co
CM en
0 CD




CM i-H
0 0
o o
IX IX
CM I-H
co cn
0 0
0 0




CD O
CD O
• •
^^ C^J
O 0
CM r»»
in CM
cn o
CD I-H


CM CO
•<*• in
i t
0 I-H
0 0




O)
T3
X
O
Q.

Cy
c_
Heptachlol
Dieldrin


CM
0
O
IX
to
co
o




1— 1
CD
O
IX
to
I-H
I— 1
CD




I— 1
CD
958C+0.
o


o
in
0
r-l
O











c
si
•o
LU


O O)
CM r-H
0 0
IX IX
in in
CM CM
O CD




CM tO
rH CD
O O
IX IX
m •«*•
—i CO
i-H O
O 0




in to
•-I O
d o
o o
o i--
in co
Ot O
0 ~


o o
o en
i i
O ft
CM in
o o









S-
o
Methoxychi
Chlordane


en
to
o
to
CM
O




i-H
O
IX
r— 1
CO
r-H
CD




CM
'0+3Z80
t— i


O
CD
1
CO
to
m











Toxaphene


in
CD
»-H
CD




r— 1
CO
CD
IX
to
o
r— 1
CD




r-H
CO
856C+0.
CD


CD
CO
en
CD
in
0











to
r—t
O
I-H
CO
o
Q.


in
o
o
IX
1—4
29
CM
CD




i— 1
CD
IX
CM
CM
CD




r— 1
O
CD
CM
00
CD


CD
CD
in
i
o
in
o











in
CM
I-H
CO
o
Q.


•o
0)


4->
.*=
u
•r—
1
£

•o
•*->
£
O
i.
o
(0
r—
1
=J
0>
O
2
ro
U
•i—
cx
ex
re
o>
ro
s-
c
o
•p-
ro
S_
**•*
C
O)
u
o
u
1—
                                               130

-------
                                           « ?!    1'
                                           . O
u _«•»
8 I-
Z-T»— ••
°5ca ae
•• ^^
•o »/»»-•
01 •• 
S«/> Z UJ
U. *C 3"£ Z

oil •-« o
llzi
O •"• ** O ' ,



sp/q&piv utjpug












dU9ZUdQOJtOTlfOH^
JOIlJOBdoJ^




.

«

.'

j
1 •
J .
• J
^ .
^
r
1




3
1 -
1
^> „



caH ^ •
• *
1.
J-
4.
1
•
n j2 ® **•
•* ••" 9
82 *****
eL £" "

S ^ * •"°
** *
M * £
W ==IS J5
O a « JB
8 » 3 S
»• 2 a.
a ?.5k
« * -o
a l^s
c o^ •
JI 3 *•
C o
 Al ^-
8zSis
£f N e
8^|lc
s^^li
5 U "
* *2c
s 111
f^-£"°
•wlo^
o «5|
•»• -^-i
ft» 3r-T
x «5;

V
3
131

-------
COLUMN:  Fused silica capillary
LIQUID PHASE:  06-1
FILM THICKNESS:.  l.Oum
COLUMN DIMENSIONS:  0.32mm ID,
                    30 M  long
                      els
•g
1
                   i
                             N

                             Ki
                   O   N

                   1   I
          Figure 2.
                          10       15       20
                                 TIME (MBO
                               25
            30
35
Extract of reagent water spiked at 20 wg/L with atrazlne,
60 ug/L with slmazlne, 0.45 uo/L with cis-nonachlor, and
0.35 ug/L with hexachlorocyclopentadlene,, heptachlor,
alpha chlordane, gamma chlordane, and trans-nonachlor.
                                      132

-------
       I

       R
£     o-
r~     ••»

I   .1
s
       IB
     ••o
0-IU.O
                                                                                     M
                                                 133'

-------

134

-------

!    J
§"•!«••»•
«*• OD   «/»
 MO   K
       •• O
                                                                                                              3

                                                                                                              e
                                                                                                                       i
                                                                                                                        *
                                                                                                                       in

                                                                                                                       t
                                                                135

-------

o.
3
   «•«/»
     »-o
O-JU.
                                                                                               ft
8

3

8
                                                                                                       2
                                                                                                  ac    ».
                                                                                                2
                                                                                                v*     in
                                                                                                       "5.

                                                   136

-------
  I
  c

  *
(/)*-•
•I
 i
                                                            N
                                                            n
                                                            a-

                                                                 M



                                                                 *
                                                                2!

                                                                §.
                               137

-------
ex.
8
T»   t/)
f> •• t/>
MUJ iu
5* »MA   !S"

3S5S
O »-• t-»o
                                                                  I
                                                                  .u
                                                                      N
                                                                      s
                                                                      g

                                                                            CM
                                                                            X
                                                                            o>
                                                                            00

                                                                            £
                                        138

-------
     I
*   »
m    e
                                                                       ft
                                                                        .8  £

                                                                      •4
                                                                      e
                                                                            i
                                          139

-------
    I
    a:
*
u
s  1°
T>  «/»«—
V ••
M
s»
-j--j
o •-«»-> o
                                                    n~
     •
    
-------
I
*»
1C
                                                                ft
                                                                •
                                                                  8*
                                                                   5
                                                                    *
                                                                S

                                                                e«  2!
                                                                   §.
                                                                   II
                                141

-------

-------
METHOD 507.  DETERMINATION OF NITROGEN- AND PHOSPHORUS-CONTAINING PESTICIDES
     IN WATER BY GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY WITH A NITROGEN-PHOSPHORUS DETECTOR
                                Revision 2.0
  T. Engels  (Battelle Columbus Laboratories) - National Pesticide Survey
       Method 1,  Revision 1.0 (1987)

    R.  L.  Graves  - Method 507,  Revision 2.0 (1989)
                ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
                    OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
                   U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
                          CINCINNATI, OHIO 45268
                                    143

-------
                                  METHOD 507

   DETERMINATION OF NITROGEN-AND PHOSPHORUS-CONTAINING PESTICIDES IN WATER
          BY GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY WITH A  NITROGEN-PHOSPHORUS DETECTOR
1.   SCOPE AND APPLICATION

     1.1  This is a gas chromatographic (GC) method applicable to the
          determination of certain nitrogen- and phosphorus-containing
          pesticides in ground water and finished drinking water. (1)  The
          following compounds can be determined using this method:
               Analvte
Chemical Abstract Services
	Registry Number	
               Alachlor                      15972-60-8
               Ametryn                         834-12-8
               Atraton                        1610-17-9
               Atrazine                       1912-24-9
               Bromacil                        314-40-9
               Butachlor                     23184-66-9
               Butyl ate                       2008-41-5
               Carboxin                       5234-68-5
               Chlorpropham                    101-21-3
               Cycloate                       1134-23-2
               Diazinon(a)*                    333-41-5
               Dichlorvos                       62-73-7
               Diphenamid                      957-51-7
               Disulfoton*          .           298-04-4
               Disulfoton sulfone*            2497-06-5
               Disulfoton sulfoxide(a)        2497-07-6
               EPTC                            759-94-4
               Ethoprop                      13194-48-4
               Fenamiphos                    22224-92-6
               Fenarimol                     60168-88-9
               Fluridone                     59756-60-4
               Hexazinone                    51235-04-2
               Merphos*                        150-50-5
               Methyl paraoxon                 950-35-6
               Metolachlor                   51218-45-2
               Metribuzin                    21087-64-9
               Mevinphos                      7786-34-7
               MGK 264-                        113-48-4
               Molinate                       2212-67-1
               Napropamide                   15299-99-7
               Norflurazon                   27314-13-2
               Pebulate                       1114-71-2
               Prometon                       1610-18-0
               Prometryn                      7287-19-6
               Pronamide(a)*                 23950-58-5
               Propazine                       139-40-2
               Simazine                        122-34-9
               Simetryn                       1014-70-6
               Stirofos                      22248-79-9
               Tebuthiuron                   34014-18-1
                                      144

-------
               Terbacil                       5902-51-2
               Terbufos(a)*                  13071-79-9
               Terbutryn                       886-50-0
               Triademefon                   43121-43-3
               Tricyclazole                  41814-78-2
               Vernolate                      1929-77-7

           (a)  Compound exhibits aqueous instability.  Samples for which this
               compound is an analyte of interest must be extracted
               immediately (Sections 11.1 through 11.3).

            *  These compounds are only qualitatively identified in the
               National Pesticides Survey (NPS) Program.  These compounds are
               not quantitated because control over precision has not been
               accomplished.

     1.2  This method has been validated in a single laboratory and estimated
          detection limits (EDLs) have been determined for the analytes above
          (Sect. 13).  Observed detection limits may vary among waters,
          depending upon the nature, of interferences in the sample matrix and
          the specific instrumentation used.

     1.3  This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of
          analysts experienced in the use of GC and in the interpretation of
          gas chromatograms.  Each analyst must demonstrate the ability to
          generate acceptable results with this method using the procedure
          described in Sect. 10.3.

     1.4  Analytes that are not separated chromatographically, i.e., analytes
          which have very similar retention times, cannot be individually
          identified and measured in the same calibration mixture or water
          sample unless an alternative technique for identification and
          quantitation exist (Section 11.5).

     1.5  When this method is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for any or
          all of the analytes above, analyte identifications should be
          confirmed by at least one additional qualitative technique.

2.   SUMMARY OF METHOD

     2.1  A measured volume of sample of approximately 1 L is extracted with
          methylene chloride by shaking in a separatory funnel or mechanical
          tumbling in a bottle.  The methylene chloride extract is isolated,
          dried .and concentrated to a volume of 5 ml during a solvent exchange
          to methyl tert-butyl ether (MTBE).  Chromatographic conditions are
          described which permit the separation and measurement of the
          analytes in the extract by Capillary Column GC with a nitrogen-
          phosphorus detector (NPD).

3.   DEFINITIONS

     3.1  Internal standard — A pure analyte(s) added to a solution in known
          amount(s) and used to measure the relative responses of other method
          analytes and surrogates that are components of the same solution.
          The internal standard must be an analyte that is not a sample
          component.

                                      145

-------
3.2  Surrogate analyte — A pure analyte(s), which is extremely unlikely
     to be found in any sample, and which is added to a sample aliquot in
     known amount(s) before extraction and is measured with the same
     procedures used to measure other sample components.  The purpose of
     a surrogate analyte is to monitor method performance with each
     sample.

3.3  Laboratory duplicates (LD1 and LD2) — Two sample aliquots taken in
     the analytical laboratory and analyzed separately with identical
     procedures.  Analyses of LD1 and LD2 give a measure of the precision
     associated with laboratory procedures, but not with sample
     collection, preservation, or storage procedures.

3.4  Field duplicates (FD1 and FD2) — Two separate samples collected at
     the same time and place under identical circumstances and treated
     exactly the same throughout field and laboratory procedures.
     Analyses of FD1 and FD2 give a measure of the precision associated
     with sample collection, preservation and storage, as well as with
     laboratory procedures.

3.5  Laboratory reagent blank (LRB) — An aliquot of reagent water that
     is treated exactly as a sample including exposure to all  glassware,
     equipment, solvents, reagents, internal standards, and surrogates
     that are used with.other samples.  The LRB is used to determine if
     method analytes or other interferences are present in the laboratory
     environment, the reagents, or the apparatus.

3.6  Field reagent blank (FRB) — Reagent water placed in a sample
     container in the laboratory and treated as a sample in all  respects,
     including exposure to sampling site conditions, storage,  preserva-
     tion and all analytical procedures.  The purpose of the FRB is to
     determine if method analytes or other interferences are present in
     the field environment.

3.7  Laboratory performance check solution (LPC) — A solution of method
     analytes, surrogate compounds, and internal standards used to
     evaluate the performance of the instrument system with respect to a
     defined set of method criteria.

3.8  Laboratory fortified blank (LFB) — An aliquot of reagent water to
     which known quantities of the method analytes are added in the
     laboratory.  The LFB is analyzed exactly like a sample, and its
     purpose is to determine whether the methodology is in control, and
     whether the laboratory is capable of making accurate and  precise
     measurements at the required method detection limit.

3.9  Laboratory fortified sample matrix (LFM) -- An aliquot of an
     environmental  sample to which known quantities of the method
     analytes are added in the laboratory.  The LFM is analyzed exactly
     like a sample, and its purpose is to determine whether the sample
     matrix contributes bias to the analytical  results. The background
     concentrations of the analytes in the sample matrix must  be
     determined in a separate aliquot and the measured values  in the LFM
     corrected for background concentrations.
                                 146

-------
     3.10 Stock standard solution -- A concentrated solution containing a
          single certified standard that is a method analyte, or a
          concentrated solution of a single analyte prepared in the laboratory
          with an assayed reference compound.  Stock standard solutions are
          used to prepare primary dilution standards.

     3.11 Primary dilution standard solution — A solution of several analytes
          prepared in the laboratory from stock standard solutions and diluted
          as needed to prepare calibration solutions and other needed analyte
          solutions.

     3.12 Calibration standard (CAL) — A solution prepared from the primary
          dilution standard solution and stock standard solutions of the
          internal standards and surrogate analytes.  The CAL solutions are
          used to calibrate the instrument response with respect to analyte
          concentration.

     3.13 Quality control sample (QCS) — A sample matrix containing method
          analytes or a solution of method analytes in a water miscible
          solvent which is used to fortify reagent water or environmental
          samples.  The QCS is obtained from a source external to the
          laboratory, and is used to check laboratory performance with
          externally prepared test materials.

4.   INTERFERENCES

     4.1  Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents,
          reagents, glassware and other sample processing apparatus that lead
          to discrete artifacts or elevated baselines in gas chromatograms.
          All reagents and apparatus must be routinely demonstrated to be free
          from interferences under the conditions of the analysis, by running
          laboratory reagent blanks as described in Sect. 10.2.

          4.1.1  Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned.  (2) Clean all glass-
                 ware as soon as possible after use by thoroughly rinsing with
                 the last solvent used in it.  Follow by washing with hot
                 water and detergent and thorough rinsing with tap and reagent
                 water.  Drain dry, and heat in an oven or muffle furnace at
                 400°C for 1 hour.  Do not heat volumetric ware.  Thermally
                 stable materials might not be eliminated by this treatment.
                 Thorough rinsing with acetone may be substituted for the
                 heating.  After drying and cooling, seal and store glassware
                 in a clean environment to prevent any accumulation of dust or
                 other contaminants.  Store inverted or capped with aluminum
                 foil.

          4.1.2  The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to
                 minimize interference problems.  Purification of solvents by
                 distillation in all-glass systems may be required.  WARNING:
                 When a solvent is purified, stabilizers added by the
                 manufacturer may be removed thus potentially making the
                 solvent hazardous.  Also, when a solvent is purified,
                 preservatives added by the manufacturer are removed thus
                 potentially reducing the shelf-life.
                                      147

-------
     4.2   Interfering  contamination may occur when a sample containing low
           concentrations  of  analytes  is analyzed  immediately following a
           sample  containing  relatively high concentrations of analytes.
           Between-sample  rinsing of the sample syringe and associated
           equipment with  MTBE can minimize sample cross contamination.  After
           analysis of  a sample containing high concentrations of analytes, one
           or more injections of MTBE  should be made to ensure that accurate
           values  are obtained for the next sample.

     4.3   Matrix  interferences may be caused by contaminants that are
           coextracted  from the sample.  Also, note that all the analytes
           listed  in the scope and application section are not resolved from
           each other on any  one column, i.e., one analyte of interest may be
           an interferant  for another  analyte of interest.  The extent of
           matrix  interferences will vary considerably from source to source,
           depending upon  the water sampled.  Further processing of sample
           extracts may be necessary.  Positive Identifications should be
           confirmed (Sect. 11.5).

     4.4   It is important that samples and working standards be contained in
           the same solvent.  The solvent for working standards must be the
           same as the  final  solvent used in sample preparation.  If this is
           not the case, chromatographic comparability of standards to sample
           may be  affected.

5.   SAFETY

     5.1   The toxicity or carcinogen!city of each reagent used in this method
           has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound must
           be treated as a potential health hazard.  Accordingly, exposure to
           these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level.  The
           laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file
           of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals
           specified in this method.  A reference file of material  safety data
           sheets should also be made  available to all personnel involved in
           the chemical analysis.  Additional  references to laboratory safety
           are available and have been identified (3-5)  for the information of
           the analyst.

     5.2   WARNING:  When  a solvent is purified,  stabilizers added by the
          manufacturer may be removed thus potentially making the solvent
           hazardous.

6.   APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT  (All  specifications are suggested.  Catalog
     numbers are included for illustration only.)

     6.1  Sample bottle — Borosilicate,  1-L volume with graduations (Wheaton
          Media/Lab bottle 219820 or equivalent), fitted with screw caps lined
          with TFE-fluorocarbon.   Protect samples from light.   The container
          must be washed  and dried as described  in Sect.  4.1.1  before use to
          minimize contamination.   Cap liners are cut to fit from sheets
           (Pierce Catalog No. 012736 or equivalent)  and extracted  with
          methanol overnight prior to use.
                                      148

-------
6.2  GLASSWARE

     6.2.1  Separatory funnel — 2000-mL, with TFE-fluorocarbon stopcock,
            ground glass or TFE-fluorocarbon stopper.

     6.2.2  Tumbler bottle — 1.7-L (Wheaton Roller Culture Vessel or
            equivalent), with TFE-fluorocarbon lined screw cap.  Cap
            liners are cut to fit from sheets (Pierce Catalog No. 012736)
            and extracted with methanol overnight prior to use.

     6.2.3  Flask, Erlenmeyer — 500-mL.

     6.2.4  Concentrator tube, Kuderna-Danish (K-D) — 10- or 25-mL,
            graduated (Kontes K-570050-2525 or K-570050-1025 or
            equivalent).  Calibration must be checked at the volumes
            employed in the test.  Ground glass stoppers are used to
            prevent evaporation of extracts.

     6.2.5  Evaporative flask, K-D — 500-mL (Kontes K-570001-0500 or
            equivalent).  Attach to concentrator tube with springs.

     6.2;6  Snyder column, K-D — Three-ball macro (Kontes K-503000-0121
            or equivalent).

     6.2.7  Snyder column, K-D — Two-ball micro (Kontes K-569001-0219 or
            equivalent).

     6.2.8  Vials — glass, 5- to 10-mL capacity with TFE-fluorocarbon
            lined screw cap.

6.3  Separatory funnel shaker (Optional) — Capable of holding 2-L
     separatory funnels and shaking them with rocking motion to achieve
     thorough mixing of separatory funnel contents (available from
     Eberbach Co. in Ann Arbor, MI or other suppliers).

6.4  Tumbler — Capable of holding tumbler bottles and tumbling them
     end-over-end at 30 turns/min (Associated Design and Mfg. Co.,
     Alexandria, VA. or other suppliers).

6.5  Boiling stones — Carborundum, #12 granules (Arthur H. Thomas Co.
     #1590-033 or equivalent).  Heat at 400°C for 30 min prior to use.
     Cool and store in desiccator.

6.6  Water bath — Heated, capable of temperature control (± 2°C).  The
     bath should be used in a hood.

6.7  Balance — Analytical, capable of accurately weighing to the nearest
     0.0001 g.

6.8  GAS CHROMATOGRAPH — Analytical system complete with temperature
     programmable GC suitable for use with capillary columns and all
     required accessories including syringes, analytical columns, gases,
     detector and stripchart recorder.  A data system is recommended for
     measuring peak areas.  Table 1 lists retention times observed for


                                 149

-------
          method analytes using the columns and analytical conditions
          described below.

          6.8.1  Column 1 (Primary column) — 30 m long x 0.25 mm I.D. DB-5
                 bonded fused silica column, 0.25 /zm film thickness (J&W
                 Scientific) or equivalent.  Helium carrier gas flow is
                 established at 30 cm/sec linear velocity and oven temperature
                 is programmed from 60°C to 300°C at 4°C/min.  Data presented
                 in this method were obtained using this column.  The
                 injection volume was 2 0L in splitless mode with a 45 s
                 delay.  The injector temperature was 250°C and the detector
                 temperature was 300°C.  Alternative columns may be used in
                 accordance with the provisions described in Sect. 10.4.

          6.8.2  Column 2 (Confirmation column) — 30 m long x 0.25 mm
                 I.D.DB-1701 bonded fused silica column, 0.25 jum film
                 thickness (J&W Scientific) or equivalent.  Helium carrier gas
                 flow is established at 30 cm/sec linear velocity and oven
                 temperature is programmed from 60C to 300°C at 4°C/min.

          6.8.3, Detector — Nitrogen-phosphorus (NPD).  A NPD was used to
                 generate the validation data presented in this method.
                 Alternative detectors, including a mass spectrometer, may be
                 used in accordance with the provisions described in Sect.
                 10.4.

7.   REAGENTS AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS - - WARNING:  When a solvent is
     purified,  stabilizers added by the manufacturer are removed thus
     potentially making the solvent hazardous.   Also, when a solvent is
     purified, preservatives added by the manufacturer are removed thus
     potentially reducing the shelflife.

     7.1  Acetone,  methylene chloride,  methyl  tert.-butyl ether (MTBE) --
          Distilled-in-glass quality or equivalent.

     7.2  Phosphate buffer,  pH 7 — Prepare by mixing 29.6 ml 0.1 N HC1 and 50
          ml 0.1 M dipotassium phosphate.

     7.3  Sodium chloride (NaCl),  crystal,  ACS grade — Heat treat in  a
          shallow tray at 450°C for a minimum of 4 hours to remove interfering
          organic substances.

     7.4  Sodium sulfate,  granular, anhydrous,  ACS grade — Heat treat in a
          shallow tray at 450°C for a minimum of 4 hours to remove interfering
          organic substances.

     7.5  Sodium thiosulfate, granular,  anhydrous,  ACS grade.

     7.6  Triphenylphosphate (TPP)  — 98% purity,  for use as internal  standard
          (available from Aldrich  Chemical  Co.).

     7.7  l,3-Dimethyl-2-nitrobenzene — 98% purity,  for use as surrogate
          standard  (available from Aldrich  Chemical  Co.).
                                     150

-------
7.8  Mercuric Chloride — ACS grade (Aldrich Chemical Co.) - for use as a
     bactericide.  If any other bactericide can be shown to work as well
     as mercuric chloride, it may be used instead.

7.9  Reagent water — Reagent water is defined as a water that is
     reasonably free of contamination that would prevent the
     determination of any analyte of interest.  Reagent water used to
     generate the validation data in this method was distilled water
     obtained from the Magnetic Springs Water Co., Columbus, Ohio.

7.10 STOCK STANDARD SOLUTIONS (1.00 /jg/juL) — Stock standard solutions
     may be purchased as certified solutions or prepared from pure
     standard materials using the following procedure:

     7.10.1 Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing
            approximately 0.0100 g of pure material.  Dissolve the
            material in MTBE and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric
            flask.  The stock solution for simazine should be prepared in
            methanol.  Larger volumes may be used at the convenience of
            the analyst.  If compound purity is certified at 96% or
            greater, the weight may be used without correction to
            calculate the concentration of the stock standard.
            Commercially prepared stock standards may be used at any
            concentration if they are certified by the manufacturer or by
            an independent source.

     7.10.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into
            TFE-fluorocarbon-sealed screw cap amber vials.  Store at room
            temperature and protect from light.

     7.10.3 Stock standard solutions should be replaced after two months
            or sooner if comparison with laboratory fortified blanks, or
            QC samples indicate a problem.

7.11 INTERNAL STANDARD SOLUTION — Prepare the internal standard solution
     by accurately weighing approximately 0.0500 g of pure TPP.  Dissolve
     the TPP in MTBE and dilute to volume in a 100-mL volumetric flask.
     Transfer the internal standard solution to a TFE-fluorocarbon-sealed
     screw cap bottle and store at room temperature.  Addition of 50 #L
     of the internal standard solution to 5 mL of sample extract results
     in a final TPP concentration of 5.0 /zg/mL.  Solution should be
     replaced when ongoing QC (Sect. 10) indicates a problem.  Note that
     TPP has been shown to be an effective internal standard for the
     method analytes (1), but other compounds may be used if the quality
     control requirements in Sect. 10 are met.

7.12 SURROGATE STANDARD SOLUTION — Prepare the surrogate standard
     solution by accurately weighing approximately 0.0250 g of pure
     l,3-dimethyl-2-nitrobenzene.  Dissolve the 1,3-dimethyl-
     2-nitrobenzene in MTBE and dilute to volume in a 100-mL volumetric
     flask.  Transfer the surrogate standard solution to a
     TFE-fluorocarbon-sealed screw cap bottle and store at room
     temperature.  Addition of 50 #L of the surrogate standard solution
     to a 1-L sample prior to extraction results in a 1,3-dimethyl-
     2-nitrobenzene concentration in the sample of 12.5 /jg/L.  Solution
     should be replaced when ongoing QC (Sect. 10) indicates a problem.

                                 151

-------
          Note that l,3-dimethyl-2-nitrobenzene has been shown to be an
          effective surrogate standard for the method analytes (1), but other
          compounds may be used if the quality control requirements in Sect.
          10 are met.

     7.13 LABORATORY PERFORMANCE CHECK SOLUTION — Prepare the laboratory
          performance check solution by adding 5 /tL of the vernolate stock
          solution, 0.5 mL of the bromacil stock solution, 30 jttL of the
          prometon stock solution, 15 /*L of the atrazine stock solution, 1.0
          mL of the surrogate solution, and 500 (j.1 of the internal standard
          solution to a 100-mL volumetric flask.  Dilute to volume with MTBE
          and thoroughly mix the solution.  Transfer to a TFE-fluorocarbon-
          sealed screw cap bottle and store at room temperature.   Solution
          should be replaced when ongoing QC (Section 10) indicates a problem.

8.   SAMPLE COLLECTION. PRESERVATION. AND STORAGE

     8.1  Grab samples must be collected in glass containers.  Conventional
          sampling practices (6) should be followed;  however, the bottle must
          not be prerinsed with sample before collection.

     8.2  SAMPLE PRESERVATION AND STORAGE

          8.2.1  Add mercuric chloride (See 7.8) to the sample bottle in
                 amounts to produce a concentration of 10 mg/L.   Add 1  mL of a
                 solution containing 10 mg/mL of mercuric chloride in reagent
                 water to the sample bottle at the sampling site  or in  the
                 laboratory before shipping to the sampling site.  A major
                 disadvantage of mercuric chloride is that it is  a highly
                 toxic chemical; mercuric chloride must be handled with
                 caution,  and samples containing mercuric chloride must be
                 disposed of properly.

          8.2.2  If residual  chlorine is present,  add 80 mg of sodium
                 thiosulfate per liter of sample to the sample bottle prior to
                 collecting the sample.

          8.2.3  After the sample  is collected in  a bottle containing
                 preservative(s),  seal  the bottle  and shake vigorously  for
                 1  min.

          8.2.4  The samples  must  be iced or  refrigerated at  4°C  away from
                 light from the  time of collection  until  extraction.  Pre-
                 servation study results  indicated  that  most  method  analytes
                 present  in samples  were  stable  for 14  days when  stored under
                 these conditions.   (1).   The  analytes  disulfoton sulfoxide,
                 diazinon,  pronamide,  and terbufos  exhibited  significant
                 aqueous  instability,  and samples to  be  analyzed  for  these
                 compounds must  be extracted  immediately.   The analytes
                 carboxin,  EPTC, fluridone, metolachlor,  napropamide,
                 tebuthiuron,  and terbacil  exhibited  recoveries of less than
                 60% after 14  days.   Analyte  stability may  be  affected  by  the
                 matrix; therefore,  the analyst  should verify  that the
                 preservation  technique is  applicable to  the  samples  under
                 study.
                                     152

-------
     8.3  Extract Storage — Extracts should be stored at 4°C away from light.
          Preservation study results indicate that most analytes are stable
          for 28 days; however, a 14-day maximum extract storage time is
          recommended.  The analyst should verify appropriate extract holding
          times applicable to the samples under study.

9.  CALIBRATION

     9.1  Establish GC operating parameters equivalent to those indicated in
          Sect. 6.8.  The GC system may be calibrated using either the
          internal standard technique (Sect. 9.2) or the external standard
          technique (Sect. 9.3).  Be aware that NPDs may exhibit instability
          (i.e., fail  to hold calibration curves over time).  The analyst may,
          when analyzing samples for target analytes which are very rarely
          found, prefer to analyze on a daily basis a low level (e.g. 5 to 10
          times detection limit or 1/2 times the regulatory limit, whichever
          is less), sample (containing all analytes of interest) and require
          some minimum sensitivity (e.g. 1/2 full scale deflection) to show
          that if the analyte were present it would be detected.  The analyst
          may then quantitate using single point calibration (Sect. 9.2.5 or
          9.3.4).  NOTE:  Calibration standard solutions must be prepared such
          that no unresolved analytes are mixed together.

     9.2  INTERNAL STANDARD CALIBRATION PROCEDURE — To use this approach, the
          analyst must select one or more internal standards compatible in
          analytical behavior to the compounds of interest.  The analyst must
          further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is
          not affected by method or matrix interferences.  TPP has been
          identified as a suitable internal standard.

          9.2.1  Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three
                 (recommend five) concentration levels for each analyte of
                 interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to
                 a volumetric flask. If Merphos is to be determined, calibrate
                 with DEF (S,S,S-tributylphosphoro-trithioate).  To each
                 calibration standard, add a known constant amount of one or
                 more of the internal standards, and dilute to volume with
                 MTBE.  The lowest standard should represent analyte
                 concentrations near, but above, their respective EDLs.  The
                 remaining standards should bracket the analyte concentrations
                 expected in the sample extracts, or should define the working
                 range of the detector.

          9.2.2  Analyze each calibration standard according to the procedure
                 described in Sect. 11.4.  Tabulate response (peak height or
                 area) against concentration for each compound and internal
                 standard.  Calculate the response factor (RF) for each
                 analyte and surrogate using Equation 1.
                 RF =      s   is               Equation 1

                         (Ais)(Cs)

                 where :

                 As  = Response for the analyte.


                                      153

-------
             Ais  = Response  for the  internal  standard.

             Cis = Concentration of the internal standard /*g/L.

             Cs  = Concentration of the analyte to be measured jug/L.

     9.2.3   If the  RF  value over  the  working range  is  constant  (20%  RSD
             or less) the  average  RF can  be used for calculations.
             Alternatively,  the results can be used  to  plot  a  calibration
             curve of response  ratios  (As/Ais) vs.  Cs.

     9.2.4   The working calibration curve or RF must be verified on  each
             working shift by the  measurement of one or more calibration
             standards.  If  the response  for  any analyte varies  from  the
             predicted  response by more than  ±20%, the  test must be
             repeated using  a fresh calibration standard.  If  the
             repetition also fails, a  new calibration curve must be
             generated  for that analyte using freshly prepared standards.

     9.2.5   Single point calibration  is  a viable alternative  to a
             calibration curve.  Prepare  single point standards from  the
             secondary dilution  standards in  MTBE.   The single point
             standard should  be  prepared  at a  concentration that produces
             a response that  deviates  from the sample extract response by
             no more than 20%.

     9.2.6   Verify calibration  standards periodically, recommend at  least
             quarterly, by analyzing a standard prepared from reference
            material obtained  from an independent source.  Results from
            these analyses must be within the limits used to routinely
            check calibration.

9.3  EXTERNAL STANDARD CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

     9.3.1  Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three
             (recommend five) concentration levels for each analyte of
            interest and surrogate compound by adding volumes of one or
            more stock standards to a volumetric flask.  If Merphos  is to
            be determined, calibrate with DEF (S,S,S-tributylphosphoro-
            trithioate).   Dilute to volume with MTBE.   The lowest
            standard should represent analyte concentrations near,  but
            above, their respective EDLs.  The remaining standards  should
            bracket the analyte concentrations expected in the sample
            extracts,  or should define the working range of the detector.

     9.3.2  Starting with  the standard of lowest concentration,  analyze
            each  calibration standard according to Sect. 11.4 and
            tabulate response (peak height or area)  versus the
            concentration  in the standard.   The results can  be used to
            prepare a calibration  curve for each compound.
            Alternatively,  if the  ratio of response  to concentration
            (calibration  factor) is  a constant over  the working range
            (20%  RSD or less),  linearity  through the origin  can be
            assumed and the  average  ratio or  calibration factor can be
            used  in  place  of a calibration  curve.
                                154

-------
          9.3.3  The working  calibration  curve or calibration  factor must  be
                verified  on  each working day by the measurement  of a minimum
                of two  calibration  check standards, one  at  the beginning  and
                one at  the end  of the  analysis day.  These  check standards
                should  be at two different  concentration levels  to verify the
                calibration  curve.   For  extended periods of analysis  (greater
                than  8  hrs.),  it is strongly recommended that check standards
                be interspersed with samples at regular  intervals during  the
                course  of the analyses.  If the response for  any analyte
                varies  from  the predicted response by  more  than  ±20%,  the
                test  must be repeated  using a fresh calibration  standard.  If
                the results  still do not agree, generate a  new calibration
                curve.

          9.3.4  Single  point calibration is a viable alternative to a
                calibration  curve.   Prepare single point standards from the
                secondary dilution  standards in MTBE.  The  single point
                standard  should be  prepared at a concentration that produces
                a response that deviates from the  sample extract response by
                no more than 20%.

          9.3.5  Verify  calibration  standards periodically,  recommend  at least
                quarterly,  by analyzing  a  standard prepared from reference
                material  obtained  from an  independent  source. Results from
                these analyses must be within the  limits used to routinely
                check calibration.

10,   QUALITY CONTROL

     10.1 Minimum  quality control  (QC)  requirements are  initial  demonstration
          of laboratory capability,  determination of  surrogate compound
          recoveries  in  each  sample  and blank, monitoring internal standard
          peak area or height in each sample and  blank  (when internal  standard
          calibration  procedures are being  employed),  analysis of laboratory
          reagent  blanks,  laboratory fortified  samples, laboratory fortified
          blanks,  and  QC samples.

     10.2 Laboratory Reagent Blanks.  Before processing any samples,  the
          analyst  must demonstrate  that all  glassware  and reagent
          interferences are  under control.   Each  time  a set of samples is
          extracted or reagents are changed, a  LRB  must be analyzed.   If
          within the retention time window of any analyte of interest  the  LRB
          produces a peak that would prevent the  determination of that
          analyte, determine the source of contamination  and eliminate the
          interference before processing samples.

     10.3 Initial  Demonstration of Capability.

          10.3.1 Select a representative fortified  concentration   (about 10
                 times EDL or at the regulatory Maximum Contaminant Level,
                 whichever is lower) for each analyte.   Prepare  a sample
                 concentrate (in methanol)  containing each analyte at  1000
                 times selected concentration.   With  a syringe,  add 1  mL of
                 the concentrate to each of at least  four 1-L aliquots of
                 reagent water, and analyze each  aliquot according to
                 procedures  beginning in Sect.  11.

                                     155

-------
      10.3.2  For each  analyte  the  recovery  value  for  all  four  of these
             samples must  fall  in  the  range of  R  ±  30%  (or within R  ± 3SR
             if broader) using the values for R and SR for reagent water
             in Table  2.   For  those compounds that  meet the  acceptance
             criteria,  performance is  considered  acceptable  and  sample
             analysis  may  begin.   For  those compounds that fail  these
             criteria,  this  procedure  must  be repeated using four fresh
             samples until satisfactory performance has been demonstrated.

      10.3.3  The initial demonstration of capability  is used primarily to
             preclude  a laboratory from analyzing unknown sample's  via a
             new,  unfamiliar method prior to obtaining some  experience
             with  it.   It  is expected  that  as laboratory personnel gain
             experience with this  method the quality of data will  improve
             beyond those  required here.

10.4 The analyst  is permitted  to  modify GC columns, GC detectors, GC
     conditions,  continuous extraction techniques, concentration
     techniques  (i.e.  evaporation techniques), internal standards or
     surrogate compounds.   Each time  such  method modifications  are made,
     the analyst  must  repeat the  procedures in Sect. 10.3.

10.5 Assessing  Surrogate  Recovery

     10.5.1 When  surrogate  recovery from a sample  or method blank is <70%
            or >130%,  check (1) calculations to locate possible errors,
             (2) fortifying  solutions  for degradation, (3) contamination,
            and (4) instrument performance.  If those steps do  not reveal
            the cause  of the problem, reanalyze the extract.

     10.5.2 If a  blank extract reanalysis  fails the 70-130% recovery
            criterion, the  problem must be identified and corrected
            before continuing.

     10.5.3 If sample extract reanalysis meets the surrogate recovery
            criterion, report only data for the reanalyzed extract.   If
            sample extract reanalysis continues to fail  the recovery
            criterion, report all  data for that sample as suspect.

10.6 Assessing the Internal  Standard

     10.6.1 When using the internal standard calibration  procedure,  the
            analyst is expected to monitor the IS response (peak area or
            peak height)  of all samples during each analysis day. The IS
            response for any sample chromatogram  should not  deviate  from
            the daily calibration  check standard's IS response by more
            than 30%.

     10.6.2 If >30% deviation  occurs with an individual  extract, optimize
            instrument performance and inject  a second  aliquot of that
            extract.

            10.6.2.1   If the reinjected aliquot produces  an  acceptable
                      internal  standard response  report results  for  that
                      aliquot.
                                156

-------
           10.6.2.2  If a deviation of greater than 30% is obtained for
                     the reinjected extract, analysis of the sample
                     should be repeated beginning with Sect. 11,
                     provided the sample is still available. Otherwise,
                     report results obtained from the reinjected
                     extract, but annotate as suspect.

     10.6.3 If  consecutive samples fail the IS response acceptance
           criterion,  immediately analyze a calibration check  standard.

           10.6.3.1  If the check standard provides a response factor
                     (RF) within 20%  of the predicted value, then  follow
                     procedures  itemized in Sect. 10.6.2 for each  sample
                     failing  the IS response criterion.

            10.6.3.2  If the check standard provides a response factor
                     which deviates more than 20% of the predicted
                     value, then the  analyst must recalibrate, as
                     specified  in Sect. 9.

10.7 Assessing  Laboratory  Performance  - Laboratory  Fortified Blank

     10.7.1 The laboratory must  analyze at  least one  laboratory fortified
            blank (LFB) sample with  every  twenty samples  or one per
            sample set  (all  samples  extracted within  a  24-h period)
            whichever is  greater.  The fortified concentration  of each
            analyte in  the LFB should  be 10 times EDL  or  the MCL,
            whichever is  less.  Calculate  accuracy as  percent recovery
            (X-)-   If the  recovery of  any analyte falls outside the
            control limits (see  Sect.  10.7.2),  that analyte is  judged out
            of control, and the  source of the  problem should be
            identified and resolved  before continuing analyses.

     10.7.2 Until sufficient data become available from within their own
            laboratory, usually a minimum of results from 20 to 30
            analyses, the laboratory should assess laboratory performance
            against the control  limits in Sect.   10.3.2 that are derived
            from the data in Table 2.   When sufficient internal
            performance data becomes available,   develop control limits
            from the mean percent recovery (X) and standard deviation  (S)
            of the percent recovery.  These data are used to establish
            upper and lower control  limits as follows:

            UPPER CONTROL LIMIT  = X + 3S

            LOWER CONTROL LIMIT =  X  - 3S

            After each five to ten new recovery  measurements,  new  control
            limits should be  calculated using only the most recent 20-30
            data  points.  These calculated control limits  should never
            exceed those  established  in Sect. 10.3.2.

      10.7.3  It is  recommended that the laboratory periodically determine
             and  document  its  detection limit capabilities  for  analytes of
             interest.


                                 157

-------
10.7.4 At least quarterly, analyze a QC sample from an outside
       source.
            source.

     10.7.5 Laboratories are encouraged to participate in external
            performance evaluation studies such as the laboratory
            certification programs offered by many states or the studies
            conducted by USEPA.  Performance evaluation studies serve as
            independent checks on the analyst's performance.

10.8 Assessing Analyte Recovery - Laboratory Fortified Sample Matrix

     10.8.1 The laboratory must add' a known concentration to a minimum of
            5% of the routine samples or one sample concentration per
            set,  whichever is greater.  The fortified concentration
            should not be less then the background concentration of the
            sample selected for fortification.   Ideally,  the
            concentration should be the same as that used for the
            laboratory fortified blank (Sect.  10.7).   Over time, samples
            from  all  routine sample sources should be fortified.

     10.8.2 Calculate the percent recovery,  P  of the concentration  for
            each  analyte,  after correcting the  analytical  result,  X,  from
            the fortified sample for the background concentration,  b,
            measured  in  the unfortified sample,  I.e.',:

            P  - 100  (X - b)  / fortifying concentration,

            and compare  these values  to control  limits  appropriate  for
            reagent water data  collected in  the  same  fashion.   If the
            analyzed  unfortified sample is  found to contain  NO  background
            concentrations,  and  the  added  concentrations  are those
            specified  in  Sect.  10.7,  then  the appropriate  control limits
            would  be  the  acceptance  limits  in Sect. 10.7.   If,  on the
            other  hand,  the  analyzed  unfortified sample is found to
            contain background concentration, b, estimate  the. standard
            deviation  at the  background  concentration, sb, using
            regressions or comparable  background data and, similarly,
            estimate the mean, Xa  and standard  deviation,  s , of
            analytical results at' the  total concentration  after
            fortifying..  Then the appropriate percentage control limits
           would be P ± 3sp , where:

           P = 100 X  / (b + fortifying concentration)


           and sp = 100   (sa  + sb f  /fortifying concentration

           For example,  if the background concentration for Analyte A
           was found to be 1 /*g/L and the added amount was also 1 ug/L,
           and upon analysis the laboratory fortified sample measured
           1.6 /j/L,  then the calculated P for this sample would be (1 6
           lig/l minus 1.0 0g/L)/l /fg/L or 60%.   This calculated P is
           compared to control  limits derived  from prior  reagent water
           data.   Assume it is known that analysis of an  interference
           free sample at 1 /jg/L yields an s of 0.12 #g/L and similar
           analysis  at 2.0  /tg/L yields X and s  of 2.01  /jg/L and 0.20

                                158

-------
                /jg/L,  respectively.  The  appropriate  limits  to  judge  the
                reasonableness  of  the  percent  recovery,  60%,  obtained on  the
                fortified matrix sample is  computed as follows:

                [100  (2.01  fig/I) I 2.0 pg/L]
                                                         1/2
                ±3  (100)   [(0.12  fig/I)2 +  (0.20 jug/L)2]    / 1,0 /jg/L =

                100.5% ± 300  (0.233) =

                100.5% ± 70%  or 30% to 170% recovery  of  the  added  analyte.

     10.9  ASSESSING INSTRUMENT SYSTEM - LABORATORY  PERFORMANCE CHECK (LPC) -
          Instrument  performance should be monitored on a daily  basis  by
          analysis  of the LPC  sample.   The LPC  sample  contains compounds
          designed  to indicate appropriate instrument  sensitivity,  column
          performance (primary column)  and chromatographic performance.  LPC
          sample components  and performance  criteria are  listed  in  Table 3.
          Inability to demonstrate  acceptable instrument  performance indicates
          the need  for reevaluation of  the instrument  system.  The  sensitivity
          requirements are  set based on the  EDLs published in this  method.  If
          laboratory EDLs differ from those  listed  in  this method,
          concentrations of the instrument QC standard compounds must  be
          adjusted  to be compatible with the laboratory EDLs.

    10.10  The laboratory may adopt  additional  quality  control  practices for
          use with  this method.  The specific practices that  are most
          productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory  and the nature of
          the samples.  For example, field or laboratory  duplicates may be
          analyzed  to assess the precision of the environmental  measurements
          or field  reagent  blanks may be used to assess contamination  of
          samples  under site conditions, transportation and storage.

11.   PROCEDURE

     11.1  EXTRACTION (MANUAL METHOD)

          11.1.1 Mark the water meniscus on  the side  of the sample  bottle for
                 later determination of sample volume  (Sect.  11.1.6).   Add
                 preservative to blanks and  QC check  standards.   Fortify the
                 sample with 50 (JtL  of the  surrogate standard  solution.  Pour
                 the entire sample  into a  2-L separatory  funnel.

          11.1.2 Adjust the sample  to pH 7 by adding  50 mL of phosphate
                 buffer.

          11.1.3 Add 100 g  NaCl to  the  sample,  seal,  and  shake to dissolve
                 salt.

          11.1.4 Add 60 mL  methylene chloride to the  sample bottle, seal,  and
                 shake 30 s to rinse the inner walls.   Transfer the solvent to
                 the separatory funnel  and extract the sample by vigorously
                 shaking the funnel for 2  min with periodic venting to release
                 excess pressure.   Allow the organic  layer to separate from
                 the water phase for a  minimum of 10  min.  If the emulsion
                 interface  between  layers  is more than one third the volume of

                                     159

-------
            the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical
            techniques to complete the phase separation.  The optimum
            technique depends upon the sample, but may include stirring,
            filtration of the emulsion through glass wool,
            centrifugation, or other physical methods.  Collect the
            methylene chloride extract in a 500-mL Erlenmeyer flask.

     11.1.5 Add a second 60-mL volume of methylene chloride to the sample
            bottle and repeat the extraction procedure a second time,
            combining the extracts in the Erlenmeyer flask.  Perform a
            third extraction in the same manner.

     11.1.6 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the sample
            bottle to the mark and transferring the water to a 1000-mL
            graduated cylinder.  Record the sample volume to the nearest
            5 ml.

11.2 EXTRACTION (AUTOMATED METHOD) — Data presented in this method were
     generated using the automated extraction procedure with the
     mechanical tumbler.

     11.2.1 Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for
            later determination of sample volume (Sect. 11.2.6).   Add
            preservative to blanks and QC check standards.  Fortify the
            sample with 50 ill of the surrogate standard solution.   If the
            mechanical  separatory funnel  shaker is used,  pour the entire
            sample into a 2-L separatory funnel.   If the mechanical
            tumbler is  used,  pour the entire sample into a tumbler
            bottle.

     11.2.2 Adjust the  sample to pH 7 by adding 50 ml of phosphate
            buffer.

     11.2.3 Add 100  g NaCl  to the sample,  seal,  and shake to dissolve
            salt.

     11.2.4 Add 300  mL  methylene chloride to the  sample bottle,  seal,  and
            shake  30 s  to  rinse the inner walls.   Transfer the solvent to
            the sample  contained in the separatory funnel  or tumbler
            bottle,  seal,  and shake for 10 s,  venting periodically.
            Repeat shaking  and venting until  pressure release is  not
            observed.   Reseal  and place sample container  in  appropriate
            mechanical  mixing device  (separatory  funnel  shaker or
            tumbler).   Shake  or tumble the sample  for 1  hour.   Complete
            mixing of the  organic and aqueous  phases  should  be observed
            within about 2  min after  starting  the  mixing  device.

     11.2.5 Remove the  sample container from the mixing device.   If  the
            tumbler  is  used,  pour contents of  tumbler bottle  into  a  2-L
            separatory  funnel.   Allow the  organic  layer to separate  from
            the water phase for a minimum  of 10 min.   If  the  emulsion
            interface between  layers  is more than  one third the volume  of
            the solvent  layer,  the analyst must employ mechanical
            techniques to complete the  phase separation.  The  optimum
            technique depends  upon the  sample, but may include  stirring,
            filtration through  glass  wool, centrifugation, or  other

                                160

-------
            physical  methods.   Collect the methylene chloride extract in
            a 500-mL  Erlenmeyer flask.

     11.2.6 Determine the original  sample volume by refilling the sample
            bottle to the mark and  transferring the water to a 1000-mL
            graduated cylinder.  Record the sample volume to the nearest
            5 ml.

11.3 EXTRACT CONCENTRATION

     11.3.1 Assemble  a K-D concentrator by attaching a 25-mL concentrator
            tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask.  Other concentration
            devices or techniques may be used in place of the K-D if the
            requirements of Sect.. 10.3 are met.

     11.3.2 Dry the extract by pouring it through a solvent-rinsed drying
            column containing about 10 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate.
            Collect the extract in the K-D concentrator, and rinse the
            column with 20-30 ml methylene chloride. Alternatively, add
            about 5 g anhydrous sodium sulfate to the extract in the
            Erlenmeyer flask; swirl flask to dry extract and allow to sit
            for 15 min. Decant the methylene chloride extract into the
            K-D concentrator.  Rinse the remaining sodium sulfate with
            two 25-mL portions of methylene chloride and decant the
            rinses into the K-D concentrator.

     11.3.3 Add 1 to 2 clean boiling stones to the evaporative flask and
            attach a macro Snyder column.  Prewet the Snyder column by
            adding about 1 mL methylene chloride to the top.  Place the
            K-D apparatus on a hot water bath, 65 to 70°C, so that the
            concentrator tube  is partially immersed in the hot water, and
            the entire lower rounded surface of the flask is bathed with
            hot vapor.  Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and
            the water temperature as required to complete the
            concentration in 15 to 20 min.  At the proper rate of
            distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter,
            but the chambers will not flood.  When the apparent volume of
            liquid reaches 2 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow  it to
            drain and cool for at least 10 min.

     11.3.4 Remove the Snyder  column  and rinse the flask and its lower
            joint into the concentrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of MTBE.  Add
            5-10 mL of MTBE and a fresh boiling stone.  Attach a
            micro-Snyder column to the concentrator tube and prewet  the
            column by adding about 0.5 mL of MTBE to the top.  Place the
            micro K-D apparatus on the water bath so that the
            concentrator tube  is partially immersed in the hot water.
            Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water
            temperature  as required to complete concentration in 5 to 10
            min.  When the apparent volume of  liquid reaches 2 mL, remove
            the micro K-D from the bath and allow it to drain and cool.
            Add 5-10 mL  MTBE to the micro K-D  and reconcentrate  to 2 mL.
            Remove the micro K-D from the bath  and allow it to drain  and
            cool.  Remove the  micro Snyder column, and rinse the walls of
            the concentrator tube while adjusting the volume to  5.0  mL
            with  MTBE.   NOTE:   If methylene chloride  is not completely

                                 161

-------
             removed from the  final  extract,  it may  cause  detector
             problems.

      11.3.5  Transfer extract  to  an  appropriate-  sized TFE-fluorocarbon-
             sealed  screw-cap  vial and  store, refrigerated at 4°C,  until
             analysis by  GC-NPD.

11.4  GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY

      11.4.1  Sect. 6.8 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for
             the gas  chromatograph.  Included in Table 1 are retention
             times observed using this method.  Other GC columns,
             chromatographic conditions, or detectors may  be used if the
             requirements  of Sect. 10.3 are met.
     11.4.2 Calibrate the system daily as described in Sect. 9.
            standards and extracts must be in MTBE.
                 The
     11.4.3 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, add
            50 fiL of the internal standard solution to the sample
            extract, seal, and shake to distribute the internal standard.
     11.4.4 Inject 2 fil of the sample extract.
            size in area units.
Record the resulting peak
     11.4.5 If the response for the peak exceeds the working range of the
            system, dilute the extract and reanalyze.

11.5 IDENTIFICATION OF ANALYTES

     11.5.1 Identify a sample component by comparison of its retention
            time to the retention time of a reference chromatogram.   If
            the retention time of an unknown compound corresponds,  within
            limits, to the retention time of a standard compound,  then
            identification is considered positive.

     11.5.2 The width of the retention time window  used to make
            identifications should be based upon measurements of actual
            retention time variations of standards  over the course  of a
            day.   Three times the standard deviation of a retention  time
            can be used to calculate a suggested window size for a
            compound.   However,  the experience of the analyst should
            weigh  heavily in the interpretation of  chromatograms.

     11.5.3 Identification requires expert judgement when sample
            components  are not resolved  chromatographically.   When peaks
            obviously represent  more than  one  sample component (i.e.,
            broadened  peak with  shoulder(s)  or valley between two or more
            maxima),  or any time doubt exists  over  the  identification  of
            a peak on  a chromatogram,  appropriate alternative techniques
            to  help confirm peak identification, need be  employed.   For
            example, more  positive  identification may be  made by the use
            of  an  alternative  detector which operates on  a
            chemical/physical  principle  different from  that  originally
            used,  e.g.,  mass  spectrometry, or  the use of  a  second
                                162

-------
                 chromatography column.  A suggested alternative column is
                 described in Sect. 6.8.

12.   CALCULATIONS

     12.1  Calculate analyte concentrations in the sample from the response
           for the analyte using the calibration procedure described in Sect.
           9.

     12.2  If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, calculate
           the concentration (C) in the sample using the response factor (RF)
           determined in Sect. 9.2 and Equation 2, or determine sample
           concentration from the calibration curve.
                    C (/*g/L) -         *          Equation 2

                               (Ais)(RF)(Vo)

           where:

           As    =  Response for the parameter to be measured.

           Ais   =  Response for the internal standard.

           L    =  Amount of internal  standard added to each extract
            S

           Vo    =  Volume of water extracted (L).

     12.3  If the external standard calibration procedure is used, calculate
           the amount of material injected from the peak response using the
           calibration curve or calibration  factor determined in Sect. 9.3.2.
           The concentration (C) in the sample can be calculated from
           Equation 3.


                                                 Equation 3
           where:

           A     =  Amount of material  injected  (ng) .

           Vj    =  Volume of extract  injected  (/iL) .

           Vt    =  Volume of total extract  (juL) .

           Vs    =  Vol ume of water extracted  (ml) .

 13.  PRECISION AND ACCURACY

     13.1  In a  single laboratory, analyte recoveries  from  reagent  water were
           determined at  five concentration  levels.  Results were used  to
           determine analyte EDLs  and  demonstrate  method  range. (1)   Analytes
           were  divided  into five  groups  for recovery  studies.   Analyte EDLs


                                      163

-------
           and analyte recoveries and standard deviation about the percent
           recoveries at one Concentration are given in Table 2.

     13.2  In a single laboratory, analyte recoveries from two standard
           synthetic ground waters were determined at one concentration level
           Results were used to demonstrate applicability of the method to
           different ground water matrices.(1)  Analyte recoveries from the
           two synthetic matrices are given in Table 2.

14.  REFERENCES

     1.  National Pesticide Survey Method No.  1:  Determination of Nitrogen-
         and Phosphorus-Containing Pesticides  in Groundwater by Gas
         Chromatography with a Nitrogen-Phosphorus Detector.
                                                                            t

     2.  ASTH Annual Book of Standards, Part 11, Volume 11.02, D3694-82,
         "Standard Practice for Preparation of Sample Containers and for
         Preservation," American Society for Testing and Materials,
         Philadelphia, PA,  1986.

     3.  "Carcinogens - Working with Carcinogens," Department of Health,
         Education,  and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease
         Control, National  Institute for Occupational Safety and Health,
         Publication No. 77-206, Aug. 1977.

     4.  "OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General  Industry," (29 CFR 1910),
         Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206, (Revised,
         January 1976).

     5.  "Safety in  Academic Chemistry Laboratories," American Chemical
         Society Publication,  Committee on Chemical  Safety,  3rd Edition, 1979.

     6.  ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 11, Volume 11.01, D3370-82,
         "Standard Practice for Sampling Water," American Society for Testing
         and Materials, Philadelphia, PA, 1986.
                                     164

-------
                TABLE  1.  RETENTION TIMES FOR METHOD ANALYTES
Analyte
                                                     Retention Time8
                                                     Col. 1    Col. ;
l,3-Dimethyl-2-nitrobenzene(surrogate)
Dichlorvos
Disulfoton sulfoxide
Butyl ate
Mevinphos
Vernolate
Pebulate
Tebuthiuron
Molinate
Ethoprop
Cycloate
Chi orpropham
Atraton
Simazine
Prometon
Atrazine
Propazine
Terbufos
Pronamide
Diazinon
Disulfoton
Terbacil
Metribuzin
Methyl paraoxon
Simetryn
Alachlor
Ametryn
Prometryn
Terbutryn
Bromacil
Metolachlor
Triademefon
MGK 264 (c)
Diphenamid
Stirofos
Disulfoton sulfone
Butachlor
Fenamiphos
Napropamide
Tricyclazole
Merphos (d)
Carboxin
Norflurazon
Triphenyl phosphate (int. std.)
14.48
16.54
19.08
20.07
22.47
22.51
22.94
23.41
25.15
25.66
28.58
28.58
29.09
31.26
31.49
31.58
31.77
32.01
32.57
32.76
33.23
33.42
33.79
35.20
35.58
35.72
35.96
36.00
36.14
36.80
37.22
37.74
38.12
38.73
38.87
41.27
41.31
41.45
41.78
41.83
42.25
42.35
42.77
45.92
47
(b)
15.35
/ l_ \
(b)
16.57
18.47
21.92
19.25
19.73
42.77
A A m -7
22.47
26.42
29.67
(b)
29.97
31.32
30
A i • /\f\
31.23
A 1 1 ^
31.13
(b)
32.63
/ 1 \
(b)
30.9
* » \
(b)
A • "TO
34.73
34.1
34.55
34.1
34.52
34.23
34.8
40
35.7
37
36.73
37.97
39.65
42.42
39
41
(b)
44.33
39.28
42.05
47.58
45.4
                                       165

-------
                             TABLE  1   (CONTINUED)
Analyte
Retention Time3
 Col.l     Col.2
Hexazinone
Fenarimol
Fluridone
 46.58
 51.32
 56.68
47.8
50.02
59.07
   Columns and analytical  conditions are described in Sect.  6.8.1  and 6.8.2.

b  Data not available

c  MGK 264 gives two peaks;  peak identified in this table used  for
   quantification.

   Merphos is  converted to S,S,S-tributylphosphoro-trithioate  (DBF)  in the
   hot GC injection port;  DEF is actually detected using these analyses
   conditions.
                                     166

-------
TABLE 2.   SINGLE LABORATORY ACCURACY, PRECISION AND ESTIMATED DETECTION LIMITS
          (EDLS) FOR ANALYTES FROM REAGENT WATER AND SYNTHETIC GROUNDWATERS(A)
Analyte
Alachlor
Ametryn
Ametraton
Atrazine
Bromacil
Butachlor
Butyl ate
Carboxin
Chlorpropham
Cycloate
Diazinon
Dichlorvos
Diphenamid
Disulfoton
Disulfoton sulfone
Disulfoton sulf oxide
EPTC
Ethoprop
Fenamiphos
Fenarimol
Fluridone
Hexazinone
Merphos
Methyl paraoxon
Metolachlor
Metribuzin
Mevinphos
MGK 264
Molinate
Napropamide
Norflurazon
Pebulate
Prometon
Prometryn
Pronamide
Propazine
Simazine
Simetryn
Stirofos
Tebuthiuron
Terbacil
Terbufos
Terbutryn
EDLb
0.38
2
0.6
0.13
2.5
0.38
0.15
0.6
0.5
0.25
0.25
2.5
0.6
0.3
3.8
0.38
0.25
0.19
1.
0.38
3.8
0.76
0.25
2.5
0.75
0.15
5.
0.5
0.15
0.25
0.5
0.13
0.3
0.19
0.76
0.13
0.075
0.25
0.76
1.3
4.5
0.5
0.25
Reagent
Cone. Rc
3.8
20
6
1.3
25
3.8
1.5
6
5
2.5
2.5
25
6
3
7.5
3.8
2.5
1.9
10
3.8
38
7.6
2.5
25
7.5
1.5
50
5
1.5
2.5
5.
1.3
3
1.9
7.6
1.3
0.75
2.5
7.6
13
45
5
2.5
95
91
91
92
91
96
97
102
93
89
115
97
93
89
98
87
85
103
90
99
87
90
96
98
93
101
95
100
98
101
94
94
78
93
91
92
100
99
98
84
97
97
94
Water
c d
11
10
11
8
9
4
21
4
11
9
7
6
8
10
10
11
9
5
8
5
9
7
8
10
4
5
11
4
18
6
5
9
9
8
10
8
7
5
6
9
6
4
9
Synthetic
Water 1
R SR
82
102
84
89
81
93
36
98
82
97
83
86
88
107
92
88
83
91
87
89
91
86
90
97
92
99
93
91
83
89
101
80
89
91
84
89
86
88
84
85
86
80
91
6
11
7
6
5
15
8
13
7
14
8
6
4
12
5
22
5
7
5
6
11
6
4
8
10
10
6
11
8
5
15
6
5
8
7
6
5
4
6
10
5
6
8
Synthetic
Water 2
R SR
90
96
91
92
88
84
83
87
93
93
84
106
93
95
96
54
86
79
89
89
86
95
92
94
84
86
92
83
89
104
87
98
63
93
92
92
103
103
95
98
102
77
92
8
4
8
5
8
5
8
5
8
3
3
16
5
5
3
19
4
3
2
6
10
9
4
4
4
4
4
6
9
18
4
15
2
4
8
5
14
14
10
13
12
7
4
                                        167

-------
                          TABLE  2.    (CONTINUED)
Analyte
EDLD
09/L
Reagent Water
Cone. R6 SRd
Synthetic
Water l,e
R SR
Synthetic
Water 2f
R SR
inaaemeron
Tricyclazole
Vernol ate
0.65
1.
0.13
6.5
10
1.3
93
86
93
8
7
6
94
90
79
5
6
9
95
90
81
5
11
2
 Data  corrected  for blank and  represent the analysis of 7-8 samples using
 mechanical  tumbling and  internal  standard calibration.
 D*!          Detection limit; defined as either MDL (Appendix B to 40 CFR
 Part  136 - Definition and Procedure for the Determination of the Method
 Detection Limit - Revision  1.11) or a level of compound in a sample yielding
 a peak  in the final extract with signal-to-noise ratio of approximately 5
 whichever value is higher.  The concentration used in determining the EDl'is
 not the same as the concentration presented in this table.
R

S
    average percent recovery.

    standard deviation of the percent recovery.
Corrected for amount found in blank; Absopure Nature Artesian Spring Water
Obtained from the Absopure Water Company in Plymouth, Michigan.

Corrected for amount found in blank; reagent water fortified with fulvic acid
at the 1 mg/L concentration level.  A well -characterized fulvic  acid

thriiSJL^?111**11^1"?6-^0^1 Hum1c Substances Society (associated with
the United States Geological  Survey in Denver,  Colorado), was used
                                  168

-------








c
o>
S
as -
o
l_
§ o>
c2 4->
§"«»
c

* *1
0)
jll
1
(0
0
o

4-»
o>
O)
o




in
o
o






Q)
4^
(0
"o
C
O)

















^
">
4_3

c
o>
CO




10*

0
CM
i— i
V
U_
o.

V
O
00
o





o
in







r—
•r™
U
§
s-
CQ







O)
U
C
10
^
O
^^
^.
o>
OL
0
CL
(0
CT)
O

o
i.
J=
o




2-
s.^.
•^
o
A
C
O
+J

f™~
o
OS




o in
CO «— 1
o o







c o>
o c
•0— * *r**
O> N
0 S-

(X <













o>
u
g
o
i-
o>
o.
g.
3
^—
O
o




















c
•r«*
eo

cr
0)
o>
5

c
•r-
V)
3'

•o
O)
(0
'S
u
10
•
i.
o
u
4-

(0

V)

3
(0
<0
0)
Q.
1
1^
ts
Cu


•



4J
•C
en
•r-
O)
J=
JZ •
C
o>
"f0

^j
•o
•f—
2
^
(0
Q)
CL
0)
-C
v>
"r™
o
1— 1
^"^
^ •*
3
•o
<0

o>
•r-
Q>
jaz

*^*
(0

<0
JC
4.3
•o
^•** s
r— 1 <-x (0
«— O OJ
3 1-4 O.
X «-< «
•— JC
CO 3 4->
00
• (/>
f— 1 'r-
U ^^
CM
LJ_ ' 	
CS i-«
O)
L.
"§






















• *
o
I *
10
3
cr
0)

j=

j^
-o
0>
•r~

cc


A

J=
XJ
*
(0
o>
CL
O)
cn
(0
s-
<0
O>
_c
4->
•r"
3
•o
C .
(0
V)
(0
0)
O.
i
t4-*
0>
•^
4~
c
Q)
0)
X
4«>
 c
4-> t^
0>
w 
T- (0
x>
4^
o>
O) J=
o>
x: 4->
3! «0



169

-------

-------
   METHOD 508.    DETERMINATION OF CHLORINATED PESTICIDES IN WATER BY
         GAS CHROMAT06RAPHY WITH AN ELECTRON CAPTURE DETECTOR
                             Revision 3.0
J. J. Lichtenberg, J. E. Longbottom, T. A. Bellar, J. W. Eichelberger,
   and  R.  C. Dressman -  EPA  600/4-81-053,  Revision 1.0  (1981)

T.  Engels (Batten e  Columbus  Laboratories) -  National  Pesticide
   Survey  Method  2, Revision 2.0  (1987)

R.  L.  Graves  - Method 508,  Revision 3.0  (1989)
              ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
                   OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
                  U.S.  ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
                         CINCINNATI, OHIO 45268
                                   171

-------
                                  METHOD 508

              DETERMINATION OF CHLORINATED PESTICIDES IN WATER BY
             GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY WITH AN ELECTRON CAPTURE DETECTOR
1.   SCOPE AND APPLICATION

     1.1  This is a gas chromatographic  (GC) method applicable to  the
          determination of certain chlorinated pesticides in groundwater  and
          finished drinking water.(1)  The following compounds can be
          determined using this method:
               Compound

               Aldrin
               Chlordane-alpha
               Chlordane-gamma
               Chlorneb
               Chlorobenzilate(a)
               Chlorothalonil
               DCPA
               4,4'-ODD
               4,4'-DDE
               4,4'-DDT
               Dieldrin
               Endosulfan I
               Endosulfan II
               Endosulfan sulfate
               Endrin
               Endrin aldehyde
               Etridiazole
               HCH-alpha
               HCH-beta
               HCH-delta(a)
               HCH-gamma (Lindane)
               Heptachlor
               Heptachlor epoxide
               Hexachlorobenzene
               Methoxychlor
               cis-Permethrin
               trans-Permethrin
               Propachlor
               Trifluralin
               Aroclor  1016*
               Aroclor  1221*
               Aroclor  1232*
               Aroclor  1242*
               Aroclor  1248*
               Aroclor  1254*
               Aroclor  1260*
Chemical Abstract Service
     Registry Number
         309-
        5103
        5103-
        2675-
         501-
        2921-
        1897-
          72-
          72-
          50-
          60-
         959-
       33213-
        1031-
          72-
        7421-
        2593-
         319-
         319-
         319-
          58-
          76-
        1024-
         118-
          72-
       52645-
       52645-
        1918-
        1582-
       12674-
       11104-
       11141-
       53469-
       12672-
       11097-
       11096-
-00-2
-71-9
-74-2
-77-6
-15-6
-88-2
-45-6
-54-8
-55-9
-29-3
-57-1
-98-8
-65-9
-07-8
-20-8
-93-4
-15-9
-84-6
-85-7
-86-8
•89-9
•44-8
•57-3
•74-1
43-5
53-1
53-1
16-7
09-8
11-2
28-2
16-5
21-9
29-6
69-1
82-5
                                     172

-------
               Toxaphene*                       8001-35-2
               Chlordane*                          57-74-9

         *   The  extraction  conditions  of  this method  are comparable  to  USEPA
         Method  608,  which  does  measure the multicomponent  constituents:
         commercial  polychlorinated  biphenyl  (PCB) mixtures (Aroclors),
         toxaphene,  and chlordane.   The extract  derived from this  procedure
         may be  analyzed  for  these constituents  by using the GC  conditions
         prescribed  in either Method 608  (packed column) or Method 505
          (capillary  column).   The columns used in this method may  well  be
         adequate, however, no data  were  collected for these constituents
         during  methods development.

          (a)  These  compounds are only qualitatively  identified  in the
         National  Pesticides  Survey  (NPS) Program.  These compounds  are not
         quantitated because  control over precision has not been
         accomplished.

     1.2  This method has  been validated in a  single laboratory  and estimated
         detection limits (EDLs) have  been determined for the analytes  above
          (Sect.  13).  Observed detection  limits  may vary between waters,
         depending upon the nature of  interferences, in the  sample  matrix and
         the specific instrumentation  used.

     1.3  This method is restricted to  use by  or  under the supervision of
          analysts  experienced in the use  of GC and in the interpretation of
         gas chromatograms.   Each  analyst must demonstrate  the  ability  to
         generate  acceptable  results with this method using the  procedure
         described in Sect.  10.3.

     1.4   Degradation of DDT and  Endrin caused by active sites in the
          injection port and GC columns may occur. This is  not  as  much  a
          problem with new capillary  columns as with packed  columns.   However,
          high boiling sample  residue in capillary columns will  create the
          same problem after injection  of  sample  extracts.

     1.5  Analytes  that  are  not separated  chromatographically, i.e.,  analytes
         which have  very  similar retention times cannot be  individually
          identified  and measured in  the  same  calibration mixture or  water
          sample unless  an alternative  technique  for  identification and
          quantitation exist (Sect.  11.5).

     1.6   When this method is  used to analyze  unfamiliar samples  for  any or
          all of the  analytes  above,  analyte identifications must be  confirmed
          by at least one  additional  qualitative  technique.

2.   SUMMARY OF METHOD

     2.1   A measured  volume  of sample of  approximately 1 L  is solvent
          extracted with methylene chloride by shaking in  a  separatory funnel
          or mechanical  tumbling  in a bottle.  The methylene chloride extract
          is isolated, dried .and  concentrated  to  a volume  of 5 ml after

                                     173

-------
         solvent substitution with methyl tert-butyl ether (MTBE).  Chroma-
         tographic conditions are described which permit the separation and
         measurement of the analytes in the extract by capillary column/GC
         with an electron capture detector (ECD).

3.  DEFINITIONS

    3.1  Internal standard — A pure analyte(s) added to a solution in known
         amount(s) and used to measure the relative responses of other method
         analytes and surrogates that are components of the same solution.
         The internal standard must be an analyte that is not a sample
         component.

    3.2  Surrogate analyte — A pure analyte(s), which is extremely unlikely
         to be found in any sample, and which is added to a sample aliquot in
         known amount(s) before extraction and is measured with the same
         procedures used to measure other sample components.   The purpose of
         a surrogate analyte is to monitor method performance with each
         sample.

    3.3  Laboratory duplicates (LD1 and LD2)  — Two sample aliquots taken in
         the analytical laboratory and analyzed separately with identical
         procedures.  Analyses of LD1 and LD2 give a measure  of the precision
         associated with laboratory procedures, but not with  sample
         collection, preservation, or storage procedures.

    3.4  Field duplicates (FD1 and FD2) — Two separate samples collected at
         the same time and place under identical circumstances and treated
         exactly the same throughout field and laboratory procedures.
         Analyses of FD1 and FD2 give a measure of the precision associated
         with sample collection, preservation and storage, as well as  with
         laboratory procedures.

    3.5  Laboratory reagent blank (LRB) -- An aliquot of reagent water that
         is treated exactly as a sample including exposure to all  glassware,
         equipment, solvents,  reagents, internal standards,  and surrogates
         that are used with other samples. The LRB is used to determine if
         method analytes or other interferences are present in the laboratory
         environment, the reagents, or the apparatus.

    3.6  Field reagent blank (FRB) — Reagent water placed in a sample
         container in the laboratory and treated as a sample  in all  respects,
         including exposure to sampling site  conditions,  storage,
         preservation and all  analytical  procedures.   The purpose of the FRB
         is to determine if method analytes or other interferences are
         present in the field  environment.

    3.7  Laboratory performance  check solution (LPC)  — A solution of  method
         analytes,  surrogate compounds, and internal  standards used to
         evaluate the performance of the instrument system with respect to a
         defined set of method criteria.
                                    174

-------
    3.8  Laboratory fortified blank  (LFB) -- An aliquot of reagent water to
         which  known quantities of the method analytes are added in the
         laboratory.  The  LFB is analyzed exactly like a sample, and its
         purpose  is to determine whether the methodology is  in control, and
         whether  the laboratory is capable of making accurate and precise
         measurements at the required method detection limit.

    3.9  Laboratory fortified sample matrix  (LFM) — An aliquot of an
         environmental sample to which known quantities of the method
         analytes are added  in the laboratory.  The LFM is analyzed exactly
         like  a sample, and  its purpose  is to determine whether the sample
         matrix contributes  bias to  the  analytical results.  The background
         concentrations of the analytes  in the  sample matrix must be
         determined in a separate aliquot and the measured values in the LFM
         corrected for background concentrations.

    3.10 Stock standard solution —  A concentrated solution  containing  a
         single certified  standard that  is a method analyte, or a
         concentrated solution of a  single analyte prepared  in the laboratory
         with  an  assayed reference compound.  Stock standard solutions  are
         used  to  prepare primary dilution standards.

    3.11 Primary  dilution  standard solution  —  A  solution of several analytes
         prepared in the laboratory  from stock  standard solutions and diluted
         as needed to prepare calibration solutions and other needed analyte
         solutions.

    3.12 Calibration  standard  (CAL)  ~ A solution  prepared from the primary
         dilution standard solution  and  stock standard  solutions of the
          internal standards  and  surrogate analytes.  The CAL solutions  are
         used  to  calibrate the  instrument response with respect to analyte
         concentration.

    3.13 Quality  control  sample  (QCS)  — a  sample  matrix containing method
          analytes or  a  solution  of method analytes  in  a water miscible
          solvent  which  is  used  to  fortify reagent  water or environmental
          samples.  The  QCS is  obtained  from  a  source external to the
          laboratory,  and  is  used  to  check laboratory performance with
          externally prepared test materials.

4.   INTERFERENCES

     4.1  Method interferences  may  be caused  by  contaminants  in  solvents,
          reagents, glassware and  other sample  processing  apparatus  that lead
          to discrete  artifacts  or  elevated  baselines  in gas  chromatograms.
          All reagents and  apparatus  must be  routinely  demonstrated  to  be free
          from interferences under the conditions  of the analysis  by  running
          laboratory reagent blanks  as described in Sect.  10.2.

          4.1.1  Glassware  must be  scrupulously cleaned (2).   Clean  all  glass-
                 ware as soon as possible after use by  thoroughly  rinsing with
                 the last solvent used in it.  Follow by washing with  hot

                                      175

-------
             water and detergent and thorough rinsing with tap and reagent
             water.  Drain dry, and heat in an oven or muffle furnace at
             400°C for 1 hour.  Do not heat volumetric ware.  Thermally
             stable materials such as PCBs might not be eliminated by this
             treatment.  Thorough rinsing with acetone may be substituted
             for the heating.  After drying and cooling, seal and store
             glassware in a clean environment to prevent any accumulation
             of dust or other contaminants.  Store inverted or capped with
             aluminum foil.

      4.1.2  The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to
             minimize interference problems.  Purification of solvents by
             distillation in all-glass systems may be required.   WARNING:
             When a solvent is purified,  stabilizers added by the
             manufacturer are removed thus  potentially making the solvent
             hazardous.  Also, when a solvent is purified,  preservatives
             added by the manufacturer are  removed thus potentially
             reducing  the shelf-life.

 4.2  Interferences by phthalate  esters  can pose a major problem in pesti-
      cide analysis when  using the electron capture detector.  These
      compounds generally appear  in the  chromatogram as large peaks.
      Common flexible plastics contain varying amounts of phthalates that
      are easily extracted or leached  during laboratory operations.   Cross
      contamination of clean  glassware routinely occurs when  plastics are
      handled during  extraction steps, especially when solvent-wetted
      surfaces  are handled.   Interferences  from  phthalates  can best  be
      minimized by avoiding the use of plastics  in  the laboratory
      Exhaustive cleanup  of reagents  and  glassware  may be required to
      eliminate background phthalate contamination.(3,4)

 4.3  Interfering contamination may occur when a  sample containing low
      concentrations  of analytes  is analyzed  immediately following a
      sample containing relatively  high concentrations  of analytes.
      Between-sample  rinsing  of the sample  syringe  and  associated
      equipment with  MTBE can  minimize sample cross contamination.  After
      analysis  of a sample containing high  concentrations of  analytes, one
      or  more injections of MTBE should be  made to  ensure that accurate
      values  are  obtained for  the next sample.

4.4   Matrix  interferences may be caused  by contaminants that are
      coextracted from the sample.  Also, note that all the analytes
      listed  in the Scope and Application Section are not resolved from
      each other on any one column, i.e., one analyte of interest may be
      an  interferant for another analyte of interest.  The extent of
     matrix  interferences will vary considerably from source to  source
     depending upon the water sampled.  Cleanup of sample extracts may'be
     necessary.  Positive identifications should be confirmed (Sect.
     J. JL • D y •

4.5  It is important that samples and standards be contained in the same
     solvent, i.e., the solvent for final working standards must be the

                                 176

-------
          same as the final solvent used in sample preparation.  If this is
          not the case chromatographic comparability of standards to sample
          may be affected.

     4.6  WARNING:  A dirty injector insert will cause the late eluting
          compounds to drop off.
5.   SAFETY
6.
5.1  The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this method
     has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound must
     be treated as a potential health hazard.  Accordingly, exposure to
     these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level.  The
     laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file
     of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals
     specified in this method.  A reference file of material safety data
     sheets should also be made available to all personnel involved in
     the chemical analysis.  Additional references to laboratory safety
     are available and have been identified (5-7) for the information of
     the analyst.

5.2  WARNING:  When a solvent is purified stabilizers added by the
     manufacturer are removed thus potentially making the solvent
     hazardous.

APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT (All specifications are suggested.  Catalog
numbers are included for illustration only.)

6.1  SAMPLE BOTTLE — Borosilicate, 1-1 volume with graduations (Wheaton
     Media/Lab bottle 219820 or equivalent), fitted with screw caps lined
     with TFE-fluorocarbon.  Protect samples from light.  The container
     must be washed and dried as described in Sect. 4.1.1 before use to
     minimize contamination.  Cap liners are cut to fit from sheets
     (Pierce Catalog No. 012736) and extracted with methanol overnight
     prior to use.

6.2  GLASSWARE

     6.2.1  Separatory funnel — 2000-mL,  with TFE-fluorocarbon stopcock,
            ground glass or TFE-fluorocarbon stopper.

     6.2.2  Tumbler bottle 1.7-L (Wheaton  Roller Culture Vessel or
            equivalent), with TFE-fluorocarbon lined screw cap.  Cap
            liners are cut to fit from sheets (Pierce  Catalog No.  012736)
            and extracted with methanol  overnight prior to use.

     6.2.3  Flask, Erlenmeyer — 500-mL.

     6.2.4  Concentrator tube,  Kuderna-Danish (K-D)  10- or 25-mL,
            graduated (Kontes K-570050-1025 or K-570050-2525 or
            equivalent).  Calibration must be checked  at the volumes
                                     177

-------
            employed in the test.  Ground glass stoppers are used to
            prevent evaporation of extracts.

     6.2.5  Evaporative flask, K-D 500-mL (Kontes K-570001-0500 or
            equivalent).  Attach to concentrator tube with springs.

     6.2.6  Snyder column, K-D three-ball macro (Kontes K-503000-0121 or
            equivalent).

     6.2.7  Snyder column, K-D two-ball micro (Kontes K-569001-0219 or
            equivalent).

     6.2.8  Vials -- Glass, 5- to 10-mL capacity with TFE-fluorocarbon
            lined screw cap.

6.3  SEPARATORY FUNNEL SHAKER — Capable of holding 2-L separatory
     funnels and shaking them with rocking motion to achieve thorough
     mixing of separatory funnel contents (available from Eberbach Co. in
     Ann Arbor, MI or other suppliers).

6.4  TUMBLER — Capable of holding tumbler bottles and tumbling them
     end-over-end at 30 turns/min (Associated Design and Mfg. Co.,
     Alexandria, VA or other suppliers.).

6.5  BOILING STONES CARBORUNDUM, #12 granules (Arthur H. Thomas Co.
     #1590-033 or equivalent).  Heat at 400°C for 30 min prior to use.
     Cool and store in a desiccator.

6.6  WATER BATH -- Heated, capable of temperature control (± 2°C).  The
     bath should be used in a hood.

6.7  BALANCE — Analytical, capable of accurately weighing to the nearest
     0.0001 g.

6.8  GAS CHROMATOGRAPH — Analytical system complete with temperature
     programmable GC suitable for use with capillary columns and all
     required accessories including syringes, analytical columns, gases,
     detector and stripchart recorder.  A data system is recommended for
     measuring peak areas.  Table 1 lists retention times observed for
     method analytes using the columns and analytical conditions
     described below.

     6.8.1  Column 1 (Primary column) — 30 m long x 0.25 mm I.D. DB-5
            bonded fused silica column, 0.25 jum film thickness (J&W
            Scientific).  Helium carrier gas flow is established at 30
            cm/sec linear velocity and oven temperature is programmed
            from 60°C to 300°C at 4°C/min.  Data presented in this method
            were obtained using this column.  The injection volume was 2
            III splitless mode with a 45 sec. delay.  The injector
            temperature was 250°C and the detector temperature was 320°C.
            Column performance criteria are presented in Table 3 (See
                                 178

-------
            Section 10.9).  Alternative columns may be used in accordance
            with the provisions described in Sect. 10.4.

     6.8.2  Column 2 (Alternative column) — 30 m long x 0.25 mm
            I.D.DB-1701 bonded fused silica column, 0.25 urn film
            thickness (J&W Scientific).  Helium carrier gas flow is
            established at 30 cm/sec linear velocity and oven temperature
            is programmed from 60°C to 300°C at 4°C/min.

     6.8.3  Detector — Electron capture.  This detector has proven
            effective in the analysis of spiked reagent and artificial
            ground waters.  An ECD was used to generate the validation
            data presented in this method.  Alternative detectors,
            including a mass spectrometer, may be used in accordance with
            the provisions described in Sect. 10.4.

REAGENTS AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS - - WARNING:  When a solvent is
purified, stabilizers added by the manufacturer are removed thus
potentially making the solvent hazardous.  Also, when a solvent is
purified, preservatives added by the manufacturer are removed thus
potentially reducing the shelf-life.

7.1  ACETONE, methylene chloride, MTBE — Distilled-in-glass quality or
     equivalent.

7.2  PHOSPHATE BUFFER, pH7 Prepare by mixing 29.6 ml 0.1 N HC1 and 50 ml
     0.1 M dipotassium phosphate.

7.3  SODIUM CHLORIDE, crystal, ACS grade.  Heat treat in a shallow tray
     at 450°C for a minimum of 4 hours to remove interfering organic
     substances.

7.4  SODIUM SULFATE, granular, anhydrous, ACS grade.  Heat treat in a
     shallow tray at 450°C for a minimum of 4 hours to remove interfering
     organic substances.

7.5  SODIUM THIOSULFATE, granular, anhydrous, ACS grade.

7.6  PENTACHLORONITROBENZENE (PCNB) 98% purity, for use as internal
     standard.

7.7  4,4'-DICHLOROBIPHENYL (DCB) 96% purity, for use as surrogate
     standard (available from Chemicals Procurement Inc.).

7.8  MERCURIC CHLORIDE — ACS grade — for use as a bactericide.   If any
     other bactericide can be shown to work as well as mercuric chloride,
     it may be used instead.

7.9  REAGENT WATER — Reagent water is defined as water that is
     reasonably free of contamination that would prevent the
     determination of any analyte of interest.  Reagent water used to


                                 179

-------
     generate the validation data in this method was distilled water
     obtained from the Magnetic Springs Water Co., Columbus, Ohio.

7.10 STOCK STANDARD SOLUTIONS (1.00 /jg//iL) -- Stock standard solutions
     may be purchased as certified solutions or prepared from pure
     standard materials using the following procedure:

     7.10.1 Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing
            approximately 0.0100 g of pure material.  Dissolve the
            material in MTBE and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric
            flask.  Larger volumes may be used at the convenience of the
            analyst.  If compound purity is certified at 96% or greater,
            the weight may be used without correction to calculate the
            concentration of the stock standard.  Commercially prepared
            stock standards may be used at any concentration if they are
            certified by the manufacturer or by an independent source.

     7.10.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into TFE-fluoro-
            carbon-sealed screw cap amber vials.  Store at room temper-
            ature and protect from light.

     7.10.3 Stock standard solutions should be replaced after two months
            or sooner if comparison with laboratory fortified blanks, or
            QC samples indicate a problem.

7.11 INTERNAL STANDARD SOLUTION — Prepare an internal, standard
     fortifying solution by accurately weighing approximately 0.0010 g of
     pure PCNB.  Dissolve the PCNB in MTBE and dilute to volume in a
     10-mL volumetric flask.  Transfer the internal standard solution to
     a TFE-fluorocarbon-sealed screw cap bottle and store at room
     temperature.  Addition of 5 /zL of the internal standard fortifying
     solution to 5 mL of sample extract results in a final internal
     standard concentration of 0.1 /zg/mL.  Solution should be replaced
     when ongoing QC (Sect. 10) indicates a problem.  Note that PCNB has
     been shown to be an effective internal standard for the method
     analytes (1), but other compounds may be used if the quality control
     requirements in Section 10 are met.

7.12 SURROGATE STANDARD SOLUTION — Prepare a surrogate standard
     fortifying solution by accurately weighing approximately 0.0050 g of
     pure DCB.  Dissolve the DCB in MTBE and dilute to volume in a 10-mL
     volumetric flask.  Transfer the surrogate standard fortifying
     solution to a TFE-fluorocarbon-sealed screw cap bottle and store at
     room temperature.  Addition of 50 /zL of the surrogate standard
     fortifying  solution to a 1-L sample prior to extraction results in
     a surrogate standard concentration in the sample of 25 #g/L and,
     assuming quantitative recovery of DCB, a surrogate standard
     concentration in the final extract of 5.0 /jg/mL.  Solution should be
     replaced when ongoing QC (Sect. 10) indicates a problem.  Note DCB
     has been shown to be an effective surrogate standard for the method
     analytes (1), but other compounds may be used if the quality control
     requirements in Section 10 are met.

                                 180

-------
     7.13 LABORATORY PERFORMANCE CHECK SOLUTION — Prepare by accurately
          weighing 0.0010 g each of chlorothalonil,  chlorpyrifos,  DCPA,  and
          HCH-delta.  Dissolve each analyte in MTBE  and dilute to  volume in
          individual 10-mL volumetric flasks.   Combine 2 fil of the
          chloropyrifos stock solution, 50 jil  of the DCPA stock solution,  50
          Hi of the chlorothalonil  stock solution, and 40 jil of the HCH-delta
          stock solution to a 100-mL volumetric flask and dilute to volume
          with MTBE.  Transfer to a TFE-fluorcarbon-sealed screw cap bottle
          and store at room temperature.  Solution should be replaced when
          ongoing QC (Section 10) indicates a  problem.

8.   SAMPLE COLLECTION. PRESERVATION. AND STORAGE

     8.1  Grab samples must be collected in glass containers.  Conventional
          sampling practices (8) should be followed; however, the  bottle must
          not be prerinsed with sample before  collection.

     8.2  SAMPLE PRESERVATION

          8.2.1  Add mercuric chloride (See 7.8) to the sample bottle in
                 amounts to produce a concentration of 10 mg/L.  Add 1 mL of a
                 10 mg/mL solution of mercuric chloride in reagent water to
                 the sample bottle at the sampling site or in the laboratory
                 before shipping to the sampling site.  A major disadvantage
                 of mercuric chloride is that  it is a highly toxic chemical;
                 mercuric chloride must be handled with caution, and samples
                 containing mercuric chloride  must be disposed of properly.

          8.2.2  If residual chlorine is present, add 80 mg of sodium
                 thiosulfate per liter of sample to the sample bottle prior to
                 collecting the sample.

          8.2.3  After adding the sample to the bottle containing
                 preservative(s), seal the sample bottle and shake vigorously
                 for 1 min.

          8.2.4  Samples must be iced or refrigerated at 4°C from the time of
                 collection until extraction.   Preservation study results
                 indicate that most of the target analytes present in the
                 samples are stable for 7 days when stored under these
                 conditions (1).  Preservation data for the analytes
                 chlorthalonil, alpha-HCH, delta-HCH, gamma-HCH, cis-
                 permethrin, trans-permethrin, and trifluralin are
                 nondefinitive, and therefore if these are analytes of
                 interest,  it is recommended that the samples be analyzed
                 immediately.  Analyte stability may be affected by the
                 matrix; therefore, the analyst should verify that the
                 preservation technique is applicable to the samples under
                 study.
                                      181

-------
     8.3  EXTRACT STORAGE

          8.3.1  Sample extracts should be stored at 4°C away from light.   A
                 14-day maximum extract storage time is recommended.  However,
                 analyte stability may be affected by the matrix; therefore,
                 the analyst should verify appropriate extract holding times
                 applicable to the samples under study.

9.   CALIBRATION
     9.1
Establish GC operating parameters equivalent to those indicated in
Sect. 6.8.  The GC system must be calibrated using the internal
standard technique (Sect. 9.2) or the external standard technique
(Sect. 9.3).  WARNING:  DDT and endrin are easily degraded in the
injection port if the injection port or front of the column is
dirty.  This is the result of buildup of high boiling residue from
sample injection.  Check for degradation problems by injecting a
mid-level standard containing only 4,4'-DDT and endrin.  Look for
the degradation products of 4,4'-DDT (4,4'-DDE and 4,4'-ODD) and
endrin (endrin ketone and endrin aldehyde).  If degradation of
either DDT or endrin exceeds 20%, take corrective action before
proceeding with calibration.  Calculate percent breakdown as
fol1ows:
          % breakdown
          for 4,4'-DDT=
          % breakdown
          for Endrin
                Total DDT degradation peak area (DDE +
                    Total DDT peak area (DDT + DDE + ODD)
x 100
    Total  endrin degradation peak area (endrin aldehyde + endrin ketone)  x 100
     Total  endrin peak area (endrin + endrin aldehyde + endrin ketone)
          NOTE:   Calibration standard solutions must be prepared such that no
          unresolved analytes are mixed together.

     9.2  INTERNAL STANDARD CALIBRATION PROCEDURE  — To use this approach, the
          analyst must select one or more internal  standards compatible in
          analytical behavior to the compounds of  interest.   The analyst  must
          further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal  standard is
          not affected by method or matrix interferences.   PCNB has been
          identified as a suitable internal  standard.   Data presented in  this
          method were generated using the internal  standard calibration
          procedure.

          9.2.1   Prepare calibration standards at  a minimum of three
                 (recommend five)  concentration levels for each analyte of
                 interest and surrogate compound by adding volumes  of one or
                 more stock standards to a volumetric flask.   To each
                 calibration standard,  add a known  constant amount  of one or
                 more of the internal  standards, and dilute to volume with
                 MTBE.   The lowest standard  should  represent analyte
                 concentrations near,  but above, their respective EDLs. -The

                                     182

-------
            remaining standards should correspond to the range of
            concentrations expected in the sample concentrates, or should
            define the working range of the detector.  The calibration
            standards must bracket the analyte concentrations found in
            the sample extracts.

     9.2.2  Analyze each calibration standard according to the procedure
            (Sect. 11.4).  Tabulate response ( peak height or area)
            against concentration for each compound and internal
            standard.  Calculate the response factor (RF) for each
            analyte and surrogate using Equation 1.

                           (As)(Cis)
                  RF = 	             Equation 1
                           (Ais)(Cs)

            where :

            As  = Response for the analyte to be measured.
            Ais =  Response  for  the  internal  standard.
            Cis =  Concentration  of  the  internal  standard  (/jg/L).
            Cs  = Concentration of the analyte to be measured (jtg/L).

     9.2.3  If the RF value over the working range is constant (20% RSD
            or less) the average RF can be used for calculations.
            Alternatively, the results can be used to plot a calibration
            curve of response ratios (As/Ais) vs. Cs.

     9.2.4  The working calibration curve or RF must be verified on each
            working shift by the measurement of one or more calibration
            standards.  If the response for any analyte varies from the
            predicted response by more than ± 20%, the test must be
            repeated using a fresh calibration standard.  Alternatively,
            a new calibration curve must be prepared for that analyte.

     9.2.5  Single point calibration is a viable alternative to a
            calibration curve.  Prepare single point standards from the
            secondary dilution standards in MTBE.  The single point
            standards should be prepared at a concentration that produces
            a response that deviates from the sample extract response by
            no more than 20%.

     9.2.6  Verify calibration standards periodically, recommend at least
            quarterly, by analyzing a standard prepared from reference
            material obtained from an independent source.  Results from
            these analyses must be within the limits used to routinely
            check calibration.

9.3  EXTERNAL STANDARD CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

     9.3.1  Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three
            (recommend five) concentration levels for each analyte of

                                 183

-------
9.3.2
9.3.3
                 interest and surrogate compound by adding volumes of one or
                 more stock standards to a volumetric flask.  Dilute to volume
                 with MTBE.  The lowest standard should represent analyte
                 concentrations near, but above, their respective EDLs.  The
                 other concentrations should correspond to the range of
                 concentrations expected in the sample concentrates, or should
                 define the working range of the detector.  The calibration
                 standards must bracket the analyte concentrations found in
                 the sample extracts.

                 Starting with the standard of lowest concentration, analyze
                 each calibration standard according to Sect. 11.4 and
                 tabulate response (peak height or area) versus the
                 concentration in the standard.  The results can be used to
                 prepare a calibration curve for each compound.
                 Alternatively, if the ratio of response to concentration
                 (calibration factor) is a constant over the working range
                 (20% RSD or less), linearity through the origin can be
                 assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor can be
                 used in place of a calibration curve.

                 The working calibration curve or calibration factor must be
                 verified on each working day by the measurement of a minimum
                 of two calibration check standards, one at the beginning and
                 one at the end of the analysis day.  These check standards
                 should be at two different concentration levels to verify the
                 calibration curve.  For extended periods of analysis (greater
                 than 8 hrs.), it is strongly recommended that check standards
                 be interspersed with samples at regular intervals during the
                 course of the analyses.  If the response for any analyte
                 varies from the predicted response by more than ±20%, the
                 test must be repeated using a fresh calibration standard.
                                                                  If
       the results still do not agree, generate a new calibration
       curve.
9.3.4
9.3.5
                 Single point calibration is a viable alternative to a
                 calibration curve.  Prepare single point standards from the
                 secondary dilution standards in MTBE.  The single point
                 standards should be prepared at a concentration that produces
                 a response that deviates from the sample extract response by
                 no more than 20%.

                 Verify calibration standards periodically, recommend at least
                 quarterly, by analyzing a standard prepared from reference
                 material obtained from an independent source.  Results from
                 these analyses must be within the limits used to routinely
                 check calibration.

10.   QUALITY CONTROL

     10.1 Minimum quality control (QC) requirements are initial demonstration
          of laboratory capability, determination of surrogate compound

                                      184

-------
     recoveries in each sample and blank,  monitoring internal  standard
     peak area or height in each sample and blank (when internal  standard
     calibration procedures are being employed),  analysis of laboratory
     reagent blanks,  laboratory fortified  samples,  laboratory fortified
     blanks, and QC samples.

10.2 Laboratory Reagent Blanks —  Before  processing any samples, the
     analyst must demonstrate that all glassware and reagent
     interferences are under control.  Each time a set of samples is
     extracted or reagents are changed, a  laboratory reagent blank (LRB)
     must be analyzed.  If within the retention time window of any
     analyte of interest the LRB produces  a peak that would prevent the
     determination of that analyte, determine the source of contamination
     and eliminate the interference before processing samples.

10.3 INITIAL DEMONSTRATION OF CAPABILITY

     10.3.1 Select a representative fortified concentration (about 10
            times EDL or at the regulatory Maximum Contaminant Level,
            whichever is lower) for each analyte.  Prepare a sample
            concentrate (in methanol) containing each analyte at 1000
            times selected concentration.   With a syringe, add 1 mL of
            the concentrate to each of at least four 1-L aliquots of
            reagent water, and analyze each aliquot according to
            procedures beginning in Section 11.

     10.3.2 For each analyte the recovery value for all four of these
            samples must fall in the range of R ± 30% (or within R ± 3SR
            if broader) using the values for R and SR for reagent water
            in Table 2.  For those compounds that meet the acceptance
            criteria, performance is considered acceptable and sample
            analysis may begin.  For those compounds that fail these
            criteria, this procedure must be repeated using four fresh
            samples until satisfactory performance has been demonstrated.

     10.3.3 The initial demonstration of capability is used primarily to
            preclude a laboratory from analyzing unknown samples via a
            new,  unfamiliar method prior to obtaining some experience
            with  it.   It is expected that as laboratory personnel gain
            experience with this method the quality of data will improve
            beyond those required here.

10.4 The  analyst  is permitted to modify GC columns, GC conditions, GC
     detectors, continuous  extraction techniques, concentration
     techniques  (i.e.  evaporation techniques), internal standards or
     surrogate  compounds.   Each time  such method modifications are made,
     the  analyst  must  repeat  the procedures in Section 10.3.

10.5 ASSESSING  SURROGATE RECOVERY

     10.5.1 When  surrogate  recovery  from a sample or method blank is <70%
            or  >130%,  check (1) calculations to  locate possible  errors,

                                 185

-------
             (2) fortifying solutions for degradation, (3) contamination
             or other obvious abnormalities, and (4) instrument
             performance.  If those steps do not reveal the cause of the
             problem, reanalyze the extract.

     10.5.2  If a blank extract reanalysis fails the 70-130% recovery
             criterion, the problem must be identified and corrected
             before continuing.

     10.5.3  If sample extract reanalysis meets the surrogate recovery
             criterion, report only data for the reanalyzed extract.  If
             sample extract reanalysis continues to fail  the surrogate
             recovery criterion, report all data for that sample as
             suspect.

10.6 ASSESSING THE INTERNAL STANDARD

     10.6.1 When using the internal  standard calibration procedure, the
            analyst is expected to monitor the IS response (peak area or
            peak height) of all samples during each analysis day.   The IS
            response for any sample chromatogram should  not deviate from
            the daily calibration check standards IS response by more
            than 30%.

     10.6.2 If >30% deviation occurs with an individual  extract, optimize
            instrument performance and inject a second aliquot of that
            extract.

            10.6.2.1   If the reinjected aliquot produces an acceptable
                      internal  standard response report  results for that
                      aliquot.

            10.6.2.2   If a deviation  of greater than 30% is obtained for
                      the re-injected extract,  analysis  of the sample
                      should be repeated beginning with  Section 11,
                      provided  the sample is  still  available.   Otherwise,
                      report results  obtained  from the re-injected
                      extract,  but annotate  as  suspect.

     10.6.3 If consecutive samples fail  the  IS  response  acceptance
            criterion,  immediately analyze a  calibration  check standard.

            10.6.3.1   If the  check standard  provides  a response factor
                      (RF) within  20% of the  predicted value,  then  follow
                      procedures  itemized  in Section  10.6.2  for each
                      sample  failing  the IS  response  criterion.

            10.6.3.2   If the  check standard provides  a response factor
                     which deviates  more than  20%  of  the  predicted
                     value,  then  the analyst must  recalibrate,  as
                     specified  in Section 9.
                                186

-------
10.7 ASSESSING LABORATORY PERFORMANCE - LABORATORY FORTIFIED BLANK

     10.7.1 The laboratory must analyze at least one laboratory fortified
            blank (LFB) sample with every twenty samples or one per
            sample set (all samples extracted within a 24-h period)
            whichever is greater.  The fortified concentration of each
            analyte in the LFB should be 10 times EDL or the MCL,
            whichever is less.  Calculate accuracy as percent recovery
            (X,-).   If the recovery of any analyte falls outside the
            control limits (see Sect. 10.7.2), that analyte is judged out
            of control, and the source of the problem should be
            identified and resolved before continuing analyses.

     10.7.2 Until sufficient data become available from within their own
            laboratory, usually a minimum of results from 20 to 30
            analyses, the laboratory should assess laboratory performance
            against the control limits in Sect. 10.3.2 that are derived
            from the data in Table 2.  When sufficient internal
            performance data becomes available, develop control limits
            from the mean percent recovery (X) and standard deviation (S)
            of the percent recovery.  These data are used to establish
            upper and lower control limits as follows:

                      UPPER CONTROL LIMIT  = X + 3S
                      LOWER CONTROL LIMIT  = X - 3S

            After each five to ten new recovery measurements, new control
            limits should be calculated using only the most recent 20-30
            data points.  These calculated control limits should never
            exceed those established in Sect. 10.3.2.

     10.7.3 It is recommended that the laboratory periodically document
            and determine  its detection limit capabilities for the
            analytes of  interest.

     10.7.4 At least quarterly,  analyze a QC  sample from an outside
            source.

     10.7.5 Laboratories are encouraged to participate in external
            performance  evaluation studies such  as the labroatory
            certification  programs offered by many states or the studies
            conducted  by USEPA.   Performance  evaluation studies  serve as
            independent  checks on the  analyst's  performance.

 10.8 ASSESSING METHOD  PERFORMANCE -  LABORATORY  FORTIFIED SAMPLE  MATRIX

     10.8.1 The  laboratory must  add  a  known concentration to a minimum of
            10%  of the routine samples or one sample concentration per
            set, whichever is greater.  The added concentration  should
            not  be less  then  the  background concentration of the sample
            -selected  for fortification.   Ideally, the  fortified  analyte
            concentrations should be the  same as that  used  for the LFB

                                 187

-------
       (Section 10.7).  Over time, samples from all routine sample
       sources should be fortified.
10.8.2 Calculate the percent recovery, P of the concentration for
       each analyte, after correcting the analytical result, X, from
       the fortified sample for the background concentration, b,
       measured in the unfortified sample, i.e.,:

       P = 100 (X - b) / fortifying concentration,

       and compare these values to control limits appropriate for
       reagent water data collected in the same fashion.  If the
       analyzed unfortified sample is found to contain NO background
       concentrations, and the added concentrations are those
       specified in Sect. 10.7, then the appropriate control limits
       would be the acceptance limits in Sect. 10.7.  If, on the
       other hand, the analyzed unfortified sample is found to
       contain background concentration, b, estimate the standard
       deviation at the background concentration, sb,  using
       regressions or comparable background data and,  similarly,
       estimate the mean, X   and  standard  deviation,  s  , of
       analytical results at' the total concentration after
       fortifying.  Then the appropriate percentage control limits
       would be P ± 3sp ,  where:
       P = 100 X  / (b + fortifying concentration)


        and sn
                   2     2 1/2
          100   (s_  + s. )  /fortifying concentration
                  a      D
       For example, if the background concentration for Analyte A
       was found to be 1 /*g/L and the added amount was also 1 /jg/L,
       and upon analysis the laboratory fortified sample measured
       1.6 /i/L, then the calculated P for this sample would be (1.6
       /jg/L minus 1.0 #g/L)/l jug/L or 60%.  This calculated P is
       compared to control limits derived from prior reagent water
       data.  Assume it is known that analysis of an interference
       free sample at 1 /jg/L yields an s of 0.12 /zg/L and similar
       analysis at 2.0 /jg/L yields X and s of 2.01 /jg/L and 0.20
       JWJ/L, respectively.  The appropriate limits to judge the
       reasonableness of the percent recovery, 60%, obtained on the
       fortified matrix sample is computed as follows:
                                                1/2
[100 (2.01 jag/L) / 2.0 /ig/L]

± 3 (100)  [(0.12 /zg/L)2 + (0.20 fig/I)2]   '/ 1.0 /zg/L =

100.5% ± 300 (0.233) =

100.5% ± 70% or 30% to 170% recovery of the added analyte.
                            188

-------
          10.8.3  If  the  recovery  of  any  such  analyte falls outside the
                 designated  range, and the  laboratory performance for that
                 analyte is  shown to be  in  control  (Sect. 10.7), the recovery
                 problem encountered with the dosed sample is judged to  be
                 matrix  related,  not system related.  The result for that
                 analyte in  the unfortified sample  is labeled suspect/matrix
                 to  inform the data  user that the results are suspect due to
                 matrix  effects.

     10.9  ASSESSING  INSTRUMENT SYSTEM -  LABORATORY  PERFORMANCE  CHECK SAMPLE -
          Instrument performance  should  be  monitored on  a daily basis by
          analysis of the LPC sample.  The  LPC  sample contains  compounds
          designed to indicate appropriate  instrument sensitivity, column
          performance (primary column) and  chromatographic performance.  LPC
          sample  components  and performance criteria are listed in Table 3.
          Inability  to demonstrate acceptable instrument performance indicates
          the need for reevaluation  of the  instrument system.   The sensitivity
          requirements are set based on  the EDLs published in this method.   If
          laboratory EDLs differ  from those listed  in this method,
          concentrations of  the instrument  QC standard compounds must be
          adjusted to be compatible  with the  laboratory  EDLs.

    10.10  The laboratory may adopt additional quality control practices  for
          use with this  method.   The specific practices  that are most
          productive depend  upon  the needs  of the laboratory and the nature  of
          the samples.  For  example, field  or laboratory duplicates may  be
          analyzed to asses  the precision of  the environmental  measurements  or
          filed reagent  blanks may be used  to asses contamination  of samples
          under site conditions,  transportation and storage.

11.   PROCEDURE

     11.1  EXTRACTION (MANUAL METHOD)

          11.1.1  Mark the water meniscus on the side  of  the  sample bottle  for
                 later determination of  sample  volume  (Sect. 11.1.6).  Add
                 preservative to  blanks  and QC  check  standards.  Fortify the
                 sample  with 50 /iL  of the  surrogate standard fortifying
                 solution.  Pour  the entire sample  into  a  2-L separatory
                 funnel.

          11.1.2 Adjust  the  sample  to pH 7  by adding  50  mL  of phosphate
                 buffer.  Check pH:   add H2S04  or NaOH if necessary.

          11.1.3 Add 100 g NaCl  to  the  sample,  seal,  and shake  to  dissolve
                 salt.

          11.1.4 Add 60 mL methylene chloride to the  sample  bottle,  seal,  and
                 shake 30 s  to rinse the inner  walls.   Transfer the  solvent  to
                 the separatory funnel  and  extract  the  sample by  vigorously
                 shaking the funnel  for  2 min with  periodic  venting  to  release
                 excess pressure.  Allow the organic  layer to separate  from

                                     189

-------
            the water phase for a minimum of 10 min.  If the emulsion
            interface between layers is more than one third the volume of
            the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical
            techniques to complete the phase separation.  The optimum
            technique depends upon the sample, but may include stirring,
            filtration of the emulsion through glass wool,
            centrifugation, or other physical methods.  Collect the
            methylene chloride extract in a 500-mL Erlenmeyer flask.

     11.1.5 Add a second 60-mL volume of methylene chloride to the sample
            bottle and repeat the extraction procedure a second time,
            combining the extracts in the Erlenmeyer flask.  Perform a
            third extraction in the same manner.

     11.1.6 Determine the original sample volume  by refilling the sample
            bottle to the mark and transferring the water to a 1000-mL
            graduated cylinder.   Record the sample volume to the nearest
            5 ml.

11.2 AUTOMATED EXTRACTION METHOD — Data presented in this method were
     generated using the automated extraction procedure  with the
     mechanical tumbler.

     11.2.1 Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for
            later  determination  of sample volume  (Sect.  11.2.6).   Add
            preservative to blanks and QC check standards.   Fortify the
            sample with  50 /iL of the surrogate standard  fortifying
            solution.   If the mechanical  separatory funnel  shaker is
            used,  pour the entire sample into a 2-1 separatory funnel.
            If the mechanical  tumbler is used,  pour the  entire sample
            into a tumbler bottle.

     11.2.2 Adjust the sample to pH 7 by adding 50 ml of phosphate
            buffer.   Check pH:   add H2S04 or NaOH  if necessary.

     11.2.3 Add 100  g  NaCl  to'the sample,  seal, and shake to dissolve
            salt.

     11.2.4 Add 300  ml methylene chloride  to  the sample  bottle,  seal,  and
            shake  30 s to  rinse  the inner  walls.   Transfer  the  solvent  to
            the sample contained in the  separatory funnel  or tumbler
            bottle,  seal,  and  shake for  10 s,  venting periodically.
            Repeat shaking  and venting until  pressure release  is  not
            observed during  venting.   Reseal  and place sample  container
            in  appropriate mechanical mixing  device  (separatory funnel
            shaker or  tumbler).   Shake or  tumble the  sample  for 1  hour.
            Complete mixing  of the  organic and  aqueous phases  should be
            observed within  about 2 min  after starting the mixing  device.

     11.2.5  Remove the sample container from the mixing device.   If  the
            tumbler  is used, pour contents of tumbler  bottle into  a  2-1
            separatory funnel.  Allow the  organic layer to separate  from

                                190

-------
            the water phase for a minimum of 10  min.   If the  emulsion
            interface between layers  is  more than  one third the volume  of
            the solvent layer,  the analyst must  employ mechanical
            techniques to complete the phase separation.  The optimum
            technique depends upon the sample, but may include stirring,
            filtration through glass  wool, centrifugation, or other
            physical  methods.  Collect the methylene  chloride extract  in
            a 500-mL  Erlenmeyer flask.

     11.2.6 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the  sample
            bottle to the mark and transferring  the water to  a 1000-mL
            graduated cylinder.  Record  the sample volume to  the nearest
            5 ml.

11.3 EXTRACT CONCENTRATION

     11.3.1 Assemble  a K-D concentrator  by attaching  a 25-mL  concentrator
            tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask.   Other concentration
            devices or techniques may be used in place of the K-D  if the
            requirements of Sect. 10.3 are met.

     11.3.2 Dry the extract by pouring it through  a solvent-rinsed drying
            column containing about 10 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate.
            Collect the extract in the K-D concentrator, and  rinse the
            column with 20-30 ml methylene chloride.   Alternatively, add
            about 5 g anhydrous sodium sulfate to  the extract in the
            Erlenmeyer flask; swirl flask to dry extract and  allow to  sit
            for 15 min.  Decant the methylene chloride extract into the
            K-D concentrator.  Rinse the remaining sodium sulfate  with
            two 25-mL portions of methylene chloride  and decant the
            rinses into the K-D concentrator.

     11.3.3 Add 1 to 2 clean boiling stones to the evaporative flask and
            attach a macro Snyder column.  Prewet  the Snyder  column by
            adding about 1 mL methylene  chloride to the top.   Place the
            K-D apparatus on a hot water bath, 65  to  70°C,  so that the
            concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water,  and
            the entire lower rounded surface of  the flask is  bathed with
            hot vapor.  Adjust the vertical position  of the  apparatus  and
            the water temperature as required to complete the
            concentration in 15 to 20 min.  At the proper rate of
            distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter,
            but the chambers will not flood.  When the apparent volume  of
            liquid reaches 2 mL, remove  the K-D  apparatus and allow it  to
            drain and cool for at least  10 min.

     11.3.4 Remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and  its lower
            joint into the concentrator  tube with 1 to 2 mL  of MTBE.  Add
            5-10 mL of MTBE and a fresh  boiling  stone.  Attach a
            micro-Snyder column to the concentrator tube and  prewet the
            column by adding about 0.5 mL of MTBE to  the top.  Place the
            micro K-D apparatus on the water bath so  that the

                                 191

-------
             concentrator tube is  partially immersed  in  the  hot  water.
             Adjust the vertical position  of the  apparatus and the  water
             temperature as  required  to  complete  concentration in 5 to  10
             min.   When the  apparent  volume of liquid reaches 2  ml,  remove
             the micro  K-D from the bath and allow  it to drain and  cool.
             Add 5-10 ml MTBE  to the  micro K-D and  reconcentrate to 2 ml.
             Remove the micro  K-D  from the bath and allow it to  drain and
             cool.   Remove the micro  Snyder column, and  rinse the walls of
             the concentrator  tube while adjusting  the volume to 5.0 ml
             with MTBE.

      11.3.5  Transfer extract  to an appropriate-sized TFE-fluorocarbon-
             sealed screw-cap  vial and store,  refrigerated at 4°C,  until
             analysis by GC-NPD.

11.4  GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY

      11.4.1  Sect.  6.8  summarizes  the recommended operating conditions for
             the gas chromatograph.   Included  in Table 1  are retention
             times  observed  using  this method.  Other GC  columns,
             chromatographic conditions, or  detectors may be used if the
             requirements  of Sect. 10.3  are  met.

      11.4.2  Calibrate the system  daily  as described  in Sect. 9.   The
             standards and extracts must be  in MTBE.

      11.4.3  If the internal  standard calibration procedure is used, add
             5 nL of the  internal   standard fortifying solution to the
             sample extract,  seal,  and shake to distribute the internal
             standard.
     11.4.4 Inject 2 #L of the sample extract.
            size in area units.
Record the resulting peak
     11.4.5 If the response for the peak exceeds the working range of the
            system, dilute the extract and reanalyze.

11.5 IDENTIFICATION OF ANALYTES

     11.5.1 Identify a sample component by comparison of its retention
            time to the retention time of a reference chromatogram.   If
            the retention time of an unknown compound corresponds, within
            limits, to the retention time of a standard compound,  then
            identification is considered positive.

     11.5.2 The width of the retention time window  used to make
            identifications should be based upon measurements of actual
            retention time variations of standards  over the course of a
            day.   Three times the standard deviation of a retention  time
            can be used to calculate a suggested window size for a
            compound.  However,  the experience of the analyst should
            weigh heavily in the interpretation of  chromatograms.

                                192

-------
          11.5.3 Identification requires expert judgment when sample
                 components are not resolved chromatographically.   When GC
                 peaks obviously represent more than one sample component
                 (i.e.,  broadened peak with shoulder(s)  or valley between two
                 or more maxima), or any time doubt exists over the
                 identification of a peak on a chromatogram,  appropriate
                 alternate techniques, to help confirm peak identification,
                 need to be employed.  For example, more positive
                 identification may be made by the use of an alternative
                 detector which operates on a chemical/physical principle
                 different from that originally used; e.g., mass spectrometry,
                 or the use of a second chromatography column.  A suggested
                 alternative column is described in Sect. 6.8.

12.   CALCULATIONS

     12.1 Calculate analyte concentrations in the sample from the response for
          the analyte using the calibration procedure described in Sect. 9.

     12.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, calculate
          the concentration (C) in the sample using the calibration curve or
          response factor (RF) determined in Sect. 9.2 and Equation 2.

                         (As)ds)                    c   +.   ,
          C (/ig/L) = 	              Equation 2
                        (Ajs)(RF)(V0)

          where:
          As  = Response for the parameter to be measured.
          Ais  = Response for the internal  standard.
          Is  = Amount of internal  standard added to each extract (/zg).
          V0  = Volume of water extracted (L).

     12.3 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, calculate
          the  amount of material injected from the peak response using the
          calibration curve or  calibration factor determined in Section
          9.3.The concentration  (C) in the sample can be calculated from
          Equation 3.

                        (A)(Vt)
          C (Mg/L) = 	                Equation 3
                        (Vf)(V.)

          where:

          A  = Amount of material  injected (ng).
          V,- = Volume of extract injected (ML)-
          Vt = Volume of total extract (/it).
          Vs = Volume of water extracted (ml).
                                      193

-------
13.  PRECISION AND ACCURACY

     13.1 In a single laboratory, analyte recoveries from reagent water were
          determined at five concentration levels.  Results were used to
          determine analyte EDLs and demonstrate method range (1).  Analytes
          were divided into two fortified groups for recovery studies.
          Analyte EDLs and analyte recoveries and standard deviation about the
          percent recoveries at one concentration are given in Table 2.

     13.2 In a single laboratory, analyte recoveries from two standard
          synthetic ground waters were determined at one concentration level.
          Results were used to demonstrate applicability of the method to
          different ground water matrices (1).  Analyte recoveries from the
          two synthetic matrices are given in Table 2.

14.  REFERENCES

     1.   National Pesticide Survey Method No. 2:  Determination of
          Chlorinated Pesticides in Groundwater by Gas Chromatography with a
          Electron Capture Detector.

     2.   ASTM Annual  Book of Standards,  Part 11, Volume 11.02,  D3694-82,
          "Standard Practice for Preparation of Sample Containers and for
          Preservation,"  American Society for Testing and Materials,
          Philadelphia,  PA,  1986.

     3.   "Carcinogens  -  Working with Carcinogens," Department of Health,
          Education,  and  Welfare,  Public  Health Service,  Center for Disease
          Control, National  Institute for Occupational  Safety and Health,
          Publication No.  77-206,  Aug.  1977.

     4.   "OSHA Safety  and Health  Standards,  General  Industry,"  (29 CFR 1910),
          Occupational  Safety and  Health  Administration,  OSHA 2206,  (Revised,
          January 1976).

     5.   "Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,"  American  Chemical
          Society Publication,  Committee  on. Chemical  Safety,  3rd Edition,
          .L •/ / «7 •

     6.   ASTM  Annual Book of Standards,  Part 11,  Volume  11.01,  D3370-82,
          "Standard Practice  for Sampling Water,"  American  Society  for  Testing
          and Materials,  Philadelphia,  PA,  1986.
                                     194

-------
              TABLE 1. RETENTION TIMES FOR METHOD ANALYTES
                                         Retention Time8
                                            (minutes)
                                   Primary  .	Alternative
Etridiazole
Chlorneb
Propachlor
Trifluralin
HCH-alpha
Hexachlorobenzene
HCH-beta
HCH-gamma
PCNB (internal std.)
HCH-delta
Chlorthalonil
Heptachlor
Aldrin
Chlorpyrifos
DC PA
Heptachlor epoxide
Chlordane-gamma
Endosulfan I
Chlordane-alpha
4,4'-DDE
Dieldrin
Endrin
Endosulfan II
Chi orobenzi late
4, 4 '-ODD
Endrin aldehyde
Endosulfan sulfate
4, 4 '-DDT
Methoxychlor
cis-Permethrin
trans-Permethrin
DCB
23.46
25.50
28.90
31.62
31.62
31.96
33.32
33.66
34
35.02
35.36
37.74
40.12
40.6
41.14
42.16
43.52
44.20
44.54
45.90
45.90
46.92
47.60
47.94
48.28
48.62
49.98
50.32
53.38
58.48
58.82
64.1
22.78
26.18
30.94
(b)
32.98
(b)
40.12
35.36
34
41.48
39.78
36.72
38.08
(b)
41.14
42.16
43.86
43.52
44.54
44.88
45.90
(b)
51.68
48.28
46.92
46.92
49.30
50.32
53.72
(b)
(b)
(b)
Columns and analytical conditions are described in Sect. 6.8.1 and 6.8.2.
Data not available.
                                   195

-------
                            CM    i— < i— <
                                                                    O CO
ss   -,
                 o to ir> h«. oo co o vo in oo co CM co co co co «<• KMO o> o> i— i CM oo •-< in !•>. vo co
                               COO          CO CM       CO      (O       IO    CO   t-t       «O
>-Lu    £
Q*3    D>
                            CO    CO I--    CM      CM         CO       CM            in    i-l CO CO

                 co o> oS en i—i ov r—i •—i en I-H oo co i—i co oo CT» i—i en o> •—i oo cy> oo en ^-i cj>»—i •—11—i
                 in to in
                               in in in         in in in in in in in
                                                                          in
                                                                                in in
                                                                                                 in
                                                                                                 CM
                 oooinr-nooooooooooooooooooooininino
                    in in            m                                            r^.
                 u> ^H t-<      in in CM         in in in in **• in in       in    in r-»            in
                 t^ O C3      CM CM O i—I IO CM i—I i-l i-l CM CM CM CM i-H i—I i-H i-l r-4 O in          CM
                 o o o in   o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o CD o o o o in in in o

                 ooooinoooooooooooooooooooooooo
                                                    (U

                                                    m
                      . E    «Sr—


                        i    T3  o

                       c ja eo'«
                       o>
                       XJ tt>
•a                     o M    i=  s-
 >>!-<                  O. C   -r- ^
^r >-i                  a) £-or—
 nS«t-N.Cl«+Jgr— r— O O 1=  0>i— rt
                             >> S-Q-J= S-
                                             196

-------
          0)  c
      0)  Q. O
      S-    i—
      3  (9 4->
      •O     A
      «  O> S-
      O  C 4->

      S-TJ  0)
      Q-r—  O
          
      C     S-i-
      i-  19  01 J=
      «»-    J= 4->
      o>  c  o>
      o ••- -i-  c
            ,C "r"
       i -o
Vt
_
00
*«-
 o
 0)
 E

 O)
J5
4J

4-»
 c
 0)
 to
 o>
 S-
 o.
 d)
 S-
VO  3 f-  O)
co  o    4->
+J  O r— W)
S-u
«     > i-
a. <4-     a.
    os-
oc     a> i —
U_ r—  > O>
«  a>  o> >
    > J= O)
O  O)  Or—
       O fl»
          S-  «•!-»
      CQ o in ra
                            O
                            O
                                   S-
                                   o>
                                   n>
                             o.
                             O
                             c/>
                                   a*
                                   o
                                   s-
                                   O)
                                   C
                                   n»
                                              "8
                                            (DO)
                                            >-C
                                            a) -4->
                                           r—
                                            O •«-
                                            «o-o
                                            s- a>
                                            +->-(->
                                            c 
                                            o v>
                                               
                                               O
                                            a) o
                                            jc co
                                               a)
                                               o
                                  o       -r- •
                                            U
                                   s-
                                   O)
                                  4->
 0» i
 Q.
   t-« a> o>
          U
             SO
  .
<. o x
*-••»- o
    10
      -        .
      a>o.
      Z tl) <0 VI
         os.    to
       I.   M-
       0> I  o o«o
      t--f-i-«n
       0) E 4->
         •r- fO O)
I—   TO O
.Q    0) f—
       C 4->
 C   f- U
t-   «l- O)
       0) 4J
•o   -o o)
+»
 U
 a)
 O
 E
 ra
 S-
 o
T3
 Q)
J-
S.
O
O
•M
 "3
a
-4->-O
i- o
 E J=
i-*j
r— O)
   S
 c.
 O 
                                   en
                            OO
                                   CO
                                   a)
                             0)
                             s-
                                   as

                                   0)
                             V)
                            ^3
                            <
                                            O CO
                                            p— t-
                                            <«-  3
                                            -•->•—
                                            1-08
                                            s  c
                                                O
                                            "O-r-
                                            Q>+->
                                            t-  &-   .
                                                a) -a
                                                   a)
                                            <4->-i3

                                             S-  0)  V>
                                             OJ^r  n»

                                            "^
                                            +->  S- O
                                                  -

                                            o>
                                            5?*£

                                            £-8-5
                                               r— <_>
                                             c  > s-
                                             m  nj 
                      O
                      0
                      O)
                      s-
                                                OS
                                       O  >
      •MO
       O)
      T?C
          o
      T3 ••-
       O)
             OS-    4->
      +J
       V)
       0>
          O)
       ICS
_J
      -u  a)
       x ~o
       tt>
          c
      i— -i-
       «
       C-O
       r-Q)
          V>
          3
             0>
                       a>
                       o
                       s-
                       0)
                       05
                       nj
                       S-
                       0)
                       >
                       ns
                >
                a>
                                   can
                                   Eo
                                   n» -i-
                                   S-
                                   o-
                             X    -O3
                             (3    (DO
                             Jj    -4-> E
                             to    O>>
                             ""    0)r—
                             K     s-a-
                             "     S-
                              K   oc
                             co    <_>•!-
                                       c
                                       3T3
                                       o  a>
                                       Ersi
                                       
                                      <*-O
                                          «
                                      -OS-
                                       Q)  (O
                                      -M.C
                                       OO
                                       O>  I
                                       s-r—
                                       S-i—
                                       o    s
                                                   >,
                                                   O)
                                                   >
                                                   s-
                                                   3
                                                  
                                                   D)
                                                   o
                                                   0)
                                                   Cfl
                                                   flS
                                                   -i->
                                                   co
                       o   -o


                    197

-------









CO
c
EH
z 2
2 "5
fe «
o

jj§ cT— i
^^ ^» ^^^
Ljj O O>

;j»
c£
sg
Mi
£
ee
UJ
o.

1 .
s >>
§ 1
3 ^


•
CO
Ul

CD

1—




























4_>
CO
«
1—

CO
A
CO
oT
tfj
>J
r—
C
«£
o
c
o
U
O>



0
CM
O
o

o






CO
o
r
ex
o
JC

































^J
4^>
•r*
4->
CO
c:
oj
to


in
i— t
?— i
•o
re

o
00
o
c
0)
0)
^g
03
XI
U.
CO
o.


o
0
in
o

o









1
a



















0)
u
c

£~
s-
c£

(U
0.

u
•P"
J=
a.
re
s-
O)
o
re
o
s-
x:
<->





JO
0
in
0
A
o
•j—
3
O
CU


OO
OO
in **•
00

o o




r™"*
•^
c
o
Is
o*cu
S-T3
0 1
!co
O 3=


























a>
o
c
rt
E
i»
Q
*^m
s-
0)
a.
c
3

"o
0
























c
o
•p—
,^A
re
a-
(U
a>
.c
c:
•!••
CO
3

0)
+•*
re
r~*
3
U
l_ .
re
CJ


tl
o
4^
u


C *-N
re CM

CO r-<
3 3
re
C9 X

^^ CO
re 00
(U •
' O.I-H

1 II
^J^ ^^
C3 C5
a. a.



•





,
1 7
_g-
cn
•r-
a>
-c
c
a>
re
^

^
re
0)
ex

cu

4^

CO

,•••*,
O
F— 1
***^
r-H
•a
re
sz
at

0)
.c
•' «*-
^--_
(O
JZ

•f^
«J

p*
•4-*
"O
"5

^^
re
O)
ex

cu

4^
O CO
1— « "I—

l~4 ^~N
•—CM
3: --».
•-H
--!_ -•
™ag

O)
cu
x:



























"
o
• f*B
4^
re

qr
cu
O)
.c
•°
^3

0.
o
^
4*>

0)
4J

J—
0>
§

Q)
XI

C
O

1 %
3 4->
r-
0
CO X
a>
ce. ct.



A
a>
40
•s
J=
•o
•i™


<^g
re
a>
0.
01
s
cu
ro
a>

CO
•r*
C;
re

CO

re
a>
a.
o

j^

(O

Q)
tu
O)
XI

CO
0)
E
4J

C
o

^J
3

(2)

C
CO
a> -*


•j ft
o
CO

Q)

m^ ^
(U r—
S- 0)
 CO
JC re




198

-------
METHOD 508A.  SCREENING FOR POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS
      BY PERCHLORINATION AND GAS CHRONATOGRAPHY
                     Revision  1.0
   T. A. Bellar - Method 508A, Revision 1.0 (1989)
     ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
          OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
         U.S.  ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
                CINCINNATI,  OHIO  45268
                          199

-------
                                 METHOD 508A

                    SCREENING FOR POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS
                     BY PERCHLORINATION/GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY
  1.  SCOPE AND APPLICATION

     1.1. This procedure may be used for screening finished drinking water,
          raw source water, or drinking water  in any treatment stage for
          polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).  This procedure is applicable to
          samples containing PCBs as single congeners or as complex mixtures
          such as weathered, intact, or mixtures of commercial Aroclors.  The
          procedure is incapable of identifying the parent PCBs because the
          original PCBs are chemically converted to a common product,
          decachlorobiphenyl (DCB).  The procedure has only been evaluated
          using Aroclors and 2-chlorobiphenyl  as a source of PCBs.

     1.2. This procedure is primarily designed to function as a pass/fail test
          for DCB at 0.5 fj.g/1.  However, it will accurately measure DCB from
          the method detection limit (MDL) to  5.0 ng/L.  It is prone to false
          positive interferences and can result in a calculated weight of PCBs
          significantly greater than that of PCB originally present in the
          sample.  If DCB is detected at 0.5 fj.g/1 or above, then an approved
          method for the analysis of PCBs should be used to accurately
          identify the source and measure the concentration of the PCBs.

     1.3. This procedure can be used to help confirm the presence of PCBs for
       •   other methods using electron capture or halogen specific detectors
          whenever chromatographic patterns are not representative of those
          described in the method.

2.   SUMMARY OF PROCEDURE
     2.1
          A 1-L water sample is placed into a separatory funnel and extracted
          with methylene chloride or one of several optional solvents.  The
          extract is dried, concentrated, and the solvent is exchanged to
          chloroform.  The PCBs are then reacted with antimony pentachloride
          (SbCl5)  (in the presence of an iron catalyst and heat)  to form DCB.
          The DCB is extracted with hexane from the reaction mixture; after
          the extract is purified, an aliquot is injected into a gas
          chromatograph (GC) equipped with an electron capture detector (ECD)
          for separation and measurement.  The GC is calibrated using DCB as
          the standard.

3.   DEFINITIONS

     3.1. Calibration Standard (CAL) -- A solution of DCB used to calibrate
          the ECD.

     3.2. Congener Number -- Throughout this procedure,  individual PCBs are
          described with the number assigned by Ballschmiter and Zell  (1).

                                     200

-------
         (This number is also used to describe PCB congeners in catalogs
         produced by Ultra Scientific, Hope, RI.)

    3.3. Laboratory Duplicates (LD1 and LD2) -- Two sample aliquots taken in
         the analytical laboratory are analyzed with identical procedures.
         Analysis of laboratory duplicates indicates precision associated
         with laboratory procedures, but not with sample collection,
         preservation or storage procedures.

    3.4. Laboratory Performance Check Solution (LPC) -- A solution of method
         analytes used to evaluate the analytical system performance with
         respect to a defined set of criteria.

    3.5. Laboratory Reagent Blank (LRB) -- An aliquot of reagent water that
         is treated as a sample.  It  is exposed  to all glassware and
         apparatus, and all method solvents and  reagents are  used.  The
         extract is concentrated to the final volume used for samples and is
         analyzed the  same as a sample extract.

    3.6. Laboratory Fortified Sample  Matrix (LFM) -- An aliquot of  an
         environmental sample to which known  quantities of  the method
         analytes are  added  in the laboratory.   The LFM is  analyzed exactly
         like  a  sample, and  its purpose is  to determine whether the sample
         matrix  contributes  bias to the analytical results.   The background
         concentrations of the analytes in  the sample matrix  must  be
         determined  in a  separate  aliquot and the measured  values  in the LFM
         corrected  for background  concentrations.

     3.7. Quality Control  (QC)  Sample  -- A sample containing known
         concentrations of analytes  that  is analyzed  by a  laboratory to
         demonstrate  that it can  obtain acceptable  identifications  and
         measurements with procedures to  be used to analyze environmental
          samples containing  the  same  or similar  analytes.   Analyte
          concentrations are  known  by the  analyst.   Preparation of  the QC
          check sample by  a  laboratory other than the  laboratory performing
          the analysis is  highly  desirable.

4.   INTERFERENCES

     4.1.  Interferences may be caused by contaminants  in  solvents reagents,
          glassware, and other sample processing  equipment.   Laboratory
          reagent blanks (LRBs) are analyzed routinely to  demonstrate that
          these materials are free of interferences under  the analytical
          conditions used for samples.

     4.2.  To minimize interferences, glassware (including  sample bottles)
          should be meticulously cleaned.   As soon as possible after use,
          rinse glassware with the last solvent  used.   Then wash with
          detergent in hot water and rinse with  tap water followed by
          distilled water.  Drain dry and heat in a muffle furnace at 450 C
          for a few hours.  After cooling, store glassware inverted or covered
          with aluminum foil.  Before using,  rinse each piece with an

                                      201

-------
           appropriate solvent.
           muffle  furnace.
                            Volumetric glassware should not be heated in a
     4.3.  In  addition  to  PCBs,  several  compounds  and  classes of  compounds will
           form  DCB with varying yields  when  extracted and perchlorinated
           according  to this  procedure.   Based  upon a  literature  search  (2)
           such  compounds  include  biphenyl, polyhalogenated biphenyls,
           hydrogenated biphenyls,  and polyhalogenated terphenyls.   If such
           compounds  are present in the  extract, false positive or positively
           biased data  will be generated.

     4.4. A splitless  injection capillary column GC can be used  but standards
           and samples  should be contained in the same solvent, or results may
           be significantly biased.
     4.5.
      PCBs are converted to DCB on a mole for mole basis.   Converting DCB
      concentrations back to the original PCB concentration is beyond the
      scope of this method.  For informational  purposes and in order to
      demonstrate the degree of increased weight of PCBs generated by the
      procedure,  Table 1 lists the conversion of 0.5 ng/l  of DCB back to
      various sources of PCBs assuming 100% method recovery.
5.   SAFETY
     5.1,
     5.2.
      Chloroform and methylene chloride  have  been  tentatively  classified
      as  known  or suspected  human  or mammalian  carcinogens.  The  toxicity
      or  carcinogenicity of  the remaining  chemicals  used  in  this  method
      has not been precisely defined.  Therefore,  each  should  be  treated
      as  a potential  health  hazard,  and  exposure should be reduced to  the
      lowest feasible level.   Each laboratory is responsible for  safely
      disposing materials and for  maintaining awareness of OSHA
      regulations regarding  safe handling  of  the chemicals used in this
      method.   A reference file of material data handling sheets  should be
      made available  to  all  personnel  involved  in  analyses.  Additional
      information on  laboratory safety is  available  (3-5).

      Polychlorinated biphenyls have been  classified as known  or  suspected
      human or  mammalian  carcinogens.  Primary  standards of  these
      compounds  should be prepared  in  an area specifically designed to
      handle carcinogens.  It  is recommended that  primary dilutions be
      obtained  from certified  sources  such as the  EPA repository.
     5.3.
                                                                         This
     SbCl5 is a corrosive reagent that reacts violently with water.
     compound must be used with extreme caution.  All operations
     involving the pure reagent must be performed in a hood because
     appreciable quantities of volatile, potentially harmful materials
     will be lost to the atmosphere.

5.4. The perch!orination reaction described in this procedure requires
     that the sample extract be heated to 205°C for about 30 min while
     hermetically sealed in a glass test tube.  The solvents and volumes
     described in the procedure should be carefully reproduced; otherwise

                                202

-------
         dangerous pressures may be generated during perch!orination.  The
         following safety precautions are strongly recommended.

         5.4.1.  Use only the prescribed perch!orination glassware and
                 visually check for flaws such as chips, strains, or
                 scratches.  Discard if any abnormalities  are noted.

         5.4.2.  After cooling the perch!orinated product  is still under
                 slight  pressure and should be carefully vented  in a  hood
                 (Sect.  11.2.8.).

         5.4.3.  The SbCl5 neutralization step involves an exothermic
                 reaction and should be performed in a  hood  (Sect, 11.2.9.).

         5.4.4.  An explosion shield should be used during the
                 perchlorination and neutralization procedures along  with
                 additional  eye protection such  as an 8-in.  face shield.  An
                 oil bath heater should not be substituted for the block
                 digester.

     5.5. Storage,  labelling  and disposal of PCBs must conform to all
         applicable laws and regulations.  See  (6) for  USEPA requirements.
         Call  the  Toxics Substances Control Act  hotline for  further
         assistance  (1-800-424-9065).

     5.6. Methylene chloride  is  described  in the  procedure  (Sect. 11.1.2)  as
         the extraction  solvent; however,  hexane, hexane + 15% methylene
         chloride  or  hexane  + 15%  ethylether  may be  substituted  to minimize
         laboratory personnel  exposure  to  methylene  chloride.

     5.7. Chloroform  is described  in  the procedure  (Sect.  11.2.1) as  the
          solvent for  the perchlorination  reaction.   Other  less toxic solvents
          including methylene chloride  and  hydrocarbons  were  evaluated but
         were found  to be unsuitable.   Prior  to  implementing this procedure,
          all laboratory personnel  must  be  trained  in  safe  handling  practices
          for chloroform.

6.   APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT

     6.1.  Sampling equipment

          6.1.1.  Water sample bottles  --  Meticulously cleaned 1-L glass
                  bottles fitted with Teflon-lined screw caps.

     6.2.  Glassware

          6.2.1.  Separatory Funnel --  2-L with Teflon stopcock.

          6.2.2.  Drying Column --  Glass column approximately 400 mm long x
                  19 mm i.d. with coarse frit filter disc.
                                      203

-------
      6.2.3.   Concentrator Tube -- 10-mL graduated Kuderna-Danish design
              with ground-glass stopper.

      6.2.4.   Evaporative Flask -- 500-mL Kuderna-Danish  design.

      6.2.5.   Snyder Column -- Three-ball  macro  Kuderna-Danish  design.

      6.2.6.   Snyder Column -- Three-ball  micro  Kuderna-Danish  design.

      6.2.7.   Vials --  10- to 15-mL amber glass  with  Teflon-lined screw
              caps.

      6.2.8.   Screw cap culture test tubes --  100  mm  x  13 mm  i.d.  Pyrex
              with a Teflon-lined  screw  cap, Sargent-Welch  #S-79533A or
              equivalent.

      6.2.9.   Disposable Pasteur pipettes  -- 9-in.  heavy wall.

      6.2.10.  Screw cap test  tube  -- 15  ml with  Teflon-lined  screw cap.

6.3.  GC System  -- Packed  column or capillary  column.

      6.3.1.   Isothermal packed column GC  equipped  with an  on-column
              injector  and a  linearized  BCD capable of generating  a linear
              response  for DCB from at least 0.005  to 1.0 ng  injected.

      6.3.2.   Programmable capillary column GC equipped with  an on-column
              or split!ess injector and  a  linearized ECD capable of
              generating a linear  response  for DCB  from at  least 0.005 to
              1.0  ng  injected.   The column  oven  temperature programmer
              should  have  multi-ramp  capabilities from at least 60°C  to
              300 C.  For most precise data, an autoinjector should be
              used.

6.4. GC Columns

     6.4.1.   Packed  Column -- A 2  mm i.d. x 3 m, glass column packed with
             3% OV-1 on 80-100 mesh Supelcoport or equivalent.

     6.4.2.  Capillary Column  -- A 30 m x 0.32 mm  i.d.  fused silica
             capillary coated with a bonded 0.25 urn film of cross linked
             phenyl methyl silicone such as Durabond-5 (DB-5).

6.5. Miscellaneous Equipment

     6.5.1.  Volumetric flask -- 5-mL,  10-mL,  and 100 ml with ground
             glass stoppers.

     6.5.2.  Microsyringes -- Various standard sizes.
                                204

-------
          6.5.3.   Boiling Chips -- Approximately 10/40 mesh.   Heat at 400°C
                  for 30 min or extract with methylene chloride in a Soxhlet
                  apparatus.

          6.5.4.   Water Bath -- Heated, with concentric ring cover, capable of
                  temperature control  with + 2°C.

          6.5.5.   Analytical Balance -- Capable of accurately weighing to
                  0.0001 g.

          6.5.6.   1-L graduated cylinder.

          6.5.7.   Block digestor -- 1.4 cm i.d. x 5 cm deep holes.  Operated
                  at 205°C ± 5°C.   Note:   A  Technicon  Model BD-40  block
                  digestor with specially fabricated aluminum insert bushings
                  was used to conduct the procedure development research.
                  Block digesters with holes of other dimensions may adversely
                  influence recoveries.

7.   REAGENTS AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

     7.1. Solvents -- High purity, distilled in glass toluene, hexane,
          methylene chloride, chloroform and methyl alcohol.

     7.2. Sodium sulfate -- ACS granular, anhydrous.  Purify by heating at
          400°C for 4 h in a shallow dish.  Store in a glass bottle with a
          Teflon-lined screw cap.

     7.3. SbCl5 > 98%.

     7.4. Iron powder - 99.1%.

     7.5. PCB Solutions.

          7.5.1.  Prepare  a stock  solution  of Aroclor 1260 at 5.00 ng/p.1  in
                  methyl alcohol or obtain  a similar mixture from  a certified
                  source.

          7.5.2.  Prepare  a stock  solution  of DCB at  1.00 M9/ML in toluene or
                  obtain a similar mixture  from a certified source.

          7.5.3.  PCB fortification solution.  Dilute an aliquot  of the
                  Aroclor  1260 stock solution in methyl alcohol to produce
                  about  10 ml of a solution containing 50.0 ng//xL.  Store in a
                  50-90% filled glass  bottle with a Teflon-lined  screw cap.

          7.5.4.  Calibration standards.  Five calibration solutions
                  containing DCB from  0.01  ng/juL to 1.0 ng/p,l  in  hexane are
                  required to calibrate  the detector  response.  Prepare
                  standards at 0.010,  0.080, 0.10, 0.25 and 1.0 r\g/p,L  in
                  hexane  (see 4.4) from  the stock solution of DCB.  Store in


                                      205

-------
                   50-90% filled  glass  bottles with Teflon-lined  screw caps.
                   Monitor for solvent  loss  due  to evaporation.

           7.5.5.   Extract matrix evaluation solution.   Dilute  an  aliquot  of
                   the  DCB stock  solution  to produce  about  10 ml  of  a  solution
                   containing  50.0 ng/jul_ in  hexane.   Store  in a 50-90% filled
                   glass  bottle with  a  Teflon-lined screw cap.

     7.6.  Hydrochloric Acid Solution 1+1  -  Dilute one part concentrated
           hydrochloric acid with one part distilled  water.

     7.7.  0.1N Sodium  Bicarbonate (NaHC03)  Solution  - Dilute 0.84 g of ACS
           grade NaHC03 to  100 ml with reagent water.

     7.8.  Reagent  water  -  Water  in which  DCB is found to be less  than 0.1 p.g/1
           as analyzed  by this  procedure.  Distilled  water met  this  criterion.

8.   SAMPLE COLLECTION.  PRESERVATION. AND STORAGE

     8.1.  Sample Collection

           8.1.1.   Collect  duplicate  samples in clean 1-L glass containers and
                   seal with a  Teflon-lined  screw cap.   Fill the bottles to
                   about  90-95% full.

           8.1.2.   Because  PCBs are hydrophobic they  are likely to be  adsorbed
                   on suspended solids.  If  suspended solids are present in the
                   source,  a representative  portion of solids must be  included
                   in the water sample.

           8.1.3.   When sampling  from a water tap, open the tap and  allow the
                   system to flush until the water temperature  has stabilized
                   (about  10 min).  Adjust the flow to about 1  L/min and
                   collect  the duplicate samples 'from the flowing stream.

           8.1.4.   When sampling  from an open body of water, fill  a  1-gal
                   wide-mouth bottle  from  a  representative area.  Carefully
                   fill the duplicate sample bottles  from the 1-gal  bottle.

     8.2.  Sample Preservation  --No  chemical preservation reagents  are
           recommended.  Store the samples at 4°C to  retard  microbial action
           until analysis.

     8.3.  Sample Storage -- Extract  samples within 14 days of collection (7).
           Extracts and perch!orinated extracts may be stored for up to 30 days
           if protected from solvent  volatilization.

9.   CALIBRATION   -- Demonstration and documentation  of acceptable  initial
     calibration is required before  any samples are  analyzed and  is required
     intermittently throughout sample analyses as dictated by results of
     continuing calibration checks.  After  initial  calibration is successfully
     performed, a continuing calibration check is required at the beginning

                                     206

-------
and end of each set of samples or 8-hour period during which analyses are
performed.

9.1. Initial Calibration

     9.1.1.  Inject duplicate aliquots (1-3 pi ) of each calibration
             solution into the GC.  (Autoinjectors are preferred,
             especially with splitless injectors.)  Inject five
             additional aliquots of the 0.10 ng/juL standard.

     9.1.2.  Accurately determine the DCB retention time (RT) arid peak
             area or peak height for each injection.

     9.1.3.  Determine the average RT and the standard deviation (SD) of
             RTs for all 15 injections.  To be acceptable, the RSD of the
             RTs should be less than 0.2%.

     9.1.4.  Determine the response factor (RF) for each of the
             injections by dividing the amount (ng) injected into the
             resulting area or peak height or integrator units.

     9.1.5.  Determine the average RF and its SD and RSD for the seven
             injections at the 0.10 ng/juL level.

     9.1.6.  The RSD of the RF should be less than 6% for the seven
             injections at the 0.1 ng/jil_ level.

     9.1.7.  Compare the RF determined for the 0.01, 0.08, 0.25, and
             1.0 ng standards to the average RF calculated in 9.1.5 ± 3
             SD.   If any value falls outside of this range, then the
             instrument is not being operated within an acceptable linear
             range and the sample volume injected must be adjusted
             accordingly.  Alternatively, the linear dynamic range can be
             clearly defined  by  injecting standards at other
             concentrations.  To be marginally acceptable, the system
             should function  from 0.08 to 0.25 ng injected.

             Table II  shows typical values obtained during method
             developmnt.

 9.2. For an acceptable continuing calibration check, the 0.1 ng//iL
     calibration standard must be analyzed before and after  a series of
     samples or at least once after each 8 hours of operation.   The  RF
     must be within +  20%  of the mean value determined in 9.1.5, or a
     new calibration curve must  be generated.  Additionally, the RT must
     fall within the mean value  + 3 SD determined in 9.1.3,  or a new
     calibration curve must be generated or the reason for the RT
     variance  must be  found and  rectified.

 9.3. Extract matrix effect evaluation  --It has been found that  there may
     be a matrix effect  from  the perchlorinated extract which can bias
     the response  on certain  GC  systems.  Until this problem is

                                 207

-------
           understood,  an extract matrix effect evaluation should be performed
           on each gas  chromatographic system to determine if the system can be
           used for this procedure.   This test should be repeated each time a
           modification or change is made to the system.
           9.3.1.
           9.3.2.
           9.3.3.
           9.3.4.
          9.3.5.
          9.3.6.
          9.3.7.
 Extract,  perch!orinate,  and  cleanup  duplicate  drinking  water
 samples or  laboratory  reagent  blanks according to  the
 procedure halting  at step  11.2.13.

 Combine the two  extracts together  in a  25-mL beaker  or  flask
 and mix.

 Immediately place  5.0  ml in  a  volumetric  flask and seal.
 Place the remaining solution in a  second  hermetically sealed
 container and label MS-1 (mixed sample  1).

 Analyze MS-1 in  duplicate.   If the value  for the DCB is
 < 0.05 ng/juL, proceed  to 9.3.5.  If  > 0.05 ng/fj.1,  proceed to
 y • *5 * o •

 Fortify the  contents of the volumetric  flask with  10.0 p.1
 of the 50.0  ng/jLtL  extract matrix evaluation solution (Sect.
 7.5.5) and  label SE-1  (fortified extract  1).   Analyze SE-1
 in duplicate, then proceed to  9.3.

 Fortify the  contents of the volumetric  flask at three to ten
times the concentration found  in 9.3.4.   If the fortified
value plus the MS-1 value found in 9.3.4 exceeds the linear
dynamic range of the detector  (Sect. 9.1.7), then  terminate
the test  and select another sample.  Do not dilute extract
matrices to perform this test.

Determine the extract matrix bias according to the following
calculation:
                   (SE-1 nq/uL) - (MS-1 ng/ul) x 100
                          (Fortified value ng//j|_)
                                     = % recovery
                  Recoveries between 80 and 120% are acceptable.  If the
                  recovery is < 80%, the test should be repeated.  If the
                  recovery remains < 80%, then another GC system should be
                  used.

10.  QUALITY CONTROL

     10.1. Laboratory Reagent Blank (LRB) -- Perform all steps in the
           analytical procedure (Sect. 11) using all glassware, reagents,
           standards, equipment, apparatus,  and solvents that would be used
           for a sample analysis using 1 L of reagent water.
                                     208

-------
      10.1.1.   Prepare  and  analyze  a  LRB before  any  samples  are  extracted
               and  analyzed.

      10.1.2.   Prepare  and  analyze  additional  LRB whenever new batches  or
               sources  of reagents  are  introduced into  the analysis
               scheme.

      10.1.3.   Prepare  a LRB  each time  samples are perchlorinated.   If
               large batches  of samples are  perchlorinated,  then prepare
               and  analyze  1  LRB per  10 samples.

      10.1.4.   An acceptable  LRB contains  <  0.025 ng/juL of DCB.

      10.1.5.   Corrective action for  unacceptable LRB -- Systematically
               check solvents,  reagents (particularly the SbCl5  and
               methylene chloride), apparatus and glassware  to  locate and
               eliminate the  source of  contamination before  any  samples
               are extracted, perchlorinated, and analyzed.   Purify or
               discard  contaminated reagents and solvents.

10.2.  Calibration -- Included among initial  and continuing  calibration
      procedures are numerous QC checks to ensure that valid data are
      being acquired (See Sect. 9).  Continuing calibration  checks are
      accomplished with results from analysis of one solution,  the
      0.10 ng/juL calibration  solution.

      10.2.1.   If some  criteria are not met for a continuing calibration
               check after an 8-h  period or after a series  of samples are
               analyzed, then those samples must be reanalyzed.   Those
               criteria include the RF criteria and the RT criteria
               described in Sect.  9.2.

10.3.  All sample concentrations must be bracketed by the calibration
      curve and must be within the linear dynamic range of the detector.
      (See Sect. 9.1.7.)

      10.3.1.   Samples that fall outside the linear dynamic range due to
               excessive concentration must be reanalyzed after
               appropriate dilution if accurate values  for DCB are
               required.

10.4. All GC systems must  be evaluated for extract matrix effect bias
      according  to  Sect. 9.3.

      10.4.1.  Systems that exhibit a  bias in excess of + or - 20% should
               not  be  used for this determination.

10.5. Initial  demonstration  of laboratory capability for water analysis.

      10.5.1.  Prepare  one or more solutions  containing representative
               PCB  mixtures  at a concentration  that falls within the
                                 209

-------
 10.9,
10.10,
        10.5.2.
        10.5.3.
          linear dynamic range of the instrument.  Reagent water
          fortified with Aroclor 1260 is recommended for this test.

          Fortify four to seven 1-L portions of reagent water with
          10.0 juL of the 50 ng/p.1 PCB solution (Sect. 7.5.3).
          Extract and analyze the fortified water samples according
          to the procedure (Sect. 11).

          Calculate the recovery according to the following formula:

                          (Total nq found in extract)   x 100
                  % Recovery =
                       where 691  =
                                              691
                                  500 ng
                                                  mwDCB (499)
                                                    mw Aroclor 1260   (361)'
        10.5.4.
          aSee  Table  1  for  the molecular weights  of  other Aroclors.

          Determine the average  concentration and the relative SD of
          the five measurements.   Average  recovery should  be 100%
          ±20 with a RSD of < 10%.
  10.6.  Fortify  reagent water with  varying  quantities  of  the  50  ng/juL  PCB
        solution (Sect. 7.5.3).  Analyze  at least one  fortified  sample for
        each batch of  20  samples.   Calculate recovery  according  to Sect
        10.5.3.   Maintain QC charts of these data.  Until  interlaboratory
        data are available, the recovery  of the fortified  sample should be
        equivalent to  that determined in  10.5.4.

  10.7.  Sample matrix  effects have  been observed with  this procedure and
        they are significant.  Check for  sample matrix effects by analyzing
        one laboratory fortified sample matrix (LFM) for every 20 samples.

  10.8. At least  quarterly, analyze a quality control  sample  (QCS) from an
       external  source.  If measured analyte concentrations  are not of
       acceptable accuracy (Sect.  10.5.4),  check the  entire  analytical
       procedure to locate and correct the  problem source.
Qualitative identification of DCB in the samples is based on the
average RT for DCB determined in Sect. 9.1.3.  For a positive
identification, the DCB peak must elute within the window bracketed
by the average retention + 3 SD.  If DCB appears to fall outside of
this window, then further analyses of samples should be halted and
Sect. 9.2 initiated.

It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality
assurance practices for use with this method.  The specific
practices that are most productive depend upon the needs of the
laboratory and the nature of the samples.  Field duplicates may be
analyzed to assess the precision of the environmental  measurements.
Whenever possible, the laboratory should analyze standard reference
                                 210

-------
           materials and participate in relevant performance evaluation
           studies.
11. PROCEDURE

     11.1.  Sample Extraction
           11.1.1.  Mark the sample meniscus on the side of the sample bottle
                    for later determination of sample volume.   Pour the entire
                    sample into a 2-L separatory funnel.

           11.1.2.  Add 60 ml of methylene chloride (See Sect.  5.6) to the
                    sample bottle, seal, and shake 30 s to rinse the inner
                    surface.  Transfer the solvent to the separatory funnel
                    and extract the sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min
                    with periodic venting to release excess pressure.   Wait  at
                    least 10 min to allow the organic layer to  separate from
                    the water phase.  If the emulsion interface between layers
                    is more than one-third the volume of the solvent layer,
                    use mechanical techniques (such as stirring, filtration  of
                    emulsion through glass wool, or centrifugation) to
                    complete phase separation.  Collect the methylene chloride
                    extract in a 250-mL Erlenmeyer flask.  Add  a second 60-mL
                    volume of methylene chloride to the sample  bottle and
                    repeat the extraction procedure a second time, combining
                    the extracts in the Erlenmeyer flask.  Perform a third
                    extraction in the same manner.

           11.1.3.  Assemble a Kuderna-Danish (K-D) concentrator by attaching
                    a 10-mL concentrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask.

           11.1.4.  Pour the combined extract into a solvent-rinsed drying
                    column containing about 10 cm of anhydrous  sodium sulfate.
                    Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask with a 20 to 30  ml portion of
                    methylene chloride adding the rinse to the  drying column.
                    Collect the combined extract in the K-D concentrator.

           11.1.5.  Add one or two clean boiling chips to the evaporative
                    flask and attach a three-ball Snyder column.  Prewet the
                    Snyder column by adding about 1 ml of methylene chloride
                    to the top.  Place the K-D apparatus on a hot water bath
                    (60-65°C)  so that the concentrator tube is  partially
                    immersed in the hot water, and the entire lower rounded
                    surface of the flask is bathed with hot vapor.  Adjust the
                    vertical position of the apparatus and the  water
                    temperature as required to complete the concentration in
                    15-20 min.  At the proper rate of distillation the balls
                    of the column will actively chatter, but the chambers will
                    not flood with condensed solvent.  When the apparent
                    volume of liquid reaches 1 ml, remove the K-D apparatus
                    from the water bath and allow it to drain and cool for at
                    least 10 min.

                                      211

-------
      11.1.6.  Remove the 10-mL concentrator tube from the 500-mL
               evaporative flask and attach a 3-ball micro Snyder column.
               After wetting the column with about 0.5 mL of methylene
               chloride, continue concentrating the extract down to about
               2 mL.

      11.1.7.  Determine the original sample volume by refilling the
               sample bottle with water to the mark and transferring the
               liquid to a 1000-mL graduated cylinder.  Record the sample
               volume to the nearest 5 ml.

11.2. Perchlorination  (8,9)
      11.2.1.
      11.2.2.
      11.2.3,


      11.2.4.

      11.2.5.


      11.2.6.



      11.2.7.

      11.2.8.


      11.2.9.
Quantitatively transfer the extract to a 100 mm x 13 mm
i.d. screw cap test tube.  Rinse the KD ampul three times
with 250 /LiL  of chloroform adding the rinse to the test
tube.

Concentrate the extract to about 0.1 mL (0.1 mL is about
the volume of one drop of water) by directing a stream of
nitrogen flowing at about 100 mL/m into the test tube
while warming the base of the test tube in a 50°C water
bath.

11.2.2.1.  Do not allow to go to dryness.

11.2.2.2.  Disposable pipettes are a convenient means of
           directing the nitrogen into the test tube.  In
           an effort to minimize cross contamination, a
           new pipette should be used for each sample.

Add an additional 2 mL of chloroform and again concentrate
to 0.1 mL using the nitrogen blow-down technique.

Add 100 mg of iron powder to the extract.

Using a disposable pipette, carefully add 25 drops of
SbCl5 to the extract.   (See Sect.  5.3).   Seal  immediately.

Heat to 205°C + 5°C for a minimum of 30 min  but do not
exceed 45 min.  Perform the reaction in the hood behind an
explosion shield.

Allow the mixture to cool to room temperature.

Carefully open in a hood.  (The extract will be under a
slight pressure.)

Slowly add 0.5 mL of 1+1  diluted hydrochloric acid to the
perchlorinated extract in a hood.   Caution:  The remaining
SbCl5 will  react exothermally with  the  HC1.   If a white
                                212

-------
               precipitate is present,  add additional  hydrochloric acid
               solution until it dissolves.

      11.2.10.  Add 2.0 ml of hexane to  the contents of the test tube.
               Seal  and shake for 2 min.   Allow the two phases to
               separate.  Decant the top  layer into a  5.0-mL volumetric
               flask.   Reextract the mixture two additional  times:  First
               with 2.0 ml of hexane, then with 1.0 ml of hexane, adding
               the extracts to the 5.0-mL volumetric flask.   Carefully
               adjust  the volume to 5.0 ml using hexane.

      11.2.11.  Add 4 ml of 0.1 N NaHC03 to a 15-mL  test tube with a
               Teflon-lined screw cap.  Pour the contents of the 5-mL
               volumetric flask into the  test tube.  (Note:   Do not rinse
               the volumetric flask with  additional solvent.)  Seal and
               shake for 1 min.  Allow  the two phases  to separate.

      11.2.12.  Decant  the top layer into  a second 15-mL test tube.  Add
               4 mL of reagent water.  Seal  and shake  for 1  min.

      11.2.13.  Decant  the top layer and store in a hermetically sealed
               container for GC analysis.

11.3. GC -- Packed - on-column injection  ECD, capillary - on-column
      injection electron capture and capillary split!ess injection ECD GC
      systems have been evaluated and found to generate acceptable data
      for DCB as long  as Sect. 10.4 criteria are met.   The following
      conditions were  used to generate  the single-laboratory accuracy  and
      precision data listed in Sect. 13.   The values given are for
      guidance because slight modifications may be necessary to optimize
      specific GC systems.

      11.3.1.  The packed column GC was operated with  a glass column 3 m
               long with an i.d. of 2 mm.  The column  was packed with  3%
               OV-1 coated on 80-100 mesh Supelcoport.  3.0 /xL  volumes
               of each sample was injected directly on column using an
               autosampler.  The injection port was held at 200°C while
               the column was maintained  isothermally at 235°C with an
               Argon +5% methane carrier  gas flowing at 50 mL/min.  The
               ECD was maintained at 300°C with no  auxiliary make-up gas.

               Under these conditions,  the average RT for DCB was 9.49
               min with a SD of 0.014.  DCB was adequately resolved from
               other perch!orination reaction byproducts to generate
               accurate data for drinking water samples.   Highly
               contaminated raw source  water generated complex chromato-
               grams with late eluting  components that interfered with
               DCB measurements.

      11.3.2.  The capillary column on-column GC was operated with a DB-5
               fused silica column 30 m long with a 0.32 mm i.d. and a
               0.25 fan film thickness.  The helium carrier gas was

                                 213

-------
           11.3.3.
12.  CALCULATIONS
adjusted to flow at 29 cm/sec at 60°C.  Three microliter
sample volumes were injected on-column  into a 0.5 mm  i.d.
x 10 cm fused silica retention gap using an autoinjector.
The retention gap was maintained at 60°C during injection.

The capillary column was maintained at  60°C until one
minute after injection, then programmed at 20°/min to
180°C.   After a 2 minute hold,  the column was again
programmed at 20°C/nrin to 290°C  and  held there until  all
compounds eluted.  The ECD was operated at 300°C with an
Argon +5% methane makeup gas flowing  at 20 mL/min.

Under these conditions the average RT for DCB was 21.85
min with a SD of 0.021.  DCB was adequately resolved  from
other perch!orination byproducts to generate accurate data
for both finished drinking water and  raw source water
samples.

The capillary column splitless injection GC was operated
with a DB-5 fused silica column 30 m  long with an i.d. of
0.32 mm and a 0.25 /zm film thickness.  The helium carrier
gas was adjusted to flow at 29 cm/sec at 180°C.   Three juL
injection volumes were delivered by an  autoinjector into
the splitless injecto'r operated at 250°C.   The splitless
time was set for 30 sec.

The capillary column was maintained at  180°C until  one
minute after injection, then programmed at 20°C/min to
290°C and held for 20  min or until  all late eluting
compounds eluted.  The electron capture was operated at
300 C with an  argon +  5% methane makeup gas flowing at
20 mL/min.

Under these conditions the average RT for DCB was 24.75
min with a SD of 0.009.  DCB was adequately resolved from
other perchlorination byproducts to generate accurate data
for both finished drinking water and  raw source water
samples.
     12.1. Calculate the concentration of the DCB found in each extract using
           an automated data system or according to the formula.
           12.1.1.  Extract concentration ng//zL =
                                   Area Sample
                                   uL  In.iected
                                       RF
           12.1.2.  Sample concentration ng/L =  (Concentration nq/pL)  (5000)
                                          M/           volume of sample (L)

                    where:  area sample = area, peak height or

                                      214

-------
                                           integrator units

                            /zL  injected = volume of sample injected
                                          into GC

                            5000        = final volume of extract in #L
                                          (Sect. 11.2.10)

                            Volume of sample (L) = volume of sample
                                          extracted in liters (Sect. 11.1.7)


                            RF          = average RF (9.1.4) for
                                          the 0.1 ng//iL standard.

           12.1.3.  Calculations should utilize all available digits of
                    precision, but final reported concentrations should be
                    rounded to an appropriate number of significant figures
                    (one digit of uncertainty).  Experience indicates that
                    three significant figures may be used for concentrations
                    above 99 /Ltg/L, two significant figures for concentrations
                    between 0.1-99 fig/I, and one significant figure for lower
                    concentrations.

           12.1.4.  Do not subtract method blanks from the sample data unless
                    otherwise required in the procedure.

13.  METHOD PERFORMANCE — To obtain single-laboratory accuracy and precision
     data for method analytes, seven 1-L aliquots of chlorinated tap water,
     groundwater and river water were fortified with 500 ng of PCBs from
     several  sources.   The samples were extracted, perchlorinated and analyzed
     according to Sect. 11.  Tables 3 and 4 list the resulting data.

14.  REFERENCES

      1.   Ballschmiter, K. and M. Zell, Fresenius Z.  Anal. Chem.. 302, 20,
           1980.

      2.   DeKok, A.,  et al., Intern. J. Environ. Anal. Chem.. Vol. 11, pp.
           17-41, 1982.

      3.   "Carcinogens - Working with Carcinogens," Department of Health,
           Education,  and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease
           Control,  National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health,
           publication No. 77-206.  August 1977.

      4.   "OSHA Safety and Health Standards,"  (29 CFR 1910),  Occupational
           Safety and  Health Administration,  OSHA 2206.

      5.   "Safety in  Academic Chemistry Laboratories," American Chemical
           Society Publication, Committee on Chemical  Safety,  4th Edition,
           1985.

                                     215

-------
 6.   40 CFR Part 761.60; .65; .40; .45 40 CFR Part 761, Polychlorinated
      Biphenyls (PCBs) Manufacturing,  Processing, Distribution in
      Commerce and Use Prohibitions.

 7.   Bellar, T.A. and Lichtenberg, J. J., "Some Factors Affecting
      Recovery of Polychlorinated Biphenyls from Water and Bottom
      Samples," ASTM, STP 573, Water Quality Parameters, 1975.

 8.   H. Steinwandter, Brune, H.  Fresenius Z. Anal. Chem. 314, 160,
      1983.

 9.   H. Steinwandter, Fresenius Z. Anal. Chem. 317, 869-871, 1984.

10.   Armour, J., JQAC, 56,  4, 987-993, 1973.

11.   Glaser, J.A., D.L. Foerst, G.D.  McKee, S.A. Quave, and W.L. Budde,
      "Trace Analyses for Wastewaters," Environ. Sci.  Techno!. lj> 1426,
      1981.
                                 216

-------
                  TABLE 1.   DECACHLOROBIPHENYL EQUIVALENT OF
                            COMMON PCB SOURCES
                                                                 Decachloro-
Compound
2-Chlorobiphenyl
Aroclor 1221
Aroclor 1232
Aroclor 1242
Aroclor 1016
Aroclor 1248
Aroclor 1254
Aroclor 1260
Dechlorobiphenyl
Congener
Number
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
209
Mol ecul ar
Weiaht3
188.5
188.5
223
257.5
257.5
292
326.4
361
499
Concentration
fua/L}
0.19
0.19
0.23
0.26
0.26
0.30
0.33
0.36
0.50
biphenyl
Equiva1ent(%)°
263
263
217
192
192
167
152
139
100
a Values from (10).
b /j.g/1 of various PCBs required to generate a value of 0.50 /xg/L DCB (assuming
  100% method recovery).
c The decachlorobiphenyl  produced by perchlorination will  be this percentage
  greater than the original concentration of the PCB/Aroclor listed.
                                      217

-------
                        TABLE 2.  CALIBRATION CURVE LINEARITY TEST
                                    AND RETENTION DATA
  Standard
Concentration
  fno/tzL)
   0.01
   0.01

   0.08
   0.08
     ,1
0,
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
   0.1

   0.25
   0.25

   1.0
   1.0
                             Retention
                               Time
                               fmin)
24.74
24.74

24.74
24.73
24.75
24.75
24.75
24.75
24.75
24.74
24.74

24.76
24.76

24.76
24.76
                 Response
                  Factor
                 farea/ng)
48790
50650

48240
47260
48300  Average
49550  Standard
51170  Deviation
49160
43220  Relative
47490  Standard
47320  Deviation

49960
48240

47230
48410
48030
                                                                       2500
                                                                       5.2%
Average RT =
SD -
Relative Standard Deviation =
                               24.75
                                0.009
                                0.038%
                                            218

-------
                  TABLE 3.  SPLITLESS CAPILLARY COLUMN SINGLE LABORATORY
                      ACCURACY AND PRECISION FOR FORTIFIED TAP WATER
Source of
PCBs
2-Chlorobiphenyl
Aroclor 1221
Aroclor 1232
Aroclor 1242
Aroclor
Aroclor
Aroclor
Biphenyl
1248
1254
1260

MDL(11> Concentration Accuracy36
uo/L fuq/L) (%}
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.

08
14
23
21
15
14
14

0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
85;
99
124
82
136
122;
113;
109;
(96)b

(137)c
(96)*
(75)c
Precis ionae
RSD. m
5
8
11
13
8
6
6
4
.0;
.4
.3
.1
.6
.4;
.5;
.8;
(9

(7
(6
(5
.9)b

•6)b
.9)b
.8)"
aData corrected for source water background.   Average value over
 study = 0.11 jug/L
bData collected by on-column capillary column GC.
cData collected by packed column GC.
Potential  method interference compound.
fortified  matrix effect bias (See Sect.  9.3)
           Splitless capillary column   103,  113
           Packed column                 93,   95
           Splitless on-column (not performed)
                                           219

-------
              TABLE 4.  SPLITLESS CAPILLARY COLUMN SINGLE LABORATORY ACCURACY
                            AND PRECISION FOR RAW SOURCE WATERS
Raw
Source
Water
Ohio River
Spring
Ohio River
Little Miami
Source
of PCBs
Arocl or
1221
1260
1221
1260
Concen-
tration
fua/Ll
0.50
0.50
0.50
5.0
Extraction
Solvent
CH2C12
CH2C12
Hexane
Hexane
Source Water
Background
fua/L)
0.54
0.19
0.16
0.14
Accuracy
f%)
114
101
123
91
Precision
RSD (%)
8.4
7.9
7.5
5.8
 River

Ohio River
1260
5.0
Hexane
0.29
100
5.4
                                             220

-------
         METHOD 515.1.   DETERMINATION OF CHLORINATED ACIDS IN WATER
            BY GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY WITH AN ELECTRON CAPTURE DETECTOR
                                 Revision 4.0
R.C. Dressman and J.J. Lichtenberg - EPA 600/4-81-053, Revision 1.0 (1981)

J.W. Hodgeson - Method 515, Revision 2.0 (1986)

T. Engels (Battelle Columbus Laboratories) - National Pesticide Survey
Method 3, Revision 3.0 (1987)

R.L. Graves - Method 515.1, Revision 4.0 (1989)
                  ENVIRONMENTAL  MONITORING  SYSTEMS  LABORATORY
                      OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
                     U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
                            CINCINNATI,  OHIO  45268
                                      221

-------
                                METHOD 515.1

              DETERMINATION OF CHLORINATED ACIDS IN WATER BY GAS
               CHROMAT06RAPHY WITH AN ELECTRON CAPTURE DETECTOR
1.   SCOPE AND APPLICATION
     1.1
     1.2
     1.3
This is a gas chromatographic (GC) method applicable to the
determination of certain chlorinated acids in ground water and
finished drinking water.(1)  The following compounds can be
determined by this method:
          Analvte

          Acifluorfen*
          Bentazon
          Chioramben*
          2,4-D
          Dalapon*
          2,4-DB
          DCPA acid metabolites(a)
          Dicamba
          3,5-Dichlorobenzoic acid
          Dichlorprop
          Dinoseb
          5-Hydroxydicamba
          4-Nitrophenol*
          Pentachlorophenol (PCP)
          Picloram
          2,4,5-T
          2,4,5-TP
                                  Chemical Abstract Services
                                        Registry Number

                                          50594-66-6
                                          25057-89-0
                                            133-90-4
                                             94-75-7
                                             75-99-0
                                             94-82-6
                                           1918-
                                             51-
                                            120-
                                             88-
                                           7600-
                                            100-
                                             87-
                                           1918-
                                             93-
                                             93-
00-9
36-5
36-5
85-7
50-2
02-7
86-5
02-1
76-5
72-1
(a)DCPA monoacid and diacid metabolites included in method scope;
DCPA diacid metabolite used for validation studies.

*These compounds are only qualitatively identified in the National
Pesticides Survey (NPS) Program.  These compounds are not
quantitated because control over precision has not been
accomplished.

This method may be applicable to the determination of salts and
esters of analyte acids.  The form of each acid is not distinguished
by this method.  Results are calculated and reported for each listed
analyte as the total free acid.

This method has been validated in a single laboratory and estimated
detection limits (EDLs) have been determined for the analytes above
(Sect.13).  Observed detection limits may vary between ground
waters, depending upon the nature of interferences in the sample
matrix and the specific instrumentation used.
                                      222

-------
     1.4  This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of
          analysts experienced in the use of GC and in the interpretation of
          gas chromatograms.   Each analyst must demonstrate the ability to
          generate acceptable results with this method using the procedure
          described in Sect.  10.3.

     1.5  Analytes that are not separated chromatographically i.e.,  which have
          very similar retention times, cannot be individually identified and
          measured in the same calibration mixture or water sample unless an
          alternate technique for identification and quantitation exist (Sect.
          11.8).

     1.6  When this method is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for any or
          all of the analytes above, analyte identifications must be confirmed
          by at least one additional qualitative technique.

2.   SUMMARY OF METHOD

     2.1  A measured volume of sample of approximately 1 L is adjusted to pH
          12 with 6 N sodium hydroxide and shaken for 1 hr to hydrolyze
          derivatives.  Extraneous organic material is removed by a solvent
          wash.  The sample is acidified, and the chlorinated acids are
          extracted with ethyl ether by shaking in a separatory funnel or
          mechanical tumbling in a bottle.  The acids are converted to their
          methyl esters using diazomethane as the derivatizing agent.  Excess
          derivatizing reagent is removed, and the esters are determined by
          capillary column/GC using an electron capture detector (ECD).

     2.2  The method provides a Florisil cleanup procedure to aid in the
          elimination of interferences that may be encountered.

3.   DEFINITIONS

     3.1  Internal standard -- A pure analyte(s) added to a solution in known
          amount(s) and used to measure the relative responses of other method
          analytes and surrogates that are components of the same solution.
          The internal standard must be an analyte that is not a sample
          component.

     3.2  Surrogate analyte -- A pure analyte(s), which is extremely unlikely
          to be found in any sample, and which is added to a sample aliquot in
          known amount(s) before extraction and is measured with the same
          procedures used to measure other sample components.  The purpose of
          a surrogate analyte is to monitor method performance with each
          sample.

     3.3  Laboratory duplicates (LD1 and LD2) -- Two sample aliquots taken in
          the analytical laboratory and analyzed separately with identical
          procedures.  Analyses of LD1 and LD2 give a measure of the precision
          associated with laboratory procedures, but not with sample
          collection, preservation, or storage procedures.

     3.4  Field duplicates (FD1 and FD2) -- Two separate samples collected at
          the same time and place under identical circumstances and treated

                                      223

-------
     exactly the same throughout field and laboratory procedures.
     Analyses of FD1 and FD2 give a measure of the precision associated
     with sample collection, preservation and storage, as well as with
     laboratory procedures.

3.5  Laboratory reagent blank (LRB) --An aliquot of reagent water that
     is treated exactly as a sample including exposure to all glassware,
     equipment, solvents, reagents, internal standards, and surrogates
     that are used with other samples.  The LRB is used to determine if
     method analytes or other interferences are present in the laboratory
     environment, the reagents, or the apparatus.

3.6  Field reagent blank (FRB) -- Reagent water placed in a sample
     container in the laboratory and treated as a sample in all respects,
     including exposure to sampling site conditions, storage,
     preservation and all analytical procedures. The purpose of the FRB
     is to determine if method analytes or other interferences are
     present in the field environment.

3.7  Laboratory performance check solution (LPC) -- A solution of method
     analytes, surrogate compounds, and internal standards used to
     evaluate the performance of the instrument system with respect to a
     defined set of method criteria.

3.8  Laboratory fortified blank (LFB) --An aliquot of reagent water to
     which known quantities of the method analytes are added in the
     laboratory.  The LFB is analyzed exactly like a sample, and its
     purpose is to determine whether the methodology is in control, and
     whether the laboratory is capable of making accurate and precise
     measurements at the required method detection limit.

3.9  Laboratory fortified sample matrix (LFM) --An aliquot of an
     environmental sample to which known quantities of the method
     analytes are added in the laboratory.  The LFM is analyzed exactly
     like a sample, and its purpose is to determine whether the sample
     matrix contributes bias to the analytical results.  The background
     concentrations of the analytes in the sample matrix must be
     determined in a separate aliquot and the measured values in the LFM
     corrected for background concentrations.

3.10 Stock standard solution -- A concentrated solution containing a
     single certified standard that is a method analyte, or a
     concentrated solution of a single analyte prepared in the laboratory
     with an assayed reference compound.  Stock standard solutions are
     used to prepare primary dilution standards.

3.11 Primary dilution standard solution -- A solution of several analytes
     prepared in the laboratory from stock standard solutions and diluted
     as needed to prepare calibration solutions and other needed analyte
     solutions.

3.12 Calibration standard (CAL) -- A solution prepared from the primary
     dilution standard solution and stock standard solutions of the
     internal standards and surrogate analytes.  The CAL solutions are

                                224

-------
          used to calibrate the instrument response with respect to analyte
          concentration.

     3.13 Quality control sample (QCS) -- A sample matrix containing method
          analytes or a solution of method analytes in a water miscible
          solvent which is used to fortify reagent water or environmental
          samples.  The QCS is obtained from a source external to the
          laboratory, and is used to check laboratory performance with
          externally prepared test materials.

4.   INTERFERENCES

     4.1  Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents,
          reagents, glassware and other sample processing apparatus that lead
          to discrete artifacts or elevated baselines in gas chromatograms.
          All reagents and apparatus must be routinely demonstrated to be free
          from interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running
          laboratory reagent blanks as described in Sect. 10.2.

          4.1.1  Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned.(2)  Clean all glass-
                 ware as soon as possible after use by thoroughly rinsing with
                 the last solvent used in it.  Follow by washing with hot
                 water and detergent and thorough rinsing with dilute acid,
                 tap and reagent water.  Drain dry, and heat in an oven or
                 muffle furnace at 400°C for 1 hr.  Do not heat volumetric
                 ware.  Thermally stable materials such as PCBs might not be
                 eliminated by this treatment.  Thorough rinsing with acetone
                 may be substituted for the heating.  After drying and
                 cooling, seal and store glassware in a clean environment to
                 prevent any accumulation of dust or other contaminants.
                 Store inverted or capped with aluminum foil.

          4.1.2  The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to
                 minimize interference problems.  Purification of solvents by
                 distillation in all-glass systems may be required.
                 WARNING:  When a solvent is purified, stabilizers added by
                 the manufacturer are removed, thus potentially making the
                 solvent hazardous.  Also, when a solvent is purified,
                 preservatives added by the manufacturer are removed, thus
                 potentially reducing the shelf-life.

     4.2  The acid forms of the analytes are strong organic acids which react
          readily with alkaline substances and can be lost during sample
          preparation.  Glassware and glass wool must be acid-rinsed with IN
          hydrochloric acid and the sodium sulfate must be acidified with
          sulfuric acid prior to use to avoid analyte losses due to
          adsorption.

     4.3  Organic acids and phenols, especially chlorinated compounds, cause
          the most direct interference with the determination.  Alkaline
          hydrolysis and subsequent extraction of the basic sample removes
          many chlorinated hydrocarbons and phthalate esters that might
          otherwise  interfere with the electron capture analysis.
                                      225

-------
      4.4   Interferences  by phthalate  esters  can  pose  a major problem  in pesti-
           cide  analysis  when  using  the  ECD.  These compounds generally appear
           in  the  chromatogram as  large  peaks.  Common flexible plastics
           contain varying  amounts of  phthalates, that are easily extracted or
           leached during laboratory operations.  Cross contamination  of clean
           glassware  routinely occurs  when plastics are handled during
           extraction steps, especially  when  solvent-wetted surfaces are
           handled.   Interferences from  phthalates can best be minimized by
           avoiding the use of plastics  in the laboratory.  Exhaustive
           purification of  reagents  and  glassware may be required to eliminate
           background phthalate contamination.(3,4)

      4.5   Interfering contamination may occur when a sample containing low
           concentrations of analytes  is analyzed immediately following a
           sample  containing relatively  high  concentrations of analytes.
           Between-sample rinsing  of the sample syringe and associated
           equipment  with methyl-t-butyl-ether (MTBE) can minimize sample cross
           contamination.   After analysis of  a sample containing high
           concentrations of analytes, one or more injections of MTBE  should be
           made to  ensure that  accurate  values are obtained for the next
           sample.

      4.6   Matrix  interferences may be caused by contaminants that are
           coextracted from the sample.  Also, note that all analytes  listed in
           the Scope  and  Application Section are not resolved from each other
           on any one  column,  i.e., one  analyte of interest may be an
           interferant for  another analyte of interest.  The extent of matrix
           interferences  will vary considerably from source to source,
           depending  upon the water sampled.  The procedures in Sect.  11 can be
           used to overcome many of these interferences.   Positive
           identifications  should be confirmed (Sect.  11.8).

     4.7   It is important  that samples  and working standards be contained in
           the same solvent.  The solvent for working standards must be the
           same as the final solvent used in sample preparation.  If this is
           not the case,   chromatographic comparability of standards to  sample
          may be affected.
5.   SAFETY
     5.1
     5.2
The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this method
has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound must
be treated as a potential health hazard.  Accordingly, exposure to
these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level.  The
laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file
of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals
specified in this method.  A reference file of material safety data
sheets should also be made available to all personnel involved in
the chemical analysis.  Additional references to laboratory safety
are available and have been identified (6-8) for the information of
the analyst.

DIAZOMETHANE -- A toxic carcinogen which can explode under certain
conditions.  The following precautions must be followed:
                                     226

-------
          5.2.1  Use only a well ventilated hood -- do not breath vapors.

          5.2.2  Use a safety screen.

          5.2.3  Use mechanical pipetting aides.

          5.2.4  Do not heat above 90°C -- EXPLOSION may result.

          5.2.5  Avoid grinding surfaces, ground glass joints, sleeve
                 bearings, glass stirrers -- EXPLOSION may result.

          5.2.6  Store away from alkali metals -- EXPLOSION may result.

          5.2.7  Solutions of diazomethane decompose rapidly in the presence
                 of solid materials such as copper powder, calcium chloride,
                 and boiling chips.

          5.2.8  The diazomethane generation apparatus used in the
                 esterification procedures (Sect. 11.4 and 11.5) produces
                 micromolar amounts of diazomethane to minimize safety
                 hazards.

     5.3  ETHYL ETHER -- Nanograde, redistilled in glass, if necessary.

          5.3.1  Ethyl  ether is an extremely flammable solvent.  If a
                 mechanical  device is used for sample extraction, the device
                 should be equipped with an explosion-proof motor and placed
                 in a hood to avoid possible damage and injury due to an
                 explosion.

          5.3.2  Must be free of peroxides as indicated by EM Quant test
                 strips (available from Scientific Products Co., Cat. No.
                 PI 126-8, and other suppliers).

     5.4  WARNING:   When a solvent is purified, stabilizers added by the
          manufacturer are removed, thus potentially making the solvent
          hazardous.

6.   APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT (All  specifications are suggested.  Catalog
     numbers  are included for illustration only.)

     6.1  SAMPLE BOTTLE -- Borosilicate, 1-L volume with  graduations (Wheaton
          Media/Lab bottle'219820  or equivalent),  fitted  with screw caps lined
          with TFE-fluorocarbon.   Protect samples from light.   The container
          must be washed and dried as described in  Sect.  4.1.1  before use to
          minimize  contamination.   Cap liners are cut to  fit  from sheets
          (Pierce Catalog No.  012736)  and extracted with  methanol  overnight
          prior to  use.

     6.2  GLASSWARE

          6.2.1  Separatory  funnel  --  2000-mL,  with TFE-fluorocarbon stop-
                 cocks,  ground glass or TFE-fluorocarbon  stoppers.


                                     227

-------
     6.2.2  Tumbler bottle --  1.7-L (Wheaton  Roller Culture  Vessel  or
            equivalent),  with  TFE-fluorocarbon  lined screw cap.   Cap
            liners are cut to  fit from sheets (Pierce Catalog  No.  012736)
            and extracted with methanol  overnight prior to use.

     6.2.3  Concentrator  tube, Kuderna-Danish (K-D) -- 10- or  25-mL,
            graduated (Kontes  K-570050-2525 or  Kontes K-570050-1025 or
            equivalent).   Calibration must be checked at the volumes
            employed in the test.  Ground glass stoppers are used to
            prevent evaporation of extracts.

     6.2.4  Evaporative flask, K-D -- 500-mL (Kontes K-570001-0500 or
            equivalent).   Attach to concentrator tube with springs.

     6.2.5  Snyder column, K-D -- three-ball  macro (Kontes K-503000-0121
            or equivalent).

     6.2.6  Snyder column, K-D -- two-ball micro (Kontes K-569001-0219 or
            equivalent).

     6.2.7  Flask, round-bottom -- 500-mL with  24/40 ground  glass joint.

     6.2.8  Vials -- glass, 5- to 10-mL capacity with TFE-fluorocarbon
            lined screw cap.

     6.2.9  Disposable pipets  -- sterile plugged borosilicate  glass,  5-mL
            capacity (Corning  7078-5N or equivalent).

6.3  SEPARATORY FUNNEL SHAKER -- Capable of holding 2-L separatory
     funnels and shaking them with rocking motion to achieve thorough
     mixing of separatory funnel contents (available from Eberbach Co. in
     Ann Arbor, MI or other suppliers).

6.4  TUMBLER -- Capable of holding tumbler bottles and tumbling them
     end-over-end at 30 turns/min (Associated Design and Mfg.  Co.,
     Alexandria, VA and other suppliers).

6.5  BOILING STONES -- Teflon, Chemware (Norton Performance  Plastics No.
     015021 and other suppliers).
6.6
6.7
WATER BATH -- Heated, capable of temperature control (± 2°C).
bath should be used in a hood.
The
BALANCE -- Analytical, capable of accurately weighing to the nearest
0.0001 g.
6.8  DIAZOMETHANE GENERATOR -- Assemble from two 20 x 150 mm test tubes,
     two Neoprene rubber stoppers, and a source of nitrogen as shown in
     Figure 1 (available from Aldrich Chemical Co.).  When esterification
     is performed using diazomethane solution, the diazomethane collector
     is cooled in an approximately 2-L thermos for ice bath or a
     cryogenically cooled vessel  (Thermoelectrics Unlimited Model SK-12
     or equivalent).
                                 228

-------
6.9  GLASS WOOL -- Acid washed (Supelco 2-0383 or equivalent) and heated
     at 450°C for 4 hr.

6.10 GAS CHROMATOGRAPH -- Analytical system complete with temperature
     programmable GC suitable for use with capillary columns and all
     required accessories including syringes, analytical columns, gases,
     detector and stripchart recorder.  A data system is recommended for
     measuring peak areas.  Table 1 lists retention times observed for
     method analytes using the columns and analytical conditions
     described below.

     6.10.1  Column 1 (Primary column) -- 30 m long x 0.25 mm I.D. DB-5
             bonded fused silica column, 0.25 jum film thickness (J&W
             Scientific).  Helium carrier gas flow is established at 30
             cm/sec linear velocity and oven temperature is programmed
             from 60°C to 300°C at 4"C/min.  Data presented in this
             method were obtained using this column.  The injection
             volume was 2 juL split!ess mode with 45 second delay.  The
             injector temperature was 250°C and the detector was 320°C.
             Alternative columns may be used in accordance with the
             provisions described in Sect. 10.2.

     6.10.2  Column 2 (Confirmation column) -- 30 m long x 0.25 mm I.D.
             DB-1701 bonded fused silica column, 0.25 urn film thickness
             (J&W Scientific).  Helium carrier gas flow is established at
             30 cm/sec linear velocity and oven temperature is programmed
             from 60°C to 300°C at 4°C/min.

     6.10.3  Detector -- Electron capture.  This detector has proven
             effective in the analysis of fortified reagent and arti-
             ficial ground waters.  An ECD was used to generate the
             validation data presented in this method.  Alternative de-
             tectors, including a mass spectrometer, may be used in
             accordance with the provisions described in Sect. 10.3.

REAGENTS AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS - WARNING:   When a solvent is purified,
stabilizers added by the manufacturer are removed, thus potentially
making the solvent hazardous.  Also, when a solvent is purified,
preservatives added by the manufacturer are removed, thus potentially
reducing the shelf-life.

7.1  ACETONE, METHANOL,  METHYLENE CHLORIDE, MTBE -- Pesticide quality or
     equivalent.

7.2  ETHYL ETHER,  UNPRESERVED -- Nanograde, redistilled in glass if
     necessary.   Must be free of peroxides as indicated by EM Quant test
     strips (available from Scientific Products Co., Cat. No.  PI126-8,
     and other suppliers).  Procedures recommended for removal of per-
     oxides are provided with the test strips.

7.3  SODIUM SULFATE, GRANULAR,  ANHYDROUS,  ACS GRADE -- Heat treat in a
     shallow tray at 450°C for a minimum of 4 hr to remove interfering
     organic substances.  Acidify by slurrying 100 g sodium sulfate with
     enough ethyl  ether to just cover the solid.   Add 0.1 mL concentrated

                                229

-------
     sulfuric acid and mix thoroughly.  Remove the ether under vacuum.
     Mix 1 g of the resulting solid with 5 ml of reagent water and
     measure the pH of the mixture.  The pH must be below pH 4.  Store  at
     130eC.

7.4  SODIUM THIOSULFATE, GRANULAR, ANHYDROUS -- ACS grade.

7.5  SODIUM HYDROXIDE (NAOH), PELLETS -- ACS grade.

     7.5.1   NaOH, 6 N -- Dissolve 216 g NaOH in 900 mL reagent water.
                   *

7.6  SULFURIC ACID, CONCENTRATED -- ACS grade,sp. gr. 1.84.

     7.6.1   Sulfuric acid, 12 N -- Slowly add 335 mL concentrated
             sulfuric acid to 665 mL of reagent water.

7.7  POTASSIUM HYDROXIDE (KOH), PELLETS -- ACS grade.

     7.7.1   KOH, 37% (w/v) -- Dissolve 37 g KOH pellets in reagent water
             and dilute to 100 mL.

7.8  CARBITOL (DIETHYLENE 6LYCOL MONOETHYL ETHER) -- ACS grade.
     Available from Aldrich Chemical Co.

7.9  DIAZALD, ACS grade -- Available from Aldrich Chemical Co.

7.10 DIAZALD SOLUTION -- Prepare a solution containing 10 g Diazald in
     100 mL of a 50:50 by volume mixture of ethyl ether and carbitol.
     This solution is stable for one month or longer when stored at 4"C
     in an amber bottle with a Teflon-lined screw cap.

7.11 SODIUM CHLORIDE (NACL), CRYSTAL, ACS GRADE -- Heat treat in a
     shallow tray at 450°C for a minimum of 4 hr to remove interfering
     organic substances.

7.12 4,4'-DIBROMOOCTAFLUOROBIPHENYL (DBOB) -- 99% purity, for use as
     internal standard (available from Aldrich Chemical Co).

7.13 2,4-DICHLOROPHENYLACETIC ACID (DCAA) -- 99% purity, for use as
     surrogate standard (available from Aldrich Chemical Co).

7.14 MERCURIC CHLORIDE -- ACS grade (Aldrich Chemical Co.) - for use as a
     bacteriocide.  If any other bactericide can be shown to work as well
     as mercuric chloride, it may be used instead.

7.15 REAGENT WATER -- Reagent water is defined as water that is
     reasonably free of contamination that would prevent the
     determination of any analyte of interest.  Reagent water used to
     generate the validation data in this method was distilled water
     obtained from the Magnetic Springs Water Co., Columbus, Ohio.

7.16 SILICIC ACID, ACS GRADE.
                                 230

-------
7.17 FLORISIL --, 60-100/PR mesh (Sigma No. F-9127).  Activate by heating
     in a shallow container at 150°C for at least 24 and not more than 48
  .   hr.
7.18 STOCK STANDARD SOLUTIONS (1.00 jugM) -- Stock standard solutions
     may be purchased as certified solutions or prepared from pure
     standard materials using the following procedure:

     7.18.1  Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing
    ;   :      approximately 0.0100 g of pure material.  Dissolve the
             material in MTBE and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric
             flask.  Larger volumes may be used at the convenience of the
             analyst.  If compound purity is certified at 96% or greater,
             the weight may be used without correction to calculate the
             concentration of the stock standard.  Commercially prepared
             stock standards may be used at any concentration if they are
             certified by the manufacturer or by an independent source.

     7.18.2  Transfer the stock standard solutions into TFE-fluoro-
             carbon-sealed screw cap amber vials.  Store at room tempera-
             ture and protect from light.

     7.18.3  Stock standard solutions should be replaced after two months
             or sooner if comparison with laboratory fortified blanks, or
           ,  QC samples indicate a problem.

7.19 INTERNAL STANDARD SOLUTION -- Prepare an internal standard solution
     by accurately weighing approximately 0.0010 g of pure DBOB.
     Dissolve the DBOB in MTBE and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric
     flask.  Transfer the internal standard solution to a TFE-fluoro-
     carbon- sealed screw cap bottle and store at room temperature.
     Addition of 25 juL of the internal standard solution to 10 mL of
     sample extract results in a final internal standard concentration of
     0.25 /zg/mL.  Solution should be replaced when ongoing QC (Sect. 10)
     indicates a problem.  Note that DBOB has been shown to be an
     effective internal standard for the method analytes(l), but other
     compounds may be used if the quality control requirements in Sect.
     10 are met.

7.20 SURROGATE STANDARD SOLUTION -- Prepare a surrogate standard solution
     by accurately weighing approximately 0.0010 g of pure DCAA.
     Dissolve the DCAA in MTBE and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric
     flask.  Transfer the surrogate standard solution to a TFE-fluoro-
     carbon- sealed screw cap bottle and store at room temperature.
     Addition of 50 /^L of the surrogate standard solution to a 1-L sample
     prior to extraction results in a surrogate standard concentration in
     the sample of 5 jug/L and, assuming quantitative recovery of DCAA, a
    .surrogate standard concentration in the final extract of 0.5 jug/mL.
     Solution should be replaced when ongoing QC (Sect. 10) indicates a
     problem.  Note DCAA has been shown to be an effective surrogate
     standard for the method analytes(l), but other compounds may be used
     if the quality control requirements in Sect. 10.4 are met.
                                 231

-------
     7.21 LABORATORY PERFORMANCE CHECK SOLUTIONS -- Prepare a diluted dinoseb
          solution by adding 10 pL of the 1.0 M9/^L dinoseb stock solution to
          the MTBE and diluting to volume in a 10-mL volumetric flask.  To
          prepare the check solution, add 40 /iL of the diluted dinoseb
          solution, 16 juL of the 4-nitrophenol stock solution, 6 juL of the
          3,5-dichlorobenzoic acid stock solution, 50 p,L of the surrogate
          standard solution, 25 /zL of the internal standard solution, and 250
          pi of methanol to a 5-mL volumetric flask and dilute to volume with
          MTBE.  Methyl ate sample as described in Sects. 11.4 or 11.5.  Dilute
          the sample to 10 mL in MTBE.  Transfer to a TFE-fluorocarbon-sealed
          screw cap bottle and store at room temperature.  Solution should be
          replaced when ongoing QC (Sect. 10) indicates a problem.

8.   SAMPLE COLLECTION. PRESERVATION. AND STORAGE

     8.1  Grab samples must be collected in glass containers.  Conventional
          sampling practices (8) should be followed; however, the bottle must
          not be prerinsed with sample before collection.

     8.2  SAMPLE PRESERVATION AND STORAGE

          8.2.1   Add mercuric chloride (See 7.14) to the sample bottle in
                  amounts to produce a concentration of 10 mg/L.  Add 1 mL of
                  a 10 mg/mL solution of mercuric chloride in water to the
                  sample bottle at the sampling site or in the laboratory
                  before shipping to the sampling site.  A major disadvantage
                  of mercuric chloride is that it is a highly toxic chemical;
                  mercuric chloride must be handled with caution, and samples
                  containing mercuric chloride must be disposed of properly.

          8.2.2   If residual chlorine is present, add 80 mg of sodium
                  thiosulfate per liter of sample to the sample bottle prior
                  to collecting the sample.

          8.2.3   After the sample is collected in the bottle containing
                  preservative(s), seal the bottle and shake vigorously for
                  1 min.

          8.2.4   The samples must be iced or refrigerated at 4°C away from
                  light from the time of collection until extraction.
                  Preservation study results indicate that the analytes
                  (measured as total acid) present in samples are stable for
                  14 days when stored under these conditions.(1) However,
                  analyte stability may be affected by the matrix; therefore,
                  the analyst should verify that the preservation technique is
                  applicable to the samples under study.

     8.3  EXTRACT STORAGE

          8.3.1   Extracts should be stored at 4°C away from light.
                  Preservation study results indicate that most analytes are
                  stable for 28 days(l); however, the analyst should verify
                  appropriate extract holding times applicable to the samples
                  under study.

                                      232

-------
9.   CALIBRATION

     9.1  Establish GC operating parameters equivalent to those indicated in
          Sect. 6.10.  The GC system may be calibrated using either the
          internal standard technique (Sect. 9.2) or the external standard
          technique (Sect. 9.3).  NOTE:  Calibration standard solutions must
          be prepared such that no unresolved analytes are mixed together.

     9.2  INTERNAL STANDARD CALIBRATION PROCEDURE -- To use this approach, the
          analyst must select one or more internal standards compatible in
          analytical behavior to the compounds of interest.  The analyst must
          further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is
          not affected by method or matrix interferences..  DBOB has been
          identified as a suitable internal standard.

          9.2.1  Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three
                 (recommend five) concentration levels for each analyte of
                 interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to
                 a volumetric flask.  To each calibration standard, add a
                 known constant amount of one or more of the internal
                 standards and 250 /iL methanol, and dilute to volume with
                 MTBE.  Esterify acids with diazomethane as described in Sect.
                 11.4 or 11.5. ' The lowest standard should represent analyte
                 concentrations near, but above, the respective EDLs.  The
                 remaining standards should bracket the analyte concentrations
                 expected in the sample extracts, or should define the working
                 range of the detector.

          9.2.2  Analyze each calibration standard according to the procedure
                  (Sect. 11.7).  Tabulate response (peak height or area)
                 against concentration for each compound and internal
                 standard.  Calculate the response factor (RF) for each
                 analyte and surrogate using Equation 1.


                          (As) (c,8)
                  RF = 	      Equation 1
                          (Ais)  (Cs)

                      where:

                      As  = Response for the analyte to be measured.
                      Ais =  Response for the internal  standard.
                      Cis =  Concentration of the internal  standard (p.g/L).
                      Cs  = Concentration of the analyte to be measured
                             (M9/L).


          9.2.3   If  the RF value over the working range is constant  (20% RSD
                  or  less) the average RF can be used for calculations.  Alter-
                  natively, the  results can  be  used to plot a calibration curve
                  of  response ratios  (As/Ais)  vs.  Cs.
                                      233

-------
     9.2.4  The working calibration curve or RF must be verified on each
            working shift by the measurement of one or more calibration
            standards.  If the response for any analyte varies from the
            predicted response by more than ±20%, the test must be re-
            peated using a fresh calibration standard.  If the repetition
            also fails, a new calibration curve must be generated for
            that analyte using freshly prepared standards.

     9.3.5  Single point calibration is a viable alternative to a cali-
            bration curve.  Prepare single point standards from the
            secondary dilution standards in MTBE.  The single point
            standards should be prepared at a concentration that produces
            a response that deviates from the sample extract response by
            no more than 20%.

     9.2.6  Verify calibration standards periodically, recommend at least
            quarterly, by analyzing a standard prepared from reference
            material obtained from an independent source.   Results from
            these analyses must be within the limits used  to routinely
            check calibration.

9.3  EXTERNAL STANDARD CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

     9.3.1  Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of  three
            (recommend five) concentration levels for each analyte of
            interest and surrogate compound by adding volumes of one or
            more stock standards and 250 nl methanol to a  volumetric
            flask.   Dilute to volume with MTBE.  Esterify  acids with
            diazomethane as described in Sect. 11.4 or 11.5.  The best
            standard should represent analyte concentrations near, but
            above,  the respective EDL.   The remaining standards should
            bracket the analyte concentrations expected in the sample
            extracts,  or should define the working range of the detector.

     9.3.2  Starting with the standard of lowest concentration, analyze
            each calibration standard according to Sect. 11.7 and tabu-
            late response (peak height or area) versus the concentration
            in the  standard.  The results can be used to prepare a cali-
            bration curve for each compound.  Alternatively, if the ratio
            of response to concentration (calibration factor) is a con-
            stant over the working range (20% RSD or less),  linearity
            through the origin can be assumed and the average ratio or
            calibration factor can be used in place of a calibration
            curve.

     9.3.3  The working calibration curve or calibration factor must be
            verified on each working day by the measurement of a minimum
            of two  calibration check standards, one at the beginning and
            one at  the end of the analysis day.  These check standards
            should  be  at two different concentration levels to verify the
            calibration curve.  For extended periods of analysis (greater
            than 8  hr), it is strongly recommended that check standards
            be interspersed with samples at regular intervals during the
            course  of  the analyses.  If the response for any analyte

                                234

-------
                 varies from the predicted response by more than + 20%, the
                 test must be repeated using a fresh calibration standard.  If
                 the results still do not agree, generate a new calibration
                 curve or use a single point calibration standard as described
                 in Sect. 9.3.3.

          9.3.4  Single point calibration is a viable alternative to a
                 calibration curve.  Prepare single point standards from the
                 secondary dilution standards in MTBE.  The single point
                 standards should be prepared at a concentration that produces
                 a response that deviates from the sample extract response by
                 no more than 20%.

          9.2.5  Verify calibration standards periodically, recommend at least
                 quarterly, by analyzing a standard prepared from reference
                 material obtained from an independent source.  Results from
                 these analyses must be within the limits used to routinely
                 check calibration.

10.  QUALITY CONTROL

     10.1 Minimum quality control (QC) requirements are initial demonstration
          of laboratory capability, determination of surrogate compound
          recoveries in each sample and blank, monitoring internal standard
          peak area or height in each sample and blank (when internal standard
          calibration procedures are being employed), analysis of laboratory
          reagent blanks, laboratory fortified samples, laboratory fortified
          blanks, and QC samples.

     10.2 LABORATORY REAGENT BLANKS (LRB).  Before processing any samples, the
          analyst must demonstrate that all  glassware and reagent
          interferences are under control.  Each time a set of samples is
          extracted or reagents are changed, a LRB must be analyzed.  If
          within the retention time window of any analyte the LRB produces a
          peak that would prevent the determination of that analyte, determine
          the source of contamination and eliminate the interference before
          processing samples.

     10.3 Initial Demonstration of Capability.

          10.3.1  Select a representative fortified concentration (about 10
                  times EDL) for each analyte.  Prepare a sample concentrate
                  (in methanol) containing each analyte at 1000 times selected
                  concentration.  With a syringe, add 1 mL of the concentrate
                  to each of at least four 1-L aliquots of reagent water, and
                  analyze each aliquot according to procedures beginning in
                  Sect. 11.

          10.3.2  For each analyte the recovery value for all  four of these
                  samples must fall in the range of R ± 30% (or within R ± 3SR
                  if broader) using the values for R and SR for reagent  water
                  in Table 2.  For those compounds that meet the acceptable
                  criteria, performance is considered acceptable and sample
                  analysis may begin.  For those compounds that fail these

                                     235

-------
             criteria, this procedure must be reported using five fresh
             samples until satisfactory performance has been
             demonstrated.

     10.3.3  The initial demonstration of capability is used primarily to
             preclude a laboratory from analyzing unknown samples via a
             new, unfamiliar method prior to obtaining some experience
             with it.  It is expected that as laboratory personnel gain
             experience with this method the quality of data will improve
             beyond those required here.

10.4 The analyst is permitted to modify GC columns, GC conditions,
     detectors, continuous extraction techniques, concentration
     techniques (i.e., evaporation techniques), internal standard or
     surrogate compounds.  Each time such method modifications are made,
     the analyst must repeat the procedures in Sect. 10.3

10.5 ASSESSING SURROGATE RECOVERY.

     10.5.1  When surrogate recovery from a sample or method blank is
             <70% or >130%, check (1) calculations to locate possible
             errors, (2) spiking solutions for degradation, (3)
             contamination, and (4) instrument performance.  If those
             steps do not reveal the cause of the problem, reanalyze the
             extract.

     10.5.2  If a blank extract reanalysis fails the 70-130% recovery
             criterion, the problem must be identified and corrected
             before continuing.

     10.5.3  If sample extract reanalysis meets the surrogate recovery
             criterion, report only data for the analyzed extract.  If
             sample extract continues to fail the recovery criterion,
             report all data for that sample as suspect.

10.6 ASSESSING THE INTERNAL STANDARD

     10.6.1  When using the internal standard calibration procedure, the
             analyst is expected to monitor the IS response (peak area or
             peak height) of all samples during each analysis day.  The
             IS response for any sample chromatogram should not deviate
             from the daily calibration check standard's IS response by
             more than 30%.

     10.6.2  If >30% deviation occurs with an individual extract,
             optimize instrument performance and inject a second aliquot
             of that extract.

             10.6.2.1  If the reinjected aliquot produces an acceptable
                       internal standard response, report results for
                       that aliquot.

             10.6.2.2  If a deviation of greater than 30% is obtained for
                       the reinjected extract, analysis of the samples

                                 236

-------
                       should be repeated beginning with Sect.  11,
                       provided the sample is still available.
                       Otherwise,  report results obtained from the
                       reinjected extract, but annotate as suspect.

     10.6.3  If consecutive samples fail the IS response acceptance
             criterion, immediately analyze a calibration check standard.

             10.6.3.1  If the check standard provides a response factor
                       (RF) within 20% of the predicted value,  then
                       follow procedures itemized in Sect. 10.6.2 for
                       each sample failing the IS response criterion.

             10.6.3.2  If the check standard provides a response factor
                       which deviates more than 20% of the predicted
                       value, then the analyst must recalibrate, as
                       specified in Sect. 9.

10.7 ASSESSING LABORATORY PERFORMANCE - LABORATORY FORTIFIED BLANK

     10.7.1  The laboratory must analyze at least one laboratory
             fortified blank (LFB) sample with every 20 samples or one
             per sample set (all samples extracted within a 24-hr period)
             whichever is greater.  The concentration of each analyte in
             the LFB should be 10 times EDL or the MCL, whichever is
             less.  Calculate accuracy as percent recovery (X,).  If the
             recovery of any analyte falls outside the control  limits
             (see Sect. 10.7.2), that analyte is judged out of control,
             and the source of the problem should be identified and
             resolved before continuing analyses.

     10.7.2  Until sufficient data become available from within their own
             laboratory, usually a minimum of results from 20 to 30
             analyses, the laboratory should assess laboratory
             performance against the control limits in Sect. 10.3.2  that
             are derived from the data in Table 2.  When sufficient
             internal performance data becomes available, develop control
             limits from the mean percent recovery (X) and standard
             deviation (S) of the percent recovery.  These data are  used
             to establish upper and lower control limits as follows:

                       UPPER CONTROL LIMIT  = X + 3S
                       LOWER CONTROL LIMIT  = X - 3S

             After each five to ten new recovery measurements,  new
             control limits should be calculated using only the most
             recent 20-30 data points.  These calculated control limits
             should never exceed those established in Section 10.3.2.

     10.7.3  It is recommended that the laboratory periodically determine
             and document its detection limit capabilities for the
             analytes of interest.
                                237

-------
     10.7.4  At least quarterly, analyze a QC sample from an outside
             source.

     10.7.5  Laboratories are encouraged to participate in external
             performance evaluation studies such as the laboratory
             certification programs offered by many states or the studies
             conducted by USEPA.  Performance evaluation studies serve as
             independent checks on the analyst's performance.

10.8 ASSESSING ANALYTE RECOVERY - LABORATORY FORTIFIED SAMPLE MATRIX

     10.8.1  The laboratory must add a known concentration to a minimum
             of 10% of the routine samples or one sample concentration
             per set, whichever is greater.  The concentration should not
             be less then the background concentration of the sample
             selected for fortification.  Ideally,  the concentration
             should be the same as that used for the laboratory fortified
             blank (Sect. 10.7).  Over time, samples from all routine
             sample sources should be fortified.

     10.8.2  Calculate the percent recovery, P of the concentration for
             each analyte, after correcting the analytical  result,  X,
             from the fortified sample for the background concentration,
             b,  measured in the unfortified sample,  i.e.,:

             P - 100 (X - b)  / fortifying concentration,

             and compare these values to control limits appropriate for
             reagent water data collected in the same fashion.   If  the
             analyzed unfortified sample is found to contain  NO
             background concentrations,  and the added concentrations are
             those specified  in Sect.  10.7,  then the appropriate control
             limits would be  the acceptance limits  in Sect.  10.7.   If,  on
             the other hand,  the analyzed unfortified sample  is found to
             contain background concentration,  b,  estimate  the  standard
             deviation at the background concentration,  sb, using
             regressions or comparable background data and,  similarly,
             estimate the mean,  Xa  and standard deviation,  s ,  of
             analytical  results at'the total  concentration  after
             fortifying.   Then the  appropriate  percentage control limits
             would be P ± 3sD  , where:
             P =  100 X  /  (b +  fortifying concentration)

                                      1/2
                               2     2
             and  s  = 100   (s   + s   )  /fortifying concentration
                 P           a     b

             For  example,  if the background concentration for Analyte A
             was  found to  be 1 /ug/L and the added amount was also 1 /zg/L,
             and  upon analysis the laboratory fortified sample measured
             1.6 /i/L, then the calculated P for this sample would be (1.6

                                238

-------
                  fj.g/1 minus 1.0 jug/L)/l p.g/1 or 60%.  This calculated P is
                  compared to control limits derived from prior reagent water
                  data.  Assume it is known that analysis of an interference
                  free sample at 1 /Ltg/L yields_an s of 0.12 jug/L and similar
                  analysis at 2.0 /ig/L yields X and s of 2.01 ng/l and 0.20
                  M9/L, respectively.  The appropriate limits to judge the
                  reasonableness of the percent recovery, 60%, obtained on the
                  fortified matrix sample is computed as follows:

                  [100 (2.01 /zg/L) / 2.0 jag/L]
                                                          1/2
                  ±3 (100)  [(0.12 jug/L)2 + (0.20 »g/L)2]   /  1.0 »g/L =
                  100.5% ± 300 (0.233) =

                  100.5% ± 70% or 30% to 170% recovery of the added analyte.

          10.8.3  If the recovery of any such analyte falls outside the
                  designated range, and the laboratory performance for that
                  analyte is shown to be in control (Sect. 10.7), the recovery
                  problem encountered with the fortified sample is judged to
                  be matrix related, not system related.  The result for that
                  analyte in the unfortified sample is labeled suspect/matrix
                  to inform the data user that the results are suspect due to
                  matrix effects.

     10.9  ASSESSING INSTRUMENT SYSTEM - LABORATORY PERFORMANCE CHECK SAMPLE -
           Instrument performance should be monitored on a daily basis by
           analysis of the LPC sample.  The LPC sample contains compounds
           designed to indicate appropriate instrument sensitivity, column
           performance (primary column) and chromatographic performance.  LPC
           sample components and performance criteria are listed in Table 3.
           Inability to demonstrate acceptable instrument performance
           indicates the need for revaluation of the instrument system.  The
           sensitivity requirements are set based on the EDLs published in
           this method.  If laboratory EDLs differ from those listed in this
           method, concentrations of the instrument QC standard compounds must
           be adjusted to be compatible with the laboratory EDLs.

     10.10 The laboratory may adopt additional quality control practices for
           use with this method.   The specific practices that are most
           productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the nature
           of the samples.   For example, field or laboratory duplicates may be
           analyzed to assess the precision of the environmental  measurements
           or field reagent blanks may be used to assess contamination of
           samples under site conditions, transportation and storage.

11.   PROCEDURE

     11.1  MANUAL HYDROLYSIS, PREPARATION,  AND EXTRACTION.

           11.1.1  Add preservative to blanks and QC check standards.   Mark
                   the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for
                   later determination of sample volume (Sect. 11.1.9).  Pour

                                     239

-------
        the entire sample into a 2-L separatory funnel.   Fortify
        sample with 50 /zL of the surrogate standard solution.

11.1.2  Add 250 g NaCl to the sample,  seal,  and shake to dissolve
        salt.

11.1.3  Add 17 ml of 6 N NaOH to the sample,  seal,  and shake.
        Check the pH of the sample with pH paper;  if the sample
        does not have a pH greater than or equal  to 12,  adjust the
        pH by adding more 6 N NaOH.  Let the sample sit  at room
        temperature for 1 hr, shaking  the separatory funnel  and
        contents periodically.

11.1.4  Add 60 ml methylene chloride to the sample  bottle to rinse
        the bottle, transfer the methylene chloride to the
        separatory funnel and extract  the sample by vigorously
        shaking the funnel for 2 min with periodic  venting to
        release excess pressure.  Allow the organic layer to
        separate from the water phase  for a minimum of 10 min.  If
        the emulsion interface between layers is more than one-
        third the volume of the solvent layer,  the  analyst must
        employ mechanical techniques to complete the phase
        separation.  The optimum technique depends  upon  the sample,
        but may include stirring, filtration through glass wool,
        centrifugation, or other physical methods.   Discard the
        methylene chloride phase.

11.1.5  Add a second 60-mL volume of methylene chloride  to the
        sample bottle and repeat the extraction procedure a second
        time, discarding the methylene chloride layer.  Perform a
        third extraction in the same manner.

11.1.6  Add 17 mL of 12 N H2S04  to  the  sample,  seal,  and  shake  to
        mix.  Check the pH of the sample with pH paper;  if the
        sample does not have a pH less than or equal to  2, adjust
        the pH by adding more 12 N H2S04.

11.1.7  Add 120 ml ethyl ether to the  sample, seal, and  extract the
        sample by vigorously shaking the funnel for 2 min with
        periodic venting to release excess pressure.  Allow the
        organic layer to separate from the water phase for a
        minimum of 10 min.  If the emulsion interface between
        layers is more than one third  the volume of the  solvent
        layer, the analyst must employ mechanical  techniques to
        complete the phase separation.  The optimum technique
        depends upon the sample, but may include stirring,
        filtration through glass wool, centrifugation, or other
        physical methods.  Remove the  aqueous phase to a 2-L
        Erlenmeyer flask and collect the ethyl  ether phase in a
        500-mL round-bottom flask containing approximately 10 g of
        acidified anhydrous sodium sulfate.   Periodically,
        vigorously shake the sample and drying agent. Allow the
        extract to remain in contact with the sodium sulfate for
        approximately 2 hours.

                           240

-------
      11.1.8  Return the aqueous phase to the separatory funnel,  add a
              60-mL volume of ethyl  ether to the sample, and repeat the
              extraction procedure a second time,  combining the extracts
              in the 500-mL erlenmeyer flask.  Perform a third extraction
              with 60 ml of ethyl  ether in the same manner.

      11.1.9  Determine the original sample volume by refilling the
              sample bottle to the mark and transferring the water to a
              1000-mL graduated cylinder.  Record  the sample volume to
              the nearest 5 ml.

11.2  AUTOMATED HYDROLYSIS, PREPARATION,  AND EXTRACTION, -- Data
      presented in this method were generated using the automated
      extraction procedure with the mechanical separatory funnel  shaker.

      11.2.1  Add preservative (Sect.  8.2) to any  samples not previously
              preserved, e.g., blanks  and QC check standards.  Mark the
              water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for later
              determination of sample  volume (Sect. 11.2.9).  Fortify
              sample with 50 /xL of the surrogate standard solution.  If
              the mechanical separatory funnel shaker is used, pour the
              entire sample into a 2-L separatory  funnel.  If the
              mechanical tumbler is used, pour the entire sample into a
              tumbler bottle.

      11.2.2  Add 250 g NaCl to the sample, seal,  and shake to dissolve
              salt.

      11.2.3  Add 17 ml of 6 N NaOH to the sample, seal, and shake.
              Check the pH of the sample with pH paper; if the sample
              does not have a pH greater than or equal  to 12, adjust the
              pH by adding more 6 N NaOH.  Shake sample for 1 hr using
              the appropriate mechanical  mixing device.

      11.2.4  Add 300 ml methylene chloride to the sample bottle to rinse
              the bottle, transfer the methylene chloride to the
              separatory funnel or tumbler bottle, seal, and shake for 10
              s, venting periodically.  Repeat shaking and venting until
              pressure release is not  observed during venting.  Reseal
              and place sample container in appropriate mechanical mixing
              device.  Shake or tumble the sample  for 1 hr.  Complete and
              thorough mixing of the organic and aqueous phases should be
              observed at least 2 min  after starting the mixing device.

      11.2.5  Remove the sample container from the mixing device.  If the
              tumbler is used, pour contents of tumbler bottle into a 2-L
              separatory funnel.  Allow the organic layer to separate
              from the water phase for a minimum of 10 min.  If the
              emulsion interface between layers is more than one third
              the volume of the solvent layer, the analyst must employ
              mechanical techniques to complete the phase separation.
              The optimum technique depends upon the sample, but may
              include stirring, filtration through glass wool,
              centrifugation, or other physical methods.  Drain and

                                241

-------
              discard the organic phase.  If the tumbler is used, return
              the aqueous phase to the tumbler bottle.

      11.2.6  Add 17 ml of 12 N H2S04 to  the sample,  seal,  and shake to
              mix.  Check the pH of the sample with pH paper; if the
              sample does not have a pH less than or equal to 2, adjust
              the pH by adding more 12 N H2S04.

      11.2.7  Add 300 ml ethyl ether to the sample, seal, and shake for
              10 s, venting periodically.  Repeat shaking and venting
              until pressure release is not observed during venting.
              Reseal and place sample container in appropriate mechanical
              mixing device.  Shake or tumble sample for 1 hr.  Complete
              and thorough mixing of the organic and aqueous phases
              should be observed at least 2 min after starting the mixing
              device.

      11.2.8  Remove the sample container from the mixing device.  If the
              tumbler is used, pour contents of tumbler bottle into a 2-L
              separatory funnel.  Allow the organic layer to separate
              from the water phase for a minimum of 10 min.  If the
              emulsion interface between layers is more than one third
              the volume of the solvent layer, the analyst must employ
              mechanical techniques to complete the phase separation.
              The optimum technique depends upon the sample, but may
              include stirring, filtration through glass wool,
              centrifugation, or other physical methods.  Drain and
              discard the aqueous phase.   Collect the extract in a 500-mL
              round-bottom flask containing about 10 g of acidified
              anhydrous sodium sulfate.  Periodically vigorously shake
              the sample and drying agent.  Allow the extract to remain
              in contact with the sodium sulfate for approximately 2 hr.

      11.2.9  Determine the original  sample volume by refilling the
              sample bottle to the mark and transferring the water to a
              1000-mL graduated cylinder.  Record the sample volume to
              the nearest 5 ml.

11.3  EXTRACT CONCENTRATION

      11.3.1  Assemble a K-D concentrator by attaching a concentrator
              tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask.

      11.3.2  Pour the dried extract  through a funnel  plugged with acid
              washed glass wool,  and  collect the extract in the K-D
              concentrator.   Use a glass  rod to crush any caked sodium
              sulfate during the transfer.  Rinse the round-bottom flask
              and funnel  with 20 to 30 ml of ethyl  ether to complete the
              quantitative transfer.

      11.3.3  Add 1  to 2 clean boiling stones to the evaporative flask
              and attach a macro Snyder column.   Prewet the Snyder column
              by adding about 1 ml ethyl  ether to  the top.   Place the K-D
              apparatus on a hot water bath,  60 to  65°C,  so that the

                                242

-------
              concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water,
              and the entire lower rounded surface of the flask is bathed
              with hot vapor.  At the proper rate of distillation the
              balls of the column will  actively chatter but the chambers
              will not flood.  When the apparent volume of liquid reaches
              1 ml, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain and
              cool for at least 10 min.

      11.3.4  Remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower
              joint into the concentrator tube with 1 to 2 ml of ethyl
              ether.  Add 2 ml of MTBE and a fresh boiling stone.  Attach
              a micro-Snyder column to the concentrator tube and prewet
              the column by adding about 0.5 mL of ethyl ether to the
              top.  Place the micro K-D apparatus on the water bath so
              that the concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot
              water.  Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and
              the water temperature as required to complete concentration
              in 5 to 10 min.  When the apparent volume of liquid reaches
              0.5 ml, remove the micro K-D from the bath and allow it to
              drain and cool.  Remove the micro Snyder column and add 250
              /zL of methanol.  If the gaseous diazomethane procedure
              (Sect. 11.4) is used for esterification of pesticides,
              rinse the walls of the concentrator tube while adjusting
              the volume to 5.0 ml with MTBE.  If the pesticides will be
              esterified using the diazomethane solution (Sect. 11.5),
              rinse the walls of the concentrator tube while adjusting
              the volume to 4.5 ml with MTBE.

11.4  ESTERIFICATION OF ACIDS USING GASEOUS DIAZOMETHANE -- Results
      presented in this method were generated using the gaseous diazomet-
      hane derivatization procedure.  See Section 11.5 for an alternative
      procedure.

      11.4.1  Assemble the diazomethane generator (Figure 1) in a hood.

      11.4.2  Add 5 ml of ethyl ether to Tube 1.  Add 1 ml of ethyl
              ether, 1 ml of carbitol,  1.5 ml of 37% aqueous KOH, and 0.2
              grams Diazald to Tube 2.   Immediately place the exit tube
              into the concentrator tube containing the sample extract.
              Apply nitrogen flow (10 mL/min) to bubble diazomethane
              through the extract for 1 min.  Remove first sample.  Rinse
              the tip of the diazomethane generator with ethyl ether
              after methylation of each sample.  Bubble diazomethane
              through the second sample extract for 1 min.  Diazomethane
              reaction mixture should be used to esterify only two
              samples; prepare new reaction mixture in Tube 2 to esterify
              each two additional samples.  Samples should turn yellow
              after addition of diazomethane and remain yellow for at
              least 2 min.  Repeat methylation procedure if necessary.

      11.4.3  Seal concentrator tubes with stoppers.  Store at room
              temperature in a hood for 30 min.
                                243

-------
      11.4.4  Destroy any unreacted diazomethane by adding 0.1 to
              0.2 grams silicic acid to the concentrator tubes.  Allow to
              stand until the evolution of nitrogen gas has stopped (ap-
              proximately 20 min).  Adjust the sample volume to 5.0 ml
              with MTBE.

11.5  ESTERIFICATION OF ACIDS USING DIAZOMETHANE SOLUTION -- Alternative
      procedure.

      11.5.1  Assemble the diazomethane generator (Figure 2) in a hood.
              The collection vessel is a 10- or 15-mL vial, equipped with
              a Teflon-lined screw cap and maintained at 0-5C.

      11.5.2  Add a sufficient amount of ethyl ether to tube 1 to cover
              the first impinger.  Add 5 ml of MTBE to the collection
              vial.  Set the nitrogen flow at 5-10 mL/min.  Add 2 ml
              Diazald solution (Sect. 7.10) and 1.5 mL of 37% KOH
              solution to the second impinger.  Connect the tubing as
              shown and allow the nitrogen flow to purge the diazomethane
              from the reaction vessel into the collection vial for 30
              min.  Cap the vial  when collection is complete and maintain
              at 0-5°C.  When stored at 0-5°C this diazomethane solution
              may be used over a period of 48 hr.

      11.5.3  To each concentrator tube containing sample or standard,
              add 0.5 ml diazomethane solution.  Samples should turn
              yellow after addition of the diazomethane solution and
              remain yellow for at least 2 min.  Repeat methyl ation
              procedure if necessary.

      11.5.4  Seal concentrator tubes with stoppers.  Store at room
              temperature in a hood for 30 min.

      11.5.5  Destroy any unreacted diazomethane by adding 0.1 to
              0.2 grams silicic acid to the concentrator tubes.  Allow to
              stand until  the evolution of nitrogen gas has stopped (ap-
              proximately 20 min).  Adjust the sample volume to 5.0 mL
              with MTBE.

11.6  FLORISIL SEPARATION

      11.6.1  Place a small  plug  of glass wool into a 5-mL disposable
              glass pipet.   Tare  the pipet, and measure 1 g of activated
              Florisil  into  the pipet.

      11.6.2  Apply 5 mL of  5 percent methanol in MTBE to the Florisil.
              Allow the liquid to just reach the top of the Florisil.   In
              this and subsequent steps,  allow the liquid level to just
              reach the top  of the Florisil before applying the next
              rinse,  however, do  not allow the Florisil  to go dry.
              Discard eluate.

      11.6.3  Apply 5 mL methylated sample to the Florisil  leaving
              silicic acid  in the tube.   Collect eluate in K-D tube.

                                244

-------
      11.6.4  Add 1 ml of 5 percent methanol in MTBE to the sample
              container, rinsing walls.  Transfer the rinse to the
              Florisil column leaving silicic acid in the tube.  Collect
              eluate in a K-D tube.  Repeat with 1-mL and 3-mL aliquots
              of 5 percent methanol in MTBE, collecting eluates in K-D
              tube.

      11.6.5  If necessary, dilute eluate to 10 ml with 5 percent
              methanol in MTBE.

      11.6.6  Seal the vial and store in a refrigerator if further
              processing will not be performed immediately.  Analyze by
              6C-ECD.

11.7  GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY

      11.7.1  Sect. 6.10 summarizes the recommended operating conditions
              for the GC.  Included in Table 1 are retention times
              observed using this method.  Other GC columns, chromat-
              ographic conditions, or detectors may be used if the
              requirements of Sect. 10.4 are met.

      11.7.2  Calibrate the system daily as described in Sect. 9.  The
              standards and extracts must be in MTBE.

      11.7.3  If the internal standard calibration procedure is used,
              fortify the extract with 25 p,l of internal standard
              solution.  Thoroughly mix sample and place aliquot in a GC
              vial for subsequent analysis.

      11.7.4  Inject 2 /zL of the sample extract.  Record the resulting
              peak size in area units.

      11.7.5  If the response for the peak exceeds the working range of
              the system, dilute the extract and reanalyze.

11.8  IDENTIFICATION OF ANALYTES

      11.8.1  Identify a sample component by comparison of its retention
              time to the retention time of a reference chromatogram.  If
              the retention time of an unknown compound corresponds,
              within limits,  to the retention time of a standard
              compound, then identification is considered positive.

      11.8.2  The width of the retention time window used to make
              identifications should be based upon measurements of actual
              retention time variations of standards over the course of a
              day.  Three times the standard deviation of a retention
              time can be used to calculate a suggested window size for a
              compound.  However,  the experience of the analyst should
              weigh heavily in the interpretation of chromatograms.

      11.8.3  Identification requires expert judgement when sample
              components are not resolved chromatographically.   When GC

                                245

-------
                   peaks obviously represent more than one sample component
                   (i.e., broadened peak with shoulder(s) or valley between
                   two or more maxima, or any time doubt exists over the
                   identification of a peak on a chromatogram, appropriate
                   alternative techniques, to help confirm peak identifica-
                   tion, need to be employed.  For example, more positive
                   identification may be made by the use of an alternative
                   detector which operates on a chemical/physical principle
                   different from that originally used, e.g., mass spectrom-
                   etry, or the use of a second chromatography column.  A
                   suggested alternative column in described in Sect. 6.10.
12.  CALCULATIONS
     12.1
     12.2
     12.3
Calculate analyte concentrations in the sample from the response
for the analyte using the calibration procedure described  in Sect.
9.

If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, calculate
the concentration (C) in the sample using the response factor  (RF)
determined in Sect. 9.2 and Equation 2, or determine sample
concentration from the calibration curve.
           C Gag/L)


           where:
                           (A.) (I.)
               (Af.)(RF)(V0)
                                   Equation 2.
As  = Response for the parameter to be measured.
Ais  - Response for the internal  standard.
Is  ~ Amount of internal standard added to each extract (jug).
V0  = Volume of water extracted (L).

If the external standard calibration procedure  is used, calculate
the amount of material  injected from the peak response using the
calibration curve or calibration factor determined in Sect. 9.3.
The concentration (C) in the sample can be calculated from Equation
3.
           C (jug/L)  =
                        (A)(Vt)
                                   Equation 3.
           where:
          I
     Amount of material injected (ng).
     Volume of extract injected (juL).
     Volume of total  extract (juL).
     Volume of water  extracted (ml).
                                     246

-------
13.  PRECISION AND ACCURACY

     13.1  In a single laboratory, analyte recoveries from reagent water were
           determined at five concentration levels.  Results were used to
           determine analyte EDLs and demonstrate method range.(1)  Analyte
           EDLs and analyte recoveries and standard deviation about the
           percent recoveries at one concentration are given in Table 2.

     13.2  In a single laboratory, analyte recoveries from one standard
           synthetic ground waters were determined at one concentration level.
           Results were used to demonstrate applicability of the method to
           different ground water matrices.(1)  Analyte recoveries from the
           one synthetic matrix are given in Table 2.

14.  REFERENCES

     1.   National Pesticide Survey Method No. 3, "Determination of
          Chlorinated Acids in Water by Gas Chromatography with an Electron
          Capture Detector."

     2.   '"Pesticide Methods Evaluation," Letter Report #33 for EPA Contract
          No. 68-03-2697.  Available from U.S. Environmental Protection
          Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati,
          Ohio 45268.

     3.   ASTM Annual Book of Standards,  Part 11, Volume 11.02, D3694-82,
          "Standard Practice for Preparation of Sample Containers and for
          Preservation," American Society for Testing and Materials,
          Philadelphia, PA, p. 86, 1986.

     4.   Giam, C. S., Chan, H. S., and Nef, G. S, "Sensitive Method for
          Determination of Phthalate Ester Plasticizers in Open-Ocean Biota
          Samples," Analytical Chemistry. 47, 2225 (1975).

     5.   Giam, C. S., and Chan, H.. S. "Control of Blanks in the Analysis of
          Phthalates in Air and Ocean Biota Samples," U.S. National  Bureau of
          Standards, Special Publication  442, pp. 701-708, 1976.

     6.   "Carcinogens - Working with Carcinogens," Department of Health,
          Education, and Welfare, Public  Health Service, Center for Disease
          Control, National Institute for Occupational  Safety and Health,
          Publication No. 77-206, Aug. 1977.

     7.   "OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General  Industry," (29 CFR 1910),
          Occupational Safety and Health  Administration, OSHA 2206,  (Revised,
          January 1976).

     8.   "Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,"  American Chemical
          Society Publication, Committee  on Chemical  Safety, 3rd  Edition,
          1979.

     9.   ASTM Annual Book of Standards,  Part 11, Volume 11.01, D3370-82,
          "Standard Practice for Sampling Water," American Society for Testing
          and Materials, Philadelphia, PA, p. 130, 1986.

                                      247

-------
               TABLE 1.  RETENTION TIMES FOR METHOD ANALYTES
 Analvte
      Retention Time3
        (minutes)
Primary            Confirmation
Dal apon
3,5-Dichlorobenzoic acid
4-Nitrophenol
DCAA (surrogate)
Dicamba
Dichlorprop
2,4-D
DBOB (int. std.)
Pentachlorophenol (PCP)
Chi oramben
2,4,5-TP
5-Hydroxydi camba
2,4,5-T
2,4-DB
Dinoseb
Bentazon
Picloram
DCPA acid metabolites
Acifluorfen
3.4
18.6
18.6
22.0
22.1
25.0
25.5
27.5
28.3
29.7
29.7
30.0
30.5
32.2
32.4
33.3
34.4
35.8
41.5
4.7
17.7
20.5
14.9
22.6
25.6
27.0
27.6
27.0
32.8
29.5
30.7
30.9
32.2
34.1
34.6
37.5
37.8
42.8
Columns and analytical conditions are described in Sect. 6.10.1
and 6.10.2.
                                    248

-------
         O)

         •0'

         o

         a>

         c

         oo
1-4 bl

O «<     O)T3
MJ *    •»•» - -«
          €0
00
t§i
  !i
  i<0
pS
UJ(-
          a>
          o>
  : w>
o««

Sul
t315
>- Ul
OtD
£2
§:C
-^s
          <0
          O)  -2
          o  ^

          o
         o
         a
         uj  g
U 1X.
-JO
(0 Ik
(O


c\3

Ul

OQ
                  \o r*^ i—i to r--.    o» 10 «* co ^s- co co cj co oo co


                  CM CO •—I    CO    CJ •—I       r-l    CO    CM
                  o oo «-H r-t CM    co en oo o co co CM oo en en o
                  ir>vo^-r^ocoo»cMtoo*3-u3co<-«>o
                  i—I i—1 rH CM CM f—I    COi-          CM oo vo vo cr> ^*-co r~. ^-oo i
                  OCMOCJOOCOOOOCvJi—i O •—I O i—I O O

                  OOOOi—lOOOQOOOOOOOO
                                           o
                                     0)
                                                         ex.
                                                         ex.
                                    r—     O
                                     O     N
                                     O)
                                                    (0
                                                   J2
                   $-
                   o
                      C J3

                      SI
                      (0  t- I
                   u a>
            O        O O  O-
      &    S-  O.   -i- C  O
            O  O    73 O>  $-
     73   i—  S.     >>J=  O
     f-   J=  O.    X 0.1—  E
C    U(0US.JQOOJZ>0
oco(0jD*>-oa>&-&.u&-
O-Q    EQi—  C0734J  «0  O


<0  -<_> -r-  «^r--r-  I   I  O) v-   "  •>
                                                                I  I
                                                               to m
                                                                             !*.
                                                                             •»-> o
                                                                             •r- O>
                                                                             t- >
                                                                              CD 
                                                                             i—t   -i-
                                                                                .—.+j at
                                                                        co   4-> i-i <0 c
                                                                        0)    S_ 1-1 i_ ••-
                                                                        —    10  •    c
                                                                        CL   Q- t—I O) -i-
                                                                        E          co E
                                                                        5   oi c •*- C
                                                                        co   u_ o o a>
                                                                             O -r- £= 4->
                                                                        co         «  a>
                                                                         I    O ••- O 73
                                                                        r-»   «*>•!-»
                                                                                 a>  i  c:
                                                                        4-    O CC. i— T-
                                                                        O   4-»    «0
                                                                                  I  C73
                                                                        c   oa    a> a>
                                                                        (0      4J -r- CO
                                                                        CO    X T- CO 3
                                                                        0)
                                                                        •o
                                                                              C — J 4J O
                                                                              O- C
                                                                              0.0
                                                                                      : 4->
                                                                                       ea
                                                                                      < i.
                                                                                          a)
                                                                                 o <0 c
                                                                              _i a) s- a>

                                                                              s a> x «=.—
                                                                                 Q Q) O 03
                                                                              S-       U <0

                                                                              j= o'« a>
                                                                              0)0)4-
                                                                        73
                                                                         O>
                                                                         a>    i-
                                                                              .


                                                                              1£.
                                                                              ••- o
                                                                              O) C
                                                                              •o o

                                                                              +J 10
                                                        S~ {=
                                                        O> -r-
                                                                                    C O>TD
                                                                                    •r- -f-  0>
                                                                               O tt)
                                                                         at
                                                                        •o
                                                                         O)
                                                                         4->
                                                                         u
                                                                         o>

                                                                         i-
                                                                         o
                                                                         u
                                                                         <0
                                                                        o
 u  o>
 O) J=
4-> 4->
 a>


'I
 O)
4->  0)
 (0  S-
 E  3

4J  O)
 CO  U
 O)  O
    s-
 II 0-

-JT3
O  C
UJ  10
                                                     O» -r- CO
                                                     O.   O)
                                                        at i.
                                                     <0 3 O.

                                                     en to e
                                                     c > o
                                                     If     *pM-
                                                     -o s- +J

                                                     'a> > i-
                                                     ^r* Q) 4^ •

                                                        O O)
                                                     O) T- O
                                                                                    O.
                                                                                       JC  C
                                                                                       S
                                                                                           O
                                                                                           U
                                                                                           a>
 (0

 c'a>  co
•r- 4J  10

•o  E  a>

 ixl
 oo<.

 E  Q-a>
 O  O..C
 
                                                                                                      o
                                                                                                       Q)
                         t-
                         O)
             O)    (4_

             O     °

             2    I

            •^    S
             O)     >
             o     £

             a>    "°
             O.   -n
01
O)
<0

a>

(0
 (0


 (0

 CO

 H


oo1"
                                                                                                            O
                                                                                                            73
                                                                                                            O)
                                                                                                            C

                                                                                                            (0
                                                                                                            O)
                                                                             s-
                                                                             a.
                                                                             co

                                                                             
                                                                                                            I

                                                                                                            <0
                               O)   •
                               i-  C
                               3  (0
                               a. en
                               O T-
                               oo jc
                              JQ  U
                         <0 4->
                        f—  3
                        •£D  ^3

                         c  >>
                                                                                                            73
                                                                                                             C  C
    C
4->  <0
 C  O-
 3  E

 |5


 s-  a>
 O 4->
(*-  10

73
 O)  O)

 U  3
 O)  O-
 i-  O
 S-  CO
 O J3
0
-------
        CO

         A
         O)
          0
           o    o
     <4_      •    A

      °     V    C
      c    u_    o
      O    C3    i-
     •r-    Q.    4J
     +J     V    3
      O           i—
      O)    O    O
          0)
                      Q)
51
          «a-
          o
          o
     VO ID
       •   •

     O •-€
 .
s
*«

                                            •f—
                                            0)
                                            •M

                                             a>
                                             (O
                                            4J
                                            •o
                                         a
                                         0)
                                         a.

                                         a>
                                             00
                                                            O)
                                          T3

                                          '5
                                           (O
                                           0)
                                           o.

                                           O)


                                           2
                                           o>

                                           05

                                           0>
                 OL   .C  C3u
          .n    o     up
           0)    fc.    i-  $-
           v>    •«->    a •*•>
           o    T-     i «P-
           c    z    in z:
          •r-     I       •> I
          Q    ^4-    CO «*
                  a>
                  o
                                    o
                                    cr
                                    a>
                   a>
                                    a>
                  "8
                  •8
                                     (0
                                    O
                                     a '
JC
 o>
•r-
 0>
-C

««-

"•0



 +J
 (0

 .C

 •o
                             (0
                            . OJ
                         o a.
                                              ut
                                              CM
                                     -8.2  *

                                      H         »

                                     u.        »
                                     43       -S
                                     Qu        *
                                  C0

                                  cr
                                                0)
                                               ^=
                                               -l->
                                                   •o
                                                    O)
O)




(0




<0

CL

O




O)
J=
••->


O)




O)




 o
                                            (O
                                            0)
                                            a.


                                            §
                                                               O
                      250

-------
Nitrogtn
    Tub«1
                 Tubta
                             Samplt
                              Tub*
  FIGURE 1.  GASEOUS DIAZOMETHANE GENERATOR
                         251

-------
u
t>
                                          t.
                                          «

                                          8
                                                          CK



                                                          I
                                                          CM
                                                          3
            252

-------
           METHOD 524.1.  MEASUREMENT OF  PUR6EABLE ORGANIC  COMPOUNDS
         IN WATER BY PACKED COLUMN GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY/MASS SPECTROMETRY
                                  Revision 3.0
.A.  AT ford-Stevens,  J.  W.  Eichelberger,  W.  L.  Budde - Method 524,  Revision 1.0
 (1983)

 J.  E. Longbottom,  R. W.  Slater,  Jr.  - Method  524.1, Revision 2.0  (1986)

 J.  W. Eichelberger, W.  L.  Budde  - Method 524.1,  Revision 3.0 (1989)
                  ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
                      OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
                     U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
                            CINCINNATI, OHIO  45268
                                      253

-------
                                 METHOD 524.1
            MEASUREMENT OF PURGEABLE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN WATER BY
              PACKED COLUMN GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY/MASS SPECTROMETRY
1.   SCOPE AND APPLICATION

     1.1  This is a general purpose method for the identification and simul-
          taneous measurement of purgeable volatile organic compounds in
          finished drinking water, raw source water, or drinking water in any
          treatment stage (1).  The method is applicable to a wide range of
          organic compounds, including the four trihalomethane disinfection
          by-products, that have sufficiently high volatility and low water
          solubility to be efficiently removed from water samples with purge
          and trap procedures.  The following compounds are method analytes,
          and single-laboratory accuracy, precision, and method detection
          limit data have been determined with this method for 31 of them3.
              Compound

          Benzene
          Bromobenzene
        * Bromochloromethane
          Bromodi chloromethane
          Bromoform
        * Bromomethane
          Carbon tetrachloride
          Chlorobenzene
        * Chloroethane
          Chloroform
        * Chloromethane
        * 2-Chlorotoluene
        * 4-Chlorotoluene
          Di bromochloromethane
          1,2-Di bromo-3-chloropropane
          1,2-Dibromoethane
          Dibromomethane
          1,2-DiChlorobenzene
        * 1,3-Dichlorobenzene
          1,4-Di chlorobenzene
          Di chlorodi f1uoromethane
          1,1-Dichloroethane
          1,2-Dichloroethane
          1,1-Dichloroethene
        * cis-1,2-Dichloroethene
          trans-1,2-Di chloroethene
          1,2-Dichloropropane
          1,3-Di chloropropane
Chemical Abstract Service
	Registry Number

           71-43-2
          108-86-1
           74-97-5
           75-27-4
           75-25-2
           74-83-9
           56-23-5
          108-90-7
           75-00-3
           67-66-3
           74-87-3
           95-49-8
          106-43-4
          124-48-1
           96-12-8
          106-93-4
           74-95-3
           95-50-1
          541-73-1
          106-46-7
           75-71-8
           75-34-3
          107-06-2
           75-35-4
          156-59-4
          156-60-5
           78-87-5
          142-28-9

                                      254

-------
   * 2,2-Dichloropropane                            590-20-7
   * 1,1-Dichloropropene                            563-58-6
   * cis-l,3-Dichloropropene                      10061-01-5
   * trans-l,3-Dichloropropene                    10061-02-6
   * Ethyl benzene                                   100-41-4
     Methylene chloride                              75-09-2
     Styrene                                        100-42-5
   * 1,1,1,2-Tetrachloroethane                      630-20-6
     1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane                       79-34-5
     Tetrachloroethene                              127-18-4
     Toluene                                        108-88-3
     1,1,1-Trichloroethane                           71-55-6
   * 1,1,2-Trichloroethane                           79-00-5
     Trichloroethene                                 79-01-6
     Trichlorofluoromethane                          75-69-4
   * 1,2,3-Trichloropropane                          96-18-4
     Vinyl chloride                                  75-01-4
     o-Xylene                                        95-47-6
   * m-Xylene                                       108-38-3
     p-Xylene                                       106-42-3


   a Compounds preceded by an asterisk are known to be amenable to purge
     and trap extraction (see Method 524.2), and chromatography on the
     packed gas chromatography column used in this method, but precision,
     accuracy, retention time, and method detection limit data is not
     provided in this method.

.1.2  Method detection limits (MDLs) (2) are compound and instrument
     dependent and vary from approximately 0.1-2 /jg/L.  The applicable
     concentration range of this method is also compound and instrument
     dependent and is approximately 0.1 to 200 M9/L-  Analytes that are
     inefficiently purged from water will not be detected when present at
     low concentrations, but they can be measured with acceptable
     accuracy and precision when present in sufficient amounts.

1.3  Analytes that are not separated chromatographically, but which have
     different mass spectra and non-interfering quantitation ions, can be
     identified and measured in the same calibration mixture or water
     sample (Sect. 11.9.2).  Table 1 lists primary and secondary
     quantitation ions for each analyte.  Analytes which have very
     similar mass spectra cannot be individually identified and measured
     in the same calibration mixture or water sample unless they have
     different retention times (Sect.11.9.3).  Coeluting compounds with
     very similar mass spectra, typically many structural isomers, must
     be reported as an isomeric group or pair.  Cis- and trans-
     1,2-dichloroethene, two of the three isomeric xylenes, and two of
     the three dichlorobenzenes are three examples of structural  isomers
     that cannot be explicitly identified if more than one member of the
     isomeric group is present. These groups of isomers must be reported
     as isomeric pairs (see Method 524.2 for an alternative approach).


                                 255

-------
2.   SUMMARY OF METHOD

     2.1  Volatile organic compounds and surrogates with low water solubility
          are extracted (purged) from the sample matrix by bubbling an inert
          gas through the aqueous sample.  Purged sample components are
          trapped in a tube containing suitable sorbent materials.  When
          purging is complete, the sorbent tube is heated and backflushed with
          helium to desorb the trapped sample components into a packed gas
          chromatography (GC) column interfaced to a mass spectrometer (MS).
          The column is temperature programmed to separate the method analytes
          which are then detected with the MS.  Compounds eluting from the GC
          column are identified by comparing their measured mass spectra and
          retention times to reference spectra and retention times in a data
          base.  Reference spectra and retention times for analytes are
          obtained by the measurement of calibration standards under the same
          conditions used for samples.  The concentration of each identified
          component is measured by relating the MS response of the
          quantisation ion produced by that compound to the MS response of the
          quantitation ion produced by a compound that is used as an internal
          standard.  Surrogate analytes, whose concentrations are known in
          every sample, are measured with the same internal standard
          calibration procedure.

3.   DEFINITIONS

     3.1  Internal standard -- A pure analyte(s) added to a solution in known
          amount(s) and used to measure the relative responses of other method
          analytes and surrogates that are components of the same solution.
          The internal standard must be an analyte that is not a sample
          component.

     3.2  Surrogate analyte — A pure analyte(s), which is extremely unlikely
          to be found in any sample, and which is added to a sample aliquot in
          known amount(s) before extraction and is measured with the same
          procedures used to measure other sample components.  The purpose of
          a surrogate analyte is to monitor method performance with each
          sample.

     3.3  Laboratory duplicates (LD1 and LD2) -- Two sample aliquots taken in
          the analytical laboratory and analyzed separately with identical
          procedures.  Analyses of LD1 and LD2 give a measure of the precision
          associated with laboratory procedures, but not with sample
          collection, preservation, or storage procedures.

     3.4  Field duplicates (FD1 and FD2) — Two separate samples collected at
          the same time and place under identical circumstances and treated
          exactly the same throughout field and laboratory procedures.
          Analyses of FD1 and FD2 give a measure of the precision associated
          with sample collection, preservation and storage, as well as with
          laboratory procedures.
                                      256

-------
3.5   Laboratory reagent  blank  (LRB) — An aliquot of reagent water that
      is treated exactly  as a sample including exposure to all glassware,
      equipment, solvents, reagents, internal standards, and surrogates
      that are used with  other  samples.  The LRB is used to determine if
      method analytes or  other  interferences are present in the laboratory
      environment, the reagents, or the apparatus.

3.6   Field reagent blank (FRB) — Reagent water placed in a sample
      container in the laboratory and treated as a sample in all respects,
      including exposure  to sampling site conditions, storage,
      preservation and all analytical procedures. The purpose of the FRB
      is to determine if  method analytes or other interferences are
      present in the field environment.

3.7   Laboratory performance check solution (LPC) ~ A solution of one or
      more compounds used to evaluate the performance of the instrument
      system with respect to a defined set of method criteria.

3.8   Laboratory fortified blank (LFB) — An aliquot of reagent water to
      which known quantities of the method analytes are added in the
      laboratory.  The LFB is analyzed exactly like a sample, and its
      purpose is to determine whether the methodology is in control, and
      whether the laboratory is capable of making accurate and precise
      measurements at the required method detection limit.

3.9   Laboratory fortified sample matrix (LFM) — An aliquot of an
      environmental sample to which known quantities of the method
      analytes are added  in the laboratory.  The LFM is analyzed exactly
      like a sample, and  its purpose is to determine whether the sample
      matrix contributes bias to the analytical  results.  The background
      concentrations of the analytes in the sample matrix must be
      determined in a separate aliquot and the measured values in the LFM
      corrected for background concentrations.

3.10  Stock standard solution — A concentrated solution containing a
      single certified standard that is a method analyte,  or a
      concentrated solution of a single analyte prepared in the laboratory
     with an assayed reference compound.   Stock standard solutions are
      used to prepare primary dilution standards.

3.11  Primary dilution standard solution — A solution of several  analytes
     prepared in the laboratory from stock standard solutions and diluted
     as needed to prepare calibration solutions and other  needed analyte
     solutions.

3.12 Calibration standard (CAL) — A solution prepared from the primary
     dilution standard solution and stock standard solutions of the
      internal  standards and surrogate analytes.   The CAL solutions are
     used to calibrate the instrument response  with respect to analyte
     concentration.
                                257

-------
3.13 Quality control sample (QCS) — A sample matrix containing method.
     analytes or a solution of method analytes in a water miscible
     solvent which is used to fortify reagent water or environmental
     samples.  The QCS is obtained from a source external to the
     laboratory, and is used to check laboratory performance with
     externally prepared test materials.

INTERFERENCES

4.1  During analysis, major contaminant sources are volatile materials
     in the laboratory and impurities in the inert purging gas and in the
     sorbent trap.  The use of non-polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) plastic
     tubing, non-PTFE thread sealants, or flow controllers with rubber
     components in the purging device should be avoided since such
     materials out-gas organic compounds which will be concentrated in
     the trap during the purge operation.  Analyses of laboratory reagent
     blanks provide information about the presence of contaminants.  When
     potential interfering peaks are noted in laboratory reagent blanks,
     the analyst should change the purge gas source and regenerate the
     molecular sieve purge gas filter.  Subtracting blank values from
     sample results is not permitted.

4.2  Interfering contamination may occur when a sample containing low
     concentrations of volatile organic compounds is analyzed immediately
     after a sample containing relatively high concentrations of volatile
     organic compounds.  A preventive technique is between-sample rinsing
     of the purging apparatus and sample syringes with two portions of
     reagent water.  After analysis of a sample containing high
     concentrations of volatile organic compounds, one or more laboratory
     reagent blanks should be analyzed to check for cross contamination.

4.3  Special precautions must be taken to determine methylene chloride.
     The analytical and sample storage area should be isolated from all
     atmospheric sources of methylene chloride, otherwise random
     background levels will result.  Since methylene chloride will
     permeate through PTFE tubing, all gas chromatography carrier gas
     lines and purge gas plumbing should be constructed of stainless
     steel or copper tubing.  Laboratory worker's clothing should be
     cleaned frequently since clothing previously exposed to methylene
     chloride fumes during common liquid/liquid extraction procedures can
     contribute to  sample contamination.

SAFETY

5.1  The toxicity or carcinogen!city of chemicals used in this method
     has not been precisely defined; each chemical should be treated as  a
     potential health hazard, and exposure to these chemicals should be
     minimized.  Each laboratory is responsible for maintaining  awareness
     of OSHA regulations regarding safe handling of chemicals used in
     this method.   Additional references to laboratory safety are
     available  (3-5) for the information of the analyst.
                                 258

-------
5.2  The following method analytes have been tentatively classified as
     known or suspected human or mammalian carcinogens:  benzene, carbon
     tetrachloride, 1,4-dichlorobenzene, 1,2-dichlorethane,
     1,1,2,2-tetrachloroethane, 1,1,2-trichloroethane, chloroform,
     1,2-dibromoethane, tetrachloroethene, trichloroethene, and vinyl
     chloride.  Pure standard materials and stock standard solutions of
     these compounds should be handled in a hood.  A NIOSH/MESA approved
     toxic gas respirator should be worn when the analyst handles high
     concentrations of these toxic compounds.

APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT

6.1  SAMPLE CONTAINERS — 60-mL to 120-mL screw cap vials (Pierce #19832
     or equivalent) each equipped with a PTFE-faced silicone septum
     (Pierce #12718 or equivalent).  Prior to use, wash vials and septa
     with detergent and rinse with tap and distilled water.  Allow the
     vials and septa to air dry at room temperature, place in a 105°C
     oven for 1 hr, then remove and allow to cool in an area known to be
     free of organics.

6.2  PURGE AND TRAP SYSTEM — The purge and trap system consists of three
     separate pieces of equipment:  purging device,  trap, and desorber.
     Systems are commercially available from several sources that meet
     all of the following specifications.

     6.2.1  The all glass purging device (Figure 1)  should be designed to
            accept 25-mL samples with a water column at least 5 cm deep.
            A smaller (5-mL) purging device is recommended if the GC/MS
            system has adequate sensitivity to obtain the method
            detection limits required.   Gaseous volumes above the sample
            must be kept to a minimum (<15 ml) to eliminate dead volume
            effects.   A glass frit should  be installed at the base of the
            sample chamber so the purge gas passes through the water
            column as finely divided bubbles with a  diameter of <3 mm at
            the origin.   Needle spargers may be used,  however,  the purge
            gas must  be introduced at a point about  5 mm from the base of
            the water column.

     6.2.2  The trap  (Figure 2)  must be at least 25  cm long and have an
            inside diameter of at least 0.105 in.  Starting from the
            inlet, the trap should contain 1.0 cm of methyl  silicone
            coated packing and the following amounts of adsorbents:   1/3
            of 2,6-diphenylene oxide polymer,  1/3 of silica gel,  and 1/3
            of coconut charcoal.   If it is not necessary to determine
            dichlorodifluoromethane,  the charcoal  can  be eliminated  and
            the polymer increased to fill  2/3 of the trap.   Before
            initial use,  the trap should be conditioned overnight at
            180°C  by backflushing with  an  inert  gas  flow  of at  least
            20 mL/min.   Vent the  trap effluent to the  room,  not to the
            analytical  column.   Prior to daily use,  the trap  should  be
            conditioned  for 10 min  at 180°C with backflushing.  The trap
            may be vented  to the  analytical  column during daily

                                259

-------
            conditioning; however, the column must be run through the
            temperature program prior to analysis of samples.

     6.2.3  The use, of the methyl silicone coated packing is recommended,
            but not mandatory.  The packing serves a dual purpose of
            protecting the Tenax adsorbant from aerosols, and also of
            insuring that the Tenax is fully enclosed within the heated
            zone of the trap thus eliminating potential  cold spots.
            Alternatively, silanized glass wool may be used as a spacer
            at the trap inlet.

     6.2.4  The desorber (Figure 2) must be capable of rapidly heating
            the trap to « 180°C.   The polymer section of the trap should
            not be heated higher than 200°C or the life  expectancy of the
            trap will decrease.  Trap failure is characterized by a
            pressure drop in excess of 3 pounds per square inch across
            the trap during purging or by poor bromoform sensitivities.
            The desorber design illustrated in Figure 2  meets these
            criteria.

6.3  GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY/MASS SPECTROMETER/DATA SYSTEM (GC/MS/DS)

     6.3.1  The GC must be capable of temperature programming and should
            be equipped with variable-constant differential flow
            controllers so that the column flow rate will remain constant
            throughout desorption and temperature program operation.  The
            column oven may require cooling to <30 C; therefore, a
            subambient oven controller may be required.   The GC usually
            is interfaced to the MS with an all-glass enrichment device
            and an all-glass transfer line, but any enrichment device or
            transfer line can be used if the performance specifications
            described in this method can be achieved.

     6.3.2  Gas Chromatography Column — 1.5 to 2.5 m x 2 mm ID stainless
            steel or glass, packed with 1% SP-1000 on Carbopack-B (60/80
            mesh) or the equivalent.

     6.3.3  The mass spectrometer must be capable of electron ionization
            at a nominal electron energy of 70 eV.  The  spectrometer must
            be capable of scanning from 35 to 260 amu with a complete
            scan cycle time (including scan overhead) of 7 seconds or
            less.  (Scan cycle time = Total MS data acquisition time in
            seconds divided by number of scans in the chromatogram).  The
            spectrometer must produce a mass spectrum that meets all
            criteria in Table 2 when 50 ng or less of 4-bromof1uoro-
            benzene (BFB) is introduced into the GC.  An average spectrum
            across the BFB GC peak may be used to test instrument
            performance.

     6.3.4  An interfaced data system is required to acquire, store,
            reduce, and output mass spectral data.  The computer software
            should have the capability of processing stored GC/MS data by

                                 260

-------
                 recognizing  a  GC  peak within  any given retention  time window,
                 comparing  the  mass  spectra  from the GC peak with  spectral
                 data  in  a  user-created data base,  and generating  a  list of
                 tentatively  identified compounds with their retention times
                 and scan numbers.   The software must allow integration of the
                 ion abundance  of  any specific  ion  between specified time or
                 scan  number  limits.  The software  should also allow calcu-
                 lation of  response  factors  as  defined in Sect. 9.2.6 (or
                 construction of a second or third  order regression
                 calibration  curve), calculation of response factor  statistics
                 (mean and  standard  deviation), and calculation of concentra-
                 tions of analytes using either the calibration curve or the
                 equation in  Sect. 12.

     6.4  SYRINGE AND  SYRINGE VALVES

          6.4.1  Two 5-mL or  25-mL glass hypodermic syringes with  Luer-Lok tip
                 (depending on  sample volume used).

          6.4.2  Three 2-way  syringe valves with Luer ends.

          6.4.3  One 25-/iL micro syringe with a 2 in x 0.006 in ID,  22° bevel
                 needle (Hamilton #702N or equivalent).

          6.4.4  Micro syringes - 10, 100 /z.L.

          6.4.5  Syringes - 0.5, 1.0, and 5-mL, gas tight with shut-off valve.

     6,5  MISCELLANEOUS

          6.5.1  Standard solution storage containers - 15-mL bottles with
                 PTFE-lined screw caps.

7.  REAGENTS AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

     7.1  TRAP PACKING MATERIALS

          7.1.1  2,6-Diphenylene oxide polymer, 60/80 mesh,  chromatographic
                 grade (Tenax GC or equivalent).

          7.1.2  Methyl silicone packing (optional)  - OV-1  (3%)  on Chromosorb
                 W,  60/80 mesh,  or equivalent.

          7.1.3  Silica gel  — 35/60  mesh,  Davison,  grade  15  or  equivalent.

          7,1.4  Coconut charcoal  ~  Prepare  from Barnebey  Cheney,  CA-580-26
                 lot #M-2649 by crushing through 26  mesh  screen.

     7.2  COLUMN PACKING MATERIALS

          7.2.1  1%  SP-1000  on 60/80  mesh  Carbopack-B or equivalent.


                                     261

-------
7.3  REAGENTS

     7.3.1  Methanol — Demonstrated to be free of analytes.

     7.3.2  Reagent water -- Prepare reagent water by passing tap water
            through a filter bed contai-ning about 0.5 kg of activated
            carbon, by using a water purification system, or by boiling
            distilled water for 15 min followed by a 1-h purge with inert
            gas while the water temperature is held at 90 C.   Store in
            clean, narrow-mouth bottles with PTFE-lined septa and screw
            caps.

     7.3.3  Hydrochloric acid (1+1) — Carefully add measured volume of
            cone. HC1 to equal volume of reagent water.

     7.3.4  Vinyl chloride — Certified mixtures of vinyl chloride in
            nitrogen and 99.9% pure vinyl chloride are available from
            several sources (for example, Matheson, Ideal Gas Products,
            and Scott Gases).

     7.3.5  Ascorbic Acid — ACS reagent grade, granular.

7.4  STOCK STANDARD SOLUTIONS — These solutions may be purchased as
     certified solutions or prepared from pure standard materials using
     the following procedures.  One of these solutions is required for
     every analyte of concern, every surrogate, and the internal
     standard.  A useful working concentration is about 1-5 mg/mL.

     7.4.1  Place about 9.8 ml of methanol into a 10-mL ground-glass
            stoppered volumetric flask.  Allow the flask to stand,
            unstoppered, for about 10 min or until all alcohol-wetted
            surfaces have dried and weigh to the nearest 0.1 mg.

     7.4.2  If the analyte is a liquid at room temperature, use a 100-0L
            syringe and immediately add two or more drops of reference
            standard to the flask.  Be sure that the reference standard
            falls directly into the alcohol without contacting the neck
            of the flask.  If the analyte is a gas at room temperature,
            fill a 5-mL valved gas-tight syringe with the standard to the
            5.0-mL mark, lower the needle to 5 mm above the methanol
            meniscus, and slowly inject the standard into the neck area
            of the flask.  The gas will rapidly dissolve in the methanol.

     7.4.3  Reweigh, dilute to volume, stopper, then mix by inverting the
            flask several times.  Calculate the concentration in ng/n\-
            from the net gain in weight.  When compound purity is
            certified at 96% or greater, the weight can be used without
            correction to calculate the concentration of the stock
            standard.

     7.4.4  Store stock standard solutions in 15-mL bottles equipped
            with PTFE-lined screw caps.  Methanol solutions prepared from

                                 262

-------
            liquid analytes are stable for at least four weeks when
            stored at 4 C.  Methanol solutions prepared from gaseous
        ,    analytes are  not stable for more than one week when  stored at
            <0°C; at room temperature, they must be discarded after one
            day.

7.5  PRIMARY DILUTION STANDARDS — Use stock standard solutions  to
     prepare primary dilution standard solutions that contain all the
     analytes of concern  and the surrogates (but not the internal
     standard!) in methanol.  The primary dilution standards should be
     prepared at concentrations that can be easily diluted to prepare
     aqueous calibration  solutions that will bracket the working
     .concentration range.  Store the primary dilution standard solutions
     with minimal headspace and check frequently for signs of
     deterioration or evaporation, especially just before preparing
     calibration solutions.  Storage times described for stock standard
     solutions in Sect. 7.4.4 also apply to primary dilution standard
     solutions.

7.6  FORTIFICATION SOLUTIONS FOR INTERNAL STANDARD AND SURROGATES

     7.6.1  A solution containing the internal standard and surrogates is
            required to prepare laboratory reagent blanks (also used as a
            laboratory performance check solution), and to fortify each
            sample.  Prepare a fortification solution containing fluoro-
            benzene (internal standard), l,2-dichlorobenzene-d4
            (surrogate),  and BFB (surrogate) in methanol at concen-
            trations of 5 fig/ml of each.  A 10-0L aliquot of this
.  ,          solution added to a 25-mL water sample volume gives
            concentrations of 2 /zg/L of each.   A 10-juL aliquot of this
            solution added to a 5-mL water sample volume gives a
            concentration of 10 /jg/L of each.   Additional internal
            standards and surrogate analytes are optional.

     7.6.2 ,A solution of the internal standard alone is required to
            prepare calibration standards,  laboratory fortified blanks,
            etc. The internal standard should be in methanol  at a concen-
            tration of 5 /ig/mL.

7.7  PREPARATION OF LABORATORY REAGENT BLANK — Fill  a 25-mL (or 5-mL)
     syringe with reagent water and adjust to the mark (no air bubbles).
     Inject 10 pi of the fortification solution containing the internal
     standard and surrogates through the Luer Lok valve into the reagent
     water.  Transfer the LRB to the purging device.   See Sect.  11.1.2.

7:'8  PREPARATION OF LABORATORY FORTIFIED BLANK — Prepare this exactly
     like  a calibration standard.   See Sect.  7.9.

7.9  PREPARATION OF CALIBRATION STANDARDS

     7.9.1  The number of calibration  solutions (CALs)  needed depends on
            the calibration range  desired.   A minimum of three CAL

                                263

-------
                 solutions is required to calibrate a range of a factor of 20
                 in concentration.  For a factor of 50 use at least four
                 standards, and for a factor of 100 at least five standards.
                 One calibration standard should contain each analyte of
                 concern and each surrogate at .a concentration of 2-10 times
                 the method detection limit (Table 3) for that compound.  The
                 other CAL standards should contain each analyte of concern
                 and each surrogate at concentrations that define the range of
                 the method.  Every CAL solution contains the internal
                 standard at the same concentration (10 /zg/L suggested).

          7.9.2  To prepare a calibration standard, add an appropriate volume
                 of a primary dilution standard (containing analytes and
                 surrogates) to an aliquot of reagent water in a volumetric
                 flask.  Use a microsyringe and rapidly inject the methanol
                 solutions into the expanded area of the filled volumetric
                 flask.  Remove the needle as quickly as possible after
                 injection.  Mix by inverting the flask three times only.
                 Discard the contents contained in the neck of the flask.
                 Aqueous standards are not stable in a volumetric flask and
                 should be discarded after 1 hr. unless transferred to a
                 sample bottle and sealed immediately.

8.   SAMPLE COLLECTION. PRESERVATION. AND STORAGE

     8.1  SAMPLE COLLECTION, DECHLORINATION, AND PRESERVATION
          8.1.1
          8.1.2
          8.1.3
          8.1.4
Collect all samples in duplicate.  If samples contain
residual chlorine, and measurements of the concentrations of
disinfection by-products (trihalomethanes, etc.) at the time
of sample collection are desired, add about 25 mg of ascorbic
acid to the sample bottle before filling.  Fill sample
bottles to overflowing, but take care not to flush out the
rapidly dissolving ascorbic acid.  No air bubbles should pass
through the sample as the bottle is filled, or be trapped in
the sample when the bottle is sealed.  Adjust the pH of the
duplicate samples to <2 by carefully adding one drop of 1:1
HC1 for each 20 mL of sample volume.  Seal the sample
bottles, PFTE-face down, and shake vigorously for 1 min.

When sampling from a water tap, open the tap and allow the
system to flush until the water temperature has stabilized
(usually about 10 min).  Adjust the flow to about 500 mL/min
and collect duplicate samples from the flowing stream.

When sampling from an open body of water, fill a 1-quart
wide-mouth bottle or 1-liter beaker with sample from a
representative area, and carefully fill duplicate sample
bottles from the 1-quart container.

The samples must be chilled to 4°C on the day of collection
and maintained at that temperature until analysis.  Field

                     264

-------
                 samples that will  not be received at the laboratory on the
                 day of collection  must be packaged for shipment with
                 sufficient ice to  ensure that they will  be at 4°C on arrival
                 at the.laboratory.

     8.2  SAMPLE STORAGE

          8.2.1  Store samples at 4°C until  analysis.   The sample storage  area
                 must be free of organic solvent vapors.

          8.2.2  Analyze all samples within 14 days of collection.  Samples
                 not analyzed within this period must be discarded and
                 replaced.

     8.3  FIELD REAGENT BLANKS

          8.3.1  Duplicate field reagent blanks must be handled along with
                 each sample set, which is composed of the samples collected
                 from the same general sample site at approximately the same
                 time.  At the laboratory, fill field blank sample bottles
                 with reagent water, seal, and ship to the sampling site along
                 with empty sample  bottles and back to the laboratory with
                 filled sample bottles.  Wherever a set of samples is shipped
                 and stored, it is  accompanied by appropriate blanks.

          8.3.2  Use the same procedures used for samples to add ascorbic acid
                 and HC1 to blanks  (Sect. 8.1.1).

9.  CALIBRATION

     9.1  Demonstration and documentation of acceptable initial calibration is
          required before any samples are analyzed and is required intermit-
          tently throughout sample  analysis as dictated by results of
          continuing calibration checks.  After initial calibration is
          successful, a continuing  calibration check is required at the
          beginning of each 8 hr period during which analyses are performed.
          Additional periodic calibration checks are good laboratory practice.

     9.2  INITIAL CALIBRATION

          9.2.1  Calibrate the mass and abundance scales of the MS with
                 calibration compounds and procedures prescribed by the
                 manufacturer with  any modifications necessary to meet the
                 requirements in Sect. 9.2.2.

          9.2.2  Introduce into the GC (either by purging a laboratory reagent
                 blank or making a syringe injection) 50 ng of BFB and acquire
                 mass spectra for m/z 35-260 at 70 eV (nominal).  Use the
                 purging procedure  and/or GC conditions given in Sect. 11.  If
                 the spectrum does  not meet all criteria in Table 2, the MS
                 must be retuned and adjusted to meet all criteria before
                 proceeding with calibration.  An average spectrum across the

                                      265

-------
9.2.3
9.2.4
9.2.5
9.2.6
GC peak may be used to evaluate the performance of the
system.

Purge a medium CAL solution, for example 10-20 M9/L, using
the procedure given in Sect. 11.
Performance criteria for the medium calibration.
stored GC/MS data with the data system software.
shows an acceptable total ion chromatogram.
Examine the
Figure 3
9.2.4.1 GC performance. Good column performance will produce
        symmetrical peaks with minimum tailing for most
        compounds.  If peaks are broad, or sensitivity poor,
        replace or repack the column.  During handling,
        packing, and programming, active sites can be exposed
        on the Carbopack-B packing which can result in
        tailing peak geometry and poor resolution of many
        constituents.  Pneumatic shocks and rough treatment
        of packed columns will cause excessive fracturing of
        the packing.  If pressure in excess of 60 psi is
        required to obtain 40 mL/min carrier flow, the column
        should be repacked.  With the column connected to the
        MS interface, a pressure below about 10"5  mm of Hg
        indicates the jet separator is clogged.

9.2.4.2 MS sensitivity. The GC/MS peak identification
        software should be able to recognize a GC peak in the
        appropriate retention time window for each of the
        compounds in calibration solution, and make correct
        tentative identifications.  If fewer than 99% of the
        compounds are recognized, system maintenance is
        required.  See Sect. 9.3.6.

If all performance criteria are met, purge an aliquot of each
of the other CAL solutions using the same GC/MS conditions.

Calculate a response factor (RF) for each analyte, surrogate,
and isomer pair, for each CAL solution using the internal
standard fluorobenzene.  Table 1 contains suggested quantita-
tion ions for all compounds.  This calculation is supported
in acceptable GC/MS data system software (Sect. 6.3.4), and
many other software programs.  RF is a unit!ess number, but
units used to express quantities of analyte and internal
standard must be equivalent.
               RF
                     (Ais)(Qx)
       where:  Ax  = integrated abundance  of the quantitation  ion
                     of the analyte.

                           266

-------
                    Ais = Integrated abundance of the quantitation  ion
                          of the internal  standard.
                    Qx = quantity  of  analyte  purged  in  ng  or
                          concentration units.
                    Qis = quantity  of  internal standard  purged  in ng
                          or concentration units.

            9.2.6.1 For each analyte and surrogate, calculate the mean RF
                    from the analyses  of the CAL solutions.  Calculate
                    the standard deviation (SD)  and the relative standard
                    deviation (RSD) from each mean: ,RSD = 100 (SD/M).
                    If the RSD of any  analyte or surrogate mean RF
                    exceeds  20%, either analyze additional aliquots of
                    appro-priate CAL solutions to obtain an acceptable
                    RSD of RFs over the entire concentration range, or
                    take action to improve GC/MS performance.  See Sect.
                    9.2.7.

     9,2.7  As an alternative to calculating mean response factors and
            applying the RSD test,  use the GC/MS data system software or
            other available software to generate a second or third order
            regression calibration curve.

9.3  Continuing calibration check.   Verify the MS tune and initial
     calibration at the beginning of each 8 hr work shift during which
     analyses are performed using the  following procedure.

     9.3.1  Introduce into the GC  (either by purging a laboratory reagent
            blank or making a syringe  injection) 50 ng of BFB and acquire
            a mass spectrum that includes data for m/z 35-260.  If the
            spectrum does not meet all criteria (Table 2),  the MS must be
            retuned and adjusted to meet all criteria before proceeding
            with the continuing calibration check.

     9.3.2  Purge a medium concentration CAL solution and analyze with
            the same conditions used during the initial  calibration.

     9.3.3  Demonstrate acceptable performance for the criteria shown in
            Sect. 9.2.4.

     9.3.4  Determine that the absolute areas of the quantitation ions of
            the internal  standard and  surrogates have not decreased by
            more than 30% from the areas measured in the most recent
            continuing calibration check,  or by more than 50% from the
            areas measured during  initial  calibration.  If these areas
            have decreased by more than these amounts, adjustments must
            be made to restore system sensitivity.  These adjustments may
            require cleaning of the MS ion source, or other maintenance
            as indicated in Sect. 9.3.6, and recalioration.  Control
            charts are useful aids in  documenting system sensitivity
            changes.


                                 267

-------
     9.3.5  Calculate the RF for each analyte and surrogate from the data
            measured in the continuing calibration check.  The RF for
            each analyte and surrogate must be within 30% of the mean
            value measured in the initial calibration.  Alternatively, if
            a second or third order regression is used, the point from
            the continuing calibration check for each analyte and
            surrogate must fall, within the analyst's judgment, on the
            curve from the initial calibration.  If these conditions do
            not exist, remedial action must be taken which may require
            reinitial calibration.

     9.3.6  Some possible remedial actions.  Major maintenance such as
            cleaning an ion source, cleaning quadrupole rods, etc.
            require returning to the initial calibration step.

            9.3.6.1 Check and adjust GC and/or MS operating conditions;
                    check the MS resolution, and calibrate the mass
                    scale.

            9.3.6.2 Prepare fresh CAL solutions, and repeat the initial
                    calibration step.

            9.3.6.3 Clean the MS ion source and rods (if a quadrupole).

            9.3.6.4 Replace the MS electron multiplier, or any other
                    faulty components.

9.4  Optional  calibration for vinyl chloride using a certified gaseous
     mixture of vinyl chloride in nitrogen can be accomplished by the
     following steps.

     9.4.1  Fill the purging device with 25.0 ml of reagent water or
            aqueous calibration standard.

     9.4.2  Start to purge the aqueous mixture.  Inject a known volume
            (between 100 and 2000 ill) of the calibration gas (at room
            temperature) directly into the purging device with a gas
            tight syringe.  Slowly inject the gaseous sample through a
            septum seal  at the top of the purging device at 2000 #L/min.
            If the injection of the standard is-made through the aqueous
            sample inlet part, flush the head volume with several  mL of
            room air or carrier gas.  Inject the gaseous standard before
            5  min of the 11-min purge time have elapsed.

     9.4.3  Determine the aqueous equivalent concentration of  vinyl
            chloride standard, in /jg/L,  injected with the equation:

                   S = 0.102 (C)(V)

            where  S = Aqueous equivalent concentration
                        of vinyl  chloride standard in /jg/L;
                   C - Concentration of gaseous standard in ppm (v/v);

                                268

-------
                        V = Volume of standard injected in milliliters.

10.   QUALITY CONTROL

     10.1 Quality control (QC) requirements are the initial demonstration of
          laboratory capability followed by regular analyses of laboratory
          reagent blanks, field reagent blanks, and laboratory fortified
          blanks.  The laboratory must maintain records to document the
          quality of the data generated. Additional quality control practices
          are recommended.

     10.2 Initial demonstration of low system background.   Before any samples
          are analyzed,  it  must be demonstrated that a laboratory reagent
          blank (LRB) is reasonably free of contamination  that would prevent
          the determination of any analyte of concern.  Sources  of background
          contamination  are glassware, purge gas,  sorbants, and  equipment.
          Background contamination must be reduced to an acceptable level
          before proceeding with the next section.  In general  background from
          method analytes should be below the method detection limit.

     10.3 Initial demonstration of laboratory accuracy and precision.  Analyze
          four to seven  replicates of a laboratory fortified blank containing
          each analyte of concern at a concentration in the range of
          0.2-5 jtig/L (see regulations and maximum  contaminant levels for
          guidance on appropriate concentrations).
       t
          10.3.1 Prepare each replicate by adding  an appropriate  aliquot of a
                 quality control  sample to reagent water.   If a  quality
                 control  sample containing the method analytes is not
                 available,  a primary dilution standard made from a source  of
                 reagents different than those used to prepare the calibration
                 standards  may be used.   Also add  the appropriate amounts  of
                 internal  standard and surrogates  if they  are being used.
                 Analyze each replicate according  to the procedures described
                 in Section 11,  and on a schedule  that results  in the  analyses
                 of all  replicates over a period of several  days.

          10.3.2 Calculate  the measured concentration of each analyte  in each
                 replicate,  the mean concentration of each analyte in  all
                 replicates,  and  mean accuracy (as mean percentage of  true
                 value)  for each  analyte,  and the  precision (as relative
                 standard deviation,  RSD)  of the measurements for each
                 analyte.   Calculate the MDL of each analyte using the
                 procedures described in Sect.  13.2 (2).

          10;3.3 For each analyte and surrogate, the mean  accuracy,  expressed
                 as a percentage  of the true value,  should be 80-120%  and the
                 RSD should be <20%.  Some analytes,  particularly  the early
                 eluting  gases and late eluting higher molecular  weight
                 compounds,  are measured with less accuracy and precision than
                 other analytes.   The method detection limits must be  suffici-
                 ent to  detect analytes  at  the  required levels.   If these

                                     269

-------
            ent to detect analytes at the required levels.  If these
            criteria are not met for an analyte,  take remedial action and
            repeat the measurements for that analyte to demonstrate
            acceptable performance before samples are analyzed.

     10.3.4 Develop and maintain a system of control charts to plot the
            precision and accuracy of analyte and surrogate measurements
            as a function of time.  Charting of surrogate recoveries is
            an especially valuable activity since these are present in
           .every sample and the analytical results will  form a signi-
            ficant record of data quality.

10.4 Monitor the integrated areas of the quantitation ions of the
     internal standards and surrogates in continuing calibration checks.
     These should remain reasonably constant over time.  A drift of more
     than 50% in any area is indicative of a loss in sensitivity, and the
     problem must be found and corrected.  These integrated areas should
     also be reasonably constant in laboratory fortified blanks and
     samples.

10.5 LABORATORY REAGENT BLANKS.  With each batch of samples processed as
     a group within a work shift, analyze a laboratory reagent blank to
     determine the background system contamination.  A FRB (Sect. 10.7)
     may be used in place of an LRB.

10.6 With each batch of samples processed as a group within a work shift,
     analyze a single laboratory fortified blank (LFB) containing each
     analyte of concern at a concentration as determined in 10.3.  If
     more than 20 samples are included in a batch, analyze one LFB for
     every 20 samples.  Use the procedures described in 10.3.3 to
     evaluate the accuracy of the measurements, and to estimate whether
     the method detection limits can be obtained.  If acceptable accuracy
     and method detection limits cannot be achieved, the problem must be
     located and corrected before further samples are analyzed.   Add
     these results to the on-going control charts to document data
     quality.

10.7 With each set of field samples a field reagent blank (FRB)  should be
     analyzed.  The results of these analyses will help define contamina-
     tion resulting from field sampling and transportation activities.
     If the FRB shows unacceptable contamination, a LRB must be measured
     to define the source of the impurities.

10.8 At least quarterly, replicates of laboratory fortified blanks should
     be analyzed to determine the precision of the laboratory measure-
     ments.  Add these results to the on-going control charts to document
     data quality.

10.9 At least quarterly, analyze a quality control sample (QCS)  from an
     external source.  If measured analyte concentrations are not of
     acceptable accuracy, check the entire analytical procedure to locate
     and correct the problem source.

                                 270

-------
    10.10 Sample matrix effects have not been observed when this method is
          used  with distilled water, reagent water,  drinking water,  and
          ground  water.  Therefore, analysis of a laboratory fortified sample
          matrix  (LFM) is not required.  It is recommended that sample matrix
          effects  be evaluated at least quarterly using the QCS described in
          10.9.

    10.11 Numerous other quality control measures are incorporated into other
          parts  of this procedure, and serve to alert the analyst to  potential
          problems.

11.  PROCEDURE

    11.1  SAMPLE INTRODUCTION AND PURGING — This method is designed  for a
          25-mL  sample volume, but a smaller (5 mL) sample volume is
          recommended if the GC/MS system has adequate sensitivity to achieve
          the required method detection limits.  Adjust the purge gas
          (nitrogen or helium) flow rate to 40 mL/min.  Attach the trap inlet
          to the purging device and open the syringe  valve on the purging
          device.

    11.2  Remove the plungers from two 25-mL (or 5-mL depending on sample
          size)  syringes and attach a closed syringe  valve to each.   Warm the
          sample to room temperature, open the sample bottle, and carefully
          pour the sample into one of the syringe barrels to just short of
          overflowing.  Replace the syringe plunger,  invert the syringe, and
          compress the sample.  Open the syringe valve and vent any residual
          air while adjusting the sample volume to 25.0 mL (or 5-mL).  For
          samples and blanks, add 10 #L of the fortification solution
          containing the internal standard and the surrogates to the  sample
          through the syringe valve.  For calibration standards and laboratory
          fortified blanks, add 10 #L of the fortification solution containing
          the internal standard only.  Close the valve.  Fill the second
          syringe in an identical manner from the same sample bottle.  Reserve
          this second syringe for a reanalysis if necessary.

    11.3  Attach the sample syringe valve to the syringe valve on the purging
          device.  Be sure that the trap is cooler than 25°C,  then open the
          sample syringe valve and inject the sample  into the purging chamber.
          Close  both valves and initiate purging.  Purge the sample for 11.0
          min at ambient temperature.

    11.4  SAMPLE DESORPTION — After the 11-min purge, place the purge and
          trap system in the desorb mode.  Introduce  the trapped materials to
          the GC column by rapidly heating the trap to 180°C while
          backflushing the trap with an inert gas at  15 mL/min for about 4.
          min.  Simultaneously with the start of desorption, begin the
          temperature program of the gas chromatograph, and start data
          acquisition.  While the extracted sample is being introduced into
          the gas chromatograph, empty the purging device using the sample
          syringe and wash the chamber with two 25-mL flushes of reagent
          water.  After the purging device has been emptied, leave syringe

                                      271

-------
      valve open to allow the purge gas to vent through the sample
      Introduction needle.

11.5  GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY/MASS SPECTROMETRY — Acquire and store data from
      m/z 35-260 with a total cycle time (including scan overhead time) of
      7 sec or less.  Cycle time should be adjusted to measure at least
      five or more spectra during the elution of each GC peak.  Adjust the
      helium carrier gas flow rate to about 40 mL/min.  The column
      temperature is programmed to hold at 45°C for three min,  increase to
      2206C at 8°C/min,  and  hold  at 220°C for 15 min or until all expected
      compounds have eluted.

11.6  TRAP RECONDITIONING — After desorbing the sample for 4 min,
      recondition the trap by returning the purge and trap system to the
      purge mode.  Wait 15 sec, then close the syringe valve on the
      purging device to begin gas flow through the trap.  Maintain the
      trap temperature at 180°C.   After approximately 7 min,  turn off the
      trap heater and open the syringe valve to stop the gas flow through
      the trap.  When the trap is cool, the next sample can be analyzed.

11.7  TERMINATION OF DATA ACQUISITION — When all the sample components
      have eluted from the GC, terminate MS data acquisition.  Use
      appropriate data output software to display full range mass spectra
      and appropriate plots of ion abundance'as a function of time.  If
      any ion abundance exceeds the system working range, dilute the
      sample aliquot in the second syringe with reagent water and analyze
      the diluted aliquot.

11.8  IDENTIFICATION OF ANALYTES — Identify a sample component by compar-
      ison of its mass spectrum (after background subtraction)  to a
      reference spectrum in the user-created data base.  The GC retention
      time of the sample component should be within three standard
      deviations of the mean retention time of the compound in the
      calibration mixture.

      11.8.1 In general, all ions that are present above 10% relative
             abundance in the mass spectrum of the standard should be
             present in the mass spectrum of the sample component and
             should agree within absolute 20%.   For example,  if an ion has
             a relative abundance of 30% in the standard spectrum, its
             abundance in the sample  spectrum should be in the range of 10
             to 50%.  Some ions,  particularly the molecular ion,  are of
             special importance,  and  should be  evaluated even if they are
             below 10% relative abundance.

      11.8.2 Identification requires  expert judgement when sample
             components are not resolved chromatographically and produce
             mass spectra containing  ions contributed by more than one
             analyte.   When GC peaks  obviously  represent more than,one
             sample component (i.e.,  broadened  peak with shoulder(s) or
             valley between two or more maxima),  appropriate analyte
             spectra and background spectra can be selected by examining

                                 272

-------
                 plots  of characteristic  ions  for  tentatively  identified
                 components.   When  analytes  coelute  (i.e.,  only  one  GC  peak is
                 apparent),  the  identification criteria  can be met but  each
                 analyte spectrum will  contain extraneous  ions contributed  by
                 the  coeluting compound.   Because  purgeable organic  compounds
                 are  relatively  small molecules and  produce comparatively
                 simple mass  spectra, this is  not  a  significant  problem for
                 most method  analytes.

          11.8.3 Structural  isomers that  produce very similar  mass spectra  can
                 be explicitly identified only if  they have sufficiently
                 different GC retention times.  Acceptable resolution  is
                 achieved if the height of the valley between  two peaks is
                 less than 25% of the average  height of  the two  peaks.
                 Otherwise,  structural  isomers are identified  as isomeric
                 pairs. Cis-  and trans-l,2-dichloroethene,  two of the  three
                 isomeric xylenes,  and  two of  the  three  dichlorobenzenes are
                 three  examples  of  structural  isomers that cannot be explicit-
                 ly identified if both  members of  the isomeric pair  are
                 present.  These groups of isomers must  be reported  as
                 isomeric pairs  (see Method 524.2  for an alternative
                 approach).

          11.8.4 Methylene chloride and other  background components  appear  in
                 variable quantities in laboratory and field reagent blanks,
                 and  generally cannot be  accurately  measured.  Subtraction  of
                 the  concentration  in the blank from the concentration  in the
                 sample is not acceptable because  the concentration  of the
                 background in the  blank  is highly variable.

12.  CALCULATIONS

    12.1  Complete chromatographic  resolution  is not necessary for accurate
          and precise measurements  of analyte  concentrations if  unique ions
          with adequate intensities are available  for quantitation.  For
          example, although two  listed  analytes, carbon  tetrachloride  and
          bromodichloromethane,  were not  resolved  with the GC  conditions used,
          concentrations were calculated  by measuring the non-interfering
          quantitation  ions.

          12.1.1 Calculate analyte  and  surrogate concentrations.
                         c   .      (Ax)(Qis) 1000

                                   (A,.) RF V

                 where:  Cx  =  concentration of  analyte  or  surrogate  in
                                    in the water sample.
                         Ax  =  integrated  abundance  of  the  quantitation  ion
                               of the analyte in the sample.
                         Ais  =  integrated  abundance of the quantitation  ion
                               of the internal  standard in  the sample.
                         Qis  =  total quantity (in micrograms) of internal

                                      273

-------
                                standard  added to  the water  sample.
                          V    =  original  water sample volume  in ml.
                          RF   =  mean  response factor of analyte from the
                                initial calibration.

          12.1.2 Alternatively, use  the  GC/MS system software or other
                 available proven software to compute the concentrations  of
                 the analytes and surrogates from the second or third order
                 regression curves.

          12.1.3 Calculations should utilize all  available digits of
                 precision, but final reported concentrations should be
                 rounded  to an  appropriate number of significant figures  (one
                 digit of uncertainty).   Experience indicates that three
                 significant figures may be used  for concentrations above
                 99 fig/I, two significant figures for concentrations between
                 1-99 /Kj/L, and one  significant figure for lower concentra-
                 tions.

          12.1.4 Calculate the  total trihalomethane concentration by summing
                 the four individual trihalomethane concentrations in /*g/L.

13. ACCURACY AND PRECISION

    13.1  Single laboratory accuracy and precision data were obtained for 31
          of the method analytes using laboratory fortified blanks with
          analytes at concentrations between 1 and 5 /*g/L, and these data are
          shown in Table  3.

    13.2  With these data, method detection limits were calculated using  the
          formula (2):

                MDL = S t^^

                where:   t(n_., ,  lpha = Q-99)  = Student's t value  for the 99%
                          confidence level with n-1 degrees of freedom
                        n = number of replicates
                        S = the standard deviation of the replicate analyses.

14. REFERENCES

    1.   Alford-Stevens, A.,  J.W. Eichelberger,  W.L.  Budde, "Purgeable Organic
        Compounds in Water by Gas Chromatography/ Mass Spectrometry, Method
        524."  Environmental  Monitoring and Support Laboratory,  U.S.
        Environmental  Protection Agency,  Cincinnati,  Ohio, February 1983.

    2.   Glaser,  J.A.,  D.L. Foerst, G.D.  McKee,  S.A.  Quave, and W.L. Budde,
        "Trace Analyses for Wastewaters," Environ. Sci.  Techno!.,  15,  1426,
        1981.
                                     274

-------
3.  "Carcinogens - Working with Carcinogens," Department of Health,
    Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease
    Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health,
    Publication No. 77-206, August, 1977.

4.  "OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry," (29CFR1910),
    Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206, (Revised,
    January 1976).

5.  "Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories," American Chemical Society
    Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.
                                  275

-------
               TABLE 1.  MOLECULAR WEIGHTS, RETENTION TIME DATA,
                   AND QUANTITATION IONS FOR METHOD ANALYTES
 Compound
MWa
Retention15    Primary
  Time     Quantitation
fmin:sec)       Ions
  Secondary
Quantitation
    Ions	
      Internal  standard

 Fluorobenzene                  96        16:34        96           77

      Surrogates

 4-Bromofluorobenzene          174        26:53        95           174,176
 l,2-Dichlorobenzene-d4       150       35:55       152          115,150

      Target Analvtes

 Benzene                        78        15:31        78           77
 Bromobenzene                  156        25:12       156           77,158
 Bromochloromethane            128        9:20       128           49,130
 Bromodichloromethane          162        12:24        83           85,'l27
 Bromoform                    250        17:17       173          175^252
 Bromomethane                   94                    94           96
 Carbon tetrachloride         152        12:19       117          119
 Chlorobenzene                112        22:14       112           77,114
 Chloroethane                   64                    64           66
 Chloroform                   118        9:41        83           85
 Chloromethane                  50           .         50     ,52
 2-Chlorotoluene              126                    91          126
 4-Chlorotoluene              126                    91          126
 Dibromochloromethane         206        14:53       129          127
 1,2-Dibromo-3-Chloropropane  234        23:55        75          155,157
 1,2-Dibromoethane            186        16:10       107          109,188
 Dibromomethane               172        10:38        93           95,174
 1,2-DiChlorobenzene          146       35:07       146          111,148
 1,3-DiChlorobenzene          146       35:55       146          111,148
 1,4-DiChlorobenzene          146       35:55       146          111,148
 Dichlorodifluoromethane      120        4:14        85           87
 1,1-DiChloroethane             98        9:02        63           65,83
 1,2-Dichloroethane             98        10:43        62           98
 1,1-Dichloroethene             96        7:50        96           61,63
cis-l,2-Dichloroethene         96                    96           61,98
trans-l,2-Dichloroethene       96        9:55        96           61,98
1,2-Dichloropropane          112       13:55        63          112*
1,3-Dichloropropane          112       16:28        76           78
2,2-Dichloropropane          112                    77           97
1,1-Dichloropropene          110                    75          110,77
cis-l,3-dichloropropene      110                    75
trans-l,3-dichloropropene    110                    75
Ethyl benzene                 106                    91          106
p-Isopropyltoluene           134                   119          134,91
                                     276

-------
Compound
                            TABLE 1.   (Continued)
MWa
Retention13    Primary
  Time     Quantitation
fmin:sec)       Ions
  Secondary
Quantitation
    Ions
Methyl ene chloride
Styrene
1,1,1, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
1,1,2, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
Tetrachloroethene
Toluene
1,1, 1-Tri chl oroethane
1,1, 2-Tri chl oroethane
Trichloroethene
Tr i chl orof 1 uoromethane
1,2, 3-Tr i chl oropropane
Vinyl Chloride
o-Xyl ene
m-Xylene
p-Xylene
84
104
166
166
164
92
132
132
130
136
146
62
106
106
106
5:21
29:02

19:31
20:00
21:22
11:41

14:43
7:22

4:00
30:34
30:48
30:48
84
104
131
83
166
92
97
83
95
101
75
62
106
106
106
86,49
78
133,119
131,85
168,129
91
99,61
97,85
130,132
103
77
64
91
91
91
   Monoisotopic  molecular  weight  calculated  from the  atomic  masses  of the
   isotopes  with the  smallest  masses.
   Retention time measured from the  beginning  of the  thermal  desorption  step.
   Compounds with no  retention data  are  known  to be amenable to  purge and trap
   extraction (see Method  524.2),  and  chromatography  on  the  packed  gas
   chromatography column used  in  this  method,  but no  retention time data is
   available for this method.
                                   277

-------
TABLE 2. ION ABUNDANCE CRITERIA FOR 4-BROMOFLUOROBENZENE (BFB)
 Mass
 (M/z)
Relative Abundance Criteria
  50
  75
  95
  96
 173
 174
 175
 176
 177
15 to 40% of mass 95
30 to 80% of mass 95
Base Peak, 100% Relative Abundance
5 to 9% of mass 95
< 2% of mass 174
> 50% of mass 95
5 to 9% of mass 174
> 95% but < 101% of mass 174
5 to 9% of mass 176
                             278

-------
 TABLE 3.   ACCURACY AND PRECISION DATA FROM SEVEN TO NINE DETERMINATIONS
                 OF THE METHOD ANALYTES IN REAGENT WATER3
True
Cone.
Compound (uq/L)
Benzene
Bromobenzene
Bromodi chl oromethane
Bromoform
Carbon tetrachloride
Chlorobenzene
Chloroform
Di bromochl oromethane
1 , 2-Di bromo-3-chl oropropane
1,2-Dibromoethane
Dibromomethane
1, 2-Di chlorobenzene
1 , 4-Di chl orobenzene
Di chl orodi f 1 uoromethane
1,1-Dichloroethane
1,2-Dichloroethane
1, 1-Dichloroethene
trans-1 , 2-Di chl oroethene
1 , 2-Di chl oropropane
1 , 3-Di chl oropropane
Methyl ene chloride
Styrene
1,1,2, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
Tetrachl oroethene
Toluene
1,1, 1-Tri chl oroethane
Tri chl oroethene
Tri chl orof 1 uoromethane
Vinyl chloride
o-Xylene
p-Xylene
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
3.5
1.0
1.0
5.0
5.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Mean Rel . Mean Method
Observed Std. Std. Accuracy Dect.
Cone. Dev. Dev. (% of True Limit
(UQ/L} (ua/L) (%) Value} (ua/l)
0.97
0.92
1.0
2.4
0.88
1.02
1.03
0.92
3.5
0.93
0.94
5.0
5.6
0.96
1.05
0.97
1.09
0.98
1.01
1.00
0.99
1.2
1.11
0.93
1.05
1.05
0.90
1.09
0.98
1.02
1.11
0.036
0.042
0.17
0.23
0.098
0.047
0.086
0.14
0.63
Q.13
0.11
0.35
0.73
0.11
0.060
0.077
0.066
0.066
0.060
0.033
0.45
0.072
0.14
0.10
0.043
0.093
0.12
0.072
0.11
0.068
0.047
3.7
4.6
17.
9.6
11.
4.6
8.3
15.
18.
14.
12.
7.0
13.
12.
5.7
7.9
6.1
6.7
5.9
3.3
46.
6.0
13.
11.
4.1
8.9
13.
6.6
11.
6.7
4.2
97
92
100
100
88
L02
103
92
100
93
94
100
112
9.6
105
97
109
98
101
100
99
120
111
93
105
105
90
109
98
102
111
0.1
0.1
0.5
0.7
0.3
0.1
0.2
0.4
2.
0.4
0.3
1.
2.
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.1
1.
0.2
0.4
0.3
0.1
0.3
0.4
0.2
0.3
0.2
0.3
Data obtained by Robert W. Slater with a 25-mL sample size and the
compounds divided into two groups to minimize coelution.
                                   279

-------
   OPTIONAL
   FOAM
   TRAP
EXIT X IN.
    0.0.

 14MU 0. D.
                   INLET K IN.
                        0.0.
0. D. EXIT
                      .SAMPLE INLET

                    -*-2-WAY SYRINGE VALVE
                    —-17CM. 20 GAUGE SYRINGE NEEDLE

                       6MM. 0. D. RUBBER SEPTUM
                               . 0. D.
                            INLET
                            K IN. 0. 0.
                    1/16 IN. O.D.
                    'STAINLESS ST
   10MM GLASS FRIT
   MEDIUM POROSITY
                                        13X MOLECULAR
                                        SIEVE PURGE
                                        GAS FILTER
                                           PURGE GAS

                                           CONTROL
              FIGURE 1.  PURGING DEVICE'
                        280

-------
     PACKING PROCEDURE
            CONSTRUCTION
    GLASS
    WOOL
ACTIVATED,,^
CHARCOAL.7-7CW
 GRADE 15
         7.7C
 SILICA GEL'




   TENAX 7.7 CM


3%OV-1    ,_„,
GLASS l"nni'°"
     !»00
     7A/FQOT
   RESISTANCE
  WIRE WRAPPED
     SOLID
(DOUBLE LAYER)
    7*./FOOTi
  RESISTANCE
 WIRE WRAPPED
       SOLID
(SINGLE LAYER)
        soH
                                       COMPRESSION
                                       FITTING NUT
                                       AND FERRULES


                                        THERMOCOUPLE/
                                        CONTROLLER
                                        SENSOR
             TRAP INLET
                                NIC
                             ERATURE
                             TROL
                            ID
                          PYROMETER
                                        TUBING 2SCM
                                        0.105 IN. I.D.
                                        0.125 IN. O.D.
                                        STAINLESS STEEL
     FIGURE 2.   TRAP PACKINGS AND CONSTRUCTION TO INCLUDE
                DESORB CAPABILITY
                       281

-------
COLUMN: 1% SP-1000 ON CARBOPACK:B
PROGRAM -45°C FOR 3 MIN, 8°C/MIN TO 220°C
DETECTOR: MASS SPECTROMETER
                        HI
                                                       I  . -  - t  .   «     I
                       10    12    U    16    18    20

                             RETENTION TIME. MIN.

                         FIGURE 3.  GAS CHROMATOGRAM
22    24    26   28
                                        282

-------
         METHOD 524.2.  MEASUREMENT OF PUR6EABLE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS  IN
        WATER BY CAPILLARY COLUMN GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY/MASS SPECTROMETRY
                                 Revision 3.0
A. Alford-Stevens, J. W. Eichelberger, W. L. Budde - Method 524, Revision 1.0
(1983)

R. W. Slater, Jr. - Method 524.2, Revision 2.0 (1986)

J. W. Eichelberger, W. L. Budde - Method 524.2, Revision 3.0 (1989)
                 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
                      OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
                     U.S.  ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
                           CINCINNATI, OHIO  45268
                                     283

-------
                                 METHOD 524.2

            MEASUREMENT OF PURGEABLE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN WATER BY
            CAPILLARY  COLUMN  GAS  CHROMATOGRAPHY/MASS SPECTROMETRY
1.  SCOPE AND APPLICATION

    1.1  This is a general purpose method for the identification and
         simultaneous measurement of purgeable volatile organic compounds in
         finished drinking water, raw source water,  or drinking water in any
         treatment stage (1-2).  The method is applicable to a wide range of
         organic compounds, including the four trihalomethane disinfection
         by-products, that have sufficiently high volatility and low water
         solubility to be efficiently removed from water samples with purge
         and trap procedures.  The following compounds can be determined by
         this method.
              Compound

              Benzene
              Bromobenzene
              Bromochloromethane
              Bromodi chloromethane
              Bromoform
              Bromomethane
              n-Butylbenzene
              sec-Butyl benzene
              tert-Butylbenzene
              Carbon tetrachloride
              Chlorobenzene
              Chloroethane
              Chloroform
              Chloromethane
              2-Chlorotoluene
              4-Chlorotoluene
              Di bromochloromethane
              1,2-Di bromo-3-chloropropane
              1,2-Dibromoethane
              Dibromomethane
              1,2-Di chlorobenzene
              1,3-Di chlorobenzene
              1,4-Di chlorobenzene
              Di chlorodi f1uoromethane
              1,1-Dichloroethane
              1,2-Dichloroethane
              1,1-Dichloroethene
              ci s-1,2-Di chloroethene
              trans-1,2-Di chloroethene
              1,2-Dichloropropane

                                      284
Chemical Abstract Service
      Registry Number

          71-43-2
         108-86-1
          74-97-5
          75-27-4
          75-25-2
          74-83-9
         104-51-8
         135-98-8
          98-06-6
          56-23-5
         108-90-7
          75-00-3
          67-66-3
          74-87-3
          95-49-8
         106-43-4
         124-48-1
          96-12-8
         106-93-4
          74-95-3
          95-50-1
         541-73-1
         106-46-7
          75-71-8
          75-34-3
         107-06-2
          75-35-4
         156-59-4
         156-60-5
          78-87-5

-------
          1,3-Dichloropropane                      142-28-9
          2,2-Dichloropropane                      590-20-7
          1,1-Dichloropropene                      563-58-6
          cis-l,3-Dichloropropene                10061-01-5
          trahs-l,3-Dichloropropene              10061-02-6
          Ethyl benzene                             100-41-4
          Hexachlorobutadiene                       87-68-3
          Isopropylbenzene                          98-82-8
          4-Isopropyltoluene                        99-87-6
          Methylene chloride                        75-09-2
          Naphthalene                               91-20-3
          n-Propylbenzene                          103-65-1
          Styrene                                  100-42-5
          1,1,1,2-Tetrachloroethane                630-20-6
          1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane                 79-34-5
          Tetrachloroethene                        127-18-4
          Toluene                                  108-88-3
          1,2,3-Trichlorobenzene                    87-61-6
          1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene                   120-82-1
          1,1,1-Trichloroethane                     71-55-6
        -  1,1,2-Trichloroethane                     79-00-5
          Trichloroethene                           79-01-6
          Trichlorofluoromethane                    75-69-4
          1,2,3-Trichloropropane                    96-18-4
          1,2,4-Trimethyl benzene                    95-63-6
          1,3,5-Trimethyl benzene                   108-67-8
          Vinyl chloride                            75-01-4
          o-Xylene                                  95-47-6
          m-Xylene                                 108-38-3
          p-Xylene                                 106-42-3

1.2  Method detection limits (MDLs) (3) are compound and instrument
     dependent and vary from approximately 0.02-0.35 jag/L.   The applicable
     concentration range of this method is primarily column dependent and
     is approximately 0.02 to 200 /fg/L for the wide-bore thick-film
     columns. Narrow-bore thin-film columns may have a capacity which
     limits the range to about 0.02 to 20 /jg/L.  Analytes that are
     inefficiently purged from water will not be detected when present at
     low concentrations, but they can be measured with acceptable accuracy
     and precision when present in sufficient amounts.

1.3  Analytes that are not separated chromatographicallys but which have
     different mass spectra and non-interfering quantitation ions, can be
     identified and measured in the same calibration mixture or water
     sample (Sect 11.6.2).  Analytes which have very similar mass spectra
     cannot be individually identified and measured in the  same
     calibration mixture or water sample unless they have different
     retention times (Sect.11.6.3). Coeluting compounds with very similar
     mass spectra, typically many structural  isomers,  must  be reported as
     an isomeric group or pair.  Two of the three isomeric  xylenes and two
     of the three dichlorobenzenes are examples of structural  isomers that


                                  285

-------
     may not be resolved on the capillary column, and if not, must be
     reported as isomeric pairs.

SUMMARY OF METHOD

2.1  Volatile organic compounds and surrogates with low water solubility
     are extracted (purged) from the sample matrix by bubbling an inert
     gas through the aqueous sample.  Purged sample components are trapped
     in a tube containing suitable sorbent materials.  When purging is
     complete, the sorbent tube is heated and backflushed with helium to
     desorb the trapped sample components into a capillary gas
     chromatography (GC) column interfaced to a mass spectrometer (MS).
     The column is temperature programmed to separate the method analytes
     which are then detected with the MS.  Compounds eluting from the GC
     column are identified by comparing their measured mass spectra and
     retention times to reference spectra and retention times in a data
     base.  Reference spectra and retention times for analytes are
     obtained by the measurement of calibration standards under the same
     conditions used for samples.  The concentration of each identified
     component is measured by relating the MS response of the quantitation
     ion produced by that compound to the MS response of the quantitation
     ion produced by a compound that is used as an internal standard.
     Surrogate analytes, whose concentrations are known in every sample,
     are measured with the same internal standard calibration procedure.

DEFINITIONS

3.1  Internal standard — A pure analyte(s) added to a solution in known
     amount(s) and used to measure the relative responses of other method
     analytes and surrogates that are components of the same solution.
     The internal standard must be an analyte that is not a sample
     component.

3.2  Surrogate analyte — A pure analyte(s), which is extremely unlikely
     to be found in any sample, and which is added to a sample aliquot in
     known amount(s) before extraction and is measured with the same
     procedures used to measure other sample components.  The purpose of a
     surrogate analyte is to monitor method performance with each sample.

3.3  Laboratory duplicates (LD1 and LD2) — Two sample aliquots taken in
     the analytical laboratory and analyzed separately with identical
     procedures.  Analyses of LD1 and LD2 give a measure of the precision
     associated with laboratory procedures, but not with sample
     collection, preservation, or storage procedures.

3.4  Field duplicates (FD1 and FD2) — Two separate samples collected at
     the same time and place under identical circumstances and treated
     exactly the same throughout field and laboratory procedures.
     Analyses of FD1 and FD2 give a measure of the precision associated
     with sample collection, preservation and storage, as well as with
     laboratory procedures.
                                  286

-------
 3.5  Laboratory reagent blank (LRB)  — An aliquot of reagent water that is
      treated exactly as a sample including exposure to all  glassware,
      equipment, solvents, reagents,  internal  standards,  and surrogates
      that are used with other samples.  The LRB is used  to  determine  if
      method analytes or other interferences are present  in  the  laboratory
      environment,  the reagents,  or the apparatus.

 3.6  Field reagent blank (FRB)  — Reagent water placed in a sample
      container in  the laboratory and treated, as a sample in all  respects,
      including exposure to sampling  site conditions,  storage, preservation
      and  all  analytical  procedures.   The purpose of the  FRB is  to
      determine if  method analytes or other interferences are present  in
      the  field environment.

 3.7  Laboratory performance  check solution (LPC)  — A solution  of  one or
      more compounds (analytes,  surrogates,  internal  standard, or other
      test compounds)  used to evaluate the performance of the instrument
      system with respect to  a defined set of  method criteria.

 3.8  Laboratory fortified blank  (LFB)  — An aliquot of reagent water to
      which known quantities  of the method analytes  are added in  the
      laboratory.   The LFB is analyzed exactly like  a  sample,  and its
      purpose  is to determine whether the methodology  is  in  control, and
      whether  the laboratory  is capable of making  accurate and precise
      measurements  at  the required method detection  limit.

 3.9  Laboratory fortified sample  matrix  (LFM) — An aliquot  of an  environ-
      mental  sample to which  known quantities  of the method  analytes are
      added in  the  laboratory.  The LFM is  analyzed  exactly  like  a  sample,
      and  its  purpose  is  to determine  whether  the sample matrix contributes
      bias  to  the analytical  results.   The  background  concentrations of  the
      analytes  in the  sample  matrix must  be determined  in a  separate
      aliquot  and the  measured values  in  the LFM corrected for background
      concentrations.

 3.10  Stock standard solution — A concentrated solution containing a
      single certified standard that  is a method analyte, or  a, concentrated
      solution  of a  single analyte prepared in the laboratory with an
      assayed reference compound.  Stock  standard solutions  are used to
      prepare primary dilution standards.

 3.11  Primary dilution standard solution — A solution of several analytes
      prepared  in the laboratory from stock standard solutions and diluted
      as needed to prepare calibration solutions and other needed analyte
      solutions.

3.12 Calibration standard (CAL)  — A solution prepared from  the  primary
     dilution standard solution and stock standard solutions and the
      internal standards and surrogate analytes.   The CAL solutions  are
     used to calibrate the instrument response with respect  to analyte
     concentra-tion.
                                 287

-------
    3.13 Quality control sample (QCS) — A sample matrix containing method
         analytes or a solution of method analytes in a water miscible solvent
         which is used to fortify reagent water or environmental  samples.   The
         QCS is obtained from a source external to the laboratory,  and is  used
         to check laboratory performance with externally prepared test
         materi als.

4.  INTERFERENCES

    4.1  During analysis, major contaminant sources are volatile materials in
         the laboratory and impurities in the inert purging gas and in the
         sorbent trap.  The use of non-polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) plastic
         tubing, non-PTFE thread sealants, or flow controllers with rubber
         components in the purging device should be avoided since such
         materials out-gas organic compounds which will be concentrated in the
         trap during the purge operation.  Analyses of laboratory reagent
         blanks provide information about the presence of contaminants.  When
         potential interfering peaks are noted in laboratory reagent blanks,
         the analyst should change the purge gas source and regenerate the
         molecular sieve purge gas filter.  Subtracting blank values from
         sample results is not permitted.

    4.2  Interfering contamination may occur when a sample containing low
         concentrations of volatile organic compounds is analyzed immediately
         after a sample containing relatively high concentrations of volatile
         organic compounds.  A preventive technique is between-sample rinsing
         of the purging apparatus and sample syringes with two portions of
         reagent water.  After analysis of a sample containing high
         concentrations of volatile organic compounds, one or more laboratory
         reagent blanks should be analyzed to check for cross contamination.

    4.3  Special precautions must be taken to determine methylene chloride.
         The analytical and sample storage area should be isolated from all
         atmospheric sources of methylene chloride, otherwise random
         background levels will result.  Since methylene chloride will
         permeate through PTFE tubing, all gas chromatography carrier gas
         lines and purge gas plumbing should be constructed of stainless steel
         or copper tubing. Laboratory worker's clothing should be cleaned
         frequently since clothing previously exposed to methylene chloride
         fumes during common liquid/liquid extraction procedures can
         contribute to sample contamination.

5.  SAFETY

    5.1  The toxicity or carcinogenicity of chemicals used in this method has
         not been precisely defined; each chemical should be treated as a
         potential health hazard, and exposure to these chemicals should be
         minimized.  Each laboratory is responsible for maintaining awareness
         of OSHA regulations regarding safe handling of chemicals used in this
         method.  Additional references to laboratory safety are available
         (4-6) for the information of the analyst.


                                      288

-------
    5.2  The following method analytes have been tentatively classified as
         known or suspected human or mammalian carcinogens:  benzene, carbon
         tetrachloride, 1,4-dichlorobenzene, 1,2-dichlorethane, hexachloro-
         butadiene,1,1,2,2-tetrachloroethane, 1,1,2-trichloroethane, chloro-
         form, l,2-dibromoethane,tetrachloroethene, trichloroethene, and vinyl
         chloride.  Pure standard materials and stock standard solutions of
         these .compounds should be handled in a hood.  A NIOSH/MESA approved
         toxic gas respirator should be worn when the analyst handles high
         concentrations of these toxic compounds.

6.  APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT

    6.1  SAMPLE CONTAINERS — 60-mL to 120-mL screw cap vials (Pierce #19832
         or equivalent) each equipped with a PTFE-faced silicone septum
         (Pierce #12718 or equivalent).  Prior to use, wash vials and septa
         with detergent and rinse with tap and distilled water.  Allow the
         vials and septa to air dry at room temperature, place in a 105°C oven
         for 1 hr, then remove and allow to cool  in an area known to be free
         of organics.

    6.2  PURGE AND TRAP SYSTEM — The purge and trap system consists of three
         separate pieces of equipment:  purging device,  trap, and desorber.
         Systems are commercially available from several sources that meet all
         of the following specifications.

         6.2.1   The all glass purging device (Figure 1) should be designed to
                 accept 25-mL samples with a water column at least 5 cm deep.
                 A smaller (5-mL) purging  device is recommended if the GC/MS
                 system has adequate sensitivity to obtain the method
                 detection limits required.  Gaseous volumes above the sample
                 must  be kept to a minimum (< 15 mL) to  eliminate dead volume
                 effects.   A glass frit should be installed at the base of the
                 sample chamber so the purge gas passes  through the water
                 column as finely divided  bubbles with a diameter of < 3 mm at
                 the origin.   Needle spargers may be used,  however,  the purge
                 gas must be introduced at a point about 5 mm from the base of
                 the water column.

         6.2.2   The trap (Figure 2)  must  be at least 25 cm long and have an
                 inside diameter of at least 0.105 in.   Starting from the
                 inlet, the trap should contain 1.0 cm of methyl  silicone
                 coated packing and the following amounts of adsorbents:   1/3
                 of 2,6-diphenylene oxide  polymer,  1/3 of silica gel,  and 1/3
                 of coconut charcoal.   If  it is not necessary to determine
                 dichlorodifluoromethane,  the charcoal can  be eliminated and
                 the polymer increased to  fill  2/3 of the trap.   Before
                 initial  use,  the trap should be  conditioned overnight at
                 180°C  by  backflushing with  an  inert gas  flow of at  least  20
                 mL/min.   Vent the  trap effluent  to the  room,  not  to the
                 analytical  column.   Prior to daily use,  the trap  should be
                 conditioned  for 10 min at 180°C with backflushing.  The trap
                 may be vented to the  analytical  column  during  daily

                                     289

-------
             conditioning; however, the column must be run through the
             temperature program prior to analysis of samples.

     6.2.3   The use of the methyl silicone coated packing is recommended,
             but not mandatory.  The packing serves a dual purpose of
             protecting the Tenax adsorbant from aerosols, and also of
             insuring that the Tenax is fully enclosed within the heated
             zone of the trap thus eliminating potential  cold spots.
             Alternatively, silanized glass wool may be used as a spacer
             at the trap inlet.

     6.2.4   The desorber (Figure 2) must be capable of rapidly heating
             the trap to 180°C either prior to or at the  beginning of the
             flow of desorption gas.  The polymer section of the trap
             should not be heated higher than 200°C or the life expectancy
             of the trap will decrease.  Trap failure is characterized by
             a pressure drop in excess of 3 pounds per square inch across
             the trap during purging or by poor bromoform sensitivities.
             The desorber design illustrated in Fig. 2 meets these
             criteria.

6.3  GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY/MASS SPECTROMETER/DATA SYSTEM (GC/MS/DS)

     6.3.1   The GC must be capable of temperature programming and should
             be equipped with variable-constant differential flow
             controllers so that the column flow rate will remain constant
             throughout desorption and temperature program operation.  The
             column oven must be cooled to 10°C; therefore,  a subambient
             oven controller is required.  If syringe injections of BFB
             will be used, a split/splitless injection port is required.

     6.3.2   Capillary Gas Chromatography Columns.  Any gas chromatography
             column that meets the performance specifications of this
             method may be used.  Separations of the calibration mixture
             must be equivalent or better than those described in this
             method.  Three useful columns have been identified.

             6.3.2.1  Column 1 — 60 m x 0.75 mm ID VOCOL (Supelco, Inc.)
                      glass wide-bore capillary with a 1.5 iim film
                      thickness.

                      Column 2 -- 30 m x 0.53 mm ID DB-624 (J&W
                      Scientific, Inc.) fused silica capillary with a 3 /zm
                      film thickness.

                      Column 3 — 30 m x 0.32 mm ID DB-5  (J&W Scientific,
                      Inc.) fused silica capillary with a 1 urn film thick-
                      ness.

     6.3.3   Interfaces between the GC and MS.  The interface used depends
             on the column selected and the gas flow rate.
                                  290

-------
        6.3.3.1  The wide-bore columns 1 and 2 have the capacity to
                 accept the standard gas flows from the trap during
                 thermal desorption, and chromatography can begin
                 with the onset of thermal desorption.  Depending on
                 the pumping capacity of the MS, an additional
                 interface between the end of the column and the MS
                 may be required.  An open split interface (7), an
                 all-glass jet separator, or a cryogenic (Sect.
                 6.3.3.2) device are acceptable interfaces.  Any
                 interface can be used if the performance
                 specifications described in this method can be
                 achieved.  The end of the transfer line after the
                 interface, or the end of the analytical column if no
                 interface is used, should be placed within a few mm
                 of the MS ion source.

        6.3.3.2  The narrow bore column 3 cannot accept the thermal
                 desorption gas flow, and a cryogenic interface is
                 required.  This interface (Tekmar Model 1000 or
                 equivalent) condenses the desorbed sample components
                 at liquid nitrogen temperature, and allows the
                 helium gas to pass through to an exit.  The
                 "condensed components are frozen in a narrow band on
                 an uncoated fused silica precolumn.  When all
                 components have been desorbed from the trap, the
                 interface is rapidly heated under a stream of
                 carrier gas to transfer the analytes to the
                 analytical column.  The end of the analytical column
                 should  be placed with a few mm of the MS ion
                 source.  A potential problem with this interface is
                 blockage of the interface by frozen water from the
                 trap.   This condition will  result in a major loss in
                 sensitivity and chromatographic resolution.

6.3.4   The mass spectrometer must be capable of electron ionization
        at a nominal electron energy of 70 eV.   The spectrometer must
        be capable of scanning from 35 to 260 amu with a complete
        scan cycle time (including scan overhead)  of 2 sec or less.
        (Scan cycle time = Total  MS data acquisition time in  seconds
        divided by number of scans in the chromatogram).  The
        spectrometer must produce a mass spectrum that meets  all
        criteria in Table 3 when 25 ng or less  of
        4-bromofluorobenzene (BFB)  is introduced into the GC.   An
        average spectrum across the BFB GC peak may be used to test
        instrument performance.

6.3.5   An interfaced data system is required to acquire,  store,
        reduce, and output mass spectral  data.   The computer  software
        should have the capability of processing stored GC/MS data by
        recognizing a GC peak within any given  retention time window,
        comparing the mass spectra from the  GC  peak with spectral
        data in a user-created data base,  and generating a  list of

                            291

-------
                 tentatively identified compounds with their retention times
                 and scan numbers.  The software must allow integration of the
                 ion abundance of any specific ion between specified time or
                 scan number limits.  The software should also allow
                 calculation of response factors as defined in Sect. 9.2.6 (or
                 construction of a second or third order regression
                 calibration curve), calculation of response factor statistics
                 (mean and standard deviation), and calculation of
                 concentrations of analytes using either the calibration curve
                 or the equation in Sect. 12.


    6.4  SYRINGE AND SYRINGE VALVES

         6.4.1   Two 5-mL or 25-mL glass hypodermic syringes with Luer-Lok tip
                 (depending on sample volume used).

         6.4.2   Three 2-way syringe valves with Luer ends.

         6.4.3   One 25-/JL micro syringe with a 2 in x 0.006 in ID, 22° bevel
                 needle (Hamilton #702N or equivalent).

         6.4.4   Micro syringes - 10, 100 #L.

         6.4.5   Syringes - 0.5, 1.0, and 5-mL, gas tight with shut-off valve.

    6.5  MISCELLANEOUS

         6.5.1   Standard solution storage containers — 15-mL bottles with
                 PTFE-lined screw caps.

7.  REAGENTS AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

    7.1  TRAP PACKING MATERIALS

         7.1.1   2,6-Diphenylene oxide polymer, 60/80 mesh, chromatographic
                 grade (Tenax GC or equivalent).

         7.1.2   Methyl silicone packing (optional) — OV-1 (3%) on Chromosorb
                 W, 60/80 mesh, or equivalent.

         7.1.3   Silica gel — 35/60 mesh, Davison, grade 15 or equivalent.

         7.1.4   Coconut charcoal — Prepare from Barnebey Cheney, CA-580-26
                 lot #M-2649 by crushing through 26 mesh screen.

    7.2  REAGENTS

         7.2.1   Methanol — Demonstrated to be free of analytes.

         7.2.2   Reagent water — Prepare reagent water by passing tap water
                 through a filter bed containing about 0.5 kg of activated

                                      292


-------
        .  ... carbon, by using a water purification system, or by boiling
             distilled water for 15 min followed by a 1-h purge with inert
             gas while the water temperature is held at 90 C.  Store in
             clean, narrow-mouth bottles with PTFE-lined septa and screw
        .     caps.

     7.2.3   Hydrochloric acid (1+1) — Carefully add measured volume of
             cone. HC1 to equal volume of reagent water.

     7.2.4   Vinyl chloride — Certified mixtures of vinyl chloride in
             nitrogen and pure vinyl chloride are available from several
             sources (for example, Matheson, Ideal Gas Products, and Scott
             Gases).

     7.2.5   Ascorbic acid — ACS reagent grade, granular.

     7.2.6   Sodium thiosulfate — ACS reagent grade, granular.

7.3  STOCK STANDARD SOLUTIONS — These solutions may be purchased as
     certified solutions or prepared from pure standard materials using
     the following procedures.  One of these solutions is required for
     every analyte of concern, every surrogate, and the internal standard.
     A useful working concentration is about 1-5 mg/mL.

     7.3.1   Place about 9.8 ml of methanol into a 10-mL ground-glass
             stoppered volumetric flask.  Allow the flask to stand,
             unstoppered, for about 10 min or until  all  alcohol-wetted
             surfaces have dried and weigh to the nearest 0.1 mg.

     7.3.2   If the analyte is a liquid,at room temperature,  use a 100-/U.
             syringe and immediately add two or more drops of reference
             standard to the flask.  Be sure that the reference standard
             falls directly into the alcohol without contacting the neck
             of the flask.  If the analyte is a gas  at room temperature,
             fill a 5-mL valved gas-tight syringe with the standard to the
             5.0-mL mark, lower the needle to 5 mm above the methanol
             meniscus,  and slowly inject the standard into the neck area
             of the flask.  The gas will rapidly dissolve in the methanol.

     7.3.3   Reweigh,  dilute to volume,  stopper,  then mix by inverting the
             flask several times.   Calculate the concentration in vg/fiL
             from the net gain in weight.   When compound purity is
             certified at 96% or greater,  the weight can be used without
             correction to calculate the concentration of the stock
             standard.

     7.3.4   Store stock standard solutions in  15-mL bottles  equipped  with
             PTFE-lined screw caps.   Methanol  solutions  prepared from
             liquid analytes are stable  for at  least 4 weeks  when stored
             at 4°C.  Methanol solutions prepared from gaseous  analytes
.             are not stable for more than  1 week when  stored  at <0°C; at
;:-.-••       room temperature,  they must be discarded  after 1  day.

                                 293

-------
7.4  PRIMARY DILUTION STANDARDS -- Use stock standard solutions to prepare
     primary dilution standard solutions that contain all the analytes of
     concern and the surrogates (but riot the internal standard!) in
     methanol.  The primary dilution standards should be prepared at
     concentrations that can be easily diluted to prepare aqueous calibra-
     tion solutions that will bracket the working concentration range.
     Store the primary dilution standard solutions with minimal headspace
     and check frequently for signs of deterioration or evaporation,
     especially just before preparing calibration solutions.  Storage
     times described for stock standard solutions in Sect. 7.4.4 also
     apply to primary dilution standard solutions.

7.5  FORTIFICATION SOLUTIONS FOR INTERNAL STANDARD AND SURROGATES

     7.5.1   A solution containing the internal standard and the
             surrogates is required to prepare laboratory reagent blanks
             (also used as a laboratory performance check solution), and
             to fortify each sample.  Prepare a fortification solution
             containing fluorobenzene (internal standard), 1,2-
             dichlorobenzene-d4 (surrogate),  and BFB (surrogate) in
             methanol at concentrations of 5 ng/ml of each (any
             appropriate concentration is acceptable).  A 5-/JL aliquot of
             this solution added to a 25-mL water sample volume gives
             concentrations of 1 #g/L of each.  A 5-juL aliquot of this
             solution added to a 5-mL water sample volume gives a
             concentration of 5 ng/L of each).  Additional internal
             standards and surrogate analytes are optional.

     7.5.2   A solution of the internal standard alone is required to
             prepare calibration standards and laboratory fortified
             blanks.  The internal standard should be in methanol at a
             concentration of 5 /jg/mL (any appropriate concentration is
             acceptable).

7.6  PREPARATION OF LABORATORY REAGENT BLANK — Fill a 25-mL (or 5-mL)
     syringe with reagent water and adjust to the mark (no air bubbles).
     Inject 10 /*L of the fortification solution containing the internal
     standard and surrogates through the Luer .Lok valve into the reagent
     water.  Transfer the LRB to the purging device.  See Sect. 11.1.2.

7.7  PREPARATION OF LABORATORY FORTIFIED BLANK — Prepare this exactly
     like a calibration standard (Sect. 7.8).  This is a calibration
     standard that is treated as a sample.                              .

7.8  PREPARATION OF CALIBRATION STANDARDS

     7.8.1   The number of calibration solutions (CALs) needed depends on
             the calibration range desired.  A minimum of three CAL
             solutions is required to calibrate a range of a factor of 20
             in concentration.  For a factor of 50, use at least four
             standards, and for a factor of 100 at least five standards.
             One calibration standard should contain each analyte of

                                  294

-------
                 concern and each surrogate at a concentration of 2-10 times
       ;          the method detection limit (Tables 4-6) for that compound.
                 The other CAL standards should contain each analyte of
         ;       concern and each surrogate at concentrations that define the
                 range of the method.  Every CAL solution contains the
                 internal standard at the same concentration (5 ng/L suggested
                 for a 5-mL sample; 1 /ig/L for a 25-mL sample).

         7.8.2   To prepare a calibration standard, add an appropriate volume
                 of a primary dilution standard (containing analytes and
                 surrogates) to an aliquot of reagent water in a volumetric
                 flask.  Use a microsyringe and rapidly inject the methanol
                 solutions into the expanded area of the filled volumetric
                 flask.  Remove the needle as quickly as possible after
                 injection.  Mix by inverting the flask three times only.
                 Discard the contents contained in the neck of the flask.
           •. •. .  Aqueous standards are not stable in a volumetric flask and
                 should be discarded after 1 hr unless transferred to a sample
                 bottle and sealed immediately.

8.  SAMPLE COLLECTION. PRESERVATION. AND STORAGE

    8.1  SAMPLE COLLECTION, DECHLORINATION, AND PRESERVATION

         8.1.1   Collect all samples in duplicate.  If samples contain
                 residual chlorine, and measurements of the concentrations of
                 disinfection by-products (trihalomethanes, etc.) at the time
                 of sample collection are desired, add about 25 mg of ascorbic
                 acid to the sample bottle before filling.   If gases are not
          -       to be determined, sodium thiosulfate may be used to reduce
         -,'.-:    the residual chlorine.  Fill  sample bottles to overflowing,
                 but take care not to flush out the rapidly dissolving
                 ascorbic acid.  No air bubbles should pass through the sample
                 as the bottle is filled, or be trapped in  the sample when the
                 bottle is sealed.  Adjust the pH of the duplicate samples to
                 <2 by carefully adding one drop of 1:1 HC1 for each 20 mL of
                 sample volume.  Seal  the sample bottles,  PFTE-face down, and
                 shake vigorously for 1 min.                  .

         8.1.2   When sampling from a water tap,  open the tap and allow the
                 system to flush until  the water temperature has stabilized
                 (usually about 10 min).   Adjust the flow to about 500 mL/min
                 and collect duplicate samples from the flowing stream.

         8.1.3   When sampling from an open body of water,  fill  a 1-quart
                 wide-mouth bottle or 1-liter  beaker with  sample from a
                 representative area,  and carefully fill  duplicate sample
                 bottles from the 1-quart container.

         8.1.4   The samples must be chilled  to 4°C  on  the  day of collection
               ••  and maintained at that temperature until  analysis.   Field
                 samples that will not be received at the  laboratory on the
                 day of collection must be packaged for shipment with

                                     295

-------
                 sufficient ice to ensure that they will be at 4°C on arrival
                 at the laboratory.
    8.2  SAMPLE STORAGE

         8.2.1   Store samples at 4°C until  analysis.   The sample storage area
                 must be free of organic solvent vapors.

         8.2.2   Analyze all samples within 14 days of collection.  Samples
                 not analyzed within this period must be discarded and
                 replaced.

    8.3  FIELD REAGENT BLANKS
         8.3.1
         8.3.2
9.  CALIBRATION
Duplicate field reagent blanks must be handled along with
each sample set, which is composed of the samples collected
from the same general sample site at approximately the same
time.  At the laboratory, fill field blank sample bottles
with reagent water, seal, and ship to the sampling site along
with empty sample bottles and back to the laboratory with
filled sample bottles.  Wherever a .set of samples is shipped
and stored, it is accompanied by appropriate blanks.

Use the same procedures used for samples to add ascorbic acid
and HC1 to blanks (Sect. 8.1.1).
    9.1  Demonstration and documentation of acceptable initial calibration is
         required before any samples are analyzed and is required
         intermittently throughout sample analysis as dictated by results of
         continuing calibration checks.  After initial calibration is
         successful, a continuing calibration check is required at the
         beginning of each 8 hr. period during which analyses are performed.
         Additional periodic calibration checks are good laboratory practice.

    9.2  INITIAL CALIBRATION

         9.2.1   Calibrate the mass and abundance scales of the MS with
                 calibration compounds and procedures prescribed by the
                 manufacturer with any modifications necessary to meet the
                 requirements in Sect. 9.2.2,

         9.2.2   Introduce into the GC (either by purging a laboratory reagent
                 blank or making a syringe injection) 25 ng of BFB and acquire
                 mass spectra for m/z 35-260 at 70 eV (nominal).  Use the
                 purging procedure and/or GC conditions given in Sect. 11.  If
                 the spectrum does not meet all criteria in Table 2,  the MS
                 must be retuned and adjusted to meet all criteria before
                 proceeding with calibration.  An average spectrum across the
                 GC peak may be used to evaluate the performance of the
                 system.

                                      296

-------
9.2.3


9.2.4
        Purge a medium CAL solution, for example 10-20 fig/I, using
        the procedure given in Sect. 11.
Performance criteria for the medium calibration.
stored GC/MS data with the data system software.
shows an acceptable total ion chromatogram.
                                                          Examine the
                                                          Figure 3
        9.2.4.1  GC performance.  Good column performance will
                 produce symmetrical peaks with minimum tailing for
                 most compounds.  If peaks are broad, or sensitivity
                 poor, see Sect. 9.3.6 for some possible remedial
                 actions.

        9.2.4.2  MS sensitivity.  The GC/MS/DS peak identification
                 software should be able to recognize a GC peak in
                 the appropriate retention time window for each of
                 the compounds in calibration solution, and make
                 correct tentative identifications.  If fewer than
                 99% of the compounds are recognized, system
                 maintenance is required.  See Sect. 9.3.6.

9.2.5   If all performance criteria are met, purge an aliquot of each
        of the other CAL solutions using the same GC/MS conditions.

9.2.6   Calculate a response factor (RF) for each analyte, surrogate,
        and isomer pair for each CAL solution using the internal
        standard fluorobenzene.  Table 1 contains suggested
        quantitation ions for all compounds.  This calculation is
        supported in acceptable GC/MS data system software (Sect.
        6.3.4), and many other software programs.  RF is a unit! ess
        number, but units used to express quantities of analyte and
        internal standard must be equivalent.

                 RF=  (AX)(Q,-S)
where:   Ax  = integrated abundance of the quantitation ion
                of the analyte.
               integrated abundance of the quantitation ion
                of the internal standard.
               quantity of analyte purged in ng or
                concentration units.
               quantity of internal  standard purged  in  ng  or
                concentration units.
                 Ajs =

                 Qx  =
                  is
        9.2.6.1  For each analyte and surrogate, calculate the mean
                 RF from the analyses of the CAL solutions.
                 Calculate the standard deviation (SD) and the
                 relative standard deviation (RSD) from each mean:
                 RSD = 100 (SD/M).  If the RSD of any analyte or
                 surrogate mean RF exceeds 20%, either analyze
                             297

-------
                      additional aliquots of appropriate CAL solutions to
                      obtain an acceptable RSD of RFs over the entire
                      concentration range, or take action to improve 6C/MS
                      performance.  See Sect. 9.2.7.

     9.2.7   As an alternative to calculating mean response factors and
             applying the RSD test, use the GC/MS data system software or
             other available software to generate a second or third order
             regression calibration curve.

9.3  Continuing calibration check.  Verify the MS tune and initial
     calibration at the beginning of each 8-hr work shift during which
     analyses are performed using the following procedure.

     9.3.1   Introduce into the GC (either by purging a laboratory reagent
             blank or making a syringe injection) 25 ng of BFB and acquire
             a mass spectrum that includes data for m/z 35-260.   If the
             spectrum does not meet all criteria (Table 2), the  MS must be
             retuned and adjusted to meet all criteria before proceeding
             with the continuing calibration check.

     9.3.2   Purge a medium concentration CAL solution and analyze with
             the same conditions used during the initial  calibration.

     9.3.3   Demonstrate acceptable performance for the criteria shown in
             Sect. 9.2.4.

     9.3.4   Determine that the absolute areas of the quantitation ions of
             the internal  standard and surrogates have not decreased by
             more than 30% from the areas measured in the most recent
             continuing calibration check, or by more than 50% from the
             areas measured during initial calibration.   If these areas
             have decreased by more than these amounts,  adjustments must
             be made to restore system sensitivity.  These adjustments may
             require cleaning of the MS ion source, or other maintenance
             as indicated  in Sect.  9.3.6, and recalibration.   Control
             charts are useful  aids in documenting system sensitivity
             changes.

     9.3.5   Calculate the RF for each analyte and surrogate from the  data
             measured in the continuing calibration check.   The  RF for
             each analyte  and surrogate must be within 30% of the mean
             value measured in the initial calibration.   Alternatively,  if
             a second or third order regression is used,  the point from
             the continuing calibration check for each analyte and
             surrogate must fall,  within the analyst's judgement,  on the
             curve from the initial  calibration.   If these conditions  do
             not exist,  remedial  action must be taken which may  require
             re-initial  calibration.
                                 298

-------
     9.3.6   Some possible  remedial  actions.  Major maintenance  such as
             cleaning  an  ion  source, cleaning quadrupole  rods, etc.
             require returning to  the  initial calibration step.

             9.3.6.1   Check and  adjust GC  and/or MS operating conditions;
                       check the  MS resolution,  and calibrate the mass
                       scale.

             9.3.6.2   Clean or replace the split!ess  injection liner;
                       silanize a new injection  liner.

             9.3.6.3   Flush the  GC column  with  solvent  according to manu-
                       facturer's instructions.

             9.3.6.4   Break off  a  short portion (about  1  meter)  of the
                       column  from  the  end  near  the injector; or  replace  GC
                       column.  This  action will cause a change in
                       retention  times.

             9.3.6.5   Prepare fresh  CAL solutions, and  repeat the  initial
                       calibration  step.

             9.3.6.6   Clean the  MS ion source and rods  (if a quadrupole).

             9.3.6.7   Replace any  components that allow analytes to come
                       into  contact with hot metal surfaces.

             9.3.6.8   Replace the  MS electron multiplier, or any other
                       faulty  components.

 9.4  Optional  calibration for vinyl  chloride using a  certified gaseous
     mixture of vinyl  chloride in  nitrogen can  be accomplished by  the
     following steps.

     9.4.1   Fill the  purging device with  25.0  ml (or 5-mL) of reagent
:             water  or  aqueous calibration  standard.

     9.4.2   Start  to  purge the  aqueous mixture.  Inject  a known volume
              (between  100 and 2000 /iL) of  the calibration gas  (at  room
             temperature) directly into the purging device with  a  gas
             tight  syringe.  Slowly  inject the  gaseous  sample through a
             septum seal  at the  top  of the purging device at 2000  /nL/min.
              If the injection of the standard is made through the  aqueous
             sample inlet port,  flush  the  dead  volume with several ml of
             room air  or  carrier gas.   Inject the gaseous standard before
             5 min  of  the 11-min purge time have elapsed.

     9.4.3   Determine the  aqueous equivalent concentration of vinyl
             chloride  standard,  in vg/L, injected with  the equation:

                       S = 0.102  (C)(V)


                                   299

-------
                 where
S = Aqueous equivalent concentration
     of vinyl chloride standard in jug/L;
C = Concentration of gaseous standard in ppm (v/v);
V = Volume of standard injected in milliliters.
10. QUALITY CONTROL
    10.1 Quality control (QC) requirements are the initial  demonstration of
         laboratory capability followed by regular analyses of laboratory
         reagent blanks, field reagent blanks, and laboratory fortified
         blanks.  The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality
         of the data generated.  Additional  quality control practices are
         recommended.

    10.2 Initial demonstration of low system background.   Before any samples
         are analyzed, it must be demonstrated that a laboratory reagent blank
         (LRB) is reasonably free of contamination that would prevent the
         determination of any analyte of concern.   Sources  of background
         contamination are glassware, purge gas,  sorbants,  and equipment.
         Background contamination must be reduced to an acceptable level
         before proceeding with the next section.   In general, background from
         method analytes should be below the method detection limit.

    10.3 Initial demonstration of laboratory accuracy and precision.  Analyze
         five to seven replicates of a laboratory fortified blank containing
         each analyte of concern at a concentration in the  range of 0.2-5 /tg/L
         (see regulations and maximum contaminant levels  for guidance on
         appropriate concentrations).

         10.3.1  Prepare each replicate by adding an appropriate aliquot of a
                 quality control sample to reagent water.  If a quality
                 control sample containing the method analytes is not
                 available,  a primary dilution standard made from a source of
                 reagents different than those used to prepare the calibration
                 standards may be used.  Also add the appropriate amounts of
                 internal standard and surrogates if they are being used.
                 Analyze each replicate according to the  procedures described
                 in Section  11, and on a schedule that results in the analyses
                 of all  replicates over a period  of several days.

         10.3.2  Calculate the measured concentration of  each analyte in each
                 replicate,  the mean concentration of each  analyte in all
                 replicates,  and mean accuracy (as mean percentage of true
                 value)  for  each analyte,  and the precision (as relative
                 standard deviation, RSD)  of the  measurements for each
                 analyte.  Calculate the MDL of ea.ch analyte using the
                 procedures  described in Sect. 13.2 (2).

         10.3.3  For each analyte and surrogate,  the mean accuracy,  expressed
                 as a percentage of the true value,  should  be 80-120% and the
                 RSD should  be <20%.  Some analytes,  particularly the early
                 eluting gases and late eluting higher molecular weight

                                     300

-------
             compounds,  are measured with less accuracy and precision than
             other analytes.  The method detection limits must be
             sufficient  to detect analytes at the required levels.   If
             these criteria are not met for an analyte, take remedial
             action and  repeat the measurements for that analyte to
             demonstrate acceptable performance before samples are
             analyzed.

     10.3.4  Develop and maintain a system of control  charts to plot the
             precision  and accuracy of analyte and surrogate measurements
             as a function of time.  Charting of surrogate recoveries is
             an especially valuable activity since these are present in
             every sample and the analytical results will form a
             significant record of data quality.

10.4 Monitor the integrated areas of the quantitation ions of the internal
     standards and surrogates in continuing calibration checks.  These
     should remain reasonably constant over time.  A drift of more  than
     50% in any area is  indicative of a loss in sensitivity, and the
     problem must be found and corrected.  These integrated areas should
     also be reasonably constant in laboratory fortified blanks and
     samples.

10.5 Laboratory reagent blanks.  With each batch of samples processed as a
     group within a work shift, analyze a laboratory reagent blank  to
     determine the background system contamination.  A FRB (Sect. 10.7)
     may be used in place of a LRB.

10.6 With each batch of samples processed as a group within a work  shift,
     analyze a single laboratory fortified blank (LFB) containing each
     analyte of concern at a concentration as determined in 10.3.  If more
     than 20 samples are included in a batch, analyze one LFB for every 20
     samples.  Use the procedures described in 10.3.3 to evaluate the
     accuracy of the measurements, and to estimate whether the method
     detection limits can be obtained.  If.acceptable accuracy and  method
     detection limits cannot be achieved, the problem must be located and
     corrected before further samples are analyzed.  Add these results to
     the on-going control charts to document data quality.

10.7 With each set of field samples a field reagent blank (FRB) should be
     analyzed.  The results of these analyses will help define contamina-
     tion resulting from field sampling and transportation activities.  If
     the FRB shows unacceptable contamination, a LRB must be measured to
     define the source of the impurities.

10.8 At least quarterly, replicates of laboratory fortified blanks  should
     be analyzed to determine the precision of the laboratory measure-
     ments.  Add these results to the on-going control charts to document
     data quality.

10.9 At least quarterly, analyze a quality control sample (QCS) from an
     external source.  If measured analyte concentrations are not of

                                  301

-------
         acceptable accuracy, check the entire analytical procedure to locate
         and correct the problem source.

   10.10 Sample matrix effects have not been observed when this method is used
         with distilled water, reagent water, drinking water, and ground
         water.  Therefore, analysis of a laboratory fortified sample matrix
         (LFM) is not required.  It is recommended that sample matrix effects
         be evaluated at least quarterly using the QCS described in 10.9.

   10.11 Numerous other quality control measures are incorporated into  other
         parts of this procedure, and serve to alert the analyst to potential
         problems.

11.  PROCEDURE

    11.1 SAMPLE INTRODUCTION AND PURGING

         11.1.1  This method is designed for a 25-mL sample volume, but a
                 smaller (5 ml) sample volume is recommended if the GC/MS
                 system has adequate sensitivity to achieve the required
                 method detection limits.   Adjust the purge gas (nitrogen or
                 helium) flow rate to 40 mL/min.  Attach the trap inlet to the
                 purging device and open the syringe valve on the purging
                 device.

         11.1.2  Remove the plungers from two 25-mL (or 5-mL depending on
                 sample size) syringes and attach a closed syringe valve to
                 each.   Warm the sample to room temperature,  open the sample
                 bottle, and carefully pour the sample into one of the syringe
                 barrels to just short of overflowing.   Replace the syringe
                 plunger,  invert the syringe,  and compress the sample.   Open
                 the syringe valve and vent any residual  air while adjusting
                 the sample volume to 25.0-mL (or 5-mL).   For samples and
                 blanks, add 5-#L (or an appropriate volume)  of the
                 fortification solution containing the internal  standard and
                 the surrogates to the sample through the syringe valve.   For
                 calibration standards and laboratory fortified blanks,  add
                 5-#L of the fortification solution containing the internal
                 standard  only.   Close the valve.   Fill  the second syringe in
                 an  identical  manner from  the same sample bottle.   Reserve
                 this second syringe for a reanalysis if necessary.

         11.1.3  Attach the sample syringe valve to the  syringe valve on  the
                 purging device.   Be sure  that  the trap  is cooler than  25°C,
                 then open  the sample syringe  valve and  inject the sample into
                 the purging chamber.   Close  both  valves  and  initiate purging.
                 Purge  the  sample for 11.0 min  at  ambient temperature.

   11.2  SAMPLE DESORPTION

         11.2.1   Non-cryogenic interface — After  the  11-min  purge, place  the
                 purge  and  trap  system in  the desorb  mode and  preheat the  trap

                                     302

-------
             to 180°C without a flow of desorption  gas.   Then simultan-
             eously start the flow of desorption gas at 15-mL/min for
             about 4 min, begin the temperature program of the gas
             chromatograph, and start data acquisition.

     11.2.2  Cryogenic interface — After the 11-min purge, place the
             purge and trap system in the desorb mode, make sure the
             cryogenic interface is a -150°C  or lower,  and rapidly heat
             the trap to 180°C while backflushing with an inert gas at
             4 mL/min for about 5 min.  At the end  of the 5 min desorption
             cycle, rapidly heat the cryogenic trap to 250°C,  and
             simultaneously begin the temperature program of the gas
             chromatograph, and start data acquisition.

     11.2.3  While the trapped components are being introduced into the
             gas chromatograph (or cryogenic interface), empty the purging
             device using the sample syringe and wash the chamber with two
             25-mL flushes of reagent water.   After the purging device has
             been emptied, leave syringe valve open to allow the purge gas
             to vent through the sample introduction needle.

11.3 GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY/MASS SPECTROMETRY — Acquire and store data over
     the nominal mass range 35-260 with a total cycle time (including scan
     overhead time) of 2 sec or less.  If water, methanol, or carbon
     dioxide cause a background problem, start at 47 or 48 m/z.  Cycle
     time must be adjusted to measure five or more  spectra during the
     elution of each GC peak. Several alternative temperature programs can
     be used.

     11.3.1  Single, ramp linear temperature program for wide bore columns
             1 and 2 with a jet separator.  Adjust  the helium carrier gas
             flow rate to about 15 mL/min.  The column temperature is
             reduced 10°C and held for 5 min  from the beginning of
             desorption, then programmed to 160°C at 6°C/min,  and  held
             until all components have eluted.

     11.3.2  Multi-ramp linear temperature program  for wide bore column 2
             with the open split interface.  Adjust the helium carrier gas
             flow rate to about 4.6 mL/min.,  The column temperature is
             reduced 10°C and held for 6 min  from the beginning of
             desorption, then heated to 70°C  at 10°/min,  heated to  120°C
             at 5°/min,  heated to 180°  at 8°/min, and held at 180° until
             all compounds have eluted.

     11.3.3  Single ramp linear temperature program for narrow bore column
             3 with a cryogenic interface.  Adjust  the helium carrier gas
             flow rate to about 4 mL/min.  The column temperature is
             reduced 10°C and held for 5 min  from the beginning of
             vaporization from the cryogenic trap,  programmed at 6°C/min
             for 10 min, then 15°C/nrin  for 5  min to 145°C, and  held until
             all components have eluted.


                                  303

-------
11.4 TRAP RECONDITIONING — After desorbing the sample for 4 min,
     recondition the trap by returning the purge and trap system to the
     purge mode.  Wait 15 sec, then close the syringe valve on the purging
     device to begin gas flow through the trap.  Maintain the trap
     temperature at 180°C.   After approximately 7 min,  turn off the trap
     heater and open the syringe valve to stop the gas flow through the
     trap.  When the trap is cool, the next sample can be analyzed.

11.5 TERMINATION OF DATA ACQUISITMN — When all the sample components
     have eluted from the GC, terminate MS data acquisition.  Use
     appropriate data output software to display full range mass spectra
     and appropriate plots of ion abundance as a function of time.  If any
     ion abundance exceeds the system working range, dilute the sample
     aliquot in the second syringe with reagent water and analyze the
     diluted aliquot.

11.6 IDENTIFICATION OF ANALYTES — Identify a sample component by
     comparison of its mass spectrum (after background subtraction) to a
     reference spectrum in the user-created data base.   The GC retention
     time of the sample component should be within three standard
     deviations of the mean retention time of the compound in the
     calibration mixture.

     11.6.1  In general, all ions that are present above 10% relative
             abundance in the mass spectrum of the standard should be
             present in the mass spectrum of the sample component and
             should agree within absolute 20%.  For example, if an ion has
             a relative abundance of 30% in the standard spectrum, its
             abundance in the sample spectrum should be in the range of 10
             to 50%.  Some ions, particularly the molecular ion, are of
             special importance, and should be evaluated even if they are
             below 10% relative abundance.

     11.6.2  Identification requires expert judgement when sample
             components are not resolved chromatographically and produce
             mass spectra containing ions contributed by more than one
             analyte.  When GC peaks obviously represent more than one
             sample component (i.e., broadened peak with shoulder(s) or
             valley between two or more maxima), appropriate analyte
             spectra and background spectra can be selected by examining
             plo.ts of characteristic ions for tentatively identified
             components.  When analytes coelute (i.e.,  only one GC peak is
             apparent), the identification criteria can be met but each
             analyte spectrum will  contain extraneous ions contributed by
             the coeluting compound.  Because purgeable organic compounds
             are relatively small  molecules and produce comparatively
             simple mass spectra,  this is not a significant problem for
             most method analytes.

     11.6.3  Structural isomers that produce very similar mass spectra can
             be explicitly identified only if they have sufficiently
             different GC retention times.  Acceptable  resolution is

                                 304

-------
                 achieved if the height of the valley between two peaks is
                 less than 25% of the average height of the two peaks.
                 Otherwise,  structural  isomers are identified as isomeric
                 pairs.   Two of the three isomeric xylenes and two of the
                 three dichlorobenzenes are examples of structural isomers
                 that may not be resolved on the capillary columns.   If
                 unresolved, these groups of isomers must be reported as
                 isomeric pairs.

         11.6.4  Methylene chloride and other background components  appear in
                 variable quantities in laboratory and field reagent blanks,
                 and generally cannot be accurately measured.  Subtraction of
                 the concentration in the blank from the concentration in the
                 sample is not acceptable because the concentration  of the
                 background in the blank is highly variable.

12.  CALCULATIONS

    12.1 Complete chromatographic resolution is not necessary for accurate and
         precise measurements of analyte concentrations if unique ions with
         adequate intensities are available for quantitation.


         12.1.1  Calculate analyte and surrogate concentrations.

                          c  =   (Ax)(Qis) 1000
                                   (A,.)  RF V
                 where:    Cx  = concentration  of analyte or surrogate in fig/L
                                  in the water sample.
                          Ax  = integrated abundance of the quantitation ion
                                  of the analyte in the sample.
                          Ais  =  integrated abundance  of  the  quantitation  ion
                                  of the internal standard in the sample.
                          Q1s  =  total quantity  (in micrograms)  of  internal
                                  standard added to the water sample.
                          V   = original water sample volume in ml.
                          RF  = mean response factor of analyte from the
                                  initial calibration.

         12.1.2  Alternatively, use the GC/MS system software or other
                 available proven software to compute the concentrations of
                 the analytes and surrogates from the second or third order
                 regression curves.

         12.1.3  Calculations should utilize all available digits of precis-
                 ion, but final reported concentrations should be rounded to
                 an appropriate number of significant figures (one digit of
                 uncertainty).  Experience indicates that three significant
                 figures may be used for concentrations above 99 /tg/L,  two
                 significant figures for concentrations between 1- 99 /zg/L,
                 and one significant figure for lower concentrations.

                                     305

-------
         12.1.4  Calculate the total trihalomethane concentration  by  summing
                 the four individual trihalomethane concentrations in
13. ACCURACY AND PRECISION

    13.1 Single laboratory accuracy and precision data were obtained  for the
         method analytes using laboratory fortified blanks with analytes at
         concentrations between 1 and 5 ng/L.  Four sets of results were
         obtained using the three columns specified (Sect. 6.3.2) and the open
         split, cryogenic, and jet separator interfaces (Sect. 6.3.3).  These
         data are shown in Tables 4-6.

    13.2 With these data, method detection limits were calculated using the
         formula (2):

         MDL - S t(n.1f1.alpha = 0_99)


         where:

         tovi.t-aipha = 0.99) = Student's  t  val ue for the  99%  confidence
                                  level with n-1 degrees of freedom,

         n = number of replicates

         S = the standard deviation of the
              replicate analyses.

14. REFERENCES

    1.   A. Al ford-Stevens, J.W. Eichelberger,  W.L. Budde, "Purgeable Organic
         Compounds in Water by Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry,  Method
         524."  Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, U.S.
         Environmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati, Ohio, February  1983.

    2.   Madding, C., "Volatile Organic Compounds in Water by Purge and Trap
         Capillary Column GC/MS", Proceedings of the Water Quality Technology
         Conference,  American Water Works Association, Denver, CO, December,
         1984.

    3.   Glaser, J.A., D.L. Foerst,  G.D. McKee, S.A. Quave, and W.L.  Budde,
         "Trace Analyses for Wastewaters, "Environ. Sci. Techno! . . 15, 1426,
         1981.                                                     ~

    4.   "Carcinogens-Working with Carcinogens," Department of Health,
         Education, and Welfare, Public Health  Service, Center for Disease
         Control, National  Institute for Occupational  Safety and Health,
         Publication  No. 77-206, August, 1977.

    5.   "OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry," (29CFR1910),
         Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206, (Revised,
         January 1976).

                                      306

-------
6.   "Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories," American Chemical
     Society  Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition,
     1979.

7.   Arrendale, R.F., R.F. Severson, and O.T. Chortyk, "Open Split
     Interface for Capillary Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry", Anal.
     Chem. 1984, 56, 1533.

8.   Flesch, J.J., P.S. Fair, "The Analysis of Cyanogen Chloride in
     Drinking Water," Proceedings of Water Quality Technology Conference,
     American Water Works Association, St. Louis, MO., November 14-16,
     1988.
                                  307

-------
     TABLE 1.  MOLECULAR WEIGHTS AND QUANTITATION IONS FOR METHOD ANALYTES
Compound
MWa
    Primary
 Quantitation
	Ion
  Secondary
Quantitation
    Ions
      Internal  standard

 Fluorobenzene                96

      Surrogates

 4-Bromofl uorobenzene         174
 l,2-Dichlorobenzene-d4       150

      Target Analvtes

 Benzene                       78
 Bromobenzene                 156
 Bromochloromethane           128
 Bromodichloromethane         162
 Bromoform                    250
 Bromomethane                  94
 n-Butylbenzene               134
 sec-Butyl benzene             134
 tert-Butylbenzene            134
 Carbon tetrachloride         152
 Chlorobenzene                112
 Chloroethane                  64
 Chloroform                   118
 Chloromethane                 50
 2-Chlorotoluene              126
 4-Chlorotoluene              126
 Dibromochloromethane         206
 1,2-Dibromo-3-Chloropropane  234
 1,2-Dibromoethane            186
 Dibromomethane               172
 1,2-Dichlorobenzene          146
 1,3-Dichlorobenzene          146
 1,4-Dichlorobenzene          146
 Dichlorodifluoromethane      120
 1,1-Dichloroethane            98
 1,2-Dichloroethane            98
 1,1-Dichloroethene            96
 cis-l,2-Dichloroethene        96
trans-l,2-Dichloroethene      96
 1,2-Dichloropropane          112
 1,3-Dichloropropane          112
2,2-Dichloropropane          112
              96
              95
             152
              78
             156
             128
              83
             173
              94
              91
             105
             119
             117
             112
              64
              83
              50
              91
              91
             129
              75
             107
              93
             146
             146
             146
              85
              63
              62
              96
              96
              96
              63
              76
              77
                             77
                        174,176
                        115,150
                             77
                         77,158
                         49,130
                         85,127
                        175,252
                             96
                            134
                            134
                             91
                            119
                         77,114
                             66
                             85
                             52
                            126
                            126
                            127
                        155,157
                        109,188
                         95,174
                        111,148
                        111,148
                        111,148
                             87
                          65,83
                             98
                          61,63
                          61,98
                          61,98
                            112
                             78
                             97
                                     308

-------
1 , 1-Di chl oropropene
Compound
ci s-1 ,3-di chl oropropene
trans- 1 , 3-di chl oropropene
Ethyl benzene
Hexachl orobutadi ene
I sopropyl benzene
4- I sopropyl to! uene
Methyl ene chloride
Naphthalene
n-Propyl benzene
Styrene
1,1,1, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
1,1,2, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
Tetrachloroethene
Toluene
1,2, 3-Tri chl orobenzene
1,2, 4-Tri chl orobenzene
1,1, 1-Trichl oroethane
1,1, 2-Tri chl oroethane
Trichloroethene
Tri chl orof 1 uoromethane
1,2, 3-Tri chl oropropane
1,2, 4-Trimethyl benzene
1,3, 5-Tr imethyl benzene
Vinyl Chloride
o-Xylene
m-Xyl ene
p-Xylene
110
TABLE 1.
MWa
110
110
106
258
120
134
84
128
120
104
166
166
164
92
180
180
132
132
130
136
146
120
120
62
106
106
106
75
(continued)
Primary
Quantitation
Ion
75
75
91
225
105
119
84
128
91
104
131
83
166
92
180
180
97
83
95
101
75
105
105
62
106
106
106
110,77
Secondary
Quantitation
Ions
110
110
106
260
120
134,91
86,49

120
78
133,119
131,85
168,129
91
182
182
99,61
97,85
130,132
103
77
120
120
64
91
91
91
aMonoisotopic molecular weight  calculated  from  the  atomic masses  of  the
 isotopes with the smallest masses.
                                     309

-------
TABLE 2.
CHROMATOGRAPHIC RETENTION TIMES FOR METHOD ANALYTES
ON THREE COLUMNS WITH  FOUR SETS OF CONDITIONS0
                         Retention
                              Time      (min:sec)
Compound
Internal standard
Fluorobenzene
Surrogates
4-Bromof 1 uorobenzene
1 , 2-Di chl orobenzene-d4
Target Analvtes
Benzene
Bromobenzene
Bromochl oromethane
Bromodi chl oromethane
Bromoform
Bromomethane
n-Butyl benzene
sec-Butyl benzene
tert-Butyl benzene
Carbon Tetrachloride
Chlorobenzene
Chloroethane
Chl orof orm
Chl oromethane
2-Chlorotoluene
4-Chlorotoluene
Cyanogen chloride
Di bromochl oromethane
1 , 2-Di bromo-3-Chl oropropane
1,2-Dibromoethane
Dibromomethane
1 , 2-Di chl orobenzene
1,3-Dichlorobenzene
1 , 4-Di chl orobenzene
Di chl orodi f 1 uoromethane
1,1-Di chloroethane
1, 2-Di chloroethane
1,1-Dichloroethene
ci s-1 , 2-Di chl oroethene
trans-1 , 2-Di chl oroethene
1 , 2-Di chl oropropane
1 , 3-Di chl oropropane
2 , 2-Di chl oropropane
1 , 1-Di chl oropropene
Column lb

8:49

18:38
22:16

8:14
18:57
6:44
10:35
17:56
2:01
22:13
20:47
20:17
7:37
15:46
2:05
6:24
1:38
19:20
19:30

14:23
24:32
14:44
10:39
22:31
21:13
21:33
1:33
4:51
8:24
2:53
6:11
3:59
10:05
14:02
6:01
7:49
Column 2b

6:27

15:43
19:08

5:40
15:52
4:23
8:29
14:53
0:58
•19:29
18:05
17:34
5:16
13:01
1:01
4:48
0:44
16:25
16:43

11:51
21:05
11:50
7:56
19:10
18:08
18:23
0:42
2:56
5:50
1:34
3:54
2:22
7:40
11:19
3:48
5:17
Column 2V

14:06

23:38
27:25

13:30
24:00
12:22
15:48
22:46
4:48
27:32
26:08
25:36
13:10
20:40

12:36
3:24
24:32
24:46

19:12

19:24
15:26
27:26
26:22
26:36
3:08
10:48
13:38
7:50
11:56
9:54
15:12
18:42
11:52
13:06
Column 3d

8:03


• • .••",»•-•

7:25
16:25
5:38
9:20
15:42
1:17
17:57
17:28
17:19
7:25
14:20
1:27
5:33
0:58
16:44
16:49
1:03
12:48
18:02
13:36
9:05
17:47
17:28
17:38
0:53
4:02
7:00
2:20
5:04
3:32
8:56
12:29
5:19
7:10
                             310

-------
                             TABLE 2.   (continued)
Compound
                                 Retention
                    Time
(min:sec)
Column lb  Column 2b  Column  2b  Column 3d
ci s-1 , 3-di chl oropropene
trans-1 , 3-di chl oropropene
Ethyl benzene
Hexachl orobutadi ene
Isopropyl benzene
4- I sopropy 1 tol uene
Methyl ene Chloride
Naphthalene
n-Propyl benzene
Styrene
1,1,1, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
1,1,2, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
Tetrachl oroethene
Toluene
1 , 2 , 3-Tr i chl orobenzene
1,2, 4-Tri chl orobenzene
1,1, 1-Tri chl oroethane
1,1, 2-Tri chl oroethane
Tri chl oroethene
Tri chl orof 1 uoromethane
1,2, 3-Tri chl oropropane
1,2, 4-Tri methyl benzene
1,3, 5-Tr i methyl benzene
Vinyl chloride
o-Xyl ene
m-Xyl ene
p-Xylene
11.58
13.46
15:59
26:59
18:04
21:12
3:36
27:10
19:04
17:19
15:56
18:43
13:44
12:26
27:47
26:33
7:16
13:25
9:35
2:16
19:01
20:20
19:28
1:43
17:07
16:10
16:07


13:23
23:41
15:28
18:31
2:04
23:31
16:25
14:36
13:20
16:21
11:09
10:00
24:11
23:05
4:50
11:03
7:16
1:11
16:14
17:42
16:54
0:47
14:31
13:41
13:41
16:42
17:54
21:00
32:04
23:18
26:30
9:16
32:12
24:20
22:24
20:52
24:04
18:36
17:24
32:58
31:30
12:50
18:18
14:48
6:12
24:08
31:30
24:50
3:56
22:16
21:22
21:18


14:44
19:14
16:25
17:38
2:40
19:04
16:49
15:47
14:44
15:47
13:12
11:31
19:14
18:50
6:46
11:59
9:01
1:46
16:16
17:19
16:59
1:02
15:47
15:18
15:18
8Columns 1-3 are those given in Sect. 6.3.2.1; retention times were measured
 from the beginning of thermal desorption from the trap (columns 1-2) or from
 the beginning of thermal release from the cryogenic interface (column 3).
bdC conditions given in Sect. 11.3.1.
^GC conditions given in Sect. 11.3.2.
 GC conditions given in Sect. 11.3.3.
                                      311

-------
TABLE 3. ION ABUNDANCE CRITERIA FOR 4-BROHOFLUOROBENZENE (BFB)
   Mass
   (H/z)
    50
    75
    95
    96
   173
   174
   175
   176
   177
Relative Abundance Criteria
15 to 40% of mass 95
30 to 80% of mass 95
Base Peak, 100% Relative Abundance
5 to 9% of mass 95
< 2% of mass 174
> 50% of mass 95
5 to 9% of mass 174
> 95% but < 101% of mass 174
5 to 9% of mass 176
                               312

-------
TABLE 4.  ACCURACY AND PRECISION DATA FROM 16-31 DETERMINATIONS OF THE METHOD
          ANALYTES IN REAGENT WATER USING WIDE BORE CAPILLARY COLUMN la
Comoound
Benzene
Brotnobenzene
Bromochl oromethane
Bromodi chl oromethane
Bromoform
Bromomethane
n-Butyl benzene
sec-Butyl benzene
tert-Butyl benzene
Carbon tetrachloride
Chlorobenzene
Chloroethane
Chi orof orm
Chi oromethane
2-Chlorotoluene
4-Chlorotoluene
Di bromochl oromethane
1 , 2-Di bromo-3-chl oropropane
1,2-Dibromoethane
Dibromomethane
1 , 2-Di chl orobenzene
1 , 3-Di chl orobenzene
1 , 4-Di chl orobenzene
Di chl orodi f 1 uoromethane
1,1-Di chloroethane
1,2-Dichloroethane
1,1-Di chl oroethene
cis-1,2 Dichloroethene
trans-1 , 2-Di chl oroethene
1 , 2-Di chl oropropane
1 , 3-Di chl oropropane
2 , 2-Di chl oropropane
1 , 1-Di chl oropropene
ci s-1 , 2-Di chl oropropene
trans-1 , 2-Di chl oropropene
Ethyl benzene
Hexachl orobutadi ene
I sopropyl benzene
4-Isopropyl toluene
Methyl ene chloride
Naphthalene
n-Propyl benzene
Styrene
True
Cone.
Range
(uafl}
0.1-10
0.1-10
0.5-10
0.1-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.1-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.1-10
0.1-10
0.1-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.1-10
0.5-10
0.2-20
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.1-10
0.1-10
0.5-10
0.1-10
0.1-10
0.1-10
0.5-10
0.5-10


0.1-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.1-10
0.1-10
0.1-100
0.1-10
0.1-100
Mean
Accuracy
(% of True
Valued
97
100
90
95
101
95
100
100
102
84
98
89
90
93
90
99
92
83
102
100
93
99
103
90
96
95
94
101
93
97
96
86
98


99
100
101
99
95
104
100
102
Rel.
Std.
Dev.
m
5.7
5.5
6.4
6.1
6.3
8.2
7.6
7.6
7.3
8.8
5.9
9.0
6.1
8.9
6.2
8.3
7.0
19.9
3.9
5.6
6.2
6.9
6.4
7.7
5.3
5.4
6.7
6.7
5.6
6.1
6.0
16.9
8.9


8.6
6.8
7.6
6.7
5.3
8.2
5.8
7.2
Method
Det.
Limit
(UQ/l}
0.04
0.03
0.04
0.08
0.12
0.11
0.11
0.13
0.14
0.21
0.04
0.10
0.03
0.13
0.04
0.06
0.05
0.26
0.06
0.24
0.03
0.12
0.03
0.10
0.04
0.06
0.12
0.12
0.06
0.04
0.04
0.35
0.10


0.06
0.11
0.15
0.12
0.03
0.04
0.04
0.04
                                     313

-------
                             TABLE 4.  (Continued)
Compound
1,1,1, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
1,1,2, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
Tetrachl oroethene
To! uene
1,2,3-Trichlorobenzene
1,2, 4-Tr i chl orobenzene
1,1, 1-Tri chl oroethane
1,1, 2-Tri chl oroethane
Tri chl oroethene
Tri chl orof 1 uoromethane
1,2,3-Trichloropropane
1 , 2, 4-Trimethyl benzene
1,3, 5-Trimethyl benzene
Vinyl chloride
o-Xyl ene
m-Xyl ene
p-Xylene
True
Cone.
Range
rua/L)
0.5-10
0.1-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.5-10
0.1-31
0.1-10
0.5-10
Mean
Accuracy
(% of True
Value}
90
91
89
102
109
108
98
104
90
89
108
99
92
98
103
97
104
Rel.
Std.
Dev.
(%)
6.8
6.3
6.8
8.0
8.6
8.3
8.1
7.3
7.3
8.1
14.4
8.1
7.4
6.7
7.2
6.5
7.7
Method
Det.
Limit
(UQ/L)
0.05
0.04
0.14
0.11
0.03
0.04
0.08
0.10
0.19
0.08
0.32
0.13
0.05
0.17
0.11
0.05
0.13
"Data obtained by Robert W.  Slater using column 1  with a jet separator
 interface and a quadrupole mass spectrometer (Sect. 11.3.1) with analytes
 divided among three solutions.
                                      314

-------
TABLE 5.  ACCURACY AND PRECISION DATA FROM SEVEN DETERMINATIONS OF THE
          METHOD ANALYTES IN REAGENT WATER USING THE CRYOGENIC TRAPPING
          OPTION AND A NARROW BORE CAPILLARY COLUMN 3°
Compound
Benzene
Bromobenzene
Bromochl oromethane
Bromodi chl oromethane
Bromoform
Bromomethane
n-Butyl benzene
sec-Butylbenzene
tert-Butyl benzene
Carbon tetrachloride
Chl orobenzene
Chloroethane
Chloroform
Chl oromethane
2-Chlorotoluene
4-Chlorotoluene
Cyanogen chloride13
Di bromochl oromethane
1 , 2-Di bromo-3-chl oropropane
1,2-Dibromoethane
Dibromomethane
1 , 2-Di chl orobenzene
1 , 3-Di chl orobenzene
1 , 4-Di chl orobenzene
Di chl orodi f 1 uoromethane
1,1-Di chloroethane
1, 2-Di chloroethane
1,1-Di chl oroethene
cis-1, 2 Di chl oroethene
trans-1 , 2-Di chl oroethene
1 , 2-Di chl oropropane
1,3-Dichloropropane
2 , 2-Di chl oropropane
1 , 1-Di chl oropropene
cis-1, 3-Di chl oropropene
trans-1, 3-Di chl oropropene
Ethyl benzene
Hexachlorobutadiene
Isopropyl benzene
4-Isopropyl toluene
Methyl ene chloride
Naphthalene
True
Cone.
(UQ/L)
0.1
0.5
0.5
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1

0.1
0,1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1


0.1
0.1
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.1
Mean
Accuracy
(% of True
Value}
99
97
97
100
99
99
94
90
90
92
91
100
95
99
99
96
92
99
92
97
93
97
99
93
99
98
100
95
100
98
96
99
99
98


99 ,
100
98
87
97
98
Rel.
Std.
Dev.
6.2
7.4
5.8
4.6
5.4
7.1
6.0
7.1
2.5
6.8
5.8
5.8
3.2
4.7
4.6
7.0
10.6
5.6
10.0
5.6
6.9
3.5
6.0
5.7
8.8
6.2
6.3
9.0
3.7
7.2
6.0
5.8
4.9
7.4


5.2
6.7
6.4
13.0
13.0
7.2
Method
Dect.
Limit
(ua/L)
0.03
0.11
0.07
0.03
0.20
0.06
0.03
0.12
0.33
0.08
0.03
0.02
0.02
0.05
0.05
0,05
0.30
0.07
0.05
0.02
0.03
0.05
0.05
0.04
0.11
0.03
0.02
0.05
0.06
0.03
0.02
0.04
0.05
0.02


0.03
0.04
0.10
0.26
0.09
0.04
                              315

-------
                             TABLE 5.  (Continued)
Compound
n-Propyl benzene
Styrene
1,1,1, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
1,1,2, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
Tetrachl oroethene
Toluene
1 , 2,3-Trichl orobenzene
1,2, 4-Tri chl orobenzene
1,1, 1-Tri chl oroethane
1,1, 2-Tri chl oroethane
Tri chl oroethene
Tri chl orof 1 uoromethane
1,2, 3-Tri chl oropropane
1,2, 4-Tri methyl benzene
1,3, 5-Tr i methyl benzene
Vinyl chloride
o-Xyl ene
m-Xyl ene
p-Xyl ene
True
Cone.
(U.Q/L)
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.5
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
Mean
Accuracy
(% of True
Value}
99
96
100
100
96
100
98
91
100
98
96
97
96
96
99
96
94
94
97
Rel . Method
Std. Dect.
Dev. Limit
m (ua/U
6.6
19.0
4.7
12.0
5.0
5.9
8.9
16.0
4.0
4.9
2.0
4.6
6.5
6.5
4.2
0.2
7.5
4.6
6.1
0.06
0.06
0.04
0.20
0.05
0.08
0.04
0.20
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.07
0.03
0.04
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.03
0.06
8Data obtained by Caroline A.  Madding using  column  3 with  a  cryogenic
 interface and a quadrupole mass spectrometer (Sect 11.3.3).
Reference 8.
                                      316

-------
        TABLE 6. ACCURACY AND  PRECISION DATA  FROM SEVEN DETERMINATIONS
                 OF THE METHOD ANALYTES IN REAGENT WATER USING WIDE  BORE
                 CAPILLARY COLUMN 2a
Compound
Mean Accuracy
(% of True
Value,
No.b 2 ua/l Cone.}
RSD
M
Mean Accuracy
(% of True
Value,
0.2 ua/l Conc.^
RSD
'(*)
 Internal Standard
Fluorobenzene                 1

Surrogates

4-BromofI uorobenzene          2       98
l,2-Dichlorobenzene-d4       3       97

Target Analvtes

Benzene
Bromobenzene
Bromochloromethane
Bromodi chloromethane
Bromoform
Bromomethane
n-Butylbenzene
sec-Butyl benzene
tert-Butylbenzene
Carbon tetrachloride
Chlorobenzene
Chloroethane0
Chloroform
Chloromethane
2-Chlorotoluene
4-Chlorotoluene
Di bromochloromethane
1,2-Di bromo-3-chloropropanec
l,2-Dibromoethanec
Dibromomethane              13       99
1,2-Dichlorobenzene         45       93
1,3-Dichlorobenzene         46      100
1,4-Dichlorobenzene         47       98
Dichlorodifluoromethane     14       38
1,1-Dichloroethane          15       97
1,2-Dichloroethane          16      102
1,1-Dichloroethene          17       90
cis-l,2-Dichloroethene      18      100
trans-1,2-Dichloroethene    19       92
37
38
4
5
6
7
39
40
41
8
42
9
10
43
44
11
97
102
99
96
89
55
89
102
101
84
104
97
110
91
89
95
  1.8
 3.2
  4.4
  3.0
  5.2
  1.8
  2.4
 27.
.  4.8
  3.5
  4.5
  3.2
  3.1

  2.0
  5.0
  2.4
  2.0
  2.7
 2.1
 2.7
 4.0
 4.1
25.
 2.3
 3.8
 2.2
 3.4
 2.1
 96
 95
113
101
102
100
 90
 52
 87
100
100
 92
103

 95
 d
108
108
100
 95
 94
 87
 94
 d
 85
100
 87
 89
 85
 1.3
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.9
1.8
2.2
6.7
2.3
2.8
  9
2.6
1.6
2
2.1

3.1
4.4
3.0
2.2
5.1
2.3
2.8

3.6
2.1
3.8
2.9
2.3
                                     317

-------
                            TABLE  6.  (Continued)
Compound
1 , 2-Di chl oropropane
1,3-Dichloropropane
2 , 2-Di chl oropropane0
1 , 1-Di chl oropropene0
ci s-1 , 3-Di chl oropropene0
trans-1 , 3-Di chl oropropene
Ethyl benzene
Hexachl orobutadi ene
Isopropyl benzene
4-Isopropyl to! uene
Methyl ene chloride
Naphthalene
n-Propyl benzene
Styrene
1,1,1, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
1 , 1 , 2, 2-Tetrachl oroethane
Tetrachloroethene
To! uene
1,2, 3-Tr i chl orobenzene
1 , 2 , 4-Tri chl orobenzene
1,1, 1-Tri chl oroethane
1,1, 2-Tri chl oroethane
Trichloroethene
Tri chl orof 1 uoromethane
1,2, 3-Tr i chl oropropane
1,2, 4-Tri methyl benzene
1,3, 5-Trimethyl benzene
Vinyl chloride
o-Xyl ene
m-Xyl ene
p-Xyl ene
Mean Accuracy
(% of True
Value, RSD
No.b 2 ua/L Cone.1) (%)
20
21



25
48
26
49
50
27
51
52
53
28
29
30
54
55
56
31
32
33
34
35
57
58
36
59
60
61
102
92



96
96
91
103
95
e
93
102
95
99
101
97
105
90
92
94
107
99
81
97
93
88
104
97
f
98
2.2
3.7



1.7
9.1
5.3
3.2
3.6

7.6
4.9
4.4
2.7
4.6
4.5
2.8
5.7
5.2
3.9
3.4
2.9
4.6
3.9
3.1
2.4
3.5
1.8

2.3
Mean Accuracy
(% of True
Value, RSD
0.2 ua/L Cone.) M
103
93



99
ioo
88
101
95
e
78
97
104
95
84
92
126
78
83
94
109
106
48
91
106
97
115
98
f
103
2.9
3.2



2.1
4.0
2.4
2.1
3.1

8.3
2.1
3.1
3.8
3.6
3.3
1.7
2.9
5.9
2.5
2.8
2.5
13.
2.8
2.2
3.2
14.
1.7

1.4
8Data obtained by James W.  Eichelberger using column  2 with  the open  split
 interface and an ion trap mass spectrometer (Sect. 11.3.2)  with all  method
 analytes in the same reagent water solution.
Designation in Figures 1 and 2.
°Not measured; authentic standards were not available.
dNot found at 0.2 ng/l.
cNot measured; methylene chloride was in the laboratory reagent blank.
fm-xylene coelutes with and cannot be distinguished from its isomer p-xylene,
 No 61.
                                      318

-------
   OPTIONAL
   FOAM
   TRAP
KIN.
0. D. EXIT
    0.0.

 14MM 0. D.
                  INLET* IN.
                       0.0.
   SAMPLE INLET

i~*~24IAY SYRINGE VALVE
   17CM. 20 GAUGE SYRINGE NEEDLE

   GMM. 0. 0. RUBBER SffTUM
                        ~10MM. 0. D.
                           % IN. 0. D.
                    1/16 IN. O.D.
                    'STAINLESS STEEL
   10MM GLASS FRIT
   MEDIUM POROSITY
                                       131 MOLECULAR
                                       SIEVE PURGE
                                       GASnLTER
                                         PURGE GAS
                                         ROW
                                         CONTROL
             FIGURE 1.  PURGING DEVICE
                        319

-------
    PACKING PROCEDURE
CONSTRUCTION
     GLASS em
     WOOL  ***
ACTIVATED, „
CHARCOAL.7J
GRADE 15
SIUCA
   TENAX 7.7 CM
3XOV-1
GLASS WOOL1
        5MM
                     7A/FOOT
                   RESISTANCE
                  WIRE WRAPPED
                     SOLID
                (DOUBLE LAYER)
                   RESISTANCE
                  •IRE WRAPPED
                        SOLID
                 (SINGLE LAYER)
                         8OH
            TRAP INLET
   JC)
         .COMPRESSION
          RHING NUT
          AND FERRULES


           THERMOCOUPLE/
           CONTROLLER
           SENSOR
              B£CTRONIC
              fEMPERATURE
              CONTROL
              AND
              PYROMETER
       ^  / TUBING 2SCU
           0.105 IN. I.D,
       ;> J 0.12S IN. O.D.
       ,X  STAINLESS STEa
    FIGURE 2.  TRAP PACKINGS AND CONSTRUCTION TO INCLUDE
               DESORB CAPABILITY
                        320

-------
o o
                                                                                 CVS
                                                                                 CNS
O
M
                                           321

-------
  w
                                                                        cxa
                                                                        SJO
                                                                        CSI
                                                                        CO
                                                                        CK3
o
                                           322

-------
METHOD 525.1  DETERMINATION OF ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN DRINKING WATER
        BY LIQUID-SOLID EXTRACTION AND CAPILLARY COLUMN
              GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY/MASS SPECTROMETRY
                           Revision 2.2
                             May,  1991
J. W. Eichelberger, T. D. Behymer, W. L. Budde - Method 525,
  Revision 1.0, 2.0, 2.1 (1988)
           ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
                OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
               U.S.  ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
                      CINCINNATI, OHIO 45268
                               323

-------
                                 METHOD 525.1

             DETERMINATION OF ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN DRINKING WATER
               BY LIQUID-SOLID EXTRACTION AND CAPILLARY COLUMN
                     GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY/MASS SPECTROMETRY
1.   SCOPE AND APPLICATION

     1.1   This is a general purpose method that provides procedures for
           determination of organic compounds in finished drinking water, raw
           source water, or drinking water in any treatment stage.  The method
           is applicable to a wide range of organic compounds that are
           efficiently partitioned from the water sample onto a C18 organic
           phase chemically bonded to a solid silica matrix in a cartridge or
           disk, and sufficiently volatile and thermally stable for gas
           chromatography.  Single-laboratory accuracy and precision data have
           been determined at two concentrations with two instrument systems
           for the following compounds:
          Compound

     Acenaphthylene
     Alachlor
     Aldrin
     Anthracene
     Atrazine
     Benz[a]anthracene
     Benzo[b]f1uoranthene
     Benzo[k]f1uoranthene
     Benzo[a]pyrene
     Benzo[g,h,i]perylene
     Butyl benzylphthalate
     Chlordane components
       Alpha-chlordane
       Gamma-chlordane
       Trans nonachlor
     2-Chlorobiphenyl
     Chrysene
     Dibenz[a,h]anthracene
     Di-n-butylphthalate
     2,3-Dichlorobiphenyl
     Diethylphthalate
     Bis(2-ethylhexyl)adipate
     Bi s(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate
     Dimethylphthalate
     Endrin
     Fluorene
     Heptachlor
MW1

152
269
362
178
215
228
252
252
252
276
312

406
406
440
188
228
278
278
222
222
222
390
194
378
166
370

324
Chemical Abstracts Service
	Registry Number	
          208
         15972
          309
          120
          1912
            56
          205
          207
            50
          191-
            85-

          5103-
          5103-
         39765-
          2051-
          218-
            53-
            84-
         16605-
            84-
          103-
          117-
          131-
            72-
            86-
            76-
•96-8
-60-8
-00-2
-12-7
•24-9
-55-3
-82-3
•08-9
-32-8
-24-2
-68-7

-71-9
-74-2
-80-5
-60-7
-01-9
-70-3
-72-2
-91-7
-66-2
-23-1
-81-7
-11-3
-20-8
 73-7
 44-8

-------

Compound
Heptachlor epoxide
2,2',3,3',4,4I,6-Heptachloro-
bi phenyl
Hexachlorobenzene
2,2',4,4',5,6'-Hexachloro-
bi phenyl
Hexachl orocycl opentadi ene
Indeno[l,2,3,c,d]pyrene
Lindane
,, Methoxychlor
2,2', 3,3', 4,5', 6,6' -Qcta-
chlorobi phenyl
2,2',3',4,6-Pentachloro-
biphenyl
Pentachlorophenol
Phenanthrene
. Pyrene
Simazine
2 , 2 ' , 4 , 4 ' -Tetrachl orobi phenyl
Toxaphene mixture
2, 4, 5-Trichl orobi phenyl

MW1
386

392
282

358
270
276
288
344

426

324
264
178
202
201
290

256
Chemical Abstracts Service
Reaistrv Number
1024-57-3

52663-71-5
118-74-1

60145-22-4
77-47-4
193-39-5
58-89-9 :
72-43-5

40186-71-8

60233-25-2
87-86-5
85-01-8
129-00-0
122-34-9
2437-79-8
8001-35-2
15862-07-4
     1.2
 Monoisotopic molecular weight calculated from the atomic masses of
the isotopes with the smallest masses.

A laboratory may use this method to identify and measure additional
analytes after the laboratory obtains acceptable (defined in Sect.
10) accuracy and precision data for each added analyte.

Method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the statistically calcu-
lated minimum amount that can be measured with 99% confidence that
the reported value is greater than zero (1).,  The MDL is compound
dependent and is particularly dependent on extraction efficiency
and sample matrix.  For the listed analytes, MDLs vary from 0.01 to
15 fig/I.  The concentration calibration range of this method is
0.1 /ig/L to 10
2.   SUMMARY OF METHOD

     Organic compound analytes, internal  standards, and surrogates are
     extracted from a water sample by passing 1 liter of sample water through
     a cartridge or disk containing a solid inorganic matrix coated with a
     chemically bonded C18 organic phase (liquid-solid extraction,  LSE).  The
     organic compounds are eluted from the LSE cartridge or disk with a small
     quantity of methyl ene chloride,  and  concentrated further by evaporation
     of some of the solvent.   The sample  components are separated, identified,
     and measured by injecting an aliquot  of the concentrated methyl ene

                                     325

-------
     chloride extract into a high resolution fused silica capillary column of
     a gas chromatography/mass spectrometry (GC/MS) system.  Compounds eluting
     from the GC column are identified by comparing their measured mass
     spectra and retention times to reference spectra and retention times in a
     data base.  Reference spectra and retention times for analytes are
     obtained by the measurement of calibration standards under the same
     conditions used for samples.  The concentration of each identified
     component is measured by relating the MS response of the quantitation ion
     produced by that compound to the MS response of the quantitation ion
     produced by a compound that is used as an internal standard.  Surrogate
     analytes, whose concentrations are known in every sample, are measured
     with the same internal standard calibration procedure.

3.   DEFINITIONS

     3.1   Internal standard — A pure analyte(s) added to a solution in known
           amount(s) and used to measure the relative responses of other
           method analytes and surrogates that are components of the same
           solution.  The internal standard must be an analyte that is not a
           sample component.

     3.2   Surrogate analyte — A pure analyte(s), which is extremely unlikely
           to be found in any sample, and which is added to a sample aliquot
           in known amount(s) before extraction and is measured with the same
           procedures used to measure other sample components.  The purpose of
           a surrogate analyte is to monitor method performance with each
           sample.

     3.3   Laboratory duplicates (LD1 and LD2) — Two sample aliquots taken in
           the analytical laboratory and analyzed separately with identical
           procedures.  Analyses of LD1 and LD2 give a measure of the
           precision associated with laboratory procedures, but not with
           sample collection, preservation, or storage procedures.

     3.4   Field duplicates (FD1 and FD2) — Two separate samples collected at
           the same time and place under identical circumstances and treated
           exactly the same throughout field and laboratory procedures.
           Analyses of FD1 and FD2 give a measure of the precision associated
           with sample collection, preservation, and storage, as well as with
           laboratory procedures.

     3.5   Laboratory reagent blank (LRB) — An aliquot of reagent water that
           is treated exactly as a sample including exposure to all glassware,
           equipment, solvents, reagents, internal standards, and surrogates
           that are used with other samples.  The LRB is used to determine if
           method analytes or other interferences are present in the
           laboratory environment, the reagents, or the apparatus.

     3.6   Field reagent blank (FRB) -- Reagent water placed in a sample
           container in the laboratory and treated as a sample in all
           respects, including exposure to sampling site conditions, storage,
           preservation, and all analytical procedures.  The purpose of the

                                      326

-------
      FRB is to determine if method analytes or other interferences are
      present in the field environment.

3.7   Laboratory performance check solution (LPC) — A solution of method
      analytes, surrogate compounds, and internal standards used to
      evaluate the performance of the instrument system with respect to a
      defined set of method criteria.

3.8   Laboratory fortified blank (LFB) ~ An aliquot of reagent water to
      which known quantities of the method analytes are added in the
      laboratory.  The LFB is analyzed exactly like a sample, and its
      purpose is to determine whether the methodology is in control, and
      whether the laboratory is capable of making accurate and precise
      measurements at the required method detection limit.

3.9   Laboratory fortified sample matrix (LFM) — An aliquot of an
      environmental sample to which known quantities of the method
      analytes are added in the laboratory.  The LFM is analyzed exactly
      like a sample, and its purpose is to determine whether the sample
      matrix contributes bias to the analytical results.  The background
      concentrations of the analytes in the sample matrix must be
      determined in a separate aliquot and the measured values in the LFM
      corrected for background concentrations.

3.10  Stock standard solution — A concentrated solution containing a
      single certified standard that is a method analyte,, or a
      concentrated solution of a single analyte prepared in the
      laboratory with an assayed reference compound.  Stock standard
      solutions are used to prepare primary dilution standards.

3.11  Primary dilution standard solution — A solution of several
      analytes prepared in the laboratory from stock standard solutions
      and diluted as needed to prepare calibration solutions and other
      needed analyte solutions.

3.12  Calibration standard (CAL) — a solution prepared from the primary
      dilution standard solution and stock standard solutions of the
      internal standards and surrogate analytes.  The CAL solutions are
      used to calibrate the instrument response with respect to analyte
      concentration.

3.13  Qual.ity control sample (QCS) — a sample matrix containing method
      analytes or a solution of method analytes in a water miscible
      solvent which is used to fortify reagent water or environmental
      samples.  The QCS is obtained from a source external to the
      laboratory, and is used to check laboratory performance with
      externally prepared test materials.
                                 327

-------
4.   INTERFERENCES

     4.1   During analysis, major contaminant sources are reagents and liquid-
           solid extraction columns.  Analyses of field and laboratory reagent
           blanks provide information about the presence of contaminants.

     4.2   Interfering contamination may occur when a sample containing low
           concentrations of compounds is analyzed immediately after a sample
           containing relatively high concentrations of compounds.  Syringes
           and splitless injection port liners must be cleaned carefully or
           replaced as needed.  After analysis of a sample containing high
           concentrations of compounds, a laboratory reagent blank should be
           analyzed to ensure that accurate values are obtained for the next
           sample.

5.   SAFETY

     5.1   The toxicity or carcinogen!city of chemicals used in this method
           has not been precisely defined; each chemical should be treated as
           a potential health hazard, and exposure to these chemicals should
           be minimized.  Each laboratory is responsible for maintaining
           awareness of OSHA regulations regarding safe handling of chemicals
           used in this method.  Additional references to laboratory safety
           are cited (2-4).

     5.2   Some method analytes have been tentatively classified as known or
           suspected human or mammalian carcinogens.  Pure standard materials
           and stock standard solutions of these compounds should be handled
           with suitable protection to skin, eyes, etc.

6.   Apparatus and Equipment

     6.1   All glassware must be meticulously cleaned.  This may be
           accomplished by washing with detergent and water, rinsing with
           water, distilled water, or solvents, air-drying, and heating (where
           appropriate) in an oven.  Volumetric glassware is never heated.

     6.2   Sample containers.  1-liter or 1-quart amber glass bottles fitted
           with a Teflon-lined screw cap.  (Bottles in which high purity
           solvents were received can be used as sample containers without
           additional  cleaning if they have been handled carefully to avoid
           contamination during use and after use of original contents.)

     6.3   Separatory funnels.  2-liter and 100-mL with a Teflon stopcock.

     6.4   Liquid chromatography column reservoirs.  Pear-shaped 100- or 125-
           mL vessels without a stopcock but with a ground glass outlet joint
           sized to fit the liquid-solid extraction column.  (Lab Glass, Inc.
           part no. ML-700-706S, with a 24/40 top outer joint and a 14/35
           bottom inner joint, or equivalent).  A 14/35 outlet joint fits some
           commercial  cartridges.
                                     328

-------
6.5   Syringe needles. No. 18 or 20 stainless steel.

6.6   Vacuum flasks.  1- or 2-liter with solid 'rubber stoppers.

6.7   Volumetric flasks, various sizes.

6.8   Laboratory or aspirator vacuum system.  Sufficient capacity to
      maintain a slight vacuum of 13 cm (5 in.) of mercury in the vacuum
      flask.

6.9   Micro syringes, various sizes.

6.10  Vials.  Various sizes of amber vials with Teflon-lined screw caps.

6.11  Drying column.  Approximately 1.2 cm x 40 cm with 10 mL graduated
      collection vial.

6.12  Analytical balance.  Capable of weighing 0.0001 g accurately.

6.13  Fused silica capillary gas chromatography column.  Any capillary
      column that provides adequate resolution, capacity, accuracy, and
      precision (Sect. 10) can be used.  A 30 m X 0.25 mm id fused silica
      capillary column coated with a 0.25 urn bonded film of polyphenyl-
      methylsilicone  is recommended (J&W DB-5 or equivalent).

6.14  Gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer/data system (GC/MS/DS)

      6.14.1  The GC  must be capable of temperature programming and be
              equipped for split!ess/split or on-column capillary
              injection.  The injection tube liner should be quartz and
              about 3 mm  in diameter.  The injection system must not
              allow the analytes to contact hot stainless steel or other
              metal surfaces that promote decomposition.

      6.14.2  The GC/MS interface should allow the capillary column or
              transfer line exit to be placed within a few mm of the ion
              source.  Other interfaces, for example the open split
              interface,  are acceptable as long as the system has
              adequate sensitivity  (see Sect. 9 for calibration
              requirements).

      6.14.3  The mass spectrometer must be capable of electron
              ionization  at a nominal electron energy of 70 eV.  The
              spectrometer must be capable of scanning from 45 to 450 amu
              with a  complete scan cycle time (including scan overhead)
              of 1.5  sec  or less.   (Scan cycle time = Total MS data
              acquisition time in sec divided by number of scans in the
              chromatogram).  The spectrometer must produce a mass
              spectrum that meets all criteria in Table 1 when 5 ng or
              less of DFTPP is introduced into the GC.  An average
              spectrum across the DFTPP GC peak may be used to test
              instrument  performance.

                                 329

-------
     6.15
6.14.4  An interfaced data system is required to acquire, store,
        reduce, and output mass spectral data.  The computer
        software must have the capability of processing stored
        GC/MS data by recognizing a GC peak within any given
        retention time window, comparing the mass spectra from the
        GC peak with spectral data in a user-created data base, and
        generating a list of tentatively identified compounds with
        their retention times and scan numbers.  The software must
        also allow integration of the ion abundance of an/specific
        ion between specified time or scan number limits,
        calculation of response factors as defined in Sect. 9.2.6
        (or construction of a second or third order regression
        calibration curve), calculation of response factor  .
        statistics (mean and standard deviation), and calculation
        of concentrations of analytes using either the calibration
        curve or the equation in Sect. 12.

Millipore Standard Filter Apparatus,  ALL GLASS. This will be used
if the disks are to be used to carry out the extraction instead of
the cartridges.
7.   REAGENTS AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

     7.1   Helium carrier gas, as contaminant free as possible.

     7.2   Liquid-solid extraction (LSE) cartridges.   Cartridges are inert
           non- leaching plastic, for example polypropylene,  or glass,  and
           must not contain plasticizers, such as phthalate esters or
           adipates, that leach into methylene chloride.   The cartridges are
           packed with about 1 gram of silica, or other inert inorganic
           support, whose surface is modified by chemically bonded octadecyl
           (cis) groups.  The packing must  have a narrow size distribution and
           must not leach organic compounds into methylene chloride.  One
           liter of water should pass through the cartridge in about 2  hrs
           with the assistance of a slight vacuum of  about 13 cm (5 in.) of
           mercury.  Sect.  10 provides criteria for acceptable LSE cartridges
           which are available from several commercial  suppliers.

           The extraction disks contain approximately 0.5  grams of 8 urn
           octadecyl bonded silica uniformly enmeshed in a matrix  of inert
           PFTE fibrils.   The size of the disks is  47mm x  0.5mm.   As with
           cartridges, the disks should not contain any organic compounds,
           either from the PFTE or the bonded silica,  which will leach  into
           the methylene  chloride eluant.  One liter  of reagent water should
           pass through the disks in 5-20 minutes using a  vacuum of about 66cm
           (26 in.) of mercury.   Section 10 provides  criteria for  acceptable
           LSE disks which  are available commercially.
     7.3    Solvents
           7.3.1    Methylene  chloride,  acetone,  toluene  and methanol
                   purity pesticide  quality  or equivalent.

                                     330
                                                           High

-------
      7.3.2   Reagent water.  Water in which an interferent is not
              observed at the method detection limit of the compound of
              interest.  Prepare reagent water by passing tap water
              through a filter bed containing about 0.5 kg of activated
              carbon or by using a water purification system.  Store in
              clean, narrow-mouth bottles with Teflon-lined septa and
              screw caps.

7.4   Hydrochloric acid. 6N.

7.5   Sodium sulfate, anhydrous.  (Soxhlet extracted with methylene
      chloride for a minimum of 4 hrs.)

7.6   Stock standard solutions.  Individual solutions of analytes, surro-
      gates, and internal standards may be purchased as certified
      solutions or prepared from pure materials.  To prepare, add 10 mg
      (weighed on an analytical balance to 0.1 mg) of the pure material
      to 1.9 mi. of methanol or acetone in a 2-mL .volumetric flask, dilute
      to the mark, and transfer the solution to an amber glass vial.  If
      the analytical standard is available only in quantities smaller
      than 10 mg, reduce the volume of solvent accordingly.  Some
      polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons are not soluble in methanol or
      acetone, and their stock standard solutions are prepared in
      toluene.  Methylene chloride should be avoided as a solvent for
      standards because its high vapor pressure leads to rapid
      evaporation and concentration changes.  Methanol and acetone are
      not as volatile as methylene chloride, but their solutions must
      also be handled with care to avoid evaporation.  Compounds 10, 11,
      and 35 in Table 2 are soluble in acetone.  Compounds 12, 13, and 20
      in Table 2 are soluble in toluene.  If compound purity is certified
      by the supplier at >96%, the weighed amount can be used without
      correction to calculate the concentration of the solution
      (5 /ig//iL).  Store the amber vials in a dark cool place.

7.7   Primary dilution standard solution.  The stock standard solutions
      are used to prepare a primary dilution standard.solution that
      contains multiple analytes.  The recommended solvent for this
      dilution is acetone.  Aliquots of each of the stock standard
      solutions are combined to produce the primary dilution in which the
      concentration of the analytes is at least equal to the
      concentration of the most concentrated calibration solution, that
      is, 10 ng//iL.  Store the primary dilution standard solution in an
      amber vial in a dark cool place, and check frequently for signs of
      deterioration or evaporation,  especially just before preparing
      calibration solutions.

7.8   Fortification solution of internal standards and surrogates.
      Prepare a solution of acenaphthene-D10, phenanthrene-D10,
      chrysene-Dt2, and perylene-D12, in methanol  or acetone at a
      concentration of 500 /jg/mL of each.  This solution is used in the
      preparation of the calibration solutions.   Dilute a portion of this
      solution by 10 to 50 /zg/mL and use this solution to fortify the

                                331

-------
     7.9
actual water samples (see Sect. 11.2).  Other surrogates, for
example, caffeine-  N2 and pyrene-D1Q may be included in this
solution as needed  (a 100-/zl_ aliquot of this 50 fig/ml solution
added to 1 liter of water gives a concentration of 5 /zg/L of each
internal standard or surrogate).  Store this solution in an amber
vial in a dark cool place.

MS performance check solution.  Prepare a 5 ng//iL solution of DFTPP
in methylene chloride.  Store this solution in an amber vial in a
dark cool place.
     7.10  Calibration solutions (CAL1 through CAL6).  Prepare a series of six
           concentration calibration solutions in acetone which contain all
           analytes except pentachlorophenol and toxaphene at concentrations
           of 10, 5, 2, 1, 0.5, and 0.1 ng//*L, with a constant concentration
           of 5 ng/nl of each internal standard and surrogate in each CAL
           solution. CAL1 through CAL6 are prepared by combining appropriate
           aliquots of the primary dilution standard solution (7.7) and the
           fortification solution (500 /zg/mL) of internal standards and
           surrogates (7.8). Pentachlorophenol is included in this solution at
           a concentration four times the other analytes.  Toxaphene CAL
           solutions should be prepared as separate solutions at
           concentrations of 250, 200, 100, 50, 25, and 10 ng//zL.  Store these
           solutions in amber vials in a dark cool place.  Check these
           solutions regularly for signs of deterioration, for example, the
           appearance of anthraquinone from the oxidation of anthracene.

     7.11  Reducing agents.  Sodium sulfite or sodium arsenite.  Sodium thio-
           sulfate is not recommended as it may produce a residue of elemental
           sulfur that can interfere with some analytes.

     7.12  Fortification solution for optional recovery standard.  Prepare a
           solution of terphenyl-D14  in methylene  chloride at  a  concentration
           of 500 fig/ml.  An aliquot of this solution may be added (optional)
           to the extract of the LSE cartridge to check on the recovery of the
           internal standards in the extraction process.

8.   SAMPLE COLLECTION. PRESERVATION. AND HANDLING

     8.1   Sample collection.  When sampling from a water tap, open the tap
           and allow the system to flush until the water temperature has
           stabilized (usually about 2-5 min).  Adjust the flow to about 500
           mL/min and collect samples from the flowing stream.  Keep samples
           sealed from collection time until analysis.  When sampling from an
           open body of water, fill the sample container with water from a
           representative area.  Sampling equipment, including automatic
           samplers, must be free of plastic tubing, gaskets, and other parts
           that may leach analytes into water.  Automatic samplers that
           composite samples over time must use refrigerated glass sample
           containers.
                                      332

-------
     8.2   Sample dechlorination and preservation.   All  samples should be iced
           or refrigerated at 4°C  from  the  time  of  collection  until
           extraction.  Residual chlorine should be reduced at the sampling
           site by addition of a reducing agent. Add 40-50 mg of sodium
           sulfite or sodium arsehite (these may be added as solids with
           stirring until  dissolved) to each liter  of water.  Hydrochloric
           acid should be used at the sampling site to retard the
           microbiological degradation  of some analytes  in unchlorinated
           water.  The sample pH is adjusted to <2  with  6 N hydrochloric acid.
           This is the same pH used in  the extraction, and is required to
           support the recovery of pentachlorophenol.

     8.3   Holding time.  Samples must  be extracted within 7 days and the
           extracts analyzed within 30  days of sample collection.

     8.4   Field blanks.

           8.4.1   Processing of a field reagent blank (FRB) is recommended
                   along with each sample set, which is  composed of the
                   samples collected from the same  general sample site at
                   approximately the same time.   At the  laboratory, fill a
                   sample container with reagent water,  seal,  and ship to the
                   sampling site along  with the empty sample containers.
                   Return the FRB to the laboratory with filled sample
                   bottles.

           8.4.2   When hydrochloric acid is added  to samples, use the same
                   procedures to add the same amount to  the FRB.

9.   CALIBRATION

     9.1   Demonstration and documentation of acceptable initial calibration
           is required before any samples are analyzed and is required
           intermittently throughout sample analysis as  dictated by results of
           continuing calibration checks.  After initial calibration is
           successful, a continuing calibration check is required at the
           beginning of each 8 hr. period during which analyses are performed.
           Additional periodic calibration checks are good laboratory
           practice.

     9.2   INITIAL CALIBRATION

           9.2.1   Calibrate the mass and abundance scales of the MS with
                   calibration compounds and procedures  prescribed by the
                   manufacturer with any modifications necessary to meet the
                   requirements in Sect. 9.2.2.

           9.2.2   Inject into the GC a 1-/JL aliquot of the 5 ng/#L DFTPP
                   solution and acquire a mass spectrum that includes data for
                   m/z 45-450.  Use GC conditions that produce a narrow (at
                   least five scans per peak) symmetrical peak.  If the
                   spectrum does not meet all criteria (Table 1), the MS must
                   be retuned and adjusted to meet  all criteria before
                   proceeding with calibration.  An average spectrum across
                   the GC peak may be used to evaluate the performance of the
                   system.

                                     333

-------
9.2.3   Inject a 1-/JL aliquot of a medium concentration calibration
        solution, for example 0.5-2 pg/L, and acquire and store
        data from m/z 45-450 with a total cycle time (including
        scan overhead time) of 1.5 sec or less.  Cycle time should
        be adjusted to measure at least five or more spectra during
        the elution of each GC peak.

        9.2.3.1  Multi-ramp temperature program GC conditions.
                 Adjust the helium carrier gas flow rate to about
                 33 cm/sec.  Inject at 45°C and hold in split!ess
                 mode for 1 min.  Heat rapidly to 130°C.   At 3 min
                 start the temperature program: 130-180°C at
                 12°/min;  180-240°C  at  7°/min; 240-320°C at 12°/min.
                 Start data acquisition at 5 min.

        9.2.3.2  Single ramp linear temperature program.  Adjust
                 the helium carrier gas flow rate to about 33
                 cm/sec.  Inject at 40°C and hold in splitless mode
                 for 1 min.  Heat rapidly to 160°C.   At 3 min start
                 the temperature program:  160-320°C at 6°/nrin;
                 hold at 320° for 2  min.  Start data acquisition at
                 3 min.

9.2.4   Performance criteria for the medium calibration.  Examine
        the stored GC/MS data with the data system software.
        Figure 1 shows an acceptable total ion chromatogram.

        9.2.4.1  GC performance.  Anthracene and phenanthrene
                 should be separated by baseline.
                 Benzfa]anthracene and chrysene should be separated
                 by a valley whose height is less than 25% of the
                 average peak height of these two compounds.  If
                 the valley between benz[a]anthracene and chrysene
                 exceeds 25%, the GC column requires maintenance.
                 See Sect. 9.3.6.

        9.2.4.2  MS sensitivity.  The GC/MS/DS peak identification
                 software should be able to recognize a GC peak in
                 the appropriate retention time window for each of
                 the compounds in calibration solution, and make
                 correct tentative identifications.   If fewer than
                 99% of the compounds are recognized, system
                 maintenance is required.  See Sect. 9.3.6.

        9.2.4.3  Lack of degradation of endrin.  Examine a plot of
                 the abundance of m/z 67 in the region of 1.05-1.3
                 of the retention time of endrin.  This is the
                 region of elution of endrin aldehyde, a product of
                 the thermal isomerization of endrin.  Confirm that
                 the abundance of m/z 67 at the retention time of
                 endrin aldehyde is <10% of the abundance of m/z 67
                 produced by endrin.  If more than 10% endrin
                 aldehyde is observed,  system maintenance is
                 required to correct the problem.  See Sect. 9.3.6.
                          334

-------
   9.2*5   If all performance criteria are met, inject a 1-/JL aliquot
           of each of the other CAL solutions using the same GC/MS
           conditions.

   9.2.6   Calculate a response factor (RF) for each analyte and
           surrogate for each CAL solution using the internal standard
           whose retention time is nearest the retention time of the
           analyte or surrogate.  Table 2 contains suggested internal
           standards for each analyte and surrogate, and quantitation
           ions for all compounds.  This calculation is supported in
           acceptable GC/MS data system software (Sect. 6.14.4), and
           many other software programs.  RF is a unit!ess number, but
           units used to express quantities of analyte and internal
           standard must be equivalent.
                                (Ax)(Qis)
                       RF =   	
                                (A1s)(Qx)

           where:
                        Ax =    integrated abundance of the
                                 quantitation ion of the analyte.
                        Ais =?   integrated abundance of the
                                 quantitation ion internal standard.
                        Qx  =   quantity of analyte injected in ng or
                                 concentration units.
                        Qjs .= .   quantity of internal standard injected
                                 in ng or concentration units.

              9.2.6.1   For  each analyte and surrogate, calculate the
                        mean RF from the analyses of the six CAL
                        solutions.   Calculate the standard deviation
                        (SD) and the relative standard deviation (RSD)
                        from each mean: RSD = 100 (SD/M).   If the RSD
                        of any analyte or surrogate mean RF exceeds
                        30%, either analyze additional aliquots of
                        appropriate CAL solutions to obtain an
                        acceptable RSD of RFs over the entire
                        concentration range, or take action to improve
                        GC/MS  performance.  See Sect. 9.2.7.

      9.2.7   As an alternative to  calculating mean  response  factors
              and applying the RSD  test,  use the GC/MS data system
              software  or other available software to  generate  a
              linear, second, or third order regression calibration
              curve.

9.3   Continuing calibration check.  Verify the MS tune and initial
      calibration at the beginning of each 8 hr. work  shift during
      which analyses are performed using the following procedure.

      9.3.1   Inject a  l-fil aliquot of the 5ng//zL  DFTPP solution and
              acquire a mass  spectrum that includes  data  for  m/z
              45-450.   If the spectrum does  not meet all  criteria

                              335

-------
         (Table 1),  the MS must be retuned and adjusted to meet
         all  criteria before proceeding with the continuing
         calibration check.

9.3.2    Inject a l-/iL aliquot of a medium concentration
         calibration solution and analyze with the same
         conditions  used during the initial  calibration.

9.3.3    Demonstrate acceptable performance for the criteria
         shown in Sect.  9.2.4.

9.3.4    Determine that the absolute areas of the quantitation
         ions of the internal  standards and surrogate(s) have not
         decreased by more than 30% from the areas measured in
         the  most recent continuing calibration check,  or by more
         than 50% from the areas measured during initial
         calibration.   If these areas have decreased by more than
         these amounts,  adjustments must be made to restore
         system sensitivity.   These adjustments may require
         cleaning of the MS ion source,  or other maintenance as
         indicated in Sect.  9.3.6,  and recalibration.   Control
         charts are  useful  aids in  documenting system sensitivity
         changes.

9.3.5    Calculate the RF for  each  analyte and surrogate from the
         data measured in the  continuing calibration check.  The
         RF for each analyte  and surrogate must be within 30% of
         the  mean  value  measured in the  initial  calibration.
         Alternatively,  if a  second or third order regression is
         used,  the point from  the continuing calibration check
         for  each  analyte and  surrogate  must fall,  within the
         analyst's judgement,  on the curve from the initial
         calibration.   If these conditions do not  exist,  remedial
         action must be  taken  which may  require reinitial
         calibration.

9.3.6    Some possible remedial  actions.   Major maintenance  such
         as cleaning an  ion source,  cleaning quadrupole  rods,
         etc.  require  returning to  the initial  calibration  step.

         9.3.6.1   Check and adjust GC and/or MS operating
                  conditions; check the MS resolution, and
                  calibrate the mass scale.

         9.3.6.2   Clean or replace the splitless injection
                  liner; silanize a new injection liner.

         9.3.6.3   Flush the GC column with solvent according to
                  manufacturer's instructions.

         9.3.6.4   Break off a short portion (about 1 meter) of
                  the column from the end near the injector; or
                  replace GC column.  This action will  cause a
                  change in retention times.
                        336

-------
                     9.3.6.5   Prepare fresh CAL solutions, and repeat the
                               initial  calibration step.

                     9.3.6.6   Clean the MS ion source and rods (if a
                               quadrupole).

                     9.3.6.7   Replace any components that allow analytes to
                               come into contact with hot metal surfaces.

                     9.3.6.8   Replace the MS electron multiplier, or any
                               other faulty components.

10.     QUALITY CONTROL

       10.1  Quality control (QC) requirements are the initial demonstration
             of laboratory capability followed by regular analyses of
             laboratory reagent blanks, laboratory fortified blanks, and
             laboratory fortified matrix samples.  The laboratory must
             maintain records to document the quality of the data generated.
             Additional quality control practices are recommended.

       10.2  Initial demonstration of low system background and acceptable
             particle size and packing.  Before any samples are analyzed, or
             any time a new supply of cartridges or disks is received from a
             supplier, it must be demonstrated that a laboratory reagent
             blank (LRB) is reasonably free of contamination that would
             prevent the determination of any analyte of concern.  In this
             same experiment, it must be demonstrated that the particle size
             and packing of the LSE cartridge or disk are acceptable.
             Consistent flow rate is an indication of acceptable particle
             size distribution and packing.

             10.2.1  A major source of potential  contamination  is the
                     liquid-solid extraction  (LSE) cartridge  which  could
                     contain phthalate esters,  silicon compounds, and other
                     contaminants that could  prevent  the determination  of
                     method  analytes  (5).   Although disks  are made  of a
                     teflon matrix, they may  still contain phthalate
                     materials.  Generally, phthalate esters  will be leached
                     from  the cartridges into methylene  chloride  and produce
                     a variable  background  that  is equivalent to  <2 /zg/L in
                     the water sample.   If  the  background  contamination is
                     sufficient  to prevent  accurate and  precise  analyses, the
                     condition must be corrected  before  proceeding  with the
                      initial demonstration.   Figure 2 shows unacceptable
                     background  contamination from a  poor  quality commercial
                     LSE cartridge.   The background contamination is the
                     large broad peak,  and  the  small  peaks are method
                    . analytes present at a  concentration equivalent to  2
                     /zg/L.   Several sources of  LSE cartridges may be
                     evaluated before an acceptable supply is identified.

             10.2.2  Other sources of background  contamination  are  solvents,
                     reagents, and glassware.   Background  contamination must
                     be reduced  to an acceptable  level before proceeding with


                                      337

-------
               the next section.   In  general,  background  from method
               analytes should be below the method  detection  limit.

      10.2.3   One liter of water should pass  through  a cartridge  in
               about 2 hrs with a partial  vacuum of about 13  cm (5 in.)
               of mercury.  The flow  rate through a disk  should be
               about 5-20 minutes for a liter  of drinking water, using
               full  aspirator or pump vacuum.   The  extraction time
               should not vary unreasonably among a set of LSE
               cartridges or disks.

10.3  Initial demonstration of laboratory  accuracy and precision.
      Analyze four to  seven replicates of  a laboratory fortified blank
      containing each  analyte of concern at a concentration  in the
      range of 2-5 /zg/L  (see regulations and maximum contaminant
      levels for guidance on appropriate concentrations).

      10.3.1   Prepare each  replicate by adding  an  appropriate aliquot
               of the primary dilution standard  solution,  or  another
               certified quality control  sample,  to reagent water.
               Analyze each  replicate according  to  the  procedures
               described in  Sect.  11  and on a  schedule  that results in
               the  analyses  of all replicates  over  a period of several
               days.

      10.3.2   Calculate the measured concentration of  each analyte in
               each  replicate,  the mean concentration of  each analyte
               in  all  replicates,  and mean  accuracy (as mean  percentage
               of true value)  for each analyte,  and the precision  (as
               relative standard  deviation,  RSD)  of the measurements
               for  each analyte.   Calculate the  MDL of  each analyte
               using  the procedures described  in  Sect.  13.112 (1).

      10.3.3   For  each analyte  and surrogate,  the  mean accuracy,
               expressed as  a  percentage  of the  true value, should be
               70-130% and the  RSD should be <30%.  Some  analytes,
               particularly  the  polycyclic  aromatic hydrocarbons with
               molecular weights  >250,  are  measured at  concentrations
               below  2 #g/L, with  a mean  accuracy of 35-130%  of true
               value.   The MDLs  should be sufficient to detect analytes
               at the regulatory  levels.   If these  criteria are not met
               for  an analyte,  take remedial action and repeat the
               measurements  for  that  analyte to  demonstrate acceptable
               performance before  samples are  analyzed.

      10.3.4   Develop and maintain a system of  control charts to plot
               the precision and  accuracy of analyte and  surrogate
              measurements  as  a  function of time.  Charting  of
               surrogate  recoveries is  an especially valuable activity
               since  these are present  in every  sample  and  the
               analytical  results will  form a  significant record of
              data quality.

10.4  Monitor the integrated areas of the quantisation ions of the
      internal  standards and surrogates in continuing  calibration
      checks (see Sect. 9.3.4).  In  laboratory fortified  blanks or
                              338

-------
       samples,  the  integrated  areas of  internal  standards  and
       surrogates will  not  be constant because the volume of the
       extract will  vary  (and is difficult  to keep constant).   But the
       ratios of the areas  should  be reasonably constant in laboratory
       fortified blanks and samples.  The addition of  10 /iL of  the
       recovery  standard, terphenyl-D14 (500 fig/ml),  to the extract is
       optional, and may  be used to monitor the recovery of internal
       standards and surrogates in laboratory fortified blanks  and
       samples.  Internal standard recovery should be  in excess of 70%.

 10.5   Laboratory reagent blanks.  With  each batch of  samples processed
       as  a group within  a  work shift, analyze a  laboratory reagent
       blank to  determine the background system contamination.  Any
       time a new batch of  LSE  cartridges or disks is  received, or new
       supplies  of other  reagents  are used, repeat the demonstration  of
       low background described in 10.2.

 10.6   With each batch of samples  processed as a  group within a work
       shift, analyze a single  laboratory fortified  blank  (LFB)
       containing each analyte  of  concern at a concentration as
       determined  in 10.3.   If  more than 20 samples  are  included  in a
       batch, analyze a LFB for every 20 samples. Use the  procedures
       described in  10.3.3  to evaluate the  accuracy  of the
       measurements, and  to estimate whether the  method detection
       limits can be obtained.  If acceptable accuracy and  method
       detection limits cannot  be  achieved, the problem must be located
       and corrected before further samples are analyzed.   Add  these
       results  to the on-going  control charts to  document  data  quality.

 10.7   Determine that the sample matrix  does not  contain materials that
       adversely affect method  performance. This is accomplished by
       analyzing replicates of  laboratory fortified  matrix  samples and
       ascertaining  that  the precision,  accuracy, and  method detection
       limits of analytes are  in the  same range as obtained with
       laboratory  fortified blanks.   If  a variety of different  sample
       matrices are  analyzed regularly,  for example, drinking water
       from groundwater and surface water sources, matrix  independence
       should be established for each.   A laboratory fortified  sample
       matrix  should be analyzed for  every  20 samples  processed in the
       same batch.

 10.8  With each set of field  samples  a  field reagent  blank (FRB)
       should  be analyzed.   The results  of  these  analyses  will  help
       define  contamination resulting  from  field  sampling  and
       transportation activities.

 10.9  At least quarterly,  replicates  of laboratory  fortified  blanks
       should  be analyzed to determine  the  precision of  the laboratory
       measurements.  Add these results  to  the  on-going  control charts
       to document data quality (as  in  Sect. 10.3).

10.10   At least quarterly,  analyze a  quality control sample from an
       external source.  If measured  analyte concentrations are not  of
       acceptable accuracy  (Sect.  10.3.3),  check  the entire analytical
       procedure to locate  and correct  the  problem source.


                               339

-------
      10.11  Numerous other quality control measures are incorporated into
             other parts of this procedure, and serve to alert the analyst to
             potential problems.

11.   PROCEDURE

      11.1  CARTRIDGE EXTRACTION

             11.1.1   Setup the  extraction  apparatus  shown' in  Figure  3A.  The
                      reservoir  is  not  required, but  recommended  for
                      convenient operation.  Water drains  from the  reservoir
                      through  the LSE cartridge and into a  syringe  needle
                      which is inserted through a rubber stopper  into the
                      suction  flask.  A slight vacuum of 13 cm (5 in.) of
                      mercury  is used during all operations with  the
                      apparatus.  The pressure used is critical as  a  vacuum >
                      than 13  cm may result in poor precision.  About 2 hrs is
                      required to draw  a liter of water through the system.

             11.1.2   Pour the water sample into the  2-L separatory funnel
                      with the stopcock closed, add 5 ml methanol,  and mix
                      well.  Residual chlorine should not be present  as a
                      reducing agent should have been added at the  time of
                      sampling.   Also the pH of the sample  should be  about 2.
                      If residual chlorine  is present and/or the  pH is >2, the
                      sample may be invalid.  Add a 100-juL  aliquot  of the
                      fortification solution (50 fig/ml) for internal  standards
                      and surrogates, and mix immediately until homogeneous.
                      The concentration of these compounds  in  the water should
                      be 5 fig/I.

             11.1.3   Flush each  cartridge with two 10 ml aliquots  of
                      methylene  chloride, followed by two 10 ml aliquots of
                      methanol,  letting the cartridge drain dry after each
                      flush.   These solvent flushes may be accomplished by
                      adding the  solvents directly to the solvent reservoir in
                      Figure 3A.  Add 10 ml of reagent water to the solvent
                      reservoir,  but before the reagent water  level drops
                      below the  top edge of the packing in the LSE  cartridge,
                      open the stopcock of the separatory funnel   and  begin
                      adding sample water to the solvent reservoir.   Close the
                      stopcock when an  adequate amount of sample  is in the
                      reservoir.

             11.1.4   Periodically open the stopcock  and drain a  portion of
                      the sample  water  into the solvent reservoir.  The water
                      sample will drain into the cartridge, and from  the exit
                      into the suction flask.  Maintain the packing material
                      in the cartridge  immersed in water at all times.  After
                      all of the  sample has passed through the LSE  cartridge,
                     wash the separatory funnel  and  cartridge with 10 mL of
                      reagent water, and draw air through the cartridge for 10
                     min.

             11.1.5  Transfer the 125-mL solvent reservoir and LSE cartridge
                      (from Figure 3A) to the elution apparatus (Figure 3B).

                                     340

-------
r\
                                 The same 125-mL solvent reservoir is used for both
                                 apparatus.  Wash the 2-liter separatory funnel with 5 ml
                                 of methylene chloride and collect the washings.  Close
                                 the stopcock on the 100-mL separatory funnel of the
                                 elution apparatus, add the washings to the reservoir and
                                 enough additional methylene chloride to bring the volume
                                 back up to 5 ml and elute the LSE cartridge.  Elute the
                                 LSE cartridge with an additional 5 ml of methylene
                                 chloride (10-mL total).  A small amount of nitrogen
                                 positive pressure may be used to elute the cartridge.
                                 Small amounts of residual water from the LSE cartridge
                                 will form an immiscible layer with the methylene
                                 chloride in the 100-mL separatory funnel.  Open the
                                 stopcock and allow the methylene chloride to pass
                                 through the drying column packed with anhydrous sodium
                                 sulfate (1-in) and into the collection vial.  Do not
                                 allow the water layer to enter the drying column.
                                 Remove the 100 mL separatory funnel and wash the drying
                                 column with 2 mL of methylene chloride.  Add this to the
                                 extract.  Concentrate the extract to 1 mL under a gentle
                                 stream of nitrogen.  If desired, gently warm the extract
                                 in a water bath to evaporate to between 0.5 - 1.0 mL
                                 (without gas flow).  Do not concentrate the extract to
                                 less than 0.5 mL (or dryness) as this will result in
                                 losses of analytes.  If desired, add an aliquot of the
                                 recovery standard to the concentrated extract to check
                                 the recovery of the internal standards (see Sect. 10.4).

                  11.2   DISK  EXTRACTION  (This may be manual or automatic)

                         11.2.1   Preparation of Disks

                                 11.2.1.1  Insert  the  disk into  the  47mm filter apparatus
                                           as  shown  in  Figure 4.   Wash  the  disk with  5mL
                                           methylene chloride (MeC12)  by adding the MeC12
                                           to  the  disk,  drawing  about  half  through the
                                           disk, allowing  it  to  soak the disk for  about a
                                           minute, then  drawing  the  remaining MeC12
                                           through the  disk.

                                 11.2.1.2  Pre-wet the  disk with  5 mL methanol  (MeOH)  by
                                           adding  the  MeOH to the disk  and  allowing it to
                                           soak  for  about  a minute,  then drawing most  of
                                           the remaining MeOH through.   A layer of MeOH
                                           must  be left  on the surface  of the disk, which
                                           should  not  be allowed  to  go  dry  from this
                                           point until  the end of the  sample  extraction.
                                           THIS  IS A CRITICAL STEP FOR  A UNIFORM FLOW AND
                                           GOOD  RECOVERY.

                                 11.2.1.3  Rinse the disk  with 5  mL  reagent water by
                                           adding  the water to the disk and drawing most
                                           through,  again  leaving a  layer on  the surface
                                           of  the disk.

                         11.2.2   Add 5 mL MeOH per liter of water sample.  Mix well.

                                                 341

-------
       11.2.3  Add the water sample to the reservoir and turn on the
               vacuum to begin the extraction.  Full aspirator vacuum
               may be used.  Particulate-free water may pass through
               the disk in as little as ten minutes or less.  Extract
               the entire sample, draining as much water from the
               sample container as possible.

       11.2.4  Remove the filtration top from the vacuum flask, but do
               .not disassemble the reservoir and fritted base.  Empty
               the water from the flask, and insert a suitable sample
               tube to contain the eluant.  The only constraint on the
               sample tube is that it fit around the drip tip of the
               fritted base.  Reassemble the apparatus.

       11.2.5  Add 5 ml methylene chloride to the sample bottle, and
               rinse the inside walls thoroughly.  Allow the methylene
               chloride to settle to the bottom of the bottle, and
               transfer to the disk with a pipet or syringe, rinsing
               the sides of the glass filtration reservoir  in the
               process.  Draw about half of the methylene chloride
               through the disk, release the vacuum, and allow the disk
               to soak for a minute.  Draw the remaining methylene
               chloride through the disk.

       11.2.6  Repeat the above step twice.  Pour the combined eluates
               through a small funnel with filter paper containing
               three grams of anhydrous sulfate.  Rinse the test tube
               and sodium sulfate with two 5 ml portions of methylene
               chloride.  Collect all the extract and washings in a
               concentrator tube.

       11.2.7  Concentrate the extract to 1 ml under a gentle stream of
               nitrogen.  If desired, gently warm the extract in a
               water bath or heating block to concentrate to between
               05. and 1 ml.  Do not concentrate the extract to less
               than 0.5 ml, since this will result in losses of
               analytes.

11.3   Analyze a 1-2 /tL aliquot with the GC/MS system under the same
       conditions used for the initial  and continuing calibrations
       (Sect. 9.2.3).

11.4   At the conclusion of data acquisition,  use the same software
       that was used in the calibration procedure to tentatively
       identify peaks in retention time windows of interest.  Use the
       data system software to examine the ion abundances of components
       of the chromatogram.   If any ion abundance exceeds the system
       working range,  dilute the sample aliquot and analyze the diluted
       aliquot.

11.5   Identification of analytes.  Identify a sample component by
       comparison of its mass spectrum (after background subtraction)
       to a reference spectrum in the user-created data base.   The GC
       retention time of the sample component should be within 10 sec
       of the time observed for that same compound when a calibration
       solution was analyzed.

                               342

-------
             11.5.1   In general,  all  ions that are present above 10% relative
                      abundance in the mass spectrum of the standard should be
                      present in the mass spectrum of the sample component and
                      should agree within absolute 20%.   For example, if an
                      ion has a relative abundance of 30% in the standard
                      spectrum, its abundance in the sample spectrum should be
                      in the range of  10 to 50%.  Some ions, particularly the
                      molecular ion, are of special  importance,  and should be
                      evaluated even if they are below 10% relative abundance.

             11.5.2   Identification is hampered when sample components  are
                      not resolved chromatographically and produce mass
                      spectra containing ions contributed by more than one
                      analyte.   When GC peaks obviously represent more than
                      one sample component (i.e.,  broadened peak with
                      shoulder(s)  or valley between two or more  maxima),
                      appropriate  analyte spectra and background spectra can
                      be selected  by examining plots of characteristic ions
                      for tentatively  identified components.  When analytes
                      coelute (i.e., only one GC peak is apparent),  the
                      identification criteria can be met but each analyte
                      spectrum will  contain extraneous ions contributed  by the
                      coeluting compound.

             11.5.3   Structural  isomers that produce very similar mass
                      spectra can  be explicitly identified only  if they  have
                      sufficiently different GC retention times.   See Sect.
                      9.2.4.1.   Acceptable resolution is achieved if the
                      height of the valley between two isomer peaks  is less
                      than 25% of  the  average height of the two  peak heights.
                      Otherwise,  structural  isomers  are  identified as isomeric
                      pairs.   Benzo[b]  and benzo[k]fluoranthene  are  measured
                      as an isomeric pair.

             11.5.4   Phthalate esters  and other background components appear
                      in variable  quantities in laboratory and field reagent
                      blanks,  and  generally cannot be accurately measured at
                      levels below about 2 jig/L.   Subtraction of the
                      concentration in  the blank from the concentration  in the
                      sample at or below the 2 jag/L  level  is not recommended
                      because the  concentration of the background in the  blank
                      is highly variable.

12.   CALCULATIONS

      12.1   Complete chromatographic  resolution is not necessary for
             accurate and precise measurements of analyte concentrations if
             unique ions with adequate intensities are available for
             quantitation.  For example, although two listed analytes,
             dibenz[a,h]anthracene and indeno[l,2,3,c,d]pyrene,  were not
             resolved with the GC conditions used, and produced mass spectra
             containing common ions, concentrations (Tables 3-6) were
             calculated by measuring appropriate characteristic ions.
                     i
             12.1.1   Calculate analyte  and  surrogate  concentrations.


                                     343

-------
                                      (A,.)  RF  V

                     where:
                                Cx  = concentration of analyte or  surrogate
                                         in pg/L  in the water  sample.
                                Ax  = integrated abundance of the
                                         quantitation  ion of the  analyte  in
                                         the sample.
                                Ais =  integrated abundance of the
                                         quantitation  ion of the  internal
                                         standard in the sample.
                                Qis =  total quantity  (in micrograms)  of
                                         internal standard added  to the water
                                         sample.
                                V   = original water  sample volume in liters.
                                RF  = mean response factor of analyte from
                                         the initial calibration.

             12.1.2  Alternatively,  use the GC/MS  system  software  or other
                     available proven software to  compute the concentrations
                     of the  analytes and surrogates  from  the  second or  third
                     order regression curves.

             12.1.3  Calculations  should utilize all  available  digits of
                     precision,  but  final  reported concentrations  should be
                     rounded to an  appropriate number of  significant figures
                      (one digit of uncertainity).  Experience indicates  that
                     three significant  figures may be used  for  concentrations
                     above 99 /Kj/L,  two significant  figures  for
                     concentrations  between  1-99 /tg/L,  and  one  significant
                     figure  for lower concentrations.

13.   METHOD PERFORMANCE

      13.1   Single laboratory accuracy  and precision data (Tables 3-7)  for
             each listed  analyte was obtained  at two  concentrations with the
             same extracts analyzed on more than two  different  instrument
             systems.   Seven  1-liter aliquots  of reagent water containing 2
             /ig/L of each  analyte, and five to seven  1-liter  aliquots of
             reagent water containing 0.2 /ig/L of  each analyte were analyzed
             with this  procedure.  Tables 8-10 list data gathered  using  C-18
             disks.  These data were results from  different extracts
             generated  by  a  volunteer laboratory,  Environmental  Health
             Laboratories.

             13.1.2  With these data, method  detection limits (MDL) were
                     calculated using the formula:

                     MDL - S t(n.1j1.alpha = 0-99)

             where:

                                        Student's t value for the  99%
t(n-i i-aipha = o 99i, = Student's t value  for  the
confidence level with n-1 degrees of freedom
                344

-------
                      n = number of replicates
                      S = standard deviation of replicate analyses.
       13.2  PROBLEM COMPOUNDS
             13.2.1
             13.2.2
             13.2.3
             13.2.4
            The common phthalate and adipate esters (compounds 14,
            21, and 23-26), which are widely used commercially,
            appear in variable quantities in laboratory and field
            reagent' blanks, and generally cannot be accurately or
            precisely measured at levels below about 2 /zg/L.
            Subtraction of the concentration in the blank from the
            concentration in the sample at or below the 2 fig/I level
            is not recommended because the concentrations of the
            background in blanks is highly variable.

            Some polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons are rapidly
            oxidized  and/or chlorinated in water containing
            residual chlorine.  Therefore residual chlorine must be
            reduced before analysis.

            In water free of residual chlorine, some polycyclic
            aromatic hydrocarbons (for example, compounds 9, 12, 13,
            20, and 35) are not accurately measured because of low
            recoveries in the extraction process.

            Pentachlorophenol No. 40 and hexachlorocyclopentadiene
            No. 34 may not be accurately measured.
            Pentachlorophenol is a strong acid and elutes as a broad
            weak peak.  Hexachlorocyclopentadiene is susceptible to
            photochemical and thermal decomposition.
14.   REFERENCES
     1.
     2.
     3.
     4.
     5.
Glaser, J. A., D. L. Foerst, G. D. McKee, S. A. Quave, and W. L.
Budde, "Trace Analyses for Wastewaters," Environ. Sci. Techno!. 1981
15, 1426-1435.

"Carcinogens - Working With Carcinogens," Department of Health,
Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease
Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health,
Publication No. 77-206, Aug. 1977.

"OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry," (29CFR1910),
Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206, (Revised,
January 1976).

"Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories," American Chemical
Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition,
1979.

Junk, G.A., M. J. Ayery, J. J. Richard, "Interferences in Solid-
Phase Extraction Using C-18 Bonded Porous Silica Cartridges," Anal.
Chem. 1988, 60, 1347.
                                     345

-------
       TABLE  1.   ION ABUNDANCE CRITERIA FOR BIS(PERFLUOROPHENYL)PHENYL
                  PHOSPHINE (DECAFLUOROTRIPHENYLPHOSPHINE,  DFTPP)
Mass
        Relative Abundance
           Criteria _
                                     Purpose of Checkpoint1
 51    10-80% of the base peak
 68    <2% of mass 69
 70    <2% of mass 69
127    10-80% of the base peak
197    <2% of mass 198
198    base peak or >50% of 442
199    5-9% of mass 198
275    10-60% of the base peak
365    >1% of the base peak
441    Present and < mass 443
442    base peak or >50% of 198
443    15-24% of mass 442
                                     low mass sensitivity
                                     low mass resolution
                                     low mass resolution
                                     low-mid mass sensitivity
                                     mid-mass resolution
                                     mid-mass resolution and sensitivity
                                     mid-mass resolution and isotope ratio
                                     mid-high mass sensitivity
                                     baseline threshold
                                     high mass resolution
                                     high mass resolution and sensitivity
                                     high mass resolution and isotope ratio
1A11  ions are used primarily to check the mass  measuring  accuracy  of  the mass
spectrometer and data system, and this is the most important part  of the
performance test.  The three resolution checks, which include natural
abundance isotope ratios, constitute the next most important part  of the
performance test.  The correct setting of the baseline threshold,  as indicated
by the presence of low intensity ions, is the next most important  part of the
performance test. Finally, the ion abundance ranges are designed to encourage
some standardization to fragmentation patterns.
                                      346

-------
         TABLE 2.   RETENTION TIME DATA,  QUANTITATION IONS,  AND INTERNAL
                   STANDARD REFERENCES FOR METHOD ANALYTES.
  Compound
                       Compound
                        Number
         Retention
       Time(min:sec)
        Aa     Bb
                    Quantitation
                   	Ion fm/z)
                            Internal
                            Standard
                           Reference
 Internal  standards

 acenaphthene-D10
 phenanthrene-D10
 chrysene-D12
1
2
3
 4:49
 8:26
18:14
 7:45
11:08
19:20
164
188
240
Surrogate

perylene-D12
      23:37   22:55
                       264
Target analvtes

acenaphthylene

aldrin
anthracene
atrazine
benz[a]anthracene
benzo[b]fluoranthene
benzo[k]fluoranthene
benzo[a]pyrene
benzo[g,h,i]perylene
butyl benzylphthalate
chlordane components
    alpha-chlordane
    gamma-chlordane
    trans nonachlor
2-chlorobiphenyl
chrysene
dibenz[a,h]anthracene
di-n-butylphthalate
2,3-di chlorobi phenyl
diethylphthalate
di(2-ethylhexyl)
  phthalate
di(2~ethylhexyl)adi pate
dimethylphthalate
endrin
fluorene
heptachlor
heptachlor epoxide
       4:37
          7:25
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
11:21
8:44
7:56
18:06
22:23
22:28
23:28
27:56
16:40
13:44
13:16
13:54
4:56
18:24
27:15
10:58
7:20
5:52
19:19
17:17
4:26
15:52
6:00
10:20
12:33
13:36
11:20
10:42
19:14
22:07
22:07
22:47
26:44
18:09
15:42
15:18
15:50
7:55
19:23
25:57
13:20
10:12
8:50
20:01
18:33
7:21
16:53
8:53
12:45
14:40
               152

                66
               178
               200/215
               228
               252
               252
               252
               276
               149

               375
               375
               409
               188
               228
               278
               149
               222
               149

               149
               129
               163
                81
               166
               100/160
                81/353
                1

                2
                2
                1/2
                3
                3
                3
                3
                3
                2/3

                2/3
                2/3
                2/3
                1
                3
                3
                2
                1
                1

                2/3
                2/3

               2/3
                1
               2
               2
                                     347

-------
                            TABLE"2.   (Continued)
Compound Retention Internal
Number Time(min:sec) Quantitation Standard
Comoound Aa Bb Ion (m/z) Reference
2,2l,3,3I,4,4',6-hepta-
chl orobi phenyl
hexachlorobenzene
2,2',4,4l,5,6'-hexa-
chl orobi phenyl
hexachl orocycl o-
pentadiene
indeno[l,2,3,c,d]pyrene
lindane
methoxychl or
2, 2', 3, 3', 4, 5', 6,6'-
octachl orobi phenyl
2,2',3',4,6-penta
chl orobi phenyl
pentachlorophenol
phenanthrene
pyrene
simazine
2 , 2 ' , 4 , 4 ' -t etrachl oro-
bi phenyl
toxaphene
2,4, 5-tri chl orobi phenyl
alachlor

31
32

33

34
35
36
37

38

39
40
41
42
43

44
45
46
47

18:25
7:37

14:34

3:36
27:09
8:17
18:34

18:38

12:50
8:11
8:35
13:30
7:47

11:01
11:30-23:30
9:23
""

19:25
10:20

16:30

6:15
25:50
10:57
19:30

19:33

15:00
10:51
11:13
15:29
10:35

13:25
13:00-21:30
11:59
13:19

394/396
284/286

360

237
276
181/183
227

430

326
266
178
202
201

292
159
256
160

3
1/2

2

1
3
1/2
3

3

2
2
2
.2/3
1/2

2
2
2
2
aSingle ramp linear temperature program conditions (Sect. 9.2.3.2).
''Multi-ramp linear temperature program conditions (Sect. 9.2.3.1).
                                      348

-------
TABLE 3. ACCURACY AND PRECISION DATA FROM SEVEN DETERMINATIONS OF
         THE  METHOD ANALYTES AT  2 /iG/L WITH  LIQUID-SOLID  EXTRACTION
         AND  THE  ION TRAP MASS SPECTROMETER
Compound
Number
(Table 2)
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Mean"
aSee Table
True
Cone.
(ua/U
5
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
8
2
2
2
2
25
2
2
Mean
Observed
Cone.
(ua/U
5.0
1.9
1.6
1.7
2.2
1.8
Std.
Dev.
(UQ/L)
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.3
0.2
not separated from
4.2
0.8
0.7
2.0
2.0
2.2
2.7
1.9
2.2
0.3
2.2
2.3
2.0
1.9
1.6
1.9
1.8
2.2
2.2
2.3
1.4
1.7
1.6
1.1
0.4
2.1
1.8
1.8
1.9
8.2
2.4
1.9
2.1
1.5
28.
1.7
1.8
4. Compounds 4, 40,
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.3
0.2
0.3
1.0
0.1
0.1
0.3
0.3
0.1
0.3
0.2
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.4
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.1
1.2
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.1
4.7
0.1
0.2
Rel.
Std.
Dev.
(%)
6.0
11.
13.
5.9
14.
11.
No. 11;
7.1
25.
14.
15.
10.
14.
37.
5.2
4.5
100.
14.
4.3
15.
11.
19.
11.
5.5
9.1
14.
8.7
14.
12.
25.
9.1
50.
9.5
11.
11.
5.3
15.
4.2
5.3
9.5
6.7
17.
5.9
15.
and 45 excluded
Mean Method Method
Accuracy Detection
(% of True Limit (MDL)
Conc.^ (nan \
100
95
80
85
110
90
measured
105
40
35
100
100
110
135
95
110
15
110
115
100
95
80
95
90
110
110
115
70
85
80
55
20
105
90
90
95
102
120
95
105
75
112
85
91
from the
a
a
a
a
a
a
with No. 11
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
u
a
a
a
a

15.

	 0.6 	
means.
                              349

-------
TABLE 4. ACCURACY AND PRECISION DATA FROM FIVE TO SEVEN DETERMINATIONS
         OF THE METHOD ANALYTES AT 0.2 /iG/L WITH LIQUID-SOLID EXTRACTION
         AND THE ION TRAP MASS SPECTROMETER
Compound True
Number Cone.
( Table 2^ (ua/L)
4 0.5
~
5
6
7
8
g
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
J. v
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
£i*W
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
M&an°
"Compounds
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.8
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2

0.2
0.2
4, 40,
Mean
Observed Std.
Cone'. Dev.
(ua/L) (ua/L)
0.45 0.6
0.13 0.03
0.13 0.03
0.13 0.01
0.24 0.03
0.14 0.01
not separated from No
0.25 0.04
0.03 0.01
0.03 0.02
0.32 0.07
0.17 0.04
0.19 0.03
0.17 0.08
0.19 0.03
0.21 0.01
0.03 0.02
0.48 0.09
0.20 0.03
0.45 0.21
0.39 0.16
0.31 0.16
0.21 0.01
0.12 0.12
0.21 0.05
0.22 0.01
0.19 0.04
0.19 0.03
0.16 0.04
0.19 0.03
0.04 0.01
0.04 0.03
0.22 0.02
0.11 0.01
0.19 0.05
0.13 0.02
0.78 0.08
0.20 0.004
0.18 0.005
0.25 0.04
0.14 0.04
not measured at thi
0.13 0.02
0.18 0.04
Rel . Mean Method
Std. Accuracy
Dev. (% of True
(%) Cone.}
13.
23.
23.
7.7
13.
7.1
90
65
65
65
120
70
. 11; measured with
16.
33.
67.
22.
24.
16.
47.
16.
4.8
67.
19.
15.
47.
41.
52.
4.8
100.
24.
4.5
21.
16.
25.
16.
25.
75.
9.1
9.1
26.
15.
10.
2.0
2.8
16.
29.
s level
15.
25.
bZ
15
15
160
85
95
85
95
105
150
240
100
225
195
155
105
60
105
110
95
95
80
95
20
20
110
55
95
65
97
100
90
125
70

65
95
Method
Detection
Limit (MDL)
(ua/L}
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.04
0.1
0.04
No. 11
Of*
.2
0.04
0.1
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.3
0.1
0.04
0.1
0.3
0.1
0.8
0.6
0.6
0.04
0.5
0.2
0.04
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.03
0.1
0.1
0.04
0.2
0.1
0.3
0.01
0.02
0.2
0.1

0.06
0.16
and 45 excluded from the means.
                                   350

-------
         TABLE 5. ACCURACY AND PRECISION DATA FROM SEVEN DETERMINATIONS
                  OF THE METHOD ANALYTES AT 2 nG/L WITH LIQUID-SOLID EXTRACTION
                  AND A MAGNETIC SECTOR MASS SPECTROMETER
Compound True
Number Cone.
(Table 2} fua/L>
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46h
Meanb
5
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
8
2
2
2
2
25
2
2
Mean
Observed
Cone.
(m!L\
5.7
1.9
1.6
2.2
2.4
2.2
Std.
Dev.
(ua/l)
0.34
0.22
0.18
0.67
0.46
0.87
not separated from
4.0
0.85
0.69
2.0
2.2
2.1
1.9
2.0
2.1
0.75
2.5
2.0
3.5
2.0
1.4
2.9
1.7
2.6
1.2
2.6
1.5
1.5
1.9
0.89
0.83
2.2
2.0
1.5
1.6
12.
2.3
2.0
2.5
1.6
28.
1.9
1.8
0.37
0.15
0.12
0.20
0.41
0.38
0.10
0.29
0.32
0.18
0.32
0.23
1.8
0.28
0.16
0.70
0.45
1.0
0.10
0.42
0.19
0.35
0.17
0.11
0.072
0.10
0.88
0.11
0.14
2.6
0.18
0.26
0.34
0.17
2.7
0.073
0.32
Rel.
Std.
Dev.
(%)
6.0
12.
11.
30.
19.
40
No. 11;
9.3
18.
17.
10.
19.
18.
5.2
14.
15.
24.
13.
12.
51.
14.
11.
24.
26.
38.
8.3
16.
13.
23.
8.9
12.
8.7
4.5
44.
7.3
8.8
22.
7.8
13.
14.
11.
10.
3.8
16.
Mean Method
Accuracy
(% of True
Cone.)
114
95
80
110
120
110
measured with
100
43
35
100
110
105
95
100
105
38
125
100
175
100
70
145
85
130
60
130
75
75
95
45
42
110
100
75
80
150
115
100
125
80
112
95
88
Method
Detection
Limit (MDL)
(ua/L)
a
a
a
a
a
a
No. 11
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a *
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
9.

1. 	
aSee Table 6.  Compounds 4, 40, and 45 excluded from the means.
                                     351

-------
    TABLE 6.  ACCURACY AND PRECISION DATA FROM SIX OR SEVEN DETERMINATIONS
             OF THE METHOD ANALYTES AT 0.2 /iG/L WITH LIQUID-SOLID EXTRACTION
             AND A MAGNETIC SECTOR MASS SPECTROMETER.
Compound
Number
( Table 2)
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23 ,
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Mean8
True
Cone.
rua/L)
0.5
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.8
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
Mean
Observed
Cone.
(U.Q/L)
0.67
0.11
0.11
0.14
0.26
0.24
Std.
Dev.
(UQ/L)
0.07
0.03
0.02
0.02
0.08
0.06
not separated from
0.40
0.08
0.07
0.33
0.19
0.17
0.19
0.17
0.27
0.09
1.1
0.18
0.29
0.42
0.32
0.20
0.53
0.18
0.11
0.33
0.17
0.11
0.17
0.05
0.08
0.27
0.24
0.15
0.13
1.8
0.21
0.19
0.27
0.13
0.10
0.02
0.01
0.16
0.02
0.08
0.04
0.02
0.08
0.01
1.2
0.05
0.17
0.23
0.16
0.09
0.30
0.03
0.05
0.08
0.01
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.06
0.03
0.09
0.02
0.02
0.82
0.07
0.04
0.07
0.03
Rel.
Std.
Dev.
m
9.4
24.
21.-
17.
31.
26.
No. 11;
25.
27.
22.
48.
13.
45.
18.
13.
28.
15.
109.
30.
59.
55.
50.
47.
57.
15.
42.
26.
7.1
40.
15.
35.
8.1
11.
39.
12.
13.
46.
33.
23.
27.
22.
Mean Method
Accuracy
(% of True
Cone.)
134
55
56
70
130
120
measured with
100
38
33
160
95
85
95
85
135
46
550
90
145
210
160
100
265
90
55
165
85
55
85
24
40
135
120
75
65
225
105
95
135
65
Method
Detection
Limit (MDL)
(ua/U
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.3
0.2
No. 11
0.3
0.1
0.1
0.5
0.1
0.3
0.1
0.1
0.3
0.1
4.
0.2
0.6
0.8
0.5
0.3
1.
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.04
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.02
0.1
0.3
0.1
0.1
3,
0.2
0.1
0.2
0.1
not measured at this level
0.2
0.2
0.16
0.21
0.04
0.09
23.
28.
80
102
0.12
0.3
Compounds 4,  40,  and 45 excluded from the means.
                                      352

-------
                TABLE 7.  ACCURACY AND PRECISION DATA FROM SEVEN
                         DETERMINATIONS AT 2 /iG/L WITH LIQUID-SOLID EXTRACTION
                         AND A QUADRUPOLE MASS SPECTROMETER


                       Mean             Rel .   Mean Method    Method
Compound    True     Observed    Std.   Std.    Accuracy     Detection
 Number     Cone.      Cone.     Dev.   Dev.   (% of True   Limit (MDL)
(Table 2)  (pg/L) _ (uQ/l)    (ua/l)  (%)      Cone.)
  47         2         2.4       0.4    16.      122           1.0
                                    353

-------
TABLE 8.  ACCURACY AND PRECISION DATA FROM SEVEN REPLICATES AT 0.2 /tG/L
           WITH LIQUID-SOLID C-18  DISK EXTRACTION  AND AN ION  TRAP MASS
           SPECTROMETER
Compound
Number
(Table 2}
1
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Target
Concentration
(ua/l)
0.2
5.0
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
2.0
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
20.0
0.2
0.2
Standard
Deviation
(ua/l)
0.01
0.37
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.07
0.16
0.03
0.04
0.03
0.07
0.12
0.06
0.18
0.01
0.02
0.05
0.08
0.02
0.02
0.50
0.04
0.02
0.05
0.01
0.05
0.08
0.08
0.04
0.06
0.01
0.05
0.01
0.03
0.04
0.03

0.02
0.02
0.04
0.06
2.47
0.04
0.03
Relative
Deviation
m
5.3
7.4
13.2
13.7
22.4
33.2
77.6
13.7
21.7
14.9
32.5
61.1
31.9
91.3
7.2
10.9
22.9
40.3
9.7
11.9
252.0
20.8
7.6
25.4
7.3
22.9
38.9
38.0
17.7
31.9
5.2
27.0
6.5
13.4
21.1
15.1

12.2
10.2
18.8
28.1
12.3
21.4
14.7
Mean
(aa/LV
0.22
5.55
0.26
0.22
0.21
0.29
0.40
0.21
0.26
0.23
0.37
0.19
0.19
0.55
0.16
0.27
0.18
0.47
0.17
0.27
1.54
0.36
0.23
0.23
0.20
0.28
0.36
0.28
0.22
0.19
0.34
0.29
0.22
0.20
0.20
0.17

0.20
0.24
0.19
0.21
24.80
0.19
0.11
Accuracy
(% of tarqet)
110
111
130
108
105
147
199
107
128
115
183
95
93
276
78
136
90
233
87
133
771
180
117
117
101
139
181
141
109
96
170
143
110
100
99
84

102
121
94
107
123
95
55
                                   354

-------
TABLE 9.  ACCURACY AND PRECISION DATA FROM SEVEN REPLICATES AT 2.0 flG/L
          WITH  LIQUID-SOLID C-18 DISK EXTRACTION AND AN  ION TRAP MASS
          SPECTROMETER
Compound
Number
( Table 2)
I
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
. 27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Target
Concentration
riia/L)
2
5
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
20
2
2
2
2
100
2
2
Standard
Deviation
rua/n
0.18
0.45
0.30
0.17
0.47
0.21
0.62
0.57
0.31
0.28
0.33
0.62
1.02
1.39
0.22
0.23
0.27
0.23
0.38
0.22
0.38
0.26
0.69
0.12
0.19
0.30
0.15
0.64
0.85
0.52
0.22
0.37
0.42
0.34
0.77
0.29
15.16
0.20
0.17
0.27
0.15
3.36
0.58
0.07
Relative
Deviation
(%)
9.2
9.1
14.8
8.6
23.5
10.4
30.9
28.7
15.6
13.9
16.7
31.1
51.2
69.3
11.2
11.6
13.4
11.3
18.9
11.1
19.1
12.8
34.6
6.1
9.7
15.0
7.4
32.2
42.3
25.9
11.0
18.3
21.2
16.8
38.5
14.7
75.8
9.9
8.3
13.3
7.4
3.4
28.8
3.5
Mean
(UQ/L)
2.00
5.22
2.14
2.25
2.78
2.21
2.84
2.30
2.61
2.28
2.92
1.21
1.92
3.29
2.52
1.99
2.25
2.45
2.35
2.23
3.25
2.49
1.80
1.97
2.15
2.10
2.41
2.46
1.96
2.05
1.42
2.31
2.69
2.34
0.97
2.11
19.51
2.20
2.34
2.37
2.11
98.33
1.65
1.55
Accuracy
(% of taraet}
100
104
107
112
139
111
142
115
130
114
146
61
96
164
126
100
113
123
117
111
163
124
90
98
108
105
121
123
98
102
71
115
134
117
49
106
98
110
117
119
106
98
82
77
                                 355

-------
TABLE 10.  MINIMUM DETECTION LIMITS FROM SEVEN REPLICATES USING
            LIQUID-SOLID  EXTRACTION C-18 DISKS AND AN  ION TRAP MASS
            SPECTROMETER

     Chemical  Name	Minimum Detection  Limits	

     Acenaphtyiene                             0.033
     Alachlor                                  0.092
     Aldrin                                    0.083
     Anthracene                                0.086
     Atrazine                                  0.140
     Benz[a]anthracene                        0.224
     Benzo[b]fluoranthene                     0.488
     Benzo[k]fluoranthene                     0.086
     Benzo[a]pyrene                           0.137
     Benzo[ghi]perylene                       0.094
     Butyl benzylphthalate                     0.204
     Chlordane-alpha                          0.384
     Chiordane-gamma                          0.200
     Chlordane (transnonachlor)                0.574
     Chrysene                                  0.068
     Dibenz[ah]anthracene                     0.144
     Di-n-butylphthalate                       0.253
     Diethylphthalate                         0.075
     Di(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate                1.584
     Di(2-ethlyhexyl)adipate                  0.131
     Dimethylphthalate                        0.048
     Endrin                                    0.160
     Fluorene                                  0.046
     Heptachlor                               0.144
     Heptachlorepoxide                        0.244
     Hexachlorobenzene                        0.111
     Hexachlorocyclopentadiene                0.039
     Indeno[123cd]pyrene                       0.170
     Lindane                                  0.041
     Methoxychlor                             0.084
     PCB-mono-Cl-isomer                       0.045
     PCB-di-Cl-isomer                         0.061
     PCB-tri-Cl-ISOMER                        0.135
     PCB-tetra-Cl-isomer                       0.177
     PCB-penta-Cl-isomer                       0.095
     PCB-hexa-Cl-isomer                       0.200
     PCB-hepta-Cl-isomer                       0.239
     PCB-octa-Cl-isomer                       0.133
     Pentachlorophenol                        47.648
     Phenanthrene                             0.076
     Pyrene                                    0.064
     Simazine                                  0.118
     Toxaphene                                7.763
                              356

-------
s
00
                                   357

-------
  s
M
8
EJ
e>
                                                                            cxa
                                                                              •cvi
                                          358

-------
                     2 Liter
                    separetory
                     funnel
                 125ml
                 solvent
                reservoir

               ground glass 1 14/35

               LSE cartridge

               rubber stopper


               No. 18-2O luer-lok
                   syringe needle
                     V1 liter
                   acuum flask
                                                          1 25 ml
                                                          solvent
                                                         reservoir

                                                         ground glass
                                                           114/35
                                                       LSE cartridge
                                                          10Oml
                                                         separator/
                                                           funnel
                   drying
                   column
               1.2cmx4Ocm
                                                         1O ml
                                                       graduated
                                                          vial
A. Extraction apparatus
                           FIGURE 3
B. Elution apparatus
                                  359

-------
S4
Si


8




I
  §
  M

-------
            METHOD 531.1.  MEASUREMENT OF N-METHYLCARBAMOYLOXIMES
       AND N-METHYLCARBAMATES IN WATER BY DIRECT AQUEOUS INJECTION HPLC
                        WITH POST COLUMN DERIVATIZATION
                                 Revision 3.0
D. L. Foerst - Method 531, Revision 1.0 (1985)

T. Engels (Battelle Columbus Laboratories) - National Pesticide Survey
  Method 5, Revision 2.0 (1987)

R. L. Graves - Method 531.1, Revision 3.0 (1989)
                  ENVIRONMENTAL  MONITORING  SYSTEMS  LABORATORY
                      OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
                     U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
                          •  CINCINNATI,  OHIO  45268
                                     361

-------
                                 METHOD 531.1

                    MEASUREMENT OF N-METHYLCARBAMOYLOXIMES
       AND N-HETHYLCARBAHATES IN WATER BY DIRECT AQUEOUS INJECTION HPLC
                        WITH POST  COLUMN  DERIVATIZATION


1.   SCOPE AND APPLICATION

     1.1  This is a high performance liquid chromatographic (HPLC) method
          applicable to the determinations of certain N-methylcarbamoyloximes
          and N-methylcarbamates in ground water and finished drinking
          water(l).  The following compounds can be determined using this
          method:

                                         Chemical Abstract Services
            Analvte                           Registry Number

          Aldicarb                                116-06-3
          Aldicarb sulfone                       1646-88-4
          Aldicarb sulfoxide                     1646-87-3
          Baygon                                  114-26-1
          Carbaryl                                 63-25-2
          Carbofuran                             1563-66-2
          3-Hydroxycarbofuran                   16655-82-6
          Methiocarb                             2032-65-7
          Methomyl                              16752-77-5
          Oxamyl                                23135-22-0

     1.2  This method has been validated in a single laboratory and estimated
          detection limits  (EDLs)  have been determined for the analytes above
          (Sect.12).  Observed detection limits may vary between ground
          waters, depending upon the nature of interferences in the sample
          matrix and the specific instrumentation used.

     1.3  This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of
          analysts experienced in the use of liquid chromatography and in the
          interpretation of liquid chromatograms.  Each analyst must demon-
          strate the ability to generate acceptable results with this method
          using the procedure described in Sect. 10.3.

     1.4  When this method  is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for any or
          all of the analytes above, analyte identifications should be
          confirmed by at least one additional qualitative technique.

2.   SUMMARY OF METHOD

     2.1  The water sample  is filtered and a 400-ftL aliquot is injected into a
          reverse phase HPLC column.  Separation of the analytes is achieved
          using gradient elution chromatography.  After elution from the HPLC
          column, the analytes are hydrolyzed with 0.05 N sodium hydroxide
          (NaOH) at 95°C.  The methyl amine formed during hydrolysis is

                                      362

-------
          reacted with o-phthalaldehyde (OPA) and 2-mercaptoethanol to form a
          highly fluorescent derivative which is detected by a fluorescence
          detector (2).

3.   DEFINITIONS

     3.1  Internal standard — A pure analyte(s) added to a solution in known
          amount(s) and used to measure the relative responses of other method
          analytes and surrogates that are components of the same solution.
          The internal standard must be an analyte that is not a sample
          component.

     3.2  Surrogate analyte — A pure analyte(s), which is extremely unlikely
          to be found in any sample, and which is added to a sample aliquot in
          known amount(s) before extraction and is measured with the same
          procedures  used to measure other sample components.   The purpose of
          a surrogate analyte is to monitor method performance with each
          sample.

     3.3  Laboratory  duplicates (LD1 and LD2) — Two sample aliquots taken in
          the analytical laboratory and analyzed separately with identical
          procedures.  Analyses of LD1 and LD2 give a measure  of the precision
          associated  with laboratory procedures, but not with  sample
          collection, preservation, or storage procedures.

     3.4  Field duplicates (FD1 and FD2) — Two separate samples collected at
          the same time and place under identical circumstances and treated
          exactly the same throughout field and laboratory procedures.
          Analyses of FD1 and FD2 give a measure of the precision associated
          with sample collection, preservation and storage, as well as  with
          laboratory  procedures.

     3.5  Laboratory  reagent blank (LRB) — An aliquot of reagent water that
          is treated  exactly as a sample including exposure to all  glassware,
          equipment,  solvents, reagents, internal standards,  and surrogates
          that are used with other samples.  The LRB is used to determine if
          method analytes or other interferences are present in the laboratory
          environment, the reagents, or the apparatus.

     3.6  Field reagent blank (FRB) — Reagent water placed in a sample
          container in the laboratory and treated as a sample  in all  respects,
          including exposure to sampling site conditions,  storage,
          preservation and all analytical  procedures.   The purpose  of the FRB
          is to determine if method analytes or other interferences are
          present  in  the field environment.

     3.7  Laboratory  performance check solution (LPC)  — A solution of  method
          analytes, surrogate compounds, and internal  standards used to
          evaluate the performance of the instrument system with respect to a
         .defined  set of method criteria.
                                     363

-------
     3.8  Laboratory fortified blank (LFB) — An aliquot of reagent water to
          which known quantities of the method analytes are added in the
          laboratory.  The LFB is analyzed exactly like a sample, and its
          purpose is to determine whether the methodology is in control, and
          whether the laboratory is capable of making accurate and precise
          measurements at the required method detection limit.

     3.9  Laboratory fortified sample matrix (LFM) — An aliquot of an
          environmental sample to which known quantities of the method
          analytes are added in the laboratory.  The LFM is analyzed exactly
          like a sample, and its purpose is to determine whether the sample
          matrix contributes bias to the analytical  results.  The background
          concentrations of the analytes in the sample matrix must be
          determined in a separate aliquot and the measured values in the LFM
          corrected for background concentrations.

     3.10 Stock standard solution — A concentrated solution containing a
          single certified standard that is a method analyte, or a
          concentrated solution of a single analyte prepared in the laboratory
          with an assayed reference compound.  Stock standard solutions are
          used to prepare primary dilution standards.

     3.11 Primary dilution standard solution — A solution of several
          analytes prepared in the laboratory from stock standard solutions
          and diluted as needed to prepare calibration solutions and other
          needed analyte solutions.

     3.12 Calibration standard (CAL) — A solution prepared from the primary
          dilution standard solution and stock standard solutions of the
          internal standards and surrogate analytes.  The CAL solutions are
          used to calibrate the instrument response with respect to analyte
          concentration.

     3.13 Quality control sample (QCS) — A sample matrix containing method
          analytes or a solution of method analytes in a water miscible
          solvent which is used to fortify reagent water or environmental
          samples.  The QCS is obtained from a source external to the
          laboratory, and is used to check laboratory performance with
          externally prepared test materials.

4.   INTERFERENCES

     4.1  Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents,
          reagents, glassware and other sample processing apparatus that lead
          to discrete artifacts or elevated baselines in liquid chromatograms.
          Specific sources of contamination have not been identified.  All
          reagents and apparatus must be routinely demonstrated to be free
          from interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running
          laboratory reagent blanks as described in Sect. 10.2.

          4.1.1   Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned.(2)  Clean all
                  glassware as soon as possible after use by thoroughly

                                      364

-------
                  rinsing with the last solvent used in it.  Follow by washing
                  with hot water and detergent and thorough rinsing with tap
                  and reagent water.  Drain dry, and heat in an oven or muffle
                  furnace at 450°C for 1 hour.  Do not heat volumetric ware.
                  Thermally stable materials might not be eliminated by this
                  treatment.  Thorough rinsing with acetone may be substituted
                  for the heating.  After drying and cooling, seal and store
                  glassware in a clean environment to prevent any accumulation
                  of dust or other contaminants.  Store inverted or capped
                  with aluminum foil.

          4.1.2   The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to
                  minimize interference problems.  Purification of solvents by
                  distillation in all-glass systems may be required.  WARNING:
                  When a solvent is purified, stabilizers added by the
                  manufacturer are removed, thus potentially making the
                  solvent hazardous.  Also, when a solvent is purified,
                  preservatives added by the manufacturer are removed, thus
                  potentially reducing the shelf-life.

     4.2  Interfering contamination may occur when a sample containing low
          concentrations of analytes is analyzed immediately following a
          sample containing relatively high concentrations of analytes.  A
          preventive technique is between-sample rinsing of the sample syringe
          and filter holder with two portions of reagent water.  After
          analysis of a sample containing high concentrations of analytes, one
          or more laboratory method blanks should be analyzed.

     4.3  Matrix interference may be caused by contaminants that are present
          in the sample.  The extent of matrix interference will -vary consid-
          erably from source to source, depending upon  the water sampled.
          Positive identifications must be confirmed.
5.   SAFETY
     5.1  The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this method
          has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical  compound must
          be treated as a potential health hazard.  Accordingly,  exposure to
          these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible  level.  The
          laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file
          of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the  chemicals
          specified in this method.  A reference file of material safety data
          sheets should also be made available to all personnel  involved in
          the chemical analysis.  Additional references to laboratory safety
          are available and have been identified (4-6) for the information of
          the analyst.

     5.2  WARNING:  When a solvent is purified,  stabilizers added by the
          manufacturer are removed, thus potentially making the solvent
          hazardous.
                                     365

-------
6.   APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT  (All specifications are suggested.  Catalog
     numbers are included for illustration only.)
     6.1  SAMPLING EQUIPMENT
          6.1.1   Grab sample bottle — 60-mL screw cap vials (Pierce No.
                  13075 or equivalent) and caps equipped with a PTFE-faced
                  silicone septa (Pierce No.  12722 or equivalent).  Prior to
                  use, wash vials and septa as described in Sect. 3.1.1.
     6.2  BALANCE — Analytical, capable of accurately weighing to the nearest
          0.0001 g.
     6.3  FILTRATION APPARATUS
          6.3.1   Macrofiltration -- To filter derivatization solutions and
                  mobile phases used in HPLC.  Recommend using 47 mm filters
                  (Millipore Type HA, 0.45 /on for water and Millipore Type FH,
                  0.5 ion for organics or equivalent).
          6.3.2   Microfiltration — To filter samples prior to HPLC analysis.
                  Use 13 mm filter holder (Millipore stainless steel XX300/200
                  or equivalent), and 13 mm diameter 0.2 urn polyester filters
                  (Nuclepore 180406 or equivalent).
     6.4  SYRINGES AND SYRINGE VALVES
          6.4.1   Hypodermic syringe — 10-mL glass, with Luer-Lok tip.
          6.4.2   Syringe valve — 3-way (Hamilton HV3-3 or equivalent).
          6.4.3   Syringe needle — 7 to 10-cm long, 17-gauge, blunt tip.
          6.4.4   Micro syringes -- various sizes.
     6.5  MISCELLANEOUS
          6.5.1   Solution storage bottles — Amber glass, 10- to 15-mL
                  capacity with TFE-fluorocarbon-lined screw cap.
          6.5.2   Helium, for degassing solutions and solvents.
     6.6  HIGH PERFORMANCE LIQUID CHROMATOGRAPH (HPLC)
          6.6.1   HPLC system capable of injecting 200- to 400-#L aliquots,
                  and performing binary linear gradients at a constant flow
                  rate.  A data system is recommended for measuring peak
                  areas.  Table 1 lists retention times observed for method
                  analytes using the columns and analytical conditions
                  described below.
                                      366

-------
     6.6.2   Column  1  (Primary column) — 150 mm long ,x 3.9 mm  I.D.
             stainless steel packed with 4 fan NovaPak CIS.  Mobil Phase
             is established at 10:90 methanol:  water, hold 2 min., then
             program as a linear gradient to 80:20 methanol:  water in 25
             min.  Alternative columns may be used in accordance with the
             provisions described in Sect. 10.4.

     6.6.3   Column  2  (Alternative column)* -- 250 mm long x 4.6 mm I.D.
             stainless steel packed with 5 /an Beckman Ultrasphere ODS.
             Mobile  phase is established at 1.0 mL/min as a linear
             gradient from 15:85 methanol:  water to methanol in 32 min.
             Data presented in this method were obtained using this
             column.  * Newer manufactured columns have not been able to
             resolve aldicarb sulfone from oxamyl. '"""<•;.

     6.6.4   Column  3 (Alternative column) -- 250 mm long x 4.6 mm I.D.
             stainless steel packed with 5 fim Supelco LC-1.  Mobile phase
             is established at 1.0 mL/min as a linear gradient from 15:85
             methanol:  water to methanol in 32 min.

     6.6.5   Post column reactor — Capable of mixing reagents into the
             mobile  phase.  Reactor should be constructed using PTFE
             tubing  and equipped with pumps to deliver 0.1 to 1.0 mL/min
             of each reagent;  mixing tees; and two 1.0-mL delay coils,
             one thermostated at 95°C (ABI URS 051 and URA 100 or equiva-
             lent).

     6.6.6   Fluorescence detector — Capable of excitation at 330 nm
             (nominal) and detection of emission energies greater than
             418 nm.  A Schoffel  Model  970 fluorescence detector was used
             to generate the validation data presented in this method.

REAGENTS AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS — WARNING:  When a solvent is
purified, stabilizers added by the manufacturer are removed, thus
potentially making the solvent hazardous.  Also, when a solvent is
purified, preservatives added by the manufacturer are removed, thus
potentially reducing the shelf-life.

7.1  REAGENT WATER — Reagent  water is  defined as water that is
     reasonably free of contamination that would prevent the
     determination of any analyte of interest.   Reagent water used to
     generate the validation data in this method was  distilled water
     obtained from the Magnetic Springs Water Co.,  1801  Lone Eaqle St.,
     Columbus,  Ohio 43228.

7.2  METHANOL — Distilled-in-glass  quality or equivalent.

7.3  HPLC MOBILE PHASE

     7.3.1   Water -- HPLC  grade  (available  from Burdick and Jackson).
                                367

-------
     7.3.2   Methanol  -- HPLC grade.   Filter and degas with helium before
             use.

7.4  POST COLUMN DERIVATIZATION SOLUTIONS

     7.4.1   Sodium hydroxide, 0.05 N — Dissolve 2.0 g of sodium
             hydroxide (NaOH) in reagent water.   Dilute to 1.0 L with
             reagent water.  Filter and degas with helium just before
             use.

     7.4.2   2-Hercaptoethanol (1+1)  — Mix 10.0 mL of 2-mercapto-ethanol
             and 10.0 mL of acetonitrile.  Cap.   Store in hood (CAUTION
             — stench).

     7*.4.3   Sodium borate (0.05 N) — Dissolve 19.1 g of sodium borate
             (Na2B407 ' 10H20)  in  reagent water.   Dilute to 1.0 L with
             reagent water.  The sodium borate will completely dissolve
             at room temperature if prepared a day before use,

     7.4.4   OPA reaction solution — Dissolve 100 ± 10 mg of o-phthal-
             aldehyde (mp 55-58°C) in 10 mL of methanol.  Add to 1.0 L of
             0.05 N sodium borate.  Mix, filter, and degas with helium.
             Add 100 (il of 2-mercaptoethanol (1+1) and mix.  Make up
             fresh solution daily.

7.5  MONOCHLOROACETIC ACID BUFFER (pH3) — Prepare by mixing 156 mL of
     2.5 M monochloroacetic acid and 100 mL 2.5 M potassium acetate.

7.6  4-BROMO-3,5-DIMETHYLPHENYL N-METHYLCARBAMATE (BDMC) — 98% purity,
     for use as internal standard (available from Aldrich Chemical Co.).

7.7  STOCK STANDARD SOLUTIONS (1.00 jig/M-) — Stock standard solutions
     may be purchased as certified solutions or prepared from pure
     standard materials using the following procedure:

     7.7.1   Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing
             approximately 0.0100 g of pure material.  Dissolve the
             material in HPLC quality methanol and dilute to volume  in a
             10-mL volumetric flask.   Larger volumes may be used at the
             convenience of the analyst.  If compound purity is certified
             at 96% or greater, the weight may be used without correction
             to calculate the concentration of the stock standard.
             Commercially prepared stock standards may be used at any
             concentration if they are certified by the manufacturer or
             by an independent source.

     7.7.2   Transfer the stock standard solutions into TFE-fluoro-
             carbon-sealed screw cap vials.  Store at room temperature
             and protect from light.
                                 368

-------
          7.7.3   Stock standard solutions should be replaced after two months
                  or sooner if comparison with laboratory fortified blanks, or
                  QC samples indicate a problem.

     7.8  INTERNAL STANDARD SOLUTION — Prepare an internal standard
          fortification solution by accurately weighing approximately 0.0010 g
          of pure BDMC.  Dissolve the BDMC in pesticide-quality methanol and
          dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric flask.  Transfer the internal
          standard fortification solution to a TFE-fluorocarbon-sealed screw
          cap bottle and store at room temperature.  Addition of 5 /aL of the
          internal standard fortification solution to 50 mL of sample results
          in a final internal standard concentration of 10 /zg/L.  Solution
          should be replaced when ongoing QC (Sect. 10) indicates a problem.
          Note:  BDMC has been shown to be an effective internal standard for
          the method analytes (1), but other compounds may be used, if the
          quality control requirements in Sect. 9 are met.

     7.9  LABORATORY PERFORMANCE CHECK SOLUTION — Prepare concentrate by
          adding 20 juL of the 3-hydroxycarbofuran stock standard solution,
          1.0 mL of the aldicarb sulfoxide stock standard solution, 200 /tL of
          the methiocarb stock standard solution, and 1 mL of the internal
          standard fortification solution to a 10-mL volumetric flask.  Dilute
          to volume with methanol.  Thoroughly mix concentrate.  Prepare check
          solution by placing 100 fil of the concentrate solution into a 100-mL
          volumetric flask.  Dilute to volume with buffered reagent water.
          Transfer to a TFE-fluorocarbon-sealed screw cap bottle and store at
          room temperature.  Solution should be replaced when ongoing QC
          (Sect. 10) indicates a problem.

8.   SAMPLE COLLECTION. PRESERVATION AND HANDLING

     8.1  Grab samples must be collected in glass containers.  Conventional
          sampling practices (8) should be followed; however, the bottle must
          not be prerinsed with sample before collection.

     8,2  SAMPLE PRESERVATION/PH ADJUSTMENT ~ Oxamyl, 3-hydroxycarbofuran,
          aldicarb sulfoxide, and carbaryl can all degrade quickly in neutral
          and basic waters held at room temperature. (6,7)  This short term
          degradation is of concern during the time samples are being shipped
          and the time processed samples are held at room temperature in
          autosampler trays.  Samples targeted for the analysis of these three
          analytes must be preserved at pH 3.  The pH adjustment also
          minimizes analyte biodegradation.

          8.2.1   Add 1.8 mL of monochloroacetic acid buffer to the 60-mL
                  sample bottle.  Add buffer to the sample bottle at the
                  sampling site or in the laboratory before shipping to the
                  sampling site.

          8.2.2   If residual chlorine is present, add 80 mg of sodium thio-
                  sulfate per liter of sample to the sample bottle prior to
                  collecting the sample.

                                     369

-------
          8.2.3   After sample is collected in bottle containing buffer, seal
                  the sample bottle and shake vigorously for 1 min.

          8.2.4   Samples must be iced or refrigerated at 4°C from the time of
                  collection until storage.  Samples must be stored at -10°C
                  until analyzed.  Preservation study results indicate that
                  method analytes are stable in water samples for at least 28
                  days when adjusted to pH 3 and stored at -10°C.  However,
                  analyte stability may be effected by the matrix; therefore,
                  the analyst should verify that the preservation technique is
                  applicable to the samples under study.

9.   CALIBRATION

     9.1  Establish HPLC operating parameters equivalent to those indicated in
          Sect. 6.6.  The HPLC system may be calibrated using either the
          internal standard technique (Sect. 9.2) or the external standard
          technique (Sect. 9.3).

     9.2  INTERNAL STANDARD CALIBRATION PR9CEDURE.  The analyst must select
          one or more internal standards similar in analytical behavior to the
          analytes of interest.  The analyst must further demonstrate that the
          measurement of the internal standard is not affected by method or
          matrix interferences.  BDMC has been identified as a suitable
          internal standard.

          9.2.1   Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three
                  (recommend five) concentration levels for each analyte of
                  interest by adding volumes of one or of the more stock
                  standards to a volumetric flask.  To each calibration
                  standard, add a known constant amount of one or more
                  internal standards, and dilute to volume with buffered
                  reagent water.  To prepare buffered reagent water, add 10 mL
                  of 1.0 M monochloroacetic acid buffer to 1 L of reagent
                  water.  The lowest standard should represent analyte
                  concentrations near, but above, their respective EDLs.  The
                  remaining standards should bracket the analyte concen-
                  trations expected in the sample extracts, or should define
                  the working range of the detector.

          9.2.2   Analyze each calibration standard according to the procedure
                  (Sect. 11.2).  Tabulate peak height or area responses
                  against concentration for each compound and internal
                  standard.  Calculate response factors (RF) for each analyte,
                  surrogate and internal standard using Equation 1.

                    RF =     (As)(cis)       Equation 1
                             (A

                    where:
                                     370

-------
               As  = Response for the analyte to be measured.
               Ais  = Response for the internal standard.
               Cjs  = Concentration of the  internal  standard wg/L).
               C   = Concentration of the  analyte to be measured
                     W/L).

     9.2.3   If the RF value over the working range is constant (20% RSD
             or less) the average RF can be used for calculations.
             Alternatively, the results can be used to plot a calibration
             curve of response ratios (AsxAis) vs. Cs.

     9.2.4   The working calibration curve or RF must be verified on each
             working shift by the measurement of one or more calibration
             standards.  If the response for any analyte varies from the
             predicted response by more than ±20%, the test must be
             repeated using a fresh  calibration  standard.  If the
             repetition also fails,  a new calibration curve must be
             generated for that analyte using freshly'prepared standards.

     9.2.5   Single point calibration is a viable alternative to a
             calibration curve.  Prepare single  point standards from the
             secondary dilution standards.  The  single point standards
             should be prepared at a concentration that deviates from the
             sample extract response by no more  than 20%.

     9.2.6   Verify calibration standards  periodically, recommend at
             least quarterly, by analyzing a standard prepared from
             reference material obtained from an independent source.
             Results from these analyses must be within the limits used
             to routinely check calibration.

9.3  EXTERNAL STANDARD CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

     9.3.1   Prepare calibration standards at a  minimum of three
             (recommend five) concentration levels for each analyte of
             interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to
             a volumetric flask.  Dilute to volume with buffered reagent
             water.  The lowest standard should  represent analyte
             concentrations near, but above, the respective EDLs.   The
             remaining standards should bracket  the analyte
             concentrations expected in the sample extracts,  or should
             define the working range of the detector.

     9.3.2   Starting with the standard of lowest concentration, analyze
             each calibration standard according to Sect. 11.2 and
             tabulate responses (peak height or  area) versus the
             concentration in the standard.  The results can be used to
             prepare a calibration curve for each compound.
             Alternatively, if the ratio of response to concentration
             (calibration factor) is a constant  over the working range
             <20% relative standard  deviation),  linearity through  the


                                 371

-------
                  origin can be assumed and the average ratio or calibration
                  factor can be used in place of a calibration curve.

          9.3.3   The working calibration curve or calibration factor must be
                  verified on each working day by the measurement of a minimum
                  of two calibration check standards, one at the beginning and
                  one at the end of the analysis day.  These check standards
                  should be at two different concentration levels to verify
                  the concentration curve.  For extended periods of analysis
                  (greater than 8 hr), it is strongly recommended that check
                  standards be interspersed with samples at regular intervals
                  during the course of the analyses.  If the response for any
                  analyte varies from the predicted response by more than
                  ±20%, the test must be repeated using a fresh calibration
                  standard.  If the results still do not agree, generate a new
                  calibration curve or use a single point calibration standard
                  as described in Sect. 9.3.3.

          9.S-.4   Single point calibration is a viable alternative to a
                  calibration curve.  Prepare single point standards from the
                  secondary dilution standards.  The single point standard's
                  should be prepared at a concentration that deviates from the
                  sample extract response by no more than 20%.

          9.3.5   Verify calibration standards periodically, recommend at
                  least quarterly, by analyzing a standard prepared from
                  reference material obtained from an independent source.
                  Results from these analyses must be within the limits used
                  to routinely check calibration.

10.   QUALITY CONTROL

     10.1  Minimum quality control  (QC)  requirements are initial  demonstration
           of laboratory capability,  monitoring internal  standard peak area or
           height in each sample and blank (when internal  standard calibration
           procedures are being employed),  analysis  of laboratory reagent
           blanks,  laboratory fortified samples,  laboratory fortified blanks
           and QC samples.

     10.2  LABORATORY REAGENT BLANKS.   Before processing any samples,  the
           analyst must demonstrate that all  glassware and reagent
           interferences are under control.   Each time a set of samples is
           extracted or reagents are changed,  a laboratory reagent blank (LRB)
           must be analyzed.   If within the retention time window of any
           analyte of interest the LRB produces a peak that would prevent the
           determination of that analyte,  determine  the source of
           contamination and eliminate the interference before processing
           samples.
                                     372

-------
10.3  INITIAL DEMONSTRATION OF CAPABILITY.

      10.3.1  Select a representative concentration (about 10 times EDL)
             for each analyte.  Prepare a sample concentrate (in
             methanol) containing each analyte at 1000 times selected
             concentration.  With a syringe, add 50 /iL of the
             concentrate to each of at least four 50-mL aliquots of
             reagent water, and analyze each aliquot according to
             procedures beginning in Sect. 11.

      10.3.2  For each analyte the recovery value for all four of these
             samples must fall in the range of R ± 30% (or within R ±
             3SR if broader)  using the values for R and SR  for  reagent
             water in Table 2.  For those compounds that meet the
             acceptance criteria, performance is judged acceptable and
             sample analysis may begin.  For those compounds that fail
             these criteria,  this procedure must be repeated using four
             fresh samples until satisfactory performance has been
             demonstrated.

      10.3.3  The initial demonstration of capability is used primarily
             to preclude a laboratory from analyzing unknown samples via
             a new, unfamiliar method prior to obtaining some experience
             with it.  It is expected that as laboratory personnel gain
             experience with this method the quality of data will
             improve beyond those required here.

10.4  The analyst is permitted to modify HPLC columns, HPLC conditions,
      internal standards or detectors to improve  separations or lower
      analytical costs.  Each time such method modifications are made,
      the analyst must repeat the procedures  in Sect. 10.3.

10.5  ASSESSING THE INTERNAL STANDARD

     10.5.1  When using the internal standard calibration procedure, the
            analyst is expected to monitor the IS response (peak area or
            peak height) of all samples during each analysis day.  The
            IS response for any sample chromatogram should not deviate
            from the daily calibration check standard's IS response by
            more than 30%.

     10.5.2  If >30% deviation occurs with an individual extract,
            optimize instrument performance and  inject a second aliquot.

            10.5.2.1  If the  reinjected aliquot produces an acceptable
                      internal  standard response, report results for
                      that aliquot.

            10.5.2.2  If a deviation of greater than  30% is obtained for
                      the reinjected extract, analysis  of the  sample
                      should  be repeated beginning with Sect.  11,

                                373

-------
                      provided the samples is still  available.
                      Otherwise, report results obtained from the
                      reinjected extract, but annotate as suspect.

     10.5.3  If consecutive samples fail the IS response acceptance
            criterion, immediately analyze a calibration check standard.

            10.5.3.1  If the check standard provides a response factor
                      (RF) within 20% of the predicted value, then
                      follow procedures itemized in  Sect. 10.5.2 for
                      each sample failing the IS response criterion.

            10.5.3.2  If the check standard provides a response factor
                      which deviates more than 20% of the predicted
                      value,  then the analyst must recalibrate, as
                      specified in Sect. 9.

10.6 ASSESSING LABORATORY  PERFORMANCE  -  LABORATORY  FORTIFIED BLANKS

     10.6.1  The laboratory must analyze at least one laboratory
             fortified blank (LFB) sample with every 20 samples or one
             per sample set (all samples analyzed within a 24-h period)
             whichever is greater.  The fortification concentration of
             each analyte in the LFB should be 10 times EDL or the MCL,
             whichever is less.  Calculate accuracy as percent recovery
             (X,-).   If the recovery of any analyte falls outside the
             control limits (see Sect. 10.7.2), that analyte is judged
             out of control, and the source of the problem must be
             identified and resolved before continuing analyses.

     10.6.2  Until  sufficient data become available  from within their
             own laboratory, usually a minimum of results from 20 to 30
             analyses, the laboratory should assess  laboratory
             performance against the control limits  in Sect. 10.3.2 that
             are derived from the data in Table 2.  When sufficient
             internal performance data becomes available, develop
             control limits from the mean percent recovery (X) and
             standard deviation (S) of the percent recovery.  These data
             are used to establish upper and lower control limits as
             fol1ows:

                      UPPER CONTROL LIMIT  = X + 3S
                      LOWER CONTROL LIMIT  = X - 3S

             After each five to ten new recovery measurements, new
             control limits should be calculated using only the most
             recent 20-30 data points.  These calculated control limits
             should never exceed those established in Sect. 10.3.2.

     10.6.3  It is  recommended that the laboratory periodically
             determine and document its detection limit capabilities for
             analytes of interest.

                                374

-------
      10.6.4  At least quarterly, analyze a QC sample from an outside
             source.

      10.6.5  Laboratories are encouraged to participate in external
             performance evaluation studies such as the laboratory
             certification programs offered by many states or the
             studies conducted by U.S. EPA.  Performance evaluation
             studies serve as independent checks on the analyst's
             performance.

10.7  ASSESSING ANALYTE RECOVERY - LABORATORY FORTIFIED SAMPLE MATRIX

      10.7.1  The laboratory must add a known concentration to a minimum
             of 5% of the routine samples or one sample concentration
             per set, whichever is greater.  The concentration should
             not be less then the background concentration of the sample
             selected for fortification.  Ideally, the concentration
             should be the same as that used for the laboratory
             fortified blank (Sect.  10.6).  Over time, samples from all
             routine sample sources should be fortified.

      10.7.2  Calculate the percent recovery, P of the concentration for
             each analyte, after correcting the analytical result, X,
             from the fortified sample for the background concentration,
             b, measured in the unfortified sample, i.e.,:

             P = 100 (X - b) / fortifying concentration,

             and compare these values to control limits appropriate for
             reagent water data collected in the same fashion.   If the
             analyzed unfortified sample is found to contain NO
             background concentrations, and the added concentrations are
             those specified in Sect.  10.7, then the appropriate control
             limits would be the acceptance limits in Sect.  10.7.   If,
             on the other hand, the  analyzed unfortified  sample is found
             to contain background concentration, b, estimate the
             standard deviation at the background concentration, sb,
             using regressions or comparable background data and,
             similarly,  estimate the mean,  Xa  and  standard deviation,
             sa,  of analytical  results  at  the'total  concentration  after
             fortifying.   Then the appropriate  percentage control  limits
             would be P ± 3sp,  where:

             P = 100 X  / (b + fortifying concentration)


                                         1/2
                                2      2
             and s   = 100    (s   + s  )    /fortifying concentration
                  P            a     b
                                375

-------
             would be (1.6 /ig/L minus 1.0 /ig/L)/l /ig/L or 60%.  This
             calculated P is compared to control limits derived from
             prior reagent water data.  Assume it is known that analysis
             of an interference free sample at 1 /ig/L yields an_s of
             0.12 /zg/L and similar analysis at 2.0 /ig/L yields X and s
             of 2.01 /ig/L and 0.20 /ig/L, respectively.  The appropriate
             limits to judge the reasonableness of the percent recovery,
             60%, obtained on the fortified matrix sample is computed as
             fol1ows:

             [100 (2.01 /ig/L) / 2.0 /ig/L]

                                                      1/2
             ± 3 (100)  [(0.12 "/ig/L)2 + (0.20 /ig/L)2]    / 1.0  /ig/L  =

             100.5% ± 300 (0.233) =

             100.5% ± 70% or 30% to 170% recovery of the added analyte.

      10.7.3  If the recovery of any such analyte falls outside the
             designated range, and the laboratory performance for that
             analyte is shown to be in control  (Sect. 10.6), the
             recovery problem encountered with the dosed sample is
             judged to be matrix related, not system related.  The
             result for that analyte in the unfortified  sample is
             labeled suspect/matrix to inform the data user that the
             results are suspect due to matrix effects.

10.8  ASSESSING  INSTRUMENT SYSTEM -  LABORATORY PERFORMANCE CHECK SAMPLE  -
      Instrument  performance  should  be monitored  on  a  daily  basis by
      analysis of the LPC sample.  The LPC  sample contains compounds
      designed to indicate appropriate instrument sensitivity, column
      performance (primary column) and chromatographic performance.   LPC
      sample  components and performance  criteria are listed  in Table 3.
      Inability  to demonstrate  acceptable instrument performance
      indicates  the  need for  revaluation of  the instrument  system.   The
      sensitivity requirements  are set based  on  the  EDLs  published  in
      this  method.   If laboratory EDLs differ from those  listed  in  this
      method, concentrations  of the  instrument QC standard compounds must
      be  adjusted to be compatible with  the laboratory EDLs.

10.9  The laboratory may adopt  additional quality control  practices  for
      use with this  method.   The  specific practices  that  are most
      productive  depend upon  the  needs of the laboratory  and the nature
      of  the  samples.  For example,  field or  laboratory  duplicates  may be
      analyzed to assess the  precision of the environmental  measurements
      or  field reagent blanks may be used to  assess  contamination of
      samples under  site conditions,  transportation  and  storage.
                                 376

-------
11.   PROCEDURE

     11.1  PH ADJUSTMENT AND  FILTRATION

           11.1.1  Add preservative to any samples not previously preserved
                  (Sect. 8).  Adjust the pH of the sample or standard to pH 3
                  ± 0.2 by adding 1.5 ml of 2.5 M monochloroacetic acid
                  buffer to each 50 ml of sample.  This step should not be
                  necessary if sample pH was adjusted during sample
                  collection as a preservation precaution.  Fill a 50-mL
                  volumetric flask to the mark with the sample.  Add 5 nl of
                  the internal standard fortification solution (if the
                  internal standard calibration procedure is being employed)
                  and mix by inverting the flask several times.

           11.1.2  Affix the three-way valve to a 10-mL syringe.  Place a
                  clean filter in the filter holder and affix the filter
                  holder and the 7- to 10-cm syringe needle to the syringe
                  valve.   Rinse the needle and syringe with reagent water.
                  Prewet the filter by passing 5 ml of reagent water through
                  the filter.  Empty the syringe and check for leaks.   Draw
                  10 ml of sample into the syringe and expel  through the
                  filter.   Draw another 10 ml of sample into the syringe
                  expel  through the filter,  and collect the last 5 mL  for
                  analysis.   Rinse the syringe with reagent water.   Discard
                  the filter.

     11.2  LIQUID CHROMATOGRAPHY

          11.2.1  Sect.  6.6  summarizes the recommended operating conditions
                  for the  liquid  chromatograph.   Table 1 lists  retention
                  times  observed  using this  method.   Other HPLC columns,
                  chromatographic conditions,  or detectors may  be used  if the
                  requirements of Sect.  10.4 are met.

          11.2.2  Calibrate  the system daily as  described  in  Sect.  10.   The
                  standards  and samples  must be  in  pH  3  buffered  water.

          11.2.3  Inject 400 fil of the  sample.   Record the volume injected
                  and  the  resulting peak size  in  area  units.

          11.2.4  If the response  for the  peak exceeds the working  range  of
                  the  system,  dilute the  sample with pH  3  buffered  reagent
                  water and reanalyze.

    11.3  IDENTIFICATION OF  ANALYTES

          11.3.1  Identify a sample component by comparison of  its  retention
                  time to the  retention time of a reference chromatogram.   If
                  the  retention time of an unknown compound corresponds,
                  within limits, to the retention time of  a standard
                  compound, then identification is considered positive.

                                    377

-------
           11.3.2  The width of the retention time window used to make
                  identifications should be based upon measurements of actual
                  retention time variations of standards over the course of a
                  day.  Three times the standard deviation of a retention
                  time can be used to calculate a suggested window size for a
                  compound.  However, the experience of the analyst should
                  weigh heavily in the interpretation of chromatograms.

           11.3.3  Identification requires expert judgement when sample
                  components are not resolved chromatographically.  When
                  peaks obviously represent more than one sample component
                  (i.e.,  broadened peak with shoulder(s) or valley between
                  two or  more maxima), or any time doubt exists over the
                  identification of a peak on a chromatogram, appropriate
                  alternate techniques, to help confirm peak identification,
                  need to be employed.  For example, more positive
                  identification may be made by the use of an alternative
                  detector which operates on a chemical/physical principle
                  different from that originally used; e.g., mass
                  spectrometry, or the use of a second chromatography column.
                  A suggested alternative column is described in Sect. 6.6.3.

12.  CALCULATIONS

     Determine the  concentration of individual compounds in the sample using
     the following  equation:


           Cx  -   Ax   -   's
                   A.   .    RF
                    s
           where:  Cx =  analyte concentration  in micrograms per liter;
                   Ax =  response of the sample analyte;
                   A. -  response of the standard (either  internal or
                         external), in units consistent with those used
                         for the analyte response;
                   RF  =  response  factor  (with  an external  standard,  RF  =  1,
                         because the standard is the same compound as the
                         measured analyte);

                   Qs =  concentration of  internal standard present or
                         concentration of external standard that produced As,
                         in micrograms per liter.

13.  PRECISION AND ACCURACY

     13.1  In a single laboratory, analyte recoveries from reagent water were
           determined at five concentration levels.  Results were used to
           determine analyte EDLs and demonstrate method range.(1)  Analyte
                                     378

-------
           recoveries and standard deviation about the percent recoveries at
           one concentration are given in Table 2.

     13.2  In a single laboratory, analyte recoveries from two standard
           synthetic ground waters were determined at one concentration level
           Results were used to demonstrate applicability of the method to
           different ground water matrices.(1)  Analyte recoveries from the
           two synthetic matrices are given in Table 2.

14.  REFERENCES

     1.    National  Pesticide Survey Method No.  5.,  "Measurement of N-
           Methylcarbamoyloximes and N-Methylcarbamates in Groundwater by HPL
           with Post Column Derivatization,"

     2.    Moye,  H.A.,  S.J.  Sherrer, and  P. A.  St. John,  "Dynamic Labeling of
           Pesticides for High Performance Liquid Chromatography:  Detection
           of N-Methylcarbamates and o-Phthalaldehyde," Anal.  Lett.  10_,  1049,
           A J / / •  '

     3.    ASTM Annual  Book of Standards,  Part  11, Volume 11.02,  D3694-82,
           "Standard Practice for Preparation  of Sample Containers  and for
           Preservation," American Society for Testing  and Materials,
           Philadelphia,  PA,  p.  86,  1986.

     4.    "Carcinogens  - Working with  Carcinogens,"  Department  of  Health,
           Education, and Welfare,  Public  Health  Service,  Center for Disease
           Control,  National  Institute  for Occupational Safety and  Health.
           Publication No.  77-206, Aug. 1977.

     5.    "OSHA  Safety  and Health Standards, General Industry/  (29 CFR
           1910), Occupational Safety and  Health  Administration,  OSHA  2206.
           (Revised,  January  1976).

     6.    "Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories," American  Chemical
          Society Publication, Committee  on Chemical Safety,  3rd Edition,
           * «* / 5* »

     7.   Foerst, D. L.  and H. A. Moye, "Aldicarb in Drinking Water via
          Direct Aqueous  Injection HPLC with Post Column Derivatization,"
          Proceedings of the 12th annual AWWA Water Quality Technology
          Conference, 1984.

     8.    Hill, K. M., R.H. Hollowell, and L. A. DalCortevo,  "Determination
          of N-Methylcarbamate Pesticides in Well Water by Liquid
          Chromatography and Post Column Fluorescence Derivatization,"
          Anal. Chem. £6, 2465 (1984).

     9.    ASTM Annual Book of Standards,  Part 11, Volume 11.01,  D3370-82,
          "Standard Practice for Sampling Water," American Society for
          Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA, p. 130, 1986.


                                     379

-------
           TABLE 1.  RETENTION TIMES  FOR METHOD ANALYTES
                                     Retention Time(a)
                         PHmarv<1)   Alternative*2*      Alternative0"
Aldicarb sulfoxide
Aldicarb sirtfone
Oxamyl
Methomyl
3-Hydroxycarbofuran
Aldicarb
Baygon
Carbofuran
Carbaryl
Methiocarb
BDMC
6.80
7.77
8.20
8.94
13.65
16.35
18.86
19.17
20.29
24.74
25.28
15.0
15.2
17.4
18.4
23.3
27.0
29.3
29.6
30.8
34.9
35.5
17.5
12.2
14.6
14.8
19
21.4
24.4
23.4
25.4
28.6


-------An error occurred while trying to OCR this image.

-------
CO


A

z
                                                                                       0>
                 A



                 O
                                  O
                                  (A
                                                o>
            o
            o
                                      O)
co


Ul


CD
 0)
4-



 to
 c
                         O>
                   o    o

                   •e    ±
                   a    -a
                   U    V»

                   I   -e
                   S-    A
                                         0)
                  s- ro  o
                  rt  I  i—
        r—       «
                          Q)
                          O
                          «
                     CO
                                    o>
                                    o
                                    s-
                                    (U
                                    o.
                                    o
                                    o
                                  g-
                                  O)

                                  Q)
                                  u>
                                 •a
                                  0)
                                                   ftf
                                                   o
                                                   j§
                                                    CD

                                                    CO
                                                    CO

                                                   CJ
                                                                  nj
                                                                  a>
                                                 0)
                                                  ^    O

                                                  O    £



                                                  i"    ^
                                                  	     a»
                                                 .?   -g
                                                 «     c
                                                                                       o.

                                                                                      . 
                                                                      at

                                                                      •CJ
                                                                       e:
                                                                       w
                                                                                        (9
                                                                                        &
                                                                                        a.
                                                                                        I
 i
«^-
«j


 o
•i—

 3

"3
                                                                         s.
                                        CO
                                        oo
                                                  *    i
                                                                   s.
                                                                   0,
                                                                         r—

                                                                         S-  O)

                                                                         01  U>
                                        382
                                                                 •U.S. Government Printing Office: 1991 — 548-187/40538

-------

-------

-------

-------

-------